InfoPrint 32
InfoPrint 40
Service Guide
Document Number: G544-5483-01
PN: 06L9859
IBM
Note:
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information
under Notices (see “Notices and Safety Information” on page 15).
Second Edition (March 1999)
This edition applies to G544-5483-01.
Online Documentation Authorization: For online versions of this book, we authorize you to
v Copy, modify, and print the documentation contained on the media, for use within your enterprise, provided you reproduce the
copyright notice, all warning statements, and other required statements on each copy or partial copy.
v Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related IBM product (which may be either
machines you own, or programs, if the program’s license terms permit a transfer). You must, at the same time, destroy all other
copies of the documentation.
You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from this authorization.
THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.
Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization. Upon termination, you must destroy your machine readable
documentation.
Requests for IBM publications should be made to your IBM representative, or to your IBM branch office serving your locality.
You can send comments about this publication by fax to 1-800-524-1519, by e-mail to printpub@us. ibm.com, or by mail to:
IBM Printing Systems Company Department H7FE, Building 003G
Information Development P.O. Box 1900 Boulder CO USA
80301-9191
IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1998, 1999. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to
restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Master Table of Contents
Notices and Safety Information . . . . . . . .
Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Danger Hazard Level . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caution Hazard Level . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attention Notices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Approved Power Cord and Receptacle . . . .
Connecting or Disconnecting a Communication
Disposal of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Procedures. . .
Extension Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ozone Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Servicing During an Electrical Storm. . . . . .
Toner Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Safety Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-Receptacle Safety-Check. . . . . . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Port,
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
a
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
Teleport,
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
or an Attachment Connector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
17
17
18
19
20
20
20
21
22
23
25
25
26
26
27
28
28
29
32
About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Chapter 1. Getting Started . . . . . . . . .
Defining the Problem . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving the Problem, Diagnostic Quick Path.
Error Codes and Messages . . . . . . . .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 1999
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
36
37
39
43
3
Other Messages without Error Codes . . . .
Paper Feed and Jam Problems without Error
Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routine and Miscellaneous Tasks . . . . . .
Completing Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains . .
. . . .
Codes
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
57
68
83
85
87
87
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Quick Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Links from Error Codes to Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Links from Problems with No Error Code or Message to Diagnostics .
Links from Print Quality Problems to Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Problems (No Error Code or Message) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coax / Twinax NIC Printing Problems (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet / Token-Ring NIC Printing Problems (Printer) . . . . . . . .
Electrical Noise (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interlock Switch (Printer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent Operation (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Drive Asm. (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems (Printer) . . . . . .
Toner Low, Error Code 002 Not Displayed (Printer) . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Feed Drive (Printer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Not Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex Not Working (No Error Code or Message). . . . . . . . . . .
Envelope Feeder Not Working (No Error Code or Message) . . . . .
Input Unit Not Working (No Error Code or Message) . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Problems (No Error Code or Message). . . . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Pause.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Codes and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
002—Toner Low (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 89
. 96
. 96
. 97
. 98
. 99
. 99
.103
.107
.111
.112
.115
.119
.121
.126
.127
.129
.133
.136
.139
.146
.158
.160
.160
Master Table of Contents 4
003—Toner Cart / Replace Cart (Printer) . . . . . .
004—Toner Cart / Reseat Cart (Printer) . . . . . . .
005—Toner Cart / Wrong Cart (Printer) . . . . . . .
006—Toner Cart / Reseat Cart (Printer) . . . . . . .
007—Toner Cart / Replace Cart (Printer) . . . . . .
009—Stapler / Check Staples (Finisher) . . . . . . .
010—Stapler / Check Cart (Finisher) . . . . . . . .
011—Load <paper> / In <tray> (Printer) . . . . . . .
012—Load <Paper> / In Aux or Env <Tray> (Printer)
013—Load <Paper> / In Any Tray (Printer) . . . . .
031—Output Full / Face-Down Bin (Printer) . . . . .
032—Output Full / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
033—Output Full / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
034—Output Full / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
041—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 1 (Printer) . . . .
042—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 2 (Printer) . . . .
043—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 3 (Input Unit) . .
044—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 4 (Input Unit) . .
045—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 5 (Input Unit) . .
046—Aux-Env. Tray / Replace Tray (Printer) . . . .
056—Tray 1 / Lift Failure (Printer) . . . . . . . . . .
057—Tray 2 / Lift Failure (Printer) . . . . . . . . . .
058—Tray 3 / Lift Failure (Input Unit) . . . . . . . .
059—Tray 4 / Lift Failure (Input Unit) . . . . . . . .
060—Tray 5 / Lift Failure (Input Unit) . . . . . . . .
071—Cover Open / Close Cover C (Input Unit) . . .
072—Cover Open / Close Cover A (Printer) . . . . .
073—Cover Open / Close Cover B (Printer). . . . .
210—Paper Jam / Area A, Aux Tray (Printer) . . . .
211—Paper Jam / Area A, Env. Feed (Printer) . . .
212—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit) . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.162
.163
.164
.165
.167
.169
.171
.172
.178
.179
.180
.183
.186
.189
.192
.194
.196
.198
.200
.202
.204
.206
.208
.211
.214
.217
.219
.221
.223
.226
.229
Master Table of Contents 5
213—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit) . . . . .
214—Paper Jam / Area B, Tray 3 (Input Unit) . . .
220—Paper Error / Source Tray, A . . . . . . . .
221—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray 1 (Printer) . . . .
222—Paper Jam / Area B, Tray 2 (Printer) . . . .
223—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer) . . . . . . . .
230—Paper Jam / Toner Cart (Printer) . . . . . .
231—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray (Printer) . . . . .
241—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer) . . . . . . . .
242—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Printer) . . . . . . .
250—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Printer) . . . . . . .
251—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray (Printer) . . . . .
253—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex) . . . . . . .
254—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex) . . . . . . .
255—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex) . . . . . . .
256—Paper Jam / Area A (Duplex) . . . . . . . .
271—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer) . . . . . . . .
272—Fuser Jam / Area A (Printer). . . . . . . . .
273—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray (Printer) . . . . .
274—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Printer) . . . . . . .
280—Env Feed / Reseat Env Feed (Printer) . . .
281—Paper Jam / Area A, Env Feed (Env Feeder)
282—Paper Jam / Reseat Paper . . . . . . . . .
330—Paper Jam / Area B (Input Unit) . . . . . . .
333—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input Unit) . . . . .
334—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 4 (Input Unit) . . .
340—Paper Jam / Area B, C, Tray 4 (Input Unit) .
341—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 4 (Input Unit) . . .
342—Paper Jam / Tray 4 (Input Unit) . . . . . . .
343—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input Unit) . . . . .
350—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 5 (Input Unit) . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.231
.233
.236
.238
.241
.244
.247
.250
.252
.256
.260
.264
.267
.271
.274
.278
.283
.285
.287
.289
.291
.293
.297
.299
.301
.303
.307
.310
.312
.314
.316
Master Table of Contents 6
351—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit) . . . .
352—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit) . . . .
353—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input Unit) . . . .
354—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 5 (Input Unit) . .
361—Finisher Jam / Area D, E (Finisher) . . . .
362—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher). . . . . .
410—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
411—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
412—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
413—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
414—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
415—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
416—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
417—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
418—Finisher / Stapler Failed (Finisher) . . . .
419—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher) .
420—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher) .
421—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher) .
422—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher) .
430—Main Motor / Power Off/On (Printer, M10) .
451—Fan Failed / Power Off/On (Printer, F3) . .
454—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
501—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
502—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
503—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
504—Fuser Failed / Replace Fuser (Printer) . .
511—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
512—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
513—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
514—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
520—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.319
.322
.324
.326
.330
.334
.338
.341
.344
.347
.350
.352
.354
.356
.358
.361
.364
.367
.370
.372
.377
.379
.381
.383
.385
.386
.387
.388
.389
.390
.392
Master Table of Contents 7
560—MCU Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . .
561—RAM Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . .
620—Memory SIMM / Reseat SIMM (Printer) .
621—Memory Error / Check Memory (Printer).
622—Memory Error / Check Config (Printer) .
623—Print Overrun / Check Config (Printer). .
630—NVRAM Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) .
631—NVRAM Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) .
632—ROM Error / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
633—DRAM Error / Check DRAM SIMM . . .
634—NVROM Error / Power Off/On (Printer) .
671—Disk Error / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
672—Disk Error / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
673—Disk Error / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
711—Cover Open / Close Duplex (Duplex) . .
712—Paper Jam / Duplex Unit (Duplex) . . . .
713—Paper Jam / Duplex Unit (Duplex) . . . .
714—Duplex Error / Check Cable (Printer) . .
751—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher). . . . .
752—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher). . . . .
753—Finisher Jam / Area E, F (Finisher) . . .
754—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher). . . . .
755—Finisher Jam / Area E, F (Finisher) . . .
756—Finisher Jam / Area E, F (Finisher) . . .
757—Finisher Jam / Area F, G (Finisher) . . .
758—Finisher Jam / Area F, G (Finisher) . . .
759—Finisher Jam / Area G (Finisher) . . . .
760—Finisher Failed / Area G (Finisher) . . .
761—Finisher Failed / Area G (Finisher) . . .
762—Finisher / Reseat Finisher (Finisher). . .
763—Cover Open / Area E (Finisher) . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.393
.394
.395
.397
.398
.399
.400
.401
.402
.403
.404
.405
.406
.407
.408
.410
.412
.414
.416
.418
.420
.424
.427
.429
.431
.434
.437
.439
.443
.445
.447
Master Table of Contents 8
764—Cover Open / Area H (Finisher) . . . . . .
765—Cover Open / Area F (Finisher) . . . . . .
767, 768—Cover Open / Area G (Finisher) . . .
769—Finisher / Reseat Finisher (Finisher). . . .
771—Env Feed / Reseat Env Feed (Env Feed) .
780—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
781—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher) . . . .
782—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
783—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
784—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher) . . . .
785—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
786—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
787—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher) . . . .
788—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
789—Finisher / Elevator Failed (Finisher) . . . .
790—Finisher / Safety Switches . . . . . . . . .
791—Finisher / No Comm (Finisher) . . . . . .
821—PS Option / Reseat PS SIMM (Printer) . .
851—IPDS Option / Reseat SIMM (Printer) . . .
852—IPDS Option / Add Memory (Printer) . . .
853—IPDS Option / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
854—PAGES Option / Power Off/On (Printer) . .
855—PAGES Option / No Font SIMM (Printer) .
861—Host Timeout / Check Printer (Printer). . .
862—CX Send State (Printer) . . . . . . . . . .
871—Network Option / Reseat Option (Printer) .
872—Network Option / Reseat Option (Printer) .
876—Network Option / Check Config (Printer) .
Print Quality Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background or Dark Image . . . . . . . . . . .
Black Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.449
.451
.453
.455
.458
.460
.464
.468
.472
.476
.480
.483
.486
.489
.492
.494
.497
.501
.502
.503
.504
.505
.506
.507
.508
.509
.510
.511
.512
.513
.516
Master Table of Contents 9
Blank Print . . . . . . . . . .
Damaged Page . . . . . . .
Fused, Not Fused or Partially
Light (Undertoned) Image . .
Registration, Image . . . . .
Residual Image or Ghosting .
Skewed Image . . . . . . . .
Spots on Prints . . . . . . .
Streaks, Horizontal. . . . . .
Streaks, Vertical . . . . . . .
Voids on Prints. . . . . . . .
Voids, Horizontal Band . . .
Voids, Vertical Band . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
Fused Image .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.519
.522
.525
.528
.532
.536
.539
.544
.547
.549
.552
.555
.558
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Power-On Sequence Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Power-On Sequence Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Initialization Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running Diagnostic Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leading Edge and Side Edge Registration Adjustment Procedure
Operator Panel Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.561
.562
.562
.563
.564
.566
.567
.574
.575
.576
.579
.581
.582
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer, Duplex, Envelope Feeder, and the Input Unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.589
.591
.592
.593
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Master Table of Contents 10
Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinout Diagrams Index . . . . . .
Printer Pinout Diagrams . . . . .
Duplex Assembly Pinout Diagram
Envelope Feeder Pinout Diagram
Input Unit Pinout Diagrams . . .
Finisher Pinout Diagrams . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.594
.595
.600
.613
.614
.615
.620
Chapter 5. Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locations Quick Path . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Covers, Trays, Controls, and Serial Number.
Clutches and Solenoids . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Quick Locator . . . . . . . . . .
Fans, Lamps, and Motors . . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Assemblies and Components . . . .
Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) . . . . . . . .
Other. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
Switches
. . . . .
. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.629
.630
.631
.634
.639
.714
.720
.721
.745
.754
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . .
Text and Illustrations . . . . . . . . .
Different Types of Screws . . . . . .
Printer Removal Procedures . . . . . .
Covers, Printer. . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Tray and Mounting Bracket,
Controller PCB, Printer . . . . . . .
Full Stack Sensor . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . .
HVPS, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser Exit Sensor, Printer . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.755
.761
.761
.761
.762
.763
.783
.788
.792
.793
.795
.797
.798
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
Printer
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Master Table of Contents 11
Lower Feed Roller Asm., Tray 1 . . . . . .
LVPS, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Drive Motor (M10), Printer . . . . . .
MCU PCB, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset/Exit Asm., Printer . . . . . . . . . .
Offset/Exit Drive, Printer . . . . . . . . . .
Offset Motor, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset Roller, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registration Chute, Printer. . . . . . . . .
Registration Clutch, Printer . . . . . . . .
Registration Roller, Printer . . . . . . . . .
Separation Roller, Printer . . . . . . . . .
Duplex Asm. Removal Procedure . . . . . .
Duplex Asm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Envelope Feeder Removal Procedure . . . .
Envelope Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2500-Sheet Input Unit Removal Procedures.
Covers, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Unit Asm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 3, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 4, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 5, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2000-Sheet Finisher Removal Procedures. .
Covers, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher . . . . . . . . .
Bin Asm., Middle, Finisher . . . . . . . . .
Bin Asm., Upper, Finisher . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Asm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.800
.804
.807
.813
.817
.818
.819
.820
.822
.824
.826
.831
.833
.834
.837
.838
.840
.841
.849
.870
.884
.898
.905
.906
.923
.942
.952
.970
Chapter 7. Preventive Maintenance and Usage Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
.
300 K Usage Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
.
Master Table of Contents 12
Commonly Used Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
.
Chapter 8. Parts Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Parts Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commonly Used Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Approved Cleaners and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly Locations, Printer and Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1xx—Printer Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200—Printer Controller, Interface PCB, and Electronics Fan (F2) . . . . . . . .
3xx—Printer Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
400—Printer EP Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5xx—Printer Exit Chutes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
600—Printer Fuser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700—Harnesses, Printer, Duplex, Envelope Feeder, and 2500-Sheet Input Unit
800—Printer Laser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9xx—Printer Paper Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10xx—Printer Paper Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11xx—Printer Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Features Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20xx—Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30xx—Envelope Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40xx—2500-Sheet Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50xx—2000-Sheet Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1082
.
. 1086
.
. 1088
.
. 1088
.
. 1089
.
. 1091
.
. 1093
.
. 1093
.
. 1094
.
. 1102
.
. 1105
.
. 1113
.
. 1116
.
. 1121
.
. 1123
.
. 1125
.
. 1127
.
. 1133
.
. 1164
.
. 1169
.
. 1169
.
. 1180
.
. 1188
.
. 1224
.
Appendix A. Supplies and Specifications.
Media Size Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Media Weight and Thickness Specifications .
Ordering Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Adhesive Labels . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1284
.
. 1285
.
. 1290
.
. 1291
.
. 1292
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Master Table of Contents 13
Selecting Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Overhead Transparencies . . . . .
Selecting Paper and Other Printable Material
Selecting Paper and Pre-Printed Forms . . .
Storing Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix B. Drivers, Technical Support, and Warranty
Driver Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dealer Warranty Claim Center (DWCC), U.S.A. only . .
Maintenance (Service) Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1292
.
. 1292
.
. 1293
.
. 1295
.
. 1296
.
Information
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1297
.
. 1297
.
. 1298
.
. 1298
.
. 1298
.
. 1298
.
. 1298
.
. 1299
.
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
.
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
.
Master Table of Contents 14
Notices and Safety Information
Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Danger Hazard Level . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caution Hazard Level . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Caution Symbols Used . . . . . . . .
Attention Notices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Approved Power Cord and Receptacle . . . .
Connecting or Disconnecting a Communication
Disposal of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Procedures. . .
Using the ESD Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ozone Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Servicing During an Electrical Storm. . . . . .
Toner Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Safety Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-Receptacle Safety-Check. . . . . . . .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 1999
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Port,
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
a
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
Teleport,
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
or an Attachment Connector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
17
18
18
19
20
20
20
21
22
23
24
25
25
26
26
27
28
28
28
29
31
32
15
References in this publication to IBM products, programs or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these
available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM licensed product, program, or service is
not intended to state or imply that only IBM’s product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of IBM’s intellectual property rights may be used
instead of the IBM product. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, except
those expressly designated by IBM, is the user’s responsibility.
Any performance data contained in this document was obtained in a controlled environment based on the use of
specific data. The results that may be obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Users of
this document should verify the applicable data in their specific environment. Therefore, such data does not
constitute a performance guarantee or warranty.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The furnishing of
this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the
IBM Corporation, IBM Director of Licensing, 208 Harbor Drive, Stamford, Connecticut, United States, 06904.
Notices and Safety Information 16
Safety Notices
There are two types of safety notices: Danger and Caution.
Danger Hazard Level
The word Danger indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing death or serious personal
injury.
DANGER notices are numbered <1-1>, <1-2>, and so forth where they appear in the text of this manual. Use the
notice number to locate the national language translation of that notice in the IBM InfoPrint 20/32/40: Warranty,
Communication Statements, and Safety Information.
Example of a Danger notice:
Notices and Safety Information 17
Caution Hazard Level
The word Caution indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing moderate or minor
personal injury.
CAUTION notices are numbered <2-1>, <2-2>, and so forth where they appear in the text of this manual. Use the
notice number to locate the national language translation of that notice in the IBM InfoPrint 20/32/40: Warranty,
Communication Statements, and Safety Information.
!
CAUTION:
<2-23> Pinch hazards exist in this area.
hcsf0223
Example of a Caution notice:
Other Caution Symbols Used
Other Caution symbols used in this manual include the following:
Laser Safety
High Temperature
Heavy Weight
Notices and Safety Information 18
Attention Notices
The word Attention calls attention to the possibility of damage to a program, device, system, or data.
Attention notices are not numbered, or translated in the IBM InfoPrint 20/32/40: Warranty, Communication
Statements, and Safety Information.
Examples of Attention notices:
Attention: This is an ESD sensitive device (see “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Procedures” on page 23).
Attention:
Look at all screws as you remove them. The type screw shown at [1] threads into plastic; the type at [2] threads
into metal. Some parts require longer or shorter screws than other parts; when installing a part, ensure that you
use the correct screw. When installing a cover, ensure that all tabs and cover edges are correctly seated and the
cover is flat against the mounting brackets as shown at [3].
2
1
3
hc3m1623
Used for Plastic
hc3m1624
Used for metal
hc3m1663
Holes Not Aligned
Notices and Safety Information 19
Safety Precautions
Approved Power Cord and Receptacle
Connecting or Disconnecting a Communication Port, a Teleport, or an
Attachment Connector
Notices and Safety Information 20
Disposal of Materials
Notices and Safety Information 21
Electrical Safety
This printer is inspected and listed by recognized national testing laboratories, such as Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. (UL) in the U.S.A. and Canadian Standards Association (CSA) in Canada. Listing of a product by a national
testing laboratory indicates that the product is designed and manufactured in accordance with national
requirements intended to minimize safety hazards. IBM equipment meets a very high standard of safety in design
and manufacture. Remember, however, that this product operates under conditions of high electrical potentials
and heat generation, both of which are functionally necessary.
Because the paper and toner used in the printer can burn, you should take normal precautions to prevent fire.
These precautions include common-sense measures, such as keeping potentially combustible materials (for
example, curtains and chemicals) away from the printer, providing adequate ventilation and cooling, limiting
unattended operation, and having trained personnel available and assigned to the printer.
Notices and Safety Information 22
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Procedures
Read the following electrostatic discharge (ESD) information because, if discharged into the circuitry of an
integrated circuit, static electricity can damage the circuit.
The following Attention notice in the text of this book warns of possible damage caused by ESD.
Attention:
This is an ESD sensitive area.
Follow these guidelines to prevent damage to ESD-sensitive components:
v Keep an ESD-sensitive part in its original shipping container, usually a protective bag, until you are ready to
install it.
v Make the fewest possible movements to minimize static electricity.
v Touch the metal frame of the printer or the assembly to discharge static electricity in your body just before
touching the ESD-sensitive part.
v Hold the ESD-sensitive part by its edges. Do not touch any components, pins, or connectors. If possible, keep
one hand on the frame while you are installing or removing an ESD-sensitive part.
v Do not place an ESD-sensitive part on anything that can provide a discharge path from your body through the
ESD-sensitive part. If you need to put down the ESD-sensitive part, first put it into the ESD protective wrapper
in which it was shipped.
v Prevent ESD-sensitive parts from being touched by other persons.
v Cables may connect to logic cards or boards that are ESD-sensitive. Be careful when working with connectors.
v Be careful when working with ESD-sensitive parts when the humidity is low. Low humidity increases static
electricity.
Continue to “Using the ESD Kit” on page 24.
Notices and Safety Information 23
Using the ESD Kit
To safely discharge all static electricity, use the ESD kit following the guidelines under “Electrostatic Discharge
(ESD) Procedures” on page 23.
v
v
v
v
Turn off the printer before you put on the ESD wrist band.
Connect the wrist band to an unpainted, frame-ground point of the printer.
Remove the ESD wrist band when working on any part of the printer that has power turned on.
Do not put the ESD mat near any electrical circuit that has power turned on. The internal resistance (1
megohm) in the ESD cable limits the current if it touches a high voltage.
v Do not put the ESD mat near a grounded surface. Ground the ESD mat only through the ESD cable. The ESD
cable supplies a high resistance to ground for your safety. If the ESD mat touches a grounded surface, the high
resistance in the ESD cable is bypassed, which causes the ESD mat not to work as expected.
Notices and Safety Information 24
Extension Cords
Laser Safety
CAUTION:
<2-21> Do not disassemble or attempt to adjust the laser unit. Do not attempt to operate the laser outside of the printer.
This printer complies with the performance standards set the by U.S. Food and Drug Administration for a Class 1
Laser Product. This means that the printer belongs to a class of laser products that does not produce hazardous
laser radiation in a customer access area. This classification was accomplished by providing the necessary
protective housing and scanning safeguard to ensure that laser radiation is inaccessible or within Class 1 limits.
There are various tool-operated machine covers that should be moved, removed or replaced only by trained
service personnel. There are no operator controls or adjustments associated with the laser.
No operator maintenance is required to keep the product in compliance as a Class 1 Laser Product.
No adjustments that affect laser operation or power are accessible to the operator.
Notices and Safety Information 25
Ozone Safety
An infinitesimal amount of ozone gas (O₃) is generated during corona discharge from the transfer charge roller.
The ozone gas is emitted only when the printer is operating. This printer meets the ozone emissio reference value
set by Underwriters Laboratory (UL) at the time it is shipped from the factory.
Servicing During an Electrical Storm
Notices and Safety Information 26
Toner Safety
Toner is a non-poisonous substance composed of minute, plastic compone If toner adheres to your skin or to your
clothes, remove as much as possible with a dry tissue, then wash with cold water. If you use hot water, the toner
will gel and become difficult to remove. As toner easily breaks down vinyl materials, avoid letting toner come into
contact with vinyl.
Notices and Safety Information 27
Safety Inspection
See “Danger Hazard Level” on page 17 and “Caution Hazard Level” on page 18 for an explanation of Danger and
Caution notices.
Instructions
Perform this safety inspection before performing any of the following tasks:
v Accept a machine for service agreement
v Provide per-call service
v Relocate a machine
v Review changes or attachments on any IBM machine that is leased, on service agreement, or on per-call
service
Ensure that you correct unsafe conditions before you continue.
Possible safety hazards are:
v Electrical—An electrically charged frame, or exposed wires or connections, can cause serious electrical shock.
v Mechanical—A missing safety cover or shield is hazardous. Moving parts, such as gears, shaft, and pulleys
are hazardous.
v Chemical—Use only approved cleaning agents. Do not use other solvents or chemicals.
Reference Items
You will need the following items:
v A copy of the machine EC history
v Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers, S229-8124
Notices and Safety Information 28
Printer Safety Inspection
1. Perform the “Power-Receptacle Safety-Check” on page 32.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Ensure that the correct power cord is used.
Ensure that all attaching cables are disconnected from the printer.
Inspect the power cord for wear or damage.
Ensure that the machine is steady.
Remove all covers and access panels (see Covers under ″Removals and Replacements″).
Inspect the covers and access panels for damage.
Ensure that all warning labels are in place.
If you are placing this printer on service contract with IBM, check for changes not made by IBM. If you find
changes not made by IBM, get the R009 Non-IBM Alterations/Attachments Survey form from the IBM branch
office. Complete the form and return it to the branch office.
10. Ensure that all ground connectors are correctly connected (see “Ground Connectors” on page 31).
11.
Measure the resistance from the ground pin of the printer power cord connector to the printer frame. The
reading must not exceed 0.1 ohm.
Notices and Safety Information 29
12. Perform a visual inspection of all cables, connections, and plugs for worn or damaged wiring.
13. Check for signs of contamination, corrosion, smoke, or burning. If there are signs of smoke or burning, check
the Maintenance Agreement Qualification (MAQ) form for the correct repair procedure, if needed.
14. Install all covers and access panels that were removed.
Notices and Safety Information 30
Ground Connectors
A
F
H
E
B
C
D
A
E
B
F
1
2
B
3
C
hc3m0416
5
4
G
H
J
L
G
G
K
A
B, F
C
D
E
G
H
J
K
L
Figure 1. Grounding Wires and Connectors
Notices and Safety Information 31
Power-Receptacle Safety-Check
See Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers, S229-8124, for the correct test equipment and procedures
before performing any of the following tasks. (Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers, S229-8124 may not
be applicable for other countries):
v Checking ac voltage at the power receptacle
v Checking ac impedance to ground at the power receptacle
Perform the power receptacle safety check as described in Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers,
S229-8124. Use only the applicable high-voltage probes.
Table 1. Nominal Power Receptacle AC Voltage (110–120 V AC, 50–60 Hertz)
Machine Rating
(50–60 Hertz)
Minimum Voltage
Maximum Voltage
100 V ac
90 V ac
110 V ac
120 V ac
104 V ac
134 V ac
Notices and Safety Information 32
Table 1. Nominal Power Receptacle AC Voltage (110–120 V AC, 50–60
Hertz) (continued)
Machine Rating
(50–60 Hertz)
Minimum Voltage
Maximum Voltage
220–240 V ac
200 V ac
264 V ac
Do not continue until the voltages are in the correct range.
Notices and Safety Information 33
About This Book
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
This book describes how to diagnose and repair the InfoPrint 32 and InfoPrint 40.
Related Publications
To obtain additional copies of this book or of any related publication, contact your IBM service representative, your
authorized service dealer, or, in the U.S.A. or Canada, call 1-800-879-2755 or 1-919-713-4055.
For related topics not covered in this book, refer to the list below.
v IBM InfoPrint 20/32/40: Warranty, Communication Statements, and Safety Information, G544-5523
v IBM InfoPrint Printers: Service CDROM, GK2T-9265
v IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide, S544-5484
v IBM InfoPrint 32/40: Quick Reference Card, G544-5480
v IBM InfoPrint 32/40: Setup Poster, S544-5481
v Ethernet and Token Ring Configuration Guide, G544-5240
v Twinax and Coax Configuration Guide, G544-5241
v PCL5e and PostScript Level 2 Technical Reference, S544-5344
v IPDS and SCS Technical Reference, S544-5312
v PAGES and ESC/P Option User’s Guide, GB88-0123
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 1999
34
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both:
IBM
InfoPrint
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies:
Acrobat
Adobe
Ethernet
PostScript
Adobe Systems, Inc.
Adobe Systems, Inc.
Xerox Corporation
Adobe Systems, Inc.
About This Book 35
Chapter 1. Getting Started
Defining the Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving the Problem, Diagnostic Quick Path. . . . . .
Error Codes and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Codes 000–049 and Messages . . . . . . .
Error Codes 050–099 and Messages . . . . . . .
Error Codes 200–249 and Messages . . . . . . .
Error Codes 250–299 and Messages . . . . . . .
Error Codes 300–399 and Messages . . . . . . .
Error Codes 400–499 and Messages . . . . . . .
Error Codes 500–599 and Messages . . . . . . .
Error Codes 600–699 and Messages . . . . . . .
Error Codes 700–769 and Messages . . . . . . .
Error Codes 770–799 and Messages . . . . . . .
Error Codes 800–899 and Messages . . . . . . .
Other Messages without Error Codes . . . . . . . .
Paper Feed and Jam Problems without Error Codes
Paper Jam Areas Referenced By Error Codes . .
Paper Path Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolating Paper Feed and Jam Problems . . . . .
Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routine and Miscellaneous Tasks . . . . . . . . . .
Completing Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains . . . . . .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 1999
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
37
39
43
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
55
56
57
68
69
70
82
83
85
87
87
36
Defining the Problem
Use the following suggestions to gather the information necessary to accurately define your printer problem, and
then go to Table 2 on page 39.
1. Discuss the problem with the operator. Note information such as error messages, other symptoms (such as
print quality), what happened, what type of print job, and other recent problems. Review the printer history and
obtain or print a printer configuration page (see “Printing Configuration Pages” on page 584).
2. Switch on printer power. The printer and the finisher, if installed, perform start-up diagnostic routines that
checks the printer controller, the printer, and the finisher. Most printer failures that occur during this start-up
diagnostic routine, and during WARM UP, result in either an error code or a message posted immediately.
Finisher interlock problems or a missing staple cartridge will also post an error during the start-up diagnostic
routine. All other finisher failures will be reported when the next job is sent to the finisher.
v See “Printer Power-On Sequence Check” on page 562.
v See “Finisher Power-On Sequence Check” on page 563.
v See “Finisher Initialization Check” on page 564.
3. Observe the display on the operator panel:
v Is information correctly displayed?
v Is the display blank after power is switched on?
v Does WARMING UP display?
v Does READY display within approximately 2 minutes?
v Do you have an error code or message?
v View or print the error log looking for recent problems or patterns (see ERROR LOG on p. 581).
v Try to duplicate the failure noting the following:
– Printer fails to print a test print when not connected to a workstation or a network.
– Printer fails when connected to a workstation, or an Ethernet, token-ring, coax, or twinax configuration.
– Printer prints, but the paper jams.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 37
– Printer prints, but has poor print quality.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 38
Solving the Problem, Diagnostic Quick Path
Using the problem information that you have gathered, go to Table 2 below. Select the “Symptom” or the
“Indication” that best describes your printer problem, and then go to the suggested item to further isolate the
failure.
Table 2. Diagnostic Quick Path
Symptom
Error code with a message
Indication
Go To...
Error codes 000–049
Table 3 on page 44
Error codes 050–099
Table 4 on page 46
Error codes 200–249
Table 5 on page 47
Error codes 250–299
Table 6 on page 48
Error codes 300–399
Table 7 on page 49
Error codes 400–499
Table 8 on page 50
Error codes 500–599
Table 9 on page 51
Error codes 600–699
Table 10 on page 52
Error codes 700–769
Table 11 on page 53
Error codes 770–799
Table 12 on page 55
Error codes 800–899
Table 13 on page 56
Table continues on p. 40.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 39
Table 2. Diagnostic Quick Path (continued)
Symptom
Messages without error
codes
Indication
Go To...
WARMING UP... (always on)
“Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems
(Printer)” on page 121
I/O INITIALIZING (always on)
“Ethernet / Token-Ring NIC Printing Problems (Printer)”
on page 103
IBM INFOPRINT (always on)
“Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems
(Printer)” on page 121
IBM INFOPRINT 32 (always on)
“Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems
(Printer)” on page 121
PLEASE WAIT (always on)
“Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems
(Printer)” on page 121
FINISHER PAUSE (always on)
“Finisher Pause...” on page 158
Any message, without an
error code, other than those “Other Messages without Error Codes” on page 57
listed above
Table continues on p. 41.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 40
Table 2. Diagnostic Quick Path (continued)
Symptom
Other problems
Indication
Go To...
Print quality problem
“Print Quality Problems” on page 83 (each print quality
diagnostic has a sample print)
Operator panel (blank, push-button, or other display
problems)
“Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems
(Printer)” on page 121
Power
“Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems
(Printer)” on page 121
Ethernet or a token-ring configuration, printing problem
“Ethernet / Token-Ring NIC Printing Problems (Printer)”
on page 103
Coax or twinax configuration printing problem
“Coax / Twinax NIC Printing Problems (Printer)” on
page 99
Printer not working (no error code)
“Printer Not Working” on page 129
Duplex not working (no error code)
“Duplex Not Working (No Error Code or Message)” on
page 133
Input unit not working (no error code)
“Input Unit Not Working (No Error Code or Message)” on
page 139
Finisher not working (no error code)
“Finisher Not Working (No Error Code)” on page 146
Envelope feeder not working (no error code)
“Envelope Feeder Not Working (No Error Code or
Message)” on page 136
Table continues on p. 42.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 41
Table 2. Diagnostic Quick Path (continued)
Symptom
Other problems
Routine and miscellaneous
tasks
Indication
Go To...
EP (toner) cartridge is out of toner, and error code 002
TONER LOW not displayed
“Toner Low, Error Code 002 Not Displayed (Printer)” on
page 126
Environmental problem (temperature, humidity,
ventilation, space, supplies storage)
“Appendix A. Supplies and Specifications” on page 1284
and the IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide
Intermittent operation
“Intermittent Operation (Printer)” on page 112
Paper feed or paper jam problems (If you have an error
code, go to “Error Codes and Messages” on page 43
and diagnose it first.)
“Paper Feed and Jam Problems without Error Codes” on
page 68 (paper jam areas are identified and there are
cross-sectional views of the paper path)
“Routine and Miscellaneous Tasks” on page 85
Chapter 1. Getting Started 42
Error Codes and Messages
Link to “Error Codes 000–049 and Messages” on page 44.
Link to “Error Codes 050–099 and Messages” on page 46.
Link to “Error Codes 200–249 and Messages” on page 47.
Link to “Error Codes 250–299 and Messages” on page 48.
Link to “Error Codes 300–399 and Messages” on page 49.
Link to “Error Codes 400–499 and Messages” on page 50.
Link to “Error Codes 500–599 and Messages” on page 51.
Link to “Error Codes 600–699 and Messages” on page 52.
Link to “Error Codes 700–769 and Messages” on page 53.
Link to “Error Codes 770–799 and Messages” on page 55.
Link to “Error Codes 800–899 and Messages” on page 56.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 43
Error Codes 000–049 and Messages
Find your “Error Code”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 3. Error Codes 000–049 and Messages
Error Codes 000–049 and Messages
Error Code Message
002 TONER LOW
004 TONER CART
RESEAT CART
006 TONER CART
RESEAT CART
009 STAPLER
CHECK STAPLES
011 LOAD <paper>
IN <tray>
013 LOAD <paper>
IN ANY TRAY
032 OUTPUT FULL
(1) UPPER BIN
034 OUTPUT FULL
(3) LOWER BIN
Go To...
“002—Toner Low (Printer)” on
page 160
“004—Toner Cart / Reseat Cart
(Printer)” on page 163
“006—Toner Cart / Reseat Cart
(Printer)” on page 165
“009—Stapler / Check Staples
(Finisher)” on page 169
“011—Load <paper> / In <tray>
(Printer)” on page 172
“013—Load <Paper> / In Any Tray
(Printer)” on page 179
“032—Output Full / (1) Upper Bin
(Finisher)” on page 183
“034—Output Full / (3) Lower Bin
(Finisher)” on page 189
Error Codes 000–049 and Messages
Error Code Message
003 TONER CART
REPLACE CART
005 TONER CART
WRONG CART
007 TONER CART
REPLACE CART
010 STAPLER
CHECK CART
012 LOAD <paper>
IN AUX/ENV TRAY
031 OUTPUT FULL
MAIN
033 OUTPUT FULL
(2) MIDDLE BIN
041 TRAY MISSING
REPLACE TRAY 1
Go To...
“003—Toner Cart / Replace Cart
(Printer)” on page 162
“005—Toner Cart / Wrong Cart
(Printer)” on page 164
“007—Toner Cart / Replace Cart
(Printer)” on page 167
“010—Stapler / Check Cart (Finisher)”
on page 171
“012—Load <Paper> / In Aux or Env
<Tray> (Printer)” on page 178
“031—Output Full / Face-Down Bin
(Printer)” on page 180
“033—Output Full / (2) Middle Bin
(Finisher)” on page 186
“041—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 1
(Printer)” on page 192
Chapter 1. Getting Started 44
Table 3. Error Codes 000–049 and Messages (continued)
Error Codes 000–049 and Messages
Error Code Message
042 TRAY MISSING
REPLACE TRAY 2
044 TRAY MISSING
REPLACE TRAY 4
046 AUX-ENV TRAY
REPLACE TRAY
Go To...
“042—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 2
(Printer)” on page 194
“044—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 4
(Input Unit)” on page 198
Error Codes 000–049 and Messages
Error Code Message
043 TRAY MISSING
REPLACE TRAY 3
045 TRAY MISSING
REPLACE TRAY 5
Go To...
“043—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 3
(Input Unit)” on page 196
“045—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 5
(Input Unit)” on page 200
“046—Aux-Env. Tray / Replace Tray
(Printer)” on page 202
Chapter 1. Getting Started 45
Error Codes 050–099 and Messages
Find your “Error Code”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 4. Error Codes 050–099 and Messages
Error Codes 050–099 and Messages
Error Code / Message
056 TRAY 1
LIFT FAILURE
058 TRAY 3
LIFT FAILURE
060 TRAY 5
LIFT FAILURE
072 COVER OPEN
CLOSE COVER A
Go To...
“056—Tray 1 / Lift Failure (Printer)” on
page 204
“058—Tray 3 / Lift Failure (Input Unit)”
on page 208
“060—Tray 5 / Lift Failure (Input Unit)”
on page 214
“072—Cover Open / Close Cover A
(Printer)” on page 219
Error Codes 050–099 and Messages
Error Code / Message
057 TRAY 2
LIFT FAILURE
059 TRAY 4
LIFT FAILURE
071 COVER OPEN
CLOSE COVER C
073 COVER OPEN
CLOSE COVER B
Go To...
“057—Tray 2 / Lift Failure (Printer)” on
page 206
“059—Tray 4 / Lift Failure (Input Unit)”
on page 211
“071—Cover Open / Close Cover C
(Input Unit)” on page 217
“073—Cover Open / Close Cover B
(Printer)” on page 221
Chapter 1. Getting Started 46
Error Codes 200–249 and Messages
Find your “Error Code”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 5. Error Codes 200–249 and Messages
Error Codes 200–249 and Messages
Error Code / Message
210 PAPER JAM
AREA A, AUX TRAY
212 PAPER JAM
AREA B, C
214 PAPER JAM
AREA B, TRAY 3
221 PAPER JAM
AREA A, TRAY 1
223 PAPER JAM
AREA A
231 PAPER JAM
AREA A, TRAY
242 PAPER JAM
AREA A, D
Go To...
“210—Paper Jam / Area A, Aux Tray
(Printer)” on page 223
“212—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input
Unit)” on page 229
“214—Paper Jam / Area B, Tray 3
(Input Unit)” on page 233
“221—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray 1
(Printer)” on page 238
“223—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer)” on
page 244
“231—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray
(Printer)” on page 250
Error Codes 200–249 and Messages
Error Code / Message
211 PAPER JAM
AREA A, ENV FEED
213 PAPER JAM
AREA B, C
220 PAPER ERROR
SOURCE TRAY, A
222 PAPER JAM
AREA B, TRAY 2
230 PAPER JAM
TONER CART
241 PAPER JAM
AREA A
Go To...
“211—Paper Jam / Area A, Env. Feed
(Printer)” on page 226
“213—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input
Unit)” on page 231
“220—Paper Error / Source Tray, A” on
page 236
“222—Paper Jam / Area B, Tray 2
(Printer)” on page 241
“230—Paper Jam / Toner Cart
(Printer)” on page 247
“241—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer)” on
page 252
“242—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Printer)”
on page 256
Chapter 1. Getting Started 47
Error Codes 250–299 and Messages
Find your “Error Code”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 6. Error Codes 250–299 and Messages
Error Codes 250–299 and Messages
Error Code / Message
250 PAPER JAM
AREA A, D
253 PAPER JAM
AREA A, D
255 PAPER JAM
AREA A, D
271 PAPER JAM
AREA A
273 PAPER JAM
AREA A, TRAY
280 ENVFEED
RESEAT ENVFEED
282 PAPER JAM
RESEAT PAPER
Go To...
“250—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Printer)”
on page 260
“253—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex)”
on page 267
“255—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex)”
on page 274
“271—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer)” on
page 283
“273—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray
(Printer)” on page 287
“280—Env Feed / Reseat Env Feed
(Printer)” on page 291
Error Codes 250–299 and Messages
Error Code / Message
251 PAPER JAM
AREA A, TRAY
254 PAPER JAM
AREA A, D
256 PAPER JAM
AREA A
272 FUSER JAM
AREA A, D
274 PAPER JAM
AREA A, B
281 PAPER JAM
AREA A, ENV FEED
Go To...
“251—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray
(Printer)” on page 264
“254—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex)”
on page 271
“256—Paper Jam / Area A (Duplex)” on
page 278
“272—Fuser Jam / Area A (Printer)” on
page 285
“274—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Printer)”
on page 289
“281—Paper Jam / Area A, Env Feed
(Env Feeder)” on page 293
“282—Paper Jam / Reseat Paper” on
page 297
Chapter 1. Getting Started 48
Error Codes 300–399 and Messages
Find your “Error Code”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 7. Error Codes 300–399 and Messages
Error Codes 300–399 and Messages
Error Code / Message
330 PAPER JAM
AREA B
334 PAPER JAM
AREA C, TRAY 4
341 PAPER JAM
AREA C
343 PAPER JAM
AREA A, B
351 PAPER JAM
AREA B, C
353 PAPER JAM
AREA A, B
361 FINISHER JAM
AREA D, E
Go To...
“330—Paper Jam / Area B (Input Unit)”
on page 299
“334—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 4
(Input Unit)” on page 303
“341—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 4
(Input Unit)” on page 310
“343—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input
Unit)” on page 314
“351—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input
Unit)” on page 319
“353—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input
Unit)” on page 324
“361—Finisher Jam / Area D, E
(Finisher)” on page 330
Error Codes 300–399 and Messages
Error Code / Message
333 PAPER JAM
AREA A, B
340 PAPER JAM
AREA B, C
342 PAPER JAM
AREA C, TRAY 5
350 PAPER JAM
AREA C, TRAY 5
352 PAPER JAM
AREA B, C
354 PAPER JAM
AREA C, TRAY 5
362 FINISHER JAM
AREA E
Go To...
“333—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input
Unit)” on page 301
“340—Paper Jam / Area B, C, Tray 4
(Input Unit)” on page 307
“342—Paper Jam / Tray 4 (Input Unit)”
on page 312
“350—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 5
(Input Unit)” on page 316
“352—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input
Unit)” on page 322
“354—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 5
(Input Unit)” on page 326
“362—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher)”
on page 334
Chapter 1. Getting Started 49
Error Codes 400–499 and Messages
Find your “Error Code”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 8. Error Codes 400–499 and Messages
Error Codes 400–499 and Messages
Error Code / Message
410 FINISHER
POWER OFF/ON
412 FINISHER
POWER OFF/ON
414 FINISHER
POWER OFF/ON
416 FINISHER
POWER OFF/ON
418 FINISHER
STAPLER FAILED
420 FINISHER
STAPLER FAILED
422 FINISHER
STAPLER FAILED
451 FAN FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
Go To...
“410—Finisher / Power Off/On
(Finisher)” on page 338
“412—Finisher / Power Off/On
(Finisher)” on page 344
“414—Finisher / Power Off/On
(Finisher)” on page 350
“416—Finisher / Power Off/On
(Finisher)” on page 354
“418—Finisher / Stapler Failed
(Finisher)” on page 358
“420—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed
(Finisher)” on page 364
“422—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed
(Finisher)” on page 370
“451—Fan Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer, F3)” on page 377
Error Codes 400–499 and Messages
Error Code / Message
411 FINISHER
POWER OFF/ON
413 FINISHER
POWER OFF/ON
415 FINISHER
POWER OFF/ON
417 FINISHER
STAPLER FAILED
419 FINISHER
STAPLER FAILED
421 FINISHER
STAPLER FAILED
430 MAIN MOTOR
POWER OFF/ON
454 FUSER FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
Go To...
“411—Finisher / Power Off/On
(Finisher)” on page 341
“413—Finisher / Power Off/On
(Finisher)” on page 347
“415—Finisher / Power Off/On
(Finisher)” on page 352
“417—Finisher / Power Off/On
(Finisher)” on page 356
“419—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed
(Finisher)” on page 361
“421—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed
(Finisher)” on page 367
“430—Main Motor / Power Off/On
(Printer, M10)” on page 372
“454—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 379
Chapter 1. Getting Started 50
Error Codes 500–599 and Messages
Find your “Error Code”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 9. Error Codes 500–599 and Messages
Error Codes 500–599 and Messages
Error Code / Message
502 FUSER FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
504 FUSER FAILED
REPLACE FUSER
512 LASER FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
514 LASER FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
560 MCU FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
Go To...
“502—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 383
“504—Fuser Failed / Replace Fuser
(Printer)” on page 386
“512—Laser Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 388
“514—Laser Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 390
“560—MCU Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 393
Error Codes 500–599 and Messages
Error Code / Message
503 FUSER FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
511 LASER FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
513 LASER FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
520 LASER FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
561 RAM FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
Go To...
“503—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 385
“511—Laser Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 387
“513—Laser Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 389
“520—Laser Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 392
“561—RAM Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 394
Chapter 1. Getting Started 51
Error Codes 600–699 and Messages
Find your “Error Code”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 10. Error Codes 600–699 and Messages
Error Codes 600–699 and Messages
Error Code / Message
Go To...
“621—Memory Error / Check Memory
621 MEMORY ERROR
(Printer)” on page 397
CHECK MEMORY
623 PRT OVERRUN
CHECK CONFIG
631 NVRAM FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
633 DRAM ERROR
CHECK DRAM SIMM
671 DISK ERROR
POWER OFF/ON
673 DISK ERROR
POWER OFF/ON
“623—Print Overrun / Check Config
(Printer)” on page 399
“631—NVRAM Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 401
“633—DRAM Error / Check DRAM
SIMM” on page 403
“671—Disk Error / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 405
Error Codes 600–699 and Messages
Error Code / Message
Go To...
“622—Memory Error / Check Config
622 MEMORY ERROR
(Printer)” on page 398
CHECK CONFIG
630 NVRAM FAILED
POWER OFF/ON
632 ROM ERROR
POWER OFF/ON
634 NVRAM ERROR
POWER OFF/ON
672 DISK ERROR
POWER OFF/ON
“630—NVRAM Failed / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 400
“632—ROM Error / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 402
“634—NVROM Error / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 404
“672—Disk Error / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 406
“673—Disk Error / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 407
Chapter 1. Getting Started 52
Error Codes 700–769 and Messages
Find your “Error Code”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 11. Error Codes 700–769 and Messages
Error Codes 700–769 and Messages
Error Code / Message
711 COVER OPEN
CLOSE DUPLEX
713 PAPER JAM
DUPLEX UNIT
751 FINISHER JAM
AREA E
753 FINISHER JAM
AREA E, F
755 FINISHER JAM
AREA E, F
757 FINISHER JAM
AREA F, G
759 FINISHER JAM
AREA G
761 FINISHER JAM
AREA G
Go To...
“711—Cover Open / Close Duplex
(Duplex)” on page 408
“713—Paper Jam / Duplex Unit
(Duplex)” on page 412
Error Codes 700–769 and Messages
Error Code / Message
712 PAPER JAM
DUPLEX UNIT
714 DUPLEX ERROR
CHECK CABLE
Go To...
“712—Paper Jam / Duplex Unit
(Duplex)” on page 410
“714—Duplex Error / Check Cable
(Printer)” on page 414
“751—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher)”
752 FINISHER JAM
on page 416
AREA E
“752—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher)”
on page 418
“753—Finisher Jam / Area E, F
(Finisher)” on page 420
“754—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher)”
on page 424
“755—Finisher Jam / Area E, F
(Finisher)” on page 427
“757—Finisher Jam / Area F, G
(Finisher)” on page 431
“759—Finisher Jam / Area G
(Finisher)” on page 437
“761—Finisher Failed / Area G
(Finisher)” on page 443
754 FINISHER JAM
AREA E
756 FINISHER JAM
AREA E, F
758 FINISHER JAM
AREA F, G
760 FINISHER JAM
AREA G
762 FINISHER
RESEAT FINISHER
“756—Finisher Jam / Area E, F
(Finisher)” on page 429
“758—Finisher Jam / Area F, G
(Finisher)” on page 434
“760—Finisher Failed / Area G
(Finisher)” on page 439
“762—Finisher / Reseat Finisher
(Finisher)” on page 445
Chapter 1. Getting Started 53
Table 11. Error Codes 700–769 and Messages (continued)
Error Codes 700–769 and Messages
Error Code / Message
Go To...
Error Codes 700–769 and Messages
Error Code / Message
Go To...
763 COVER OPEN
AREA E
“763—Cover Open / Area E (Finisher)”
764 COVER OPEN
on page 447
AREA H
“764—Cover Open / Area H (Finisher)”
on page 449
765 COVER OPEN
AREA F
“765—Cover Open / Area F (Finisher)”
767 COVER OPEN
on page 451
AREA G
“767, 768—Cover Open / Area G
(Finisher)” on page 453
“767, 768—Cover Open / Area G
(Finisher)” on page 453
“769—Finisher / Reseat Finisher
(Finisher)” on page 455
768 COVER OPEN
AREA G
769 FINISHER
RESEAT FINISHER
Chapter 1. Getting Started 54
Error Codes 770–799 and Messages
Find your “Error Code”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 12. Error Codes 750–799 and Messages
Error Codes 770–799 and Messages
Error Code / Message
771 ENV FEED
RESEAT ENV FEED
781 FINISHER
(2) MIDDLE BIN
783 FINISHER
(1) UPPER BIN
785 FINISHER
(3) LOWER BIN
787 FINISHER
(2) MIDDLE BIN
789 FINISHER
ELEVATOR FAILED
791 FINISHER
NO COMMUNICATION
Go To...
“771—Env Feed / Reseat Env Feed
(Env Feed)” on page 458
“781—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin
(Finisher)” on page 464
“783—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin
(Finisher)” on page 472
“785—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin
(Finisher)” on page 480
“787—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin
(Finisher)” on page 486
“789—Finisher / Elevator Failed
(Finisher)” on page 492
Error Codes 770–799 and Messages
Error Code / Message
780 FINISHER
(1) UPPER BIN
782 FINISHER
(3) LOWER BIN
784 FINISHER
(2) MIDDLE BIN
786 FINISHER
(1) UPPER BIN
788 FINISHER
(3) LOWER BIN
790 FINISHER
SAFETY SWITCHES
Go To...
“780—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin
(Finisher)” on page 460
“782—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin
(Finisher)” on page 468
“784—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin
(Finisher)” on page 476
“786—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin
(Finisher)” on page 483
“788—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin
(Finisher)” on page 489
“790—Finisher / Safety Switches” on
page 494
“791—Finisher / No Comm (Finisher)”
on page 497
Chapter 1. Getting Started 55
Error Codes 800–899 and Messages
Find your “Error Code”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 13. Error Codes 800–899 and Messages
Error Codes 800–899 and Messages
Error Code / Message
821 PS OPTION
RESEAT PS SIMM
852 IPDS OPTION
ADD MEMORY
854 PAGES OPTION
ADD MEMORY
861 HOST TIMEOUT
CHECK PRINTER
871 NETWORK OPT
RESEAT OPTION
876 NETWORK OPT
CHECK CONFIG
Go To...
“821—PS Option / Reseat PS SIMM
(Printer)” on page 501
“852—IPDS Option / Add Memory
(Printer)” on page 503
“854—PAGES Option / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 505
“861—Host Timeout / Check Printer
(Printer)” on page 507
“871—Network Option / Reseat Option
(Printer)” on page 509
Error Codes 800–899 and Messages
Error Code / Message
851 IPDS OPTION
RESEAT SIMM
853 IPDS OPTION
POWER OFF/ON
855 PAGES OPTION
NO FONT SIMM
862 CX SEND STATE
872 NETWORK OPT
RESEAT OPTION
Go To...
“851—IPDS Option / Reseat SIMM
(Printer)” on page 502
“853—IPDS Option / Power Off/On
(Printer)” on page 504
“855—PAGES Option / No Font SIMM
(Printer)” on page 506
“862—CX Send State (Printer)” on
page 508
“872—Network Option / Reseat Option
(Printer)” on page 510
“876—Network Option / Check Config
(Printer)” on page 511
Chapter 1. Getting Started 56
Other Messages without Error Codes
Find your “Message”, and then perform any necessary “Action”.
CANCEL REQUESTED
Meaning: A user pressed the Cancel Print key to cancel printing. The printer continues to print until it can
honor the request.
Action: None required.
COLD RESET A4
Meaning: The printer is powering up and resetting all menu values to the factory defaults. The A4 paper
group is the default.
Action: None required; however, you need to restore any unique settings for the printer (such as default
trays or bins).
COLD RESET LTR
Meaning: The printer is powering up and resetting all menu values to the factory defaults. The LTR paper
group is the default.
Action: None required; however, you need to restore any unique settings for the printer (such as the default
tray).
CONTEXT SAVE ADJUSTED
Meaning: The printer is configured to use the context saving option (PCL SAVE, PS SAVE, or, if the PAGES
& ESC/P option is installed, PAGES SAVE on the Memconfig Menu); however, due to a configuration
change, the printer no longer has enough memory to support context saving.
Action: Press Continue. To restore context saving, add more memory to the printer. See “Memory
Requirements” in the IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide for more information.
CONTEXT SAVE CHANGED
Meaning: The values for the PCL SAVE, PS SAVE, or PAGES SAVE items under the Memconfig menu
have been changed.
Action: Press Continue to accept the new values and continue printing.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 57
COAX HEX PRT
Meaning: You are printing a hexadecimal dump for troubleshooting problems with non-IPDS jobs sent over
the coax attachment.
Action: To cancel the dump, select CANCEL CX PRT from the Test Menu.
COPY n OF nn
Meaning: You requested multiple copies of a print job. This message increments with each copy the printer
completes.
Action: None required.
DISK DOWN/PRESS *
Meaning: The hard drive is installed but not usable. A user selected IGNORE DISK when asked to format
the hard drive.
Action: Do one of the following:
v Format the hard drive. Select FORMAT DRIVE from the Test Menu.
v Power off the printer and remove the hard drive.
DO NOT POWER OFF
Meaning: You sent a microcode update to the printer, which is currently processing.
Action: None required.
Note: Do not power off the printer while this message displays. Powering off could damage the printer.
DSK FMT RESTART
Meaning: The printer is restarting to include a hard drive in its configuration.
Action: None required.
ESC/P ETHERNET
Meaning: The printer is receiving ESC/P data through the Ethernet interface.
Action: None required.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 58
ESC/P PARALLEL
Meaning: The printer is receiving ESC/P data through the parallel port interface.
Action: None required.
ESC/P TOKEN-RING
Meaning: The printer is receiving ESC/P data through the token-ring interface.
Action: None required.
FINISHER PAUSE
Meaning: You pressed the Pause button on the HCF. The printer stops at the next job boundary.
Action: Press Pause again to resume printing.
FORMAT DISK / IGNORE DISK
Meaning: You are powering up with an unformatted hard drive, or you selected the FORMAT DISK action
on the Test Menu.
Action: Press Value to format the hard drive. Press Shift and Value together to continue as if there were no
hard drive installed.
FLUSHING...
Meaning: The printer is canceling a PCL5e, PostScript, PAGES, or ESC/P job.
Action: None required.
FORMATTING
Meaning: The printer is formatting the hard drive.
Action: None required.
F/W xxxxxxx
Meaning: Firmware error (xxxxxxx can be any alphanumeric value).
Action: Switch off printer power, wait ten seconds, and then switch on printer power. If problems persist, call
for technical support.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 59
Note: When firmware errors occur, the printer might also print an error page. If the printer does print an
error page, save it so you can tell technical support.
I/O INITIALIZING
Meaning: The network interface card is initializing.
Action: Normally none. If the message remains on the display and nothing prints, and you have an Ethernet
or token-ring card, make sure your LAN cable is connected and the network interface card is seated.
IPDS COAX
Meaning: The printer is receiving IPDS data through the coax interface.
Action: None required.
IPDS ETHERNET
Meaning: The printer is receiving IPDS data through the Ethernet interface.
Action: None required.
IPDS TOKEN-RING
Meaning: The printer is receiving IPDS data through the token-ring interface.
Action: None required.
IPDS TWINAX
Meaning: The printer is receiving IPDS data through the twinax interface.
Action: None required.
JOB QUEUED
Meaning: An informational page has been added to the print queue.
Action: None required.
KEY NOT VALID
Meaning: You pressed a key that is not valid.
Action: Press another key. In some instances, you may need to press Online to use other keys such as the
Menu key.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 60
MENU LOCKED
Meaning: The system administrator has locked the menu. You can view menu settings but you cannot
change them.
Action: None required.
MRT COMPRESSION
Meaning: The printer is compressing the page image it is currently printing.
Action: None required.
MRT LOSSY COMPRESSION ACTIVE
Meaning: The printer is compressing the page image it is currently printing. Check to make sure the output
is acceptable.
Action: None required. To prevent page compression, turn page protection on by setting the PAGEPROT
menu item to ON. The PAGEPROT menu item is available on the PCL Menu, the PostScript (PS) Menu,
and the IPDS Menu.
Note: Page protection works only if the printer has enough memory. See “Memory Requirements” in the
IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide for information on how much memory various options require.
NEW VALUES AT NEXT BOUNDARY
Meaning: You have taken the printer offline while a job was printing in order to change a menu value. The
new value might not take effect until the next “job boundary”. Different data streams, in particular SCS,
define job boundaries in different ways, so it may take a while for the new value to take effect.
Action: None required. If problems occur, make sure you take the printer offline to change menu values only
when no jobs are printing (the printer is in READY).
NONIPDS COAX
Meaning: The printer is receiving SCS or DSC/DSE data through the coax interface.
Action: None required.
NONIPDS TWINAX
Meaning: The printer is receiving SCS data through the twinax interface.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 61
Action: None required.
OFFLINE
Meaning: The printer is offline.
Action: Press Online to make the printer active.
ONLINE HEX PRINT
Meaning: The printer is performing a hexadecimal dump.
Action: None required.
PA1 REQUESTED
Meaning: A PA1 request was sent to the host over the coax interface.
Action: None required.
PA2 REQUESTED
Meaning: A PA2 request was sent to the host over the coax interface.
Action: None required.
PAGES ETHERNET
Meaning: The printer is receiving PAGES data through the Ethernet interface.
Action: None required.
PAGES PARALLEL
Meaning: The printer is receiving PAGES data through the parallel port interface.
Action: None required.
PAGES TOKEN-RING
Meaning: The printer is receiving PAGES data through the token-ring interface.
Action: None required.
PAGES: nnnn
Meaning: This is a response to the PAGE COUNT item on the Machine Info Menu, where nnnn is the
number of pages the printer has printed.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 62
Action: None required.
PCL ETHERNET
Meaning: The printer is receiving PCL5e data through the Ethernet interface.
Action: None required.
PCL PARALLEL
Meaning: The printer is receiving PCL5e data through the parallel interface.
Action: None required.
PCL TOKEN-RING
Meaning: The printer is receiving PCL5e data through the token-ring interface.
Action: None required.
PJL COAX
Meaning: The printer is receiving or sending PJL information through the coax port.
Action: None required.
PJL ETHERNET
Meaning: The printer is receiving or sending PJL information through the Ethernet port.
Action: None required.
PJL PARALLEL
Meaning: The printer is receiving or sending PJL information through the parallel port.
Action: None required.
PJL TWINAX
Meaning: The printer is receiving or sending PJL information through the twinax port.
Action: None required.
PLEASE WAIT
Meaning: The printer is processing data and cannot immediately respond to a request.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 63
Action: Wait until the message clears. If the message remains and processing on the host appears to have
stopped, switch off printer power, wait ten seconds, and then switch on printer power.
POWER SAVER ON
Meaning: The printer is in power-saving mode and has temporarily shut off power to certain of its
components. Power will be restored as soon as a job is submitted.
Action: None required.
PRINTER ERROR / POWER OFF
Meaning: An unexpected firmware error has occurred.
Action: Power off and then power on the printer. The printer should print an error page.
PS COAX
Meaning: The printer is receiving PostScript data through the coax interface.
Action: None required.
PS ETHERNET
Meaning: The printer is receiving PostScript data through the Ethernet interface.
Action: None required.
PS PARALLEL
Meaning: The printer is receiving PostScript data through the parallel interface.
Action: None required.
PS TOKEN-RING
Meaning: The printer is receiving PostScript data through the token-ring interface.
Action: None required.
PS TWINAX
Meaning: The printer is receiving PostScript data through the twinax interface.
Action: None required.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 64
READY
Meaning: The printer is ready to receive data.
Action: None required.
REALLY FORMAT / IGNORE DISK
Meaning: A prompt to ask you to verify that you want to format the hard drive.
Action: Press the Value key to format the disk. Simultaneously press the Value and Shift keys to cancel
the format.
RECONFIGURING MEMORY
Meaning: The printer has received a print job that requires it to adjust memory settings for the current page.
Action: No action is required. The printer reconfigures its memory settings to print the current page.
Afterward, its settings revert to normal. See “Memory Requirements” in the IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s
Guide for more information.
RESETTING PRINTER
Meaning: The printer is resetting to its default values.
Action: None required.
RESTORING DEFAULTS
Meaning: The printer is restoring the factory defaults for the printer.
Action: None required.
SWITCHING TO ESC/P
Meaning: The printer is switching to ESC/P.
Action: None required.
SWITCHING TO IPDS
Meaning: The printer is switching to IPDS.
Action: None required.
SWITCHING TO PAGES
Meaning: The printer is switching to PAGES.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 65
Action: None required.
SWITCHING TO PCL
Meaning: The printer is switching to PCL5e.
Action: None required.
SWITCHING TO PS
Meaning: The printer is switching to PostScript.
Action: None required.
TRAY LIFTING
Meaning: A paper tray is on the rise.
Action: None required.
TWINAX HEX PRT
Meaning: You are printing a hexadecimal dump for troubleshooting problems with non-IPDS jobs sent over
the twinax attachment.
Action: To cancel the dump, select CANCEL TX PRT from the Test Menu.
UPDATING FLASH / DO NOT POWER OFF
Meaning: You sent a microcode update to the printer, which is currently processing.
Action: None required.
Note: Do not power off the printer while this message displays. Powering off could damage the printer.
WAIT FOR IDLE PRINTER
Meaning: You attempted to print from the Test Menu while the printer was processing PCL, PostScript,
PAGES, ESC/P, or IPDS data.
Action: When a port timeout occurs for the data stream, the Ready message appears on the operator
panel. Wait for the Ready message and then try printing again.
WARMING UP
Meaning: The printer is warming up. When it is warm, it displays the READY message.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 66
Action: None required. If the message seems to appear too frequently, change the value for the
power-saving mode to a larger value. See “Changing the Power Settings (Sleep Mode) Interval” in the IBM
InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide for instructions on how to change the setting.
If the message displays for several minutes, the printer controller connection may be bad.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 67
Paper Feed and Jam Problems without Error Codes
Use the information in this section to understand and diagnose paper feed and jam problems that occur
without an error code.
If you have an error code, diagnose it using “Error Codes and Messages” on page 43.
See Figure 2 on page 69 for an illustration of the paper path area designations, and figures 3 to 13 for views of
the various paper paths.
Table 14 on page 82 helps isolate paper feed and paper jam problems that do not result in an error code or a
message.
Some error conditions are reported only when paper is being printed. Print a configuration page (CONFIG PAGE
on the Test Menu) or a PS font list (PRINT PS FONTS on the Test Menu) from the problem tray to the problem
bin. To select a tray and a bin, set the SOURCE and OUTPUT items in the Paper Menu. Also, make sure you set
TRAY SWITCH to OFF on the Paper Menu and you set DUPLEX to ON or OFF, depending on the problem. If you
set DUPLEX to ON, print a list of PostScript fonts rather than a configuration page.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 68
Paper Jam Areas Referenced By Error Codes
Area F
Area G
Area H
Area E
Toner
Cartridge
Area
Area D
(1) Upper Bin
F
H
E
(2) Middle Bin
A
(3) Lower Bin
Area A
1
Area J
2
B
Aux Tray
Area
3
C
5
4
hc3m0397
Area B
Area C
Tray 5
Tray 3
Tray 1
Tray 4
Tray 2
Figure 2. Paper Jam Areas Referenced By Messages
Chapter 1. Getting Started 69
Paper Path Views
The following illustrations show the various paper paths of the printer, the input unit, and the finisher.
Paper Path
Illustration
Printing from tray 1, tray 2, or the auxiliary tray, in simplex mode
Figure 3 on page 71
Printing from tray 3, tray 4, or tray 5 (view of paper path rollers)
Figure 4 on page 72
Printing from tray 3, tray 4, or tray 5 (view of paper path sensors)
Figure 5 on page 73
Printing an envelope
Figure 6 on page 74
Printing side 1 in duplex mode
Figure 7 on page 75
Printing side 2 in duplex mode
Figure 8 on page 76
Exiting paper on to the face-down output bin or on to the face-up output bin in duplex mode
Figure 9 on page 77
Feeding paper through the finisher
Figure 10 on page 78
Feeding paper onto the compiler tray, in stapler mode
Figure 11 on page 79
Moving the stack into the stapler in stapler mode
Figure 12 on page 80
Ejecting the stack from the stapler in stapler mode
Figure 13 on page 81
Chapter 1. Getting Started 70
Face Up Exit Sensor
Fuser Exit Sensor
Duplex Exit Sensor
Pressure Roller
Exit Gate
(up)
Full Stack Sensor
Offset Roller
Paper partially fed into output bin
Bias Transfer Roller
Separation Roller
Heat Roller
Drum Printing side 1
Aux Tray Separation Roller
Registration Roller
Wait Sensor
Registration Sensor
Aux Tray Feed Roller
Tray 1 Feed Roller
Aux Tray Pick Roller
Tray 1 Pick Roller
Tray 1
Tray 2
Aux Tray Restraint Pad
hc3m0678
Feed Roller
Tray 2 Pick Roller
Tray 1 Separation Roller
Tray 2 Feed Roller
Tray 2 Separation Roller
Figure 3. Printing from Tray 1, Tray 2, or the Auxiliary Tray in Simplex Mode
Chapter 1. Getting Started 71
Registration Roller
Tray 2 Feed Roller
Tray 3 Feed Roller
Tray 2 Feed Roller
Tray 3 Pick Roller
Paper Path #2 Sensor
Tray 3 Feed Roller
Tray 3 Separation Roller
Tray 3 Separation Roller
Tray 3
Tray 5 Feed Roller
Paper Path #3 Sensor
Tray 5 Pick Roller
Tray 4 Feed Roller
Tray 4 Feed Roller
Tray 5 Separation Roller
Tray 4 Feed Roller
Tray 4 Pick Roller
Tray 5
Tray 4 Separation Roller
hc3m1424
Tray 4
Tray 5 Feed Roller
Paper Path #4 Sensor
Figure 4. Printing from Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5 (View of Paper Path Rollers)
Chapter 1. Getting Started 72
Full Stack Sensor 24
Face-Up Tray Exit Sensor 23
Fuser Exit Sensor 22
Registration Sensor 21
1 Tray 1 No-Paper Sensor
Tray 1 Level Sensor 20
Paper Path #1 Sensor 19
2 Tray 1 Paper Size Sensors
3 Tray 2 No-Paper Sensor
Tray 2 Level Sensor 18
4 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensors
Paper Path #2 Sensor 17
5 Tray 3 No-Paper Sensor
Tray 3 Level Sensor 16
6 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensors
Paper Path #3 Sensor 15
7 Tray 5 Level Sensor
Cover C Interlock 14
8 Tray 5 No-Paper Sensor
Paper Path #4 Sensor 13
Tray 4 Level Sensor 12
9
Tray 4 No-Paper Sensor 11
Tray 5 Paper Size Sensors
Tray 4 Paper Size Sensors 10
hc3m0892
Figure 5. Printing from Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5 (View of Paper Path Sensors)
Chapter 1. Getting Started 73
Separation Roller
Envelope Feed Sensor
Separation Roller
Feed Roller
Envelope Stack
No Paper Sensor
Envelope Size
Sensor Asm
Feed Belt
Feed Roller
Bottom Roller
Transport Roller
hc3m0637
Feed Roller
Figure 6. Printing an Envelope
Chapter 1. Getting Started 74
Pressure Roller
Offset Roller
Exit Gate
(up)
Paper partially fed into output bin
Heat Roller
Duplex Cover
Interlock
Drum Printing side 1
Bias Transfer Roller
Registration Roller
hc3m0675
Figure 7. Printing Side 1 in Duplex Mode
Chapter 1. Getting Started 75
Duplex
Exit Gate
(up)
Separation Rollers
(Front and Rear)
Exit Gate
(down)
Exit Roller
Offset Roller (reverse)
Paper fed in reverse
Separation Rollers
(Front and Rear)
Exit Roller
Transport Roller
Printing side 2
Transport Roller
Drum
Bias Transfer Roller
Wait Roller
Registration Roller
hc3m0676
Separation Rollers
Figure 8. Printing Side 2 in Duplex Mode
Chapter 1. Getting Started 76
Duplex Exit
Gate (down)
Duplex Exit Sensor
Exit Roller
Exit Gate
(up for Output Tray)
(down for Face-Up Tray)
Exit Roller
Face Up Exit Sensor
Full Stack Sensor
Offset Roller (forward)
Two sided sheet fed to
the Face-Down Output Bin
Two sided sheet fed to
the Face Up Tray
Pressure Roller
Heat Roller
Fuser Exit Sensor
hc3m0677
Figure 9. Exiting Paper on to the Face-Down Output Bin or on to the Face-Up Output Bin in Duplex Mode
Chapter 1. Getting Started 77
Separation Rollers (3 sets)
Docking
Station
Transport
Station
Transport Roller &
Separation Roller
Compiler
Exit Roller
Paddle Asm
IOT Full Paper
Sensor
Transport Cover
Interlock
Offset Pinch Roller
Eject Roller
Fuser
In-Gate
Transport Rollers
(3 sets)
Transport Exit
Sensor
Transport Entrance Sensor
hc3m1538
Compiler Tray Exit
Sensor
Paddle Asm
Figure 10. Feeding Paper through the Finisher
Chapter 1. Getting Started 78
Stack Height Sensor
Stack Height Actuator
Eject Roller
(reverse rotation)
End Wall closed
Compiler Tray
Compiler Paper Sensor
End Wall Open Sensor
Stapler
hc3m1520
Figure 11. Feeding Paper onto the Compiler Tray in Stapler Mode
Chapter 1. Getting Started 79
End Wall open
Stapler
hc3m1521
Figure 12. Moving the Stack into the Stapler in Stapler Mode
Chapter 1. Getting Started 80
Stapled Paper Set
Eject Roller
(forward rotation)
hc3m1522
Figure 13. Ejecting the Stack from the Stapler in Stapler Mode
Chapter 1. Getting Started 81
Isolating Paper Feed and Jam Problems
Follow these guidelines in isolating paper feed problems:
v Check the jammed paper for damage. Check for fragments of paper left in the paper path or burrs (small
projections) on components in the paper path that correspond to the damage on the paper.
v Check the paper for defects, curls, or wavy or folded paper. Use a new ream of paper for test prints.
v If transparencies fail, verify that they meet the specifications for use with this printer.
v Verify that the paper trays are not overloaded with paper and that all tray settings are correct.
v Try to recreate the jam by running test prints. Isolate the jam to a failing area of the printer or tray.
v Visually inspect the pick, feed, and separation rollers in the problem area.
Find your “Problem”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 14. “Paper Feed and Jams without an Error Code”
Problem
Action or Go To...
Inoperative paper feed drive
“Paper Feed Drive (Printer)” on page 127
Bending, folding, tearing, or
wrinkles
“Damaged Page” on page 522
Registration
“Registration, Image” on page 532
Skewing
“Skewed Image” on page 539
Chapter 1. Getting Started 82
Print Quality Problems
Link to—Table 15 on page 84
Before analyzing print quality (PQ) problems, verify that no supply item, such as the EP (toner) cartridge, needs
replacing. Also, check the items listed below.
The quality of the printed image depends upon many factors, some controlled by the customer, and some by
service. The following customer controlled items should be as described in the IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide:
v
v
v
v
Toner
Paper, envelopes, or transparencies
Consumable supplies replenished at the correct intervals
Stable operating environment
– Temperature
– Humidity
v Location
– On a level surface
– Proper ventilation
– Shielded from direct rays from the sun
– Low dust content
– Not near water outlets, steamers, electric heaters, volatile gases, or open flame
v Supplies storage
– At the warehouse
– In the printer operating environment
Service should perform the following:
v Replace worn parts as needed.
v Perform periodic maintenance as specified.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 83
v Check printer performance and print quality at every visit.
Find your “Symptom”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 15. “Print Quality Diagnostics”
Symptom
Go To...
Background
“Background or Dark Image” on page 513
Black image
“Black Print” on page 516
Blank image
“Blank Print” on page 519
Damaged page
“Damaged Page” on page 522
Dark Image
“Background or Dark Image” on page 513
Fusing
“Fused, Not Fused or Partially Fused Image” on page 525
Light (undertoned) image
“Light (Undertoned) Image” on page 528
Registration of image
“Registration, Image” on page 532
Residual image or ghosting
“Residual Image or Ghosting” on page 536
Skewed image
“Skewed Image” on page 539
Spots
“Spots on Prints” on page 544
Streaks, horizontal
“Streaks, Horizontal” on page 547
Streaks, vertical
“Streaks, Vertical” on page 549
Voids
“Voids on Prints” on page 552
Voids, horizontal band
“Voids, Horizontal Band” on page 555
Voids, vertical band
“Voids, Vertical Band” on page 558
Chapter 1. Getting Started 84
Routine and Miscellaneous Tasks
This section guides you to performing routine printer tasks. When your complete your task, go to “Completing
Service” on page 87.
Find your “Task”, and then “Go To...” the suggested procedure to isolate the problem.
Table 16. “Miscellaneous and Routine Tasks”
Task
Go To...
Configuration page, running
See “Printing Configuration Pages” on page 584
Diagnostic tests, running
See “Running Diagnostic Routines” on page 567
Error log, using
See “ERROR LOG” on page 581
Installing the printer
See IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide
Locating assemblies and parts
See “Chapter 5. Locations” on page 629
MACHINE INFORMATION MENU
See “Machine Information Menu” on page 581
Power Receptacle Safety Check
See “Power-Receptacle Safety-Check” on page 32
Printer, relocation kit part number 11L5480
Relocating the printer, input unit, or the finisher (instructions are
included in relocation kits)
Input unit, relocation kit part number 11L6547
Finisher, relocation kit part number 06L6546
Replenishing supplies
See IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide
TEST MENU
See “Test Menu” on page 582
Test prints, running
See “Printing Test Prints” on page 587
Safety Inspection
See “Safety Inspection” on page 28
Staple cartridge (cartridge with staple case)
Order part number 90H3571
Staple refill (three staple cases of 5000 staples each)
Order part number 90H3570
Toner (EP) cartridge
Order part number 90H3566
300 K Usage kit (Domestic U.S.)
Customer to order usage kit part number 90H3567
300 K Usage kit (European)
Customer to order usage kit part number 90H3568
Chapter 1. Getting Started 85
Table 16. “Miscellaneous and Routine Tasks” (continued)
Task
300 K Usage kit (Japan)
Go To...
Customer to order usage kit part number 90H3569
Chapter 1. Getting Started 86
Completing Service
Use the following as a guide to ensure high quality printer operation:
1. Ensure the following:
a. All internal cables and connectors are correctly connected.
b. All covers, doors, panels, and trays are in place.
c. Any workstation or network cable is connected.
d. All power cords are connected.
2. Switch on printer power and ensure the following:
a. WARMING UP displays.
b. READY displays within approximately 2 minutes or the printer begins printing if a job is in the print queue.
3. Run a demo page test print from the operator panel to ensure high quality output. Show these to the operator.
4. Have the operator run a print job.
5. Clean the work area.
6. Clean the printer covers with a dry cleaning cloth; if necessary, use water and a mild detergent
(non-ammonia).
7. Return control of the printer to the operator.
For warranty information, see “Warranty Information” on page 1298.
End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains
If the printer has not been fixed using the procedures that you were directed to perform, return to “Solving the
Problem, Diagnostic Quick Path” on page 39. Ensure that you have correctly interpreted the available information,
and then define the problem again.
Review all diagnostics that you were directed to. Check the following suspecting an intermittent problem:
v All connectors and wiring associated with the suspected FRUs.
Chapter 1. Getting Started 87
v All ground connectors (see “Ground Connectors” on page 31).
v If you suspect a supplies or supplies storage problem (environmental conditions such as temperature, humidity,
or ventilation) see “Appendix A. Supplies and Specifications” on page 1284.
v If you suspect problems with the printer drivers, see “Driver Information” on page 1297 for the latest driver
information.
Refer to the “Suspected FRUs” list at the beginning of the diagnostic that you were directed to and exchange,
one at a time, and in the sequence listed, any remaining suspected FRU that you have not already exchanged.
After each replacement, run a test print to see if the problem is fixed.
If you exchanged a part that did not correct the problem, reinstall the original part before continuing.
If a solution is not found, call your next level of support (see “Technical Support” on page 1298).
Chapter 1. Getting Started 88
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems
Diagnostic Quick Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Links from Error Codes to Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Links from Problems with No Error Code or Message to Diagnostics .
Links from Print Quality Problems to Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Problems (No Error Code or Message) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coax / Twinax NIC Printing Problems (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet / Token-Ring NIC Printing Problems (Printer) . . . . . . . .
Electrical Noise (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interlock Switch (Printer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent Operation (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Drive Asm. (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems (Printer) . . . . . .
Toner Low, Error Code 002 Not Displayed (Printer) . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Feed Drive (Printer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Not Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex Not Working (No Error Code or Message). . . . . . . . . . .
Envelope Feeder Not Working (No Error Code or Message) . . . . .
Input Unit Not Working (No Error Code or Message) . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Problems (No Error Code or Message). . . . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Not Working (No Error Code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+5 V DC, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+24 V DC, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Pause.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Codes and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
002—Toner Low (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
003—Toner Cart / Replace Cart (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
004—Toner Cart / Reseat Cart (Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 1999
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 96
. 96
. 97
. 98
. 99
. 99
.103
.107
.111
.112
.115
.119
.121
.126
.127
.129
.133
.136
.139
.146
.146
.152
.155
.158
.160
.160
.162
.163
89
005—Toner Cart / Wrong Cart (Printer) . . . . . . .
006—Toner Cart / Reseat Cart (Printer) . . . . . . .
007—Toner Cart / Replace Cart (Printer) . . . . . .
009—Stapler / Check Staples (Finisher) . . . . . . .
010—Stapler / Check Cart (Finisher) . . . . . . . .
011—Load <paper> / In <tray> (Printer) . . . . . . .
012—Load <Paper> / In Aux or Env <Tray> (Printer)
013—Load <Paper> / In Any Tray (Printer) . . . . .
031—Output Full / Face-Down Bin (Printer) . . . . .
032—Output Full / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
033—Output Full / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
034—Output Full / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
041—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 1 (Printer) . . . .
042—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 2 (Printer) . . . .
043—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 3 (Input Unit) . .
044—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 4 (Input Unit) . .
045—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 5 (Input Unit) . .
046—Aux-Env. Tray / Replace Tray (Printer) . . . .
056—Tray 1 / Lift Failure (Printer) . . . . . . . . . .
057—Tray 2 / Lift Failure (Printer) . . . . . . . . . .
058—Tray 3 / Lift Failure (Input Unit) . . . . . . . .
059—Tray 4 / Lift Failure (Input Unit) . . . . . . . .
060—Tray 5 / Lift Failure (Input Unit) . . . . . . . .
071—Cover Open / Close Cover C (Input Unit) . . .
072—Cover Open / Close Cover A (Printer) . . . . .
073—Cover Open / Close Cover B (Printer). . . . .
210—Paper Jam / Area A, Aux Tray (Printer) . . . .
211—Paper Jam / Area A, Env. Feed (Printer) . . .
212—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit) . . . . . .
213—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit) . . . . . .
214—Paper Jam / Area B, Tray 3 (Input Unit) . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.164
.165
.167
.169
.171
.172
.178
.179
.180
.183
.186
.189
.192
.194
.196
.198
.200
.202
.204
.206
.208
.211
.214
.217
.219
.221
.223
.226
.229
.231
.233
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 90
220—Paper Error / Source Tray, A . . . . . . . .
221—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray 1 (Printer) . . . .
222—Paper Jam / Area B, Tray 2 (Printer) . . . .
223—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer) . . . . . . . .
230—Paper Jam / Toner Cart (Printer) . . . . . .
231—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray (Printer) . . . . .
241—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer) . . . . . . . .
242—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Printer) . . . . . . .
250—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Printer) . . . . . . .
251—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray (Printer) . . . . .
253—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex) . . . . . . .
254—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex) . . . . . . .
255—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex) . . . . . . .
256—Paper Jam / Area A (Duplex) . . . . . . . .
271—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer) . . . . . . . .
272—Fuser Jam / Area A (Printer). . . . . . . . .
273—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray (Printer) . . . . .
274—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Printer) . . . . . . .
280—Env Feed / Reseat Env Feed (Printer) . . .
281—Paper Jam / Area A, Env Feed (Env Feeder)
282—Paper Jam / Reseat Paper . . . . . . . . .
330—Paper Jam / Area B (Input Unit) . . . . . . .
333—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input Unit) . . . . .
334—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 4 (Input Unit) . . .
340—Paper Jam / Area B, C, Tray 4 (Input Unit) .
341—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 4 (Input Unit) . . .
342—Paper Jam / Tray 4 (Input Unit) . . . . . . .
343—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input Unit) . . . . .
350—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 5 (Input Unit) . . .
351—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit) . . . . .
352—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit) . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.236
.238
.241
.244
.247
.250
.252
.256
.260
.264
.267
.271
.274
.278
.283
.285
.287
.289
.291
.293
.297
.299
.301
.303
.307
.310
.312
.314
.316
.319
.322
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 91
353—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input Unit) . . . .
354—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 5 (Input Unit) . .
361—Finisher Jam / Area D, E (Finisher) . . . .
362—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher). . . . . .
410—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
411—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
412—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
413—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
414—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
415—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
416—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
417—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher) . . . . .
418—Finisher / Stapler Failed (Finisher) . . . .
419—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher) .
420—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher) .
421—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher) .
422—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher) .
430—Main Motor / Power Off/On (Printer, M10) .
451—Fan Failed / Power Off/On (Printer, F3) . .
454—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
501—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
502—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
503—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
504—Fuser Failed / Replace Fuser (Printer) . .
511—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
512—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
513—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
514—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
520—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
560—MCU Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
561—RAM Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.324
.326
.330
.334
.338
.341
.344
.347
.350
.352
.354
.356
.358
.361
.364
.367
.370
.372
.377
.379
.381
.383
.385
.386
.387
.388
.389
.390
.392
.393
.394
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 92
620—Memory SIMM / Reseat SIMM (Printer) .
621—Memory Error / Check Memory (Printer).
622—Memory Error / Check Config (Printer) .
623—Print Overrun / Check Config (Printer). .
630—NVRAM Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) .
631—NVRAM Failed / Power Off/On (Printer) .
632—ROM Error / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
633—DRAM Error / Check DRAM SIMM . . .
634—NVROM Error / Power Off/On (Printer) .
671—Disk Error / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
672—Disk Error / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
673—Disk Error / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
711—Cover Open / Close Duplex (Duplex) . .
712—Paper Jam / Duplex Unit (Duplex) . . . .
713—Paper Jam / Duplex Unit (Duplex) . . . .
714—Duplex Error / Check Cable (Printer) . .
751—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher). . . . .
752—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher). . . . .
753—Finisher Jam / Area E, F (Finisher) . . .
754—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher). . . . .
755—Finisher Jam / Area E, F (Finisher) . . .
756—Finisher Jam / Area E, F (Finisher) . . .
757—Finisher Jam / Area F, G (Finisher) . . .
758—Finisher Jam / Area F, G (Finisher) . . .
759—Finisher Jam / Area G (Finisher) . . . .
760—Finisher Failed / Area G (Finisher) . . .
761—Finisher Failed / Area G (Finisher) . . .
762—Finisher / Reseat Finisher (Finisher). . .
763—Cover Open / Area E (Finisher) . . . . .
764—Cover Open / Area H (Finisher) . . . . .
765—Cover Open / Area F (Finisher) . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.395
.397
.398
.399
.400
.401
.402
.403
.404
.405
.406
.407
.408
.410
.412
.414
.416
.418
.420
.424
.427
.429
.431
.434
.437
.439
.443
.445
.447
.449
.451
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 93
767, 768—Cover Open / Area G (Finisher) . . .
769—Finisher / Reseat Finisher (Finisher). . . .
771—Env Feed / Reseat Env Feed (Env Feed) .
780—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
781—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher) . . . .
782—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
783—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
784—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher) . . . .
785—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
786—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
787—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher) . . . .
788—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher) . . . . .
789—Finisher / Elevator Failed (Finisher) . . . .
790—Finisher / Safety Switches . . . . . . . . .
791—Finisher / No Comm (Finisher) . . . . . .
821—PS Option / Reseat PS SIMM (Printer) . .
851—IPDS Option / Reseat SIMM (Printer) . . .
852—IPDS Option / Add Memory (Printer) . . .
853—IPDS Option / Power Off/On (Printer) . . .
854—PAGES Option / Power Off/On (Printer) . .
855—PAGES Option / No Font SIMM (Printer) .
861—Host Timeout / Check Printer (Printer). . .
862—CX Send State (Printer) . . . . . . . . . .
871—Network Option / Reseat Option (Printer) .
872—Network Option / Reseat Option (Printer) .
876—Network Option / Check Config (Printer) .
Print Quality Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background or Dark Image . . . . . . . . . . .
Black Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blank Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Damaged Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.453
.455
.458
.460
.464
.468
.472
.476
.480
.483
.486
.489
.492
.494
.497
.501
.502
.503
.504
.505
.506
.507
.508
.509
.510
.511
.512
.513
.516
.519
.522
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 94
Fused, Not Fused or Partially
Light (Undertoned) Image . .
Registration, Image . . . . .
Residual Image or Ghosting .
Skewed Image . . . . . . . .
Spots on Prints . . . . . . .
Streaks, Horizontal. . . . . .
Streaks, Vertical . . . . . . .
Voids on Prints. . . . . . . .
Voids, Horizontal Band . . .
Voids, Vertical Band . . . . .
Fused Image .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.525
.528
.532
.536
.539
.544
.547
.549
.552
.555
.558
In Chapter 1. Getting Started, you defined, and then began to isolate your printer problem. The diagnostic tables
in this chapter guide you through problem isolation, directing you to the necessary repair procedures.
If the suggested diagnostics do not resolve the problem, return to “Solving the Problem, Diagnostic Quick Path” on
page 39 to define and isolate the problem again, or call for technical support at 1-800-358-6661.
This chapter contains only diagnostic procedures. Some of these procedures require other actions such as
printing a test page, printing a configuration page, or other checks or tests. Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools contains
detailed information on all such checks and tests.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 95
Diagnostic Quick Locator
“Links from Problems with No Error Code or Message to Diagnostics” on page 97
“Links from Print Quality Problems to Diagnostics” on page 98
Links from Error Codes to Diagnostics
002
003
004
005
006
007
009
010
011
012
013
031
032
033
034
041
042
043
044
045
046
056
057
058
059
060
071
072
073
210
211
212
213
214
220
221
222
223
230
231
241
242
250
251
253
254
255
256
271
272
273
274
280
281
282
330
333
334
340
341
342
343
350
351
352
353
354
361
362
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
430
451
454
501
502
503
504
511
512
514
520
560
561
621
622
623
630
631
632
633
634
671
672
673
711
712
713
714
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
767
768
769
771
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
821
851
852
853
861
862
871
872
876
“Links from Problems with No Error Code or Message to Diagnostics” on page 97
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 96
Links from Problems with No Error Code or Message to Diagnostics
“Coax / Twinax NIC Printing Problems (Printer)” on page 99
“Ethernet / Token-Ring NIC Printing Problems (Printer)” on page 103
“Electrical Noise (Printer)” on page 107
“Interlock Switch (Printer)” on page 111
“Intermittent Operation (Printer)” on page 112
“Main Drive Asm. (Printer)” on page 115
“Offset (Printer)” on page 119
“Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems (Printer)” on page 121
“Toner Low, Error Code 002 Not Displayed (Printer)” on page 126
“Paper Feed Drive (Printer)” on page 127
“Printer Not Working” on page 129
“Duplex Not Working (No Error Code or Message)” on page 133
“Envelope Feeder Not Working (No Error Code or Message)” on page 136
“Input Unit Not Working (No Error Code or Message)” on page 139
“Finisher Not Working (No Error Code)” on page 146
“+5 V DC, Finisher” on page 152
“+24 V DC, Finisher” on page 155
“Finisher Pause...” on page 158
“Links from Print Quality Problems to Diagnostics” on page 98
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 97
Links from Print Quality Problems to Diagnostics
“Background” on page 513
“Black Print” on page 516
“Blank Print” on page 519
“Damaged Page” on page 522
“Fusing” on page 525
“Light Image” on page 528
“Registration, Image” on page 532
“Residual Image” on page 536
“Skewed Image” on page 539
“Spots” on page 544
“Streaks, Horizontal” on page 547
“Streaks, Vertical” on page 549
“Voids” on page 552
“Voids, Horizontal” on page 555
“Voids, Vertical” on page 558
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 98
Printer Problems (No Error Code or Message)
v If you are here with an error code, go to “Diagnostic Quick Locator” on page 96.
v If you have a message without an error code, go to “Messages without Error Codes” in Table 2 on page 39 or
“Other Messages without Error Codes” on page 57.
v If you have a message without an error code, go to “Messages without Error Codes” in Table 2 on page 39 or
“Other Messages without Error Codes” on page 57.
Coax / Twinax NIC Printing Problems (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 17, Coax / Twinax NIC Printing Problems (Printer)
For a twinax NIC, ensure that the printer station address is set correctly in the twinax setup menu (IPDS ADDR
and/or SCS ADDR).
If the printer has had a cold reset (see “COLD RESET LTR” on page 57 and “COLD RESET A4” on page 57),
have the user ensure that all menus have been tailored to their original settings. If necessary, see an old
configuration page printout.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
IBM Coax SCS Interface
11L6555
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
IBM Twinax SCS Interface
11L6557
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 99
Suspected FRUs
MCU PCB
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 17. Coax / Twinax NIC Printing Diagnostic
Step
1.
2.
Actions and Questions
Is the problem only with IPDS jobs?
Print a configuration page (see “Printing Configuration Pages” on
page 584).
Is IPDS indicated on the configuration page?
3.
Power off and then power on the printer. Wait for the READY
message.
Yes
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Verify that there is enough
memory for IPDS jobs (see
the IBM InfoPrint 32/40:
User’s Guide). Go to step 3.
Reseat the IPDS SIMM. If that
does not fix the problem,
replace the IPDS SIMM (see
“SIMMs, Printer” on page 791).
Go to step 4.
Return to “Solving the
Problem, Diagnostic Quick
Path” on page 39 with the new
error code or symptom.
Go to step 5.
Return to “Solving the
Problem, Diagnostic Quick
Path” on page 39 with the new
error code or symptom.
Does READY appear within 5 minutes?
4.
Print a configuration page (see “Printing Configuration Pages” on
page 584).
No
Can you print a printer configuration page?
5.
Is the twinax or coax NIC indicated on the printer configuration
page?
Go to step 6.
Go to step 10 on page 101.
6.
Can you print a NIC configuration page from the Test button on
the back of the NIC?
Go to step 7.
Go to step 10 on page 101.
When a job is sent, does the printer operator panel indicate its
arrival with a message such as TX IPDS or CX IPDS?
The cabling and NIC are OK. Go to step 8 on page 101.
Suspect a problem with menu
settings, the IPDS SIMM, or
the controller (OS/PCL/PS)
SIMM, or the controller PCB.
7.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 100
Table 17. Coax / Twinax NIC Printing Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the green LED (CU) on the back of the NIC.
Is the green LED on or blinking?
8.
Yes
No
Go to step 9.
The NIC is receiving polls
from the system. Suspect a
job or configuration problem.
Refer the system administrator
to Twinax and Coax
Configuration Guide, or call
your next level of support (see
“Technical Support” on
page 1298).
If the yellow LED (SHARE) on
the back of the NIC is also on
when the printer is READY,
install a new NIC.
The NIC can communicate with the controller, but the system cannot
communicate with the NIC.
Check the cable connection at the back of the twinax of coax NIC.
9.
10.
Is the connection OK?
There is a problem with the NIC or controller.
v Power off the printer.
v Reseat the NIC
v Switch on printer and wait.
Is the problem fixed?
Replace the NIC.
There is probably a network
cabling problem or a
configuration problem. Refer
the system administrator to
Twinax and Coax
Configuration Guide, or call
your next level of support (see
“Technical Support” on
page 1298).
Verify that the original problem If there is only one NIC in the
job runs.
printer, go to step 11 on
page 102. If you have another
NIC, you can try swapping
NIC positions on the controller
to either the NIC or controller.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 101
Table 17. Coax / Twinax NIC Printing Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the NIC.
Is the problem fixed?
11.
Yes
No
Verify that the original problem Repair/replace the following,
job runs.
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS)
SIMM
v Controller PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 12.
12.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 102
Ethernet / Token-Ring NIC Printing Problems (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 18, Ethernet / Token-Ring NIC Printing Problems (Printer)
If the network interface card (NIC) is installed, but not connected to the LAN, a page with NIC details will be
printed. You can also print this page from the TEST MENU.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Ethernet NIC (10BaseT and 10Base2)
63H2837
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
Ethernet NIC (100BaseT)
11L6575
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
Token Ring NIC
63H2834
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
IPDS SIMM
90H3593
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200-19 p. 1103
p. 791
ESC/P & PAGES SIMM
11L6565
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
p. 788
Table 18. Ethernet / Token-Ring NIC Printing Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Is the problem only with IPDS jobs?
Note: To answer this question, you may need to ask the System
Administrator to send a non-IPDS job.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 104.
Go to step 3 on page 104.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 103
Table 18. Ethernet / Token-Ring NIC Printing Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Print a configuration page (see “Printing Configuration Pages” on
page 584).
2.
3.
Is IPDS indicated on the configuration page?
Power on the printer. Wait for the READY message. Wait for the full
5 minutes (you may get an error code after the printer times out).
Yes
No
There is probably a
configuration problem. Refer
the system administrator to
Ethernet and Token Ring
Configuration Guide.
Reseat the IPDS SIMM. If that
does not fix the problem,
install a new IPDS SIMM.
Go to step 4.
Return to “Solving the
Problem, Diagnostic Quick
Path” on page 39 with the new
error code or symptom.
Does READY appear within 5 minutes?
If a NIC configuration page prints within approximately 2 minutes
after power is switched on, the NIC is correctly operating. But, there
is probably a problem in the LAN connection for that NIC.
4.
Did a NIC configuration page print for each installed NIC?
If your printer has both an Ethernet and a token-ring NIC, determine
which NIC configuration has been printed. A NIC configuration page
will be printed for a NIC that has a LAN connection problem.
5.
Try to print a configuration page for the printer (not a NIC
configuration page) using TEST MENU/CONFIG <xx> PAGE.
The printer and NIC are OK. If Go to step 5.
the problem still exists, there
is probably a LAN cable or
LAN configuration problem.
Refer the system administrator
to Ethernet and Token Ring
Configuration Guide.
Go to step 6.
Return to “Solving the
Problem, Diagnostic Quick
Path” on page 39 with the new
error code or symptom.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 9 on page 105.
Go to step 8 on page 105.
Go to step 9 on page 105.
Does the TEST MENU/CONFIG <xx> PAGE print?
Look at the printer configuration page.
6.
7.
Is each installed NIC listed on the configuration page?
Can you print a NIC configuration page for each installed NIC
from the printer (TEST MENU/ PRINT EN CONFIG or TEST
MENU/PRINT TR CONFIG)?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 104
Table 18. Ethernet / Token-Ring NIC Printing Diagnostic (continued)
Step
8.
Actions and Questions
Check the LEDs on the back of the NIC; they should be as follows:
v Token ring
RING NSRT = ON
SPD ERROR = OFF
v Ethernet
UTP (10base-T) LINK = on and NET ACT = on (flashes
intermittently)
BNC (10base2) LINK = off and NET ACT = on (flashes
intermittently)
100BaseT connected to 100Mbit LAN: 100 = on and LINK ACT
= on (flashes intermittently)
100BaseT connected to 10Mbit LAN: 100 = off and LINK ACT
= on (flashes intermittently)
Yes
No
There is a LAN cabling
configuration problem. Refer
the system administrator to
Suspect a job or configuration Ethernet and Token Ring
problem, for example, an
Configuration Guide.
incorrect ID address. Refer the
system administrator to
Ethernet and Token Ring
Configuration Guide.
The printer, NIC, and LAN
connection seem OK.
Are the LEDs correctly connected?
9.
The NIC that is not shown on the printer configuration page, or the
Controller has a problem.
v Power off the printer.
v Reseat the NIC.
v Power on the printer and wait for 5 minutes.
Verify that the original problem Go to step 10 on page 106.
job runs.
Is the problem fixed?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 105
Table 18. Ethernet / Token-Ring NIC Printing Diagnostic (continued)
Step
10.
Actions and Questions
Reset the NIC jumpers as follows:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the NIC.
c. Move jumper JX1 to the RST (reset) position.
d. Reinstall the NIC.
e. Power on the printer and wait until READY displays.
f. Power off the printer.
g. Move jumper JX1 to the original position.
h. Reinstall the NIC.
Yes
No
Verify that the original problem If there is only one NIC in the
job runs.
printer, go to step 11. If you
have another NIC, you can try
swapping NIC positions on the
controller to isolate to either
the NIC or controller.
Is the problem fixed?
Install a new NIC.
Is the problem fixed?
11.
Verify that the original problem Repair/replace the following,
job runs.
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS)
SIMM
v Controller PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 12.
12.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 106
Electrical Noise (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 19 on page 109, Electrical Noise (Printer)
Problem—Intermittent operation, intermittent error codes, or other unexplained problems.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
Main power switch
90H4196
1120–7, p. 1168
p. 740
HVPS
90H4201
1110–4, p. 1165
p. 745
AC driver PCB (100-110 V ac) 90H4199
1110–1, p. 1165
p. 745
AC driver PCB (220 V ac)
90H4200
1110–1, p. 1165
p. 745
LVPS (100-110 V ac)
90H4197
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
LVPS (220 V ac)
90H4198
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Main drive asm.
90H4192
p. 807
340–1, p. 1112
User’s guide
p. 714
p. 795
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 107
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Tray 1 lift
motor (M1)
90H3625
1032–2, p. 1149
p. 714
Tray 2 lift
motor (M2)
90H3625
1042–2, p. 1159
p. 714
Tray 3 lift
motor (M3)
90H3625
4030–1, p. 1200
p. 716
p. 861
Tray 4 lift
motor (M4)
90H4235
4030–9, p. 1200
p. 716
p. 861
Tray 5 lift
motor (M5)
90H4235
4030–9, p. 1200
p. 716
p. 861
Tray 1
90H3634
1034–97, p. 1154
p. 634
Tray 2
90H3642
1044–97, p. 1163
p. 634
Feed clutches Tray 3
06L9962
4052–99, p. 1206
p. 636
p. 856
Tray 4
90H4238
4062–99, p. 1210
p. 636
p. 856
Tray 5
06L9800
4074–1, p. 1222
p. 636
p. 898
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
p. 797
Offset asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
p. 817
Lift motors
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
p. 788
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 108
Table 19. Electrical Noise Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
If there is any other electrical equipment, such as the following,
within 10 feet of the printer, isolate each, one at a time.
v Electrical generators
v Devices using electrical motors
v Radio transmitters
v Xray machines
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Permanently relocate the
printer or the interfering
equipment.
Go to step 3.
Connect the options one at a
time until the printer again
becomes inoperative. Diagnose
the problem in the last asm.
connected.
Do you still have an electrical noise problem?
Option isolation
2.
Disconnect all of the following options:
v Duplex asm.
v Input unit
v Finisher
Do you still have an electrical noise problem?
Perform “Power-Receptacle Safety-Check” on page 32 and check all Go to step 4.
ground connections (see “Ground Connectors” on page 31).
3.
Do you still have an electrical noise problem?
Replace the EP cartridge.
4.
Do you still have an electrical noise problem?
Replace the main power switch.
5.
Do you still have an electrical noise problem?
Replace the HVPS (see “HVPS, Printer” on page 795).
6.
If the problem is with the
supply outlet, have the
customer correct the problem.
If there is a faulty ground
connection within the printer,
repair the problem.
Do you still have an electrical noise problem?
Reinstall the old EP cartridge,
and then go to step 5.
Problem solved.
Reinstall the original power
switch, and then go to step 6.
Problem solved.
Reinstall the original HVPS,
and then go to step 7 on
page 110.
Problem solved.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 109
Table 19. Electrical Noise Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the AC driver PCB.
7.
Do you still have an electrical noise problem?
Replace the LVPS (see “LVPS, Printer” on page 804).
8.
Do you still have an electrical noise problem?
Replace the fuser asm. (see “Fuser, Printer” on page 793).
9.
Do you still have an electrical noise problem?
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
10.
11.
Do you still have an electrical noise problem?
Yes
No
Reinstall the original AC driver
PCB, and then go to step 8.
Problem solved.
Reinstall the original LVPS,
and then go to step 9.
Problem solved.
Reinstall the original fuser, and Problem solved.
then go to step 10.
Reinstall the original MCU
PCB, and then go to step 11.
Replace the main drive asm. (see “Main Drive Motor (M10), Printer” If a problem remains, go to
on page 807).
step 12.
Problem solved.
Problem solved.
Do you still have an electrical noise problem?
12.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 110
Interlock Switch (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 20, Interlock Switch (Printer)
Problem—The operator panel display does not display a COVER OPEN error code whenever a door or cover is
open, or it does display a COVER OPEN error code when a door or cover is closed.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
PCB, Input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 865
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Interlock switch asm. (printer)
90H3678
400–23, p. 1114
Interlock switch asm. (HCI)
90H3364
4012–9, p. 1192
Front cover interlock switch
11L5435
5050–1, p. 1238
p. 743
p. 813
p. 1007
Table 20. Printer Interlock Switch Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open and close all doors and covers.
1.
2.
Are you left with an error code for a specific door or cover?
Reopen and close all doors and covers.
a. Make note of which door or cover does not display an error when
opened.
b. Inspect the interlock switch for damage.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Go to the diagnostic
procedure for the displayed
error code.
Replace the MCU PCB
Replace the interlock
(see “MCU PCB, Printer”
switch. If a problem
remains, go to step step 3. on page 813). If a problem
remains, go to step 3.
Does the interlock switch appear damaged?
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 111
Intermittent Operation (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 21, Intermittent Operation (Printer)
Problem—The printer may have a variety of intermittent problems, but generally it does not complete a print
cycle. The problems are generally not identified with error codes.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
LVPS (100-110 V ac)
90H4197
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
LVPS (220 V ac)
90H4198
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 21. Intermittent Printer Operation Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Does the printer frequently fail to begin WARM UP, or is the
operator panel frequently inoperative?
Yes
No
Go to “Printer Not Working” on
page 129.
Go to step 2 on page 113.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 112
Table 21. Intermittent Printer Operation Diagnostic (continued)
2.
Actions and Questions
Check the +5 V dc under load:
a. Remove the rear cover.
b. Print approximately 100 pages using
TEST MENU/CONTINUOUS PRINT.
While printing, measure the voltage
between J400-7 and frame ground
on the MCU PCB.
Yes
1
No
Go to step 3.
Replace the LVPS (see “LVPS,
Printer” on page 804).
Go to step 4.
Replace the LVPS (see “LVPS,
Printer” on page 804).
Go to step 5.
Replace the MCU PCB (see
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
page 813).
hc3m1105
Step
7
Does the +5 V dc between J400-7 and
frame ground remain within ±1 V dc
during the print run?
3.
1
hc3m1103
Check the +24 V dc under load:
a. Print approximately 100 pages using
TEST MENU/CONTINUOUS PRINT.
While printing, measure the voltage
between J400-5 and frame ground
on the MCU PCB.
5
Does the +24 V dc between J400-5
and frame ground remain within a few
volts during the print run?
Did all of the test prints in 2 and 3 run OK?
4.
5.
Did the printer stop and reset while running the test prints in 2 Go to “Electrical Noise
and 3?
(Printer)” on page 107.
Go to step 6 on page 114.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 113
Table 21. Intermittent Printer Operation Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Reload the host drive software, or the host application software.
Does the printer still have intermittent problems?
6.
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
v Interface cable connecting
the printer to the host
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS)
SIMM
v Controller PCB
Problem solved.
If the problem remains go to
step 7.
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 114
Main Drive Asm. (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 22, Main Drive Asm. (Printer)
Problem—The main drive does not correctly run.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
Exit drive asm.
90H4190
310–1, p. 1106
p. 818
Kit, tray 2 feed gears
06L9945
1043–99, p. 1161
Kit, tray 2 clutch
90H3642
1044–97, p. 1163
Clutch asm., registration
90H3666
920–1, p. 1130
p. 634
Kit, tray 1 feed clutch
90H3634
1034–97, p. 1154
p. 634
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Main drive asm.
90H4192
p. 807
340–1, p. 1112
p. 714
Table 22. Printer Main Drive Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Enter the diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
Replace the MCU PCB (see
and run test 0401 (main drive motor, M10 and the main drive asm.). “MCU PCB, Printer” on
page 813).
Does the main drive asm. correctly run?
Go to step 2 on page 116.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 115
Table 22. Printer Main Drive Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the main drive asm.:
a. Remove the rear upper cover (see “Rear Upper Cover, Printer”
on page 778).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 9 on page 118.
Go to step 3.
b. Observe the main drive as you hand rotate the main drive motor
(M10) CCW.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
3.
Check the EP cartridge binding:
Replace the EP cartridge (see
IBM
InfoPrint 32/40: User’s
a. Remove the EP cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s
Guide
).
Guide).
b. Remove the rear cover.
c. Observe the main drive as you hand rotate the main drive motor
(M10) CCW.
Go to step 4.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
Check the fuser asm. binding:
a. Remove the fuser (see “Fuser, Printer” on page 793).
4.
Replace the fuser asm. (see
“Fuser, Printer” on page 793).
Go to step 5 on page 117.
b. Remove the rear cover.
c. Observe the main drive as you hand rotate the main drive motor
(M10) CCW.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 116
Table 22. Printer Main Drive Diagnostic (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the exit drive binding:
Go to step 6.
Replace the exit drive asm.
(see
“Offset/Exit
Drive,
Printer”
a. Remove the rear cover.
on page 818).
b. Lift the exit drive asm. spring-loaded drive gear from the main
drive asm. drive gear.
c. Observe the main drive as you hand rotate the main drive motor
(M10) CCW.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
6.
Check the tray 2 drive binding:
Replace the tray 2 drive asm.
a. Remove the rear cover.
b. Lift the tray 2 spring-loaded drive gear from the main drive asm.
drive gear.
c. Observe the main drive as you hand rotate the main drive motor
(M10) CCW.
Go to step 7.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
7.
Check the registration clutch binding:
Replace the registration clutch. Go to step 8 on page 118.
a. Remove the rear cover.
b. Remove the registration clutch.
c. Observe the main drive as you hand rotate the main drive motor
(M10) CCW.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 117
Table 22. Printer Main Drive Diagnostic (continued)
Step
8.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the feed clutch binding:
Replace the feed clutch.
a. Remove the rear cover.
b. Remove the feed clutch.
c. Observe the main drive as you hand rotate the main drive motor
(M10) CCW.
Go to step 9.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
9.
Check the auxiliary feeder asm.:
Replace the auxiliary feeder
asm.
a. Press downward on the drive gear of the auxiliary feeder asm.
b. Observe the main drive as you hand rotate the main drive motor
(M10) CCW.
Go to step 10.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
Check the +24 V dc:
10.
hc3m1104
1
Measure the voltage between J400-5
and frame ground, and between J400-6
and frame ground on the MCU PCB.
6
Replace the main drive asm.
(see “Main Drive Motor (M10),
Printer” on page 807).
Replace the LVPS (see “LVPS,
Printer” on page 804). If a
problem remains, go to step
11.
5
Is there +24 V dc between J400-5 and
frame ground, and +24 V dc between
J400-6 and frame ground?
11.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 118
Offset (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 23, Offset (Printer)
Problem—Offset does not correctly operate.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Exit drive asm.
90H4190
310–1, p. 1106
p. 818
Offset asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
p. 817
Main drive asm.
90H4192
340–1, p. 1112
p. 714
p. 807
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Table 23. Printer Offset Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the main drive asm.:
Go to step 2.
a. Remove all paper trays from the printer.
b. Enter the diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 0801 (main drive motor, M10).
Go to “Main Drive Asm.
(Printer)” on page 115.
Does the main drive motor (M10) and all of the main drive
gears smoothly rotate?
Check the exit drive:
v Enter the diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 1006 (exit drive motor, M8, forward).
2.
Go to step 3 on page 120.
Replace the exit drive asm.
(see “Offset/Exit Drive, Printer”
on page 818).
v Enter the diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 1007 (exit drive motor, M8, reverse).
Does the exit motor run forward during test 1006 and reverse
during test 1007?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 119
Table 23. Printer Offset Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the offset:
v Enter the diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 1006 (exit drive motor, M8, forward).
3.
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
Replace the offset asm.
Problem solved.
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
v Enter the diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 1007 (exit drive motor, M8, reverse).
Does the offset roller shift away from the exit motor (M8)
during test 1006 and then toward M8 during test 1007?
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
4.
5.
Does the offset asm. correctly operate?
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 120
Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 24, Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems (Printer)
Link to—“Printer Power-On Sequence Check” on page 562
Problem—The operator panel LEDs, the display, or the push-buttons do not function correctly.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Operator panel
06L9819¹
(140–99)
140–4, p. 1101
p. 631
8MB DRAM SIMM
63H2465
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Located on
printer
controller, p.
745
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Interface PCB
90H4205
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, dc main
90H4209
200–3, p. 1103
p. 791
p. 745
p. 813
700–12, p. 1124
¹An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 121
Table 24. Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems (Printer)
Step
Actions and Questions
Power on the printer and wait for approximately 6-minutes to be
sure that the symptom does not change.
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 6 on page 123.
Go to step 2.
Does IBM INFOPRINT or IBM INFOPRINT 32 display during the
6 minutes?
Check SIMMs:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the controller PCB (see “Controller PCB, Printer” on
page 788).
Go to step 3.
A bad connection probably
caused the problem. Install the
controller options, one at a
time, verifying correct operation
after each option is installed.
c. Reseat the controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM on the controller (see
“Controller SIMMS” on page 791).
2.
d. Remove the controller options, if installed (second DRAM SIMM,
IPDS SIMM, Japanese font SIMM, ESC/P & PAGES SIMM,
flash memory SIMM (see “Controller SIMMS” on page 791), and
the hard drive (see “Hard Drive, Printer” on page 790).
e. Reseat the DRAM SIMM.
f. Reseat the controller PCB (see “Controller PCB, Printer” on
page 788) and ensure that the 2 thumbscrews that hold the
controller PCB are tight.
g. Power on the printer.
Does IBM INFOPRINT or IBM INFOPRINT 32 display?
Go to step 4 on page 123.
There is a defective DRAM
SIMM socket on the controller
PCB. If 2DRAM SIMMS are
required, replace the controller
PCB (see “Controller PCB,
c. Move the DRAM SIMM to the other socket (see “SIMMs, Printer” Printer” on page 788).
on page 791).
Check the DRAM SIMM:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the controller PCB (see “Controller PCB, Printer” on
page 788).
3.
d. Power on the printer.
Does IBM INFOPRINT or IBM INFOPRINT 32 display?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 122
Table 24. Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems (Printer) (continued)
Actions and Questions
!
Yes
No
hcsf0223
Step
CAUTION:
<2-23> Pinch hazards exist in this area.
4.
Check fan:
a. Remove the rear cover (see “Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
Go to step 5.
Go to “Printer Not Working” on
page 129.
b. Power on the printer.
Are fuser fan (F1) and LVPS fan (F3) running OK?
Replace the following FRUs one at a time, and in the sequence listed. After each replacement, power on the printer and watch for the
correct power-on sequence. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
a. Operator panel
b. DRAM SIMM (see 791)
c. Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM (see “Controller SIMMS” on page 791)
5.
d. Controller PCB (see “Controller PCB, Printer” on page 788)
e. MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813)
f. Interface PCB
Resetting the printer to the defaults may fix the problem. To reset the defaults, press and hold the Online key while you power on the
printer. Update these default settings to the customer’s settings before completing service (see the IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide
).
Is the symptom a continuously displaying I/O INITIALIZING
message?
Go to “Ethernet / Token-Ring
NIC Printing Problems
(Printer)” on page 103.
Go to step 7.
6.
7.
Is the symptom a continuously displaying IBM INFOPRINT 32,
IBM INFOPRINT, WARMING UP, or PLEASE WAIT message?
Go to step 8 on page 124.
Go to step 9 on page 124.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 123
Table 24. Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems (Printer) (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Replace the following FRUs one at a time, and in the sequence
Problem solved.
listed. After each replacement, power on the printer and watch for
the correct power-on sequence. If the problem remains, reinstall the
original FRU and continue.
a. MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813)
Go to step 9.
b. Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM (see “Controller SIMMS” on
page 791)
c. Controller PCB (see “Controller PCB, Printer” on page 788)
8.
d. Interface PCB
e. DC main harness (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813)
f. If you have a finisher attached, the problem could be a failing
half-full sensor. Replace the following:
v Upper-bin half-full sensor
v Middle-bin half-full sensor
v Lower-bin half-full sensor
Does the power-on sequence correctly function (see “Printer
Power-On Sequence Check” on page 562?
9.
Check operator panel:
a. Power on the printer.
b. Observe the 4 LEDs and the display for approximately 6
minutes.
Go to step 11 on page 125.
Go to step 10.
Do the LEDs and the display correctly function?
10.
Replace the following FRUs one at a time, and in the sequence listed. After each replacement, power on the printer and watch for the
correct power-on sequence. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
a. Operator panel
b. Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM (see “Controller SIMMS” on page 791)
c. Controller PCB (see “Controller PCB, Printer” on page 788)
d. Interface PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 124
Table 24. Operator Panel, Controller, and Power Problems (Printer) (continued)
Step
11.
Actions and Questions
Yes
Go to step 13.
Check the operator panel keys:
a. Power on the printer and wait for READY to display. The Online
LED should be lighted.
b. Press Online. The Online LED should be off.
c. Check the functions of the other keys by selecting various menu
functions (see the IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide).
No
Go to step 12.
Do all of the operator panel keys function correctly?
12.
Replace the following FRUs one at a time, and in the sequence listed. After each replacement, power on the printer and watch for the
correct power-on sequence. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
v Operator panel
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM (see “Controller SIMMS” on page 791)
v Controller PCB (see “Controller PCB, Printer” on page 788)
v Interface PCB
13.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 125
Toner Low, Error Code 002 Not Displayed (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 25, Toner Low, Error Code 002 Not Displayed (Printer)
Problem—Error code 002 does not display when the EP cartridge is out of toner.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
Kit, toner empty sensor
90H3676¹
(400–99)
400–14, p. 1114
¹An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 25. Toner Low, Error Code 002 Not Displayed Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the toner empty sensor.
1.
3.
No
Problem solved.
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Go to step 3.
Does an error code 002 display when the toner cartridge is
low?
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
2.
Yes
Does an error code 002 display when the toner cartridge is
low?
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 126
Paper Feed Drive (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 26, Paper Feed Drive (Printer)
Problem—The paper feed drive does not correctly operate. No error code displays.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Tray asm.
90H3538
1022–1, p. 1145
p. 631
Auxiliary tray and duplex support
06L9947
1012–99, p. 1139
Aux. tray feeder asm.
06L9946
1012–7, p. 1139
Envelope feeder asm.
90H3542
3000–0, p. 1182
p. 631
p. 838
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
p. 783
Table 26. Printer Paper Feed Drive Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Check the main drive asm.:
a. Remove paper tray 1, paper tray 2, and either the auxiliary tray
or envelope feeder from the printer.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 0801 (main drive motor, M10).
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Go to “Main Drive Asm.
(Printer)” on page 115.
Check the items listed under
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary, replace
the paper in the paper source.
Go to step 3 on page 128.
Does the main drive motor (M10) and all of the main drive
gears smoothly rotate?
Inspect the paper in all trays.
2.
Is the the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a
cockle finish?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 127
Table 26. Printer Paper Feed Drive Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper path as follows:
a. Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see
“Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on
page 721).
3.
Yes
No
Go to step 5.
Replace the rollers and other
paper path parts as necessary,
and clear any obstructions from
the paper path.
Replace the appropriate unit:
v Tray asm.
v Auxiliary tray
v Envelope feeder
Go to step 5.
Problem solved.
Either go to the appropriate
map with the new error
symptom or contact your next
level of support.
b. Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
c. Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material
(especially near rollers and sensors.)
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper
path clear of obstructions?
4.
Replace paper trays:
a. If the problem is with tray 1 or 2, swap the paper trays and run
a configuration page continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on
Test Menu) from tray 1 or 2 to the main output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 or TRAY 2, OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON
(and OFF) on the Paper Menu).
b. If the problem is with the auxiliary tray or the envelope feeder,
replace the tray or feeder and run a configuration page
continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on Test Menu) from the
auxiliary tray or envelope feeder to the main output bin
(SOURCE=AUX / ENV, OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON (and
OFF) on the Paper Menu).
Does the printer run correctly?
Replace the MCU PCB.
5.
Does the paper feed properly, with no errors?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 128
Printer Not Working
Link to—diagnostic Table 27 on page 130, Printer Not Working
Problem—When you power on the printer, the following symptoms occur:
v
v
v
v
Operator panel LEDs do not light.
Blank display.
Fuser fan (F1) does not run.
WARM UP does not display.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
AC noise filter PCB (100-110 V)
90H4194
1120–2, p. 1168
p. 745
AC noise filter PCB (220 V)
90H4195
1120–2, p. 1168
p. 745
Connector, AC input
11L5510
1120–11, p. 1168
LVPS (100-110 V ac)
90H4197
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
LVPS (220 V ac)
90H4198
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
Switch, main, AC power
90H4196
1120–7, p. 1168
p. 740
Harness, main power
06L9955
1120–6, p. 1168
p. 745
Harness, dc main
90H4209
700–12, p. 1124
p. 795
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 129
Table 27. Printer Not Working Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the power cord and connections.
1.
3.
No
Go to step 2.
Replace or correctly connect
the power cord.
Go to step 3.
Do not continue until the
voltages are in the correct
range. This is the customer’s
responsibility
Is the power cord in good condition and connected at power
receptacle and printer?
Perform the “Power-Receptacle Safety-Check” on page 32.
2.
Yes
Is the AC voltage at the power receptacle correct?
Isolate options:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Disconnect the following options (if installed).
v Duplex unit
v Finisher
v Input unit
c. Power on the printer.
Reconnect the options one at a Go to step 4 on page 131.
time until the printer becomes
inoperative again. Go the map
for the failing option.
v Duplex unit (“Duplex Not
Working (No Error Code or
Message)” on page 133)
v Input unit (“Input Unit Not
Working (No Error Code or
Does the printer perform the power-on sequence correctly (see
Message)” on page 139)
“Printer Power-On Sequence Check” on page 562)?
v Finisher (“Finisher Not
Working (No Error Code)” on
page 146)
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 130
Table 27. Printer Not Working Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
4.
b. Reconnect the power cord.
c. Power on the printer.
d. Measure the voltage between J19-1
and J19-3 on the noise filter PCB.
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by running a
demo page.
hc3m1101
Check the AC voltage noise filter PCB:
a. Remove the upper rear cover (see
778).
No
3
1
v AC noise filter, PCB
v Connector, AC input
Is there approximately 110 V ac
between J19-1 and J19-3 plus or
minus 10 percent?
Check the main power switch:
Measure the voltage between J20-1 and
J20-3 on the AC drive PCB.
3
Is there approximately 110 V ac
between J20-1 and J20-3 plus or
minus 10 percent?
1
v Switch, main, AC power
v Harness, main power
Check +5V dc:
6.
Is there +5V dc between J400-7 and
frame ground, and +5V dc between
J400-8 and frame ground?
Go to step 7 on page 132.
1
hc3m1106
Measure the voltage on the MCU PCB
at the following locations:
v Between J400-7 and frame ground
v Between J400-8 and frame ground
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by running a
demo page.
hc3m1101
5.
Go to step 6.
8
7
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by running a
demo page.
v Cabling P/J501
v Harness, dc Main
v LVPS
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 131
Table 27. Printer Not Working Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
Check the +24V dc:
7.
hc3m1104
Measure the voltage on the MCU PCB
at the following locations:
v Between J400-5 and frame ground
v Between J400-6 and frame ground
Go to step 8.
1
6
5
Is there +24V dc between J400-5 and
frame ground, and +24V dc between
J400-6 and frame ground?
8.
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by running a
demo page.
v Cabling P/J502
v Harness, dc Main
v LVPS
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 132
Duplex Not Working (No Error Code or Message)
Link to—diagnostic Table 28, Duplex Not Working (No Error Code or Message)
Problem—The duplex asm. does not operate, the duplex motor does not run, and there is no error code
displayed.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Harness, printer connector (duplex interface 06L9971
cable)
2040–11, p. 1177
Duplex drive asm.
06L9810
2040–4, p. 1177
p. 714
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
p. 745
Harness, Duplex
90H4213
700–16, p. 1124
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Interface PCB
90H4205
200–3, p. 1103
Connector, duplex (call tech support to
obtain this part)
NP
1110–24, p. 1165
p. 745
Table 28. Duplex Not Working (No Error Code or Message) Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Print a simplex configuration page (DUPLEX=OFF on Paper Menu). Go to step 4 on page 134.
1.
Go to step 2 on page 134.
Is the duplex unit listed as an installed option?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 133
Table 28. Duplex Not Working (No Error Code or Message) Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the duplex interface cable (2040–11, p. 1177).
2.
Yes
Go to step 3.
Is the cable correctly connected?
a. Replace the duplex PCB.
b. Print a simplex configuration page (DUPLEX=OFF on Paper
Menu).
Problem solved.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
v Cabling P/J473, P/J611A,
P/J611B, P/J404
v MCU PCB
v Harness, printer connector
v Harness, duplex
v Connector, duplex unit
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
3.
4.
5.
v Duplex PCB
v MCU PCB
v Cabling P/J473, P/J611A,
P/J611B, P/J404
v Harness, printer connector
v Harness, duplex
v Connector, duplex unit
Does the test print correctly in duplex?
Check the host to printer connection:
Reconnect or replace the
following:
v Harness, printer connector
Is the duplex unit listed as an installed option?
Test duplex printing:
a. Power on the printer.
b. Print the PCL fonts list (PRINT PCL FONTS on the Test Menu)
in duplex mode (DUPLEX=ON on the Paper Menu).
No
Problem solved.
Go to step 6 on page 135.
Run a duplex job from the host.
Does the duplex job correctly run?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 134
Table 28. Duplex Not Working (No Error Code or Message) Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
If possible, print a duplex job from a different application.
Does the duplex job correctly run?
6.
Yes
No
Suspect a problem with the
software application.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS)
SIMM
v Controller PCB
v Interface PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 7.
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 135
Envelope Feeder Not Working (No Error Code or Message)
Link to—diagnostic Table 29, Envelope Feeder Not Working (No Error Code or Message)
Problem—The envelope feeder does not operate, the envelope feeder motor does not run, and there is no error
code displayed.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Envelope feeder asm.
90H3542
3000–0, p. 1182
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
1012–4, p. 1139
Locations
Removal
Procedures
p. 631
p. 838
Harness, drawer asm
90H3649
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Table 29. Envelope Feeder Not Working (No Error Code or Message) Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Remove the envelope feeder from the printer and check the
envelope feeder connection.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair or replace the
connector.
Problem solved.
Go to step 3 on page 137.
Is the envelope feeder connection OK?
Check the host to printer connection:
2.
Run an envelope job from the host.
Does the envelope job correctly run?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 136
Table 29. Envelope Feeder Not Working (No Error Code or Message) Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Reload the printer driver software.
3.
Yes
No
Problem solved.
Go to step 4.
Run an envelope job from the host.
Does the envelope job correctly run?
Inspect the drive belt:
If a problem remains, go to
step 5 on page 138
a. Remove the envelope feeder bottom cover.
b. Remove the envelope feeder top cover.
c. Remove the envelope feeder rear cover (see 3010–11, p. 1182).
4.
Go to step 6 on page 138
d. Reinstall the envelope feeder (without covers) on to the printer.
e. Enter the diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 0803 (envelope feeder drive motor, M11).
f. Inspect the belts and gears of the envelope feeder.
Is the envelope feeder drive correctly operating?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 137
Table 29. Envelope Feeder Not Working (No Error Code or Message) Diagnostic (continued)
5.
Actions and Questions
Check the envelope feeder voltage:
a. Remove the envelope feeder bottom
cover.
b. Remove the envelope feeder top
cover.
c. Remove the envelope feeder rear
cover.
d. Power on the printer.
e. Measure the voltage between J700-1
and J700-5, and the voltage between
J700-7 and J700-12 on the envelope
feeder PCB.
Yes
hc3m1110
Step
No
Replace the envelope feeder
PCB.
Go to step 6.
Replace the MCU PCB (see
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
page 813).
Replace the LVPS (see “LVPS,
Printer” on page 804).
1
7
5
12
Is there +5V dc between J700-1 and
J700-5, and +24V dc between J700-7
and J700-12?
6.
1
hc3m1107
Check the MCU power output:
a. Remove the rear cover.
b. Power on the printer.
c. Measure the voltage between J404-6
and frame ground, and between
J404-12 and frame ground on the
MCU PCB.
12
6
Is there +5V dc between J404-6 and
frame ground, and +24V dc between
J404-10 and frame ground?
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 138
Input Unit Not Working (No Error Code or Message)
Link to—Diagnostic Table 30 on page 140, Input Unit Not Working (No Error Code or Message)
Problem—When you power on the printer, the input unit lift motors do not run, and there is no error code
displayed.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
PCB, tray 3 paper size
90H4233
4030–7, p. 1200
p. 745
PCB, tray 4 and 5 paper size
90H4234
4030–8, p. 1200
p. 745
Harness, tray 5
06L9960
4020–21, p. 1194
Harness, trays 3 and 4
06L9961
4020–22, p. 1194
Interface PCB
90H4205
200–3, p. 1103
Connector, Input unit
06L9959
4020–20, p. 1194
PCB, Input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 865
LVPS (100-110 V ac)
90H4197
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
LVPS (220 V ac)
90H4198
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Harness, tray
90H4211
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
NP
Connector, input unit (call tech support to
obtain this part, see “Technical Support” on
page 1298.)
p. 745
700–14, p. 1124
1110–22, p. 1165
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 139
Table 30. Input Unit Not Working (No Error Code or Message) Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Print a configuration page using the following Paper Menu
settings: SOURCE=TRAY 1 or SOURCE=TRAY 2,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=OFF.
Yes
No
Go to step 10 on page 142.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Repair/replace the following, one at
a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed.
Does the Autosensed Paper section of the configuration
page list Tray 3, 4, and 5?
Check the input unit cable.
2.
Is the cable connected and in good condition?
v Connector, input unit (pn
06L9959)
3.
Check HCI PCB voltage (5 volt check):
a. Disconnect P/J 480 on the HCI PCB.
b. Measure for 5 volts on J480 between pins 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9
14, 15, 16, 17, 19, 21, 22, 24, and frame ground.
c. Disconnect P/J 481 on the HCI PCB.
d. Measure for 5 volts on J481 between pins 1, 2, and frame
ground.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 7 on page 141.
Go to step 5 on page 141.
Go to step 8 on page 142.
Do you have 5 volts on these pins?
4.
Check HCI PCB voltage (24 volt check):
a. Disconnect P/J 481 on the HCI PCB.
b. Measure for 24 volts on J481 between pins 7, 8, and frame
ground.
Do you have 24 volts on these pins?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 140
Table 30. Input Unit Not Working (No Error Code or Message) Diagnostic (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
a. Replace the HCI PCB.
b. Print a configuration page using the following Paper Menu
settings: SOURCE=TRAY 1 or SOURCE=TRAY 2,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=OFF.
Yes
No
Problem solved.
Go to step 6.
Problem solved.
Repair/replace the following, one at
a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed.
v Connector, input unit (pn
06L9959)
v Harness, tray
v Connector, input unit (call tech
support to obtain this part, see
“Technical Support” on
page 1298.)
Does the Autosensed Paper section of the configuration
page list Tray 3, 4, and 5?
a. Replace the MCU PCB.
b. Print a configuration page using the following Paper Menu
settings: SOURCE=TRAY 1 or SOURCE=TRAY 2,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=OFF.
6.
Does the Autosensed Paper section of the configuration
page list Tray 3, 4, and 5?
Check MCU PCB voltage (5 volt check):
a. Disconnect P/J 406 on the MCU PCB.
b. Measure for 5 volts on P406 between pins 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10,
11, 12, 14, 18, 19, 20, 21, 27, 29, 31, and frame ground.
7.
Do you have 5 volts on these pins?
Repair/replace the following,
Go to step 9 on page 142.
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
v Connector, input unit (pn
06L9959)
v Harness, tray
v Connector, input unit (call
tech support to obtain this
part, see “Technical Support”
on page 1298.)
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 141
Table 30. Input Unit Not Working (No Error Code or Message) Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check MCU PCB voltage (24 volt check):
a. Disconnect P/J 406 on the MCU PCB.
b. Measure for 24 volts on P406 between pins 30, 32, and
frame ground.
8.
Do you have 24 volts on these pins?
a. Replace the MCU PCB.
b. Rerun the voltage tests in step 7 on page 141 and step 8.
9.
10.
Do you still have problems with 5 volts or the 24 volts out
of the MCU?
a. Print a configuration page using the following Paper Menu
settings: SOURCE=TRAY 3, OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=OFF.
b. Print another configuration page using the following Paper
Menu settings: SOURCE=TRAY 4
c. Print another configuration page using the following Paper
Menu settings: SOURCE=TRAY 5
Does each configuration page print correctly?
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following,
Go to step 9.
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
v Connector, input unit (pn
06L9959)
v Harness, tray
v Connector, input unit (call
tech support to obtain this
part, see “Technical Support”
on page 1298.)
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
Problem solved.
v LVPS
The application software could
be the cause of the problem. If
you determine that the
application software is working
correctly, repair/replace the
following, one at a time. After
each replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Controller PCB
v MCU PCB
Go to the diagnostic step for the
failing tray:
v Tray 3: step 11 on page 143.
v Tray 4: step 12 on page 144.
v Tray 5: step 13 on page 145.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 142
Table 30. Input Unit Not Working (No Error Code or Message) Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Replace the PCB, tray 3 paper size.
b. Print a configuration page using the following Paper Menu
settings: SOURCE=TRAY 3, OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=OFF.
Does the configuration page print correctly?
11.
Yes
Problem solved.
No
Repair/replace the following, one at
a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed.
v Cabling P/J110, P/J483
v Harness, trays 3 and 4
v PCB, input unit
v Cabling P/J480, P/J481,
P/J613A-D, P/J406
v Connector, input unit (pn
06L9959)
v Connector, input unit (call tech
support to obtain this part, see
“Technical Support” on
page 1298.)
v Harness, tray
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 143
Table 30. Input Unit Not Working (No Error Code or Message) Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Replace the PCB, tray 4 and 5 paper size.
b. Print a configuration page using the following Paper Menu
settings: SOURCE=TRAY 4, OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=OFF.
Does the configuration page print correctly?
12.
Yes
Problem solved.
No
Repair/replace the following, one at
a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed.
v Cabling P/J115, P/J483
v Harness, trays 3 and 4
v PCB, input unit
v Cabling P/J480, P/J481,
P/J613A-D, P/J406
v Connector, input unit (pn
06L9959)
v Connector, input unit (call tech
support to obtain this part, see
“Technical Support” on
page 1298.)
v Harness, tray
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 144
Table 30. Input Unit Not Working (No Error Code or Message) Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
1. Replace the PCB, tray 4 and 5 paper size.
2. Print a configuration page using the following Paper Menu
settings: SOURCE=TRAY 5, OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=OFF.
Does the configuration page print correctly?
13.
Yes
Problem solved.
No
Repair/replace the following, one at
a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed.
v Cabling P/J120, P/J484
v Harness, tray 5
v PCB, input unit
v Cabling P/J480, P/J481,
P/J613A-D, P/J406
v Connector, input unit (pn
06L9959)
v Connector, input unit (call tech
support to obtain this part, see
“Technical Support” on
page 1298.)
v Harness, tray
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 145
Finisher Problems (No Error Code or Message)
Finisher Not Working (No Error Code)
Link to—diagnostic Table 31, Finisher Failure (No Error Code)
Link to—“Finisher Power-On Sequence Check” on page 563
Link to—“Finisher Initialization Check” on page 564
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Harness, printer
11L5460
5031–20, p. 1234
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
LVPS, finisher (100-110 v ac)
11L5453
5030–4, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 998
LVPS, finisher (220 v ac)
11L5502
5030–4, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 998
Pause switch
11L5439
5050–22, p. 1238
p. 743
NP
Connector, finisher (call tech support to
obtain this part, see “Technical Support” on
page 1298.)
1110–23, p. 1165
Harness, output
700–17, p. 1124
90H4214
p. 745
p. 1021
¹An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 146
Table 31. Finisher Failure (No Error Code)
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Check the printer configuration:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Disconnect the finisher from the printer by disconnecting the
finisher AC power plug and the interface plug. See “Finisher
Asm.” on page 970.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Go to “Solving the Problem,
Diagnostic Quick Path” on
page 39 using the current
symptom as an entry point.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 6 on page 148.
The finisher appears to be
working correctly. Check
drivers and application
software.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 12 on page 150.
Go to step 5 on page 148.
c. Power on the printer.
d. Print a configuration page (see “Printing Configuration Pages”
on page 584).
Did the configuration page correctly print?
2.
Check installed options:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Reconnect the finisher to the printer.
c. Power on the printer.
d. Print a configuration page (see “Printing Configuration Pages”
on page 584).
e. Check the list of installed options on the configuration sheet.
Is the finisher listed as an installed option?
3.
Print to the finisher bins:
a. Select the upper finisher bin as the default output destination
(OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper Menu).
b. Select CONTINUOUS TEST on the Test Menu.
c. Repeat steps a and b for the middle and lower bins.
(OUTPUT=FINISHR2 and OUTPUT=FINISHR3 on the Paper
Menu).
Is the output delivered to the selected bins?
4.
Are you trying to fix a problem with the finisher Pause button
not working correctly?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 147
Table 31. Finisher Failure (No Error Code) (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check finisher initialization:
Print a configuration page to
the finisher to verify correct
a. Power off the printer.
operation.
b. Perform “Finisher Power-On Sequence Check” on page 563 and
“Finisher Initialization Check” on page 564.
Go to step 6.
Did the finisher perform the power-on and initialization
sequences correctly?
6.
Check the finisher PCB:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Disconnect the finisher from the printer.
c. Remove the finisher PCB cover.
d. Reconnect the finisher.
e. Power on the printer.
f. Check CR7 and CR9 (see Figure 68 on page 753.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
Go to step 7.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 14 on page 151.
During power on, is CR7 on solid and CR9 blinking?
7.
a. Check cabling P/J405 on the MCU.
b. Check cabling P/J612 and P/J265 on the finisher PCB.
Go to step 8 on page 149.
Repair/replace the cabling.
Is the cabling correct and properly connected?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 148
Table 31. Finisher Failure (No Error Code) (continued)
hc3m1111
Check AC input to LVPS check:
a. Power on the printer.
b. Close the front and top finisher
covers or operate their interlocks.
c. Close the compiler cover or operate
the compiler cover interlock switch.
d. Measure the voltage between J2-3
and J2-4 on the LVPS PCB.
Yes
1
8.
Actions and Questions
4
Step
1
3
No
Go to step 9.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
4
v Cabling P13, P/J2
Is there correct voltage between J2-3
and J2-4? (Refer to the following
table for correct voltage.)
Machine Rating
(50-60 Hertz)
100 V ac
120 V ac
220-240 V ac
Min Volt.
Max Volt.
90 V ac.
104 V ac.
200 V ac.
110 V ac.
134 V ac.
264 V ac.
9.
Measure the voltage between J505-3
and frame ground, and between J505-4
and frame ground on the LVPS PCB.
hc3m1115
Check the +5V dc output from the
finisher LVPS:
1
Go to step 10 on page 150.
Replace the finisher LVPS PCB
(see “LVPS, Finisher” on
page 998).
34
Is there +5V dc between J505-3 and
J505-4?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 149
Table 31. Finisher Failure (No Error Code) (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
hc3m1113
Check the +5V dc input from the MCU
PCB:
Measure the voltage between J265-12
and frame ground, and between J265-10
and frame ground on the finisher PCB.
v Cabling P/J405, P/J612,
P/J265
v MCU PCB
v Harness, printer
v Harness, output
v Connector, 2000-Sheet
finisher
1
A13
A1
Measure the voltage between J896-A12
and frame ground, and between
J896-A10 and frame ground on the
finisher PCB.
Is there +5V dc between J896-A12 and
J896-A10?
If a problem remains, go to
step 14 on page 151.
Replace the finisher PCB (see
“PCB Asm., Finisher” on
page 1021).
Go to step 13 on page 151.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
B1
B13
Check the Pause switch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 1232.
12.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
Is there +5V dc between J265-12 and
J265-10?
Check the +5V dc output from the
finisher PCB:
11.
Go to step 11.
12
hc3m1116
10.
10
No
b. Press and hold down the Pause button and press Enter. An H
should display.
c. Release the Pause button and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you press the Pause button and an L
when you release it?
v Pause button
v PCB asm., finisher
v Cabling P/J836, P/J878,
P/J896
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 150
Table 31. Finisher Failure (No Error Code) (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the Pause LED:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 1435.
13.
b. Press Enter. An asterisk should appear on the operator panel
next to 1435 and the Pause LED should be on.
c. Press Enter again. The asterisk should disappear and the
Pause LED should be off.
Does the LED work correctly?
14.
Yes
No
The problem could be
intermittent. Go to step 14.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
v Pause button
v PCB asm., finisher
v Cabling P/J836, P/J878,
P/J896
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 151
+5 V DC, Finisher
Link to—diagnostic Table 32, Finisher Problems (No Error Code or Message)
Problem—+5V dc is missing from some or all finisher components, and there is no error code displayed.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
LVPS, finisher (100-110 v ac)
11L5453
5030–4, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 998
LVPS, finisher (220 v ac)
11L5502
5030–4, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 998
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
Harness, printer
11L5460
5031–20, p. 1234
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Table 32. +5 V DC, Finisher Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Disconnect the finisher from the printer.
b. Print a test print page, fed from tray 1.
1.
Yes
No
Reconnect the finisher to the
printer, and then go to step
step 2 on page 153.
Go to “Printer Not Working” on
page 129.
Does the test print run and is it fed into the facedown output
bin?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 152
Table 32. +5 V DC, Finisher Diagnostic (continued)
3.
Yes
No
Prepare for finisher voltage check:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the finisher PCB cover and connector cover.
c. Remove the PCB top cover.
d. Close the finisher front cover or operate the front cover interlock.
e. Close the compiler cover or operate the compiler cover interlock switches.
f. Go to step 3.
hc3m1111
Check the AC input to LVPS:
a. Power on the printer.
b. Measure the voltage between J2-3
and J2-4 on the LVPS PCB.
1
2.
Actions and Questions
4
Step
1
3
Go to step 4.
Go to “Printer Not Working” on
page 129.
Go to step 5 on page 154.
Replace the LVPS PCB (see
“LVPS, Finisher” on page 998).
4
Is there 110Vac between J2-3 and
J2-4?
4.
Measure the voltage between J505-3
and frame ground, and between J505-4
and frame ground on the LVPS PCB.
hc3m1115
Check the +5V dc output from the LVPS:
1
34
Is there +5V dc between J505-3 and
J505-4?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 153
Table 32. +5 V DC, Finisher Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
5.
hc3m1113
Check the +5V dc input from the MCU
PCB:
Measure the voltage between J265-12
and frame ground, and between J265-10
and frame ground on the finisher PCB.
10
No
Go to step 6.
Go to “Printer Not Working” on
page 129.
If a problem remains, go to
step 7.
Replace the finisher PCB (see
“PCB Asm., Finisher” on
page 1021).
12
1
Is there +5V dc between J265-12 and
J265-10?
6.
Measure the voltage between J896-A12
and frame ground, and between
J896-A10 and frame ground on the
finisher PCB.
Is there +5V dc between J896-A12 and
J896-A10?
7.
A13
A1
hc3m1116
Check the +5V dc output from the
finisher PCB:
B1
B13
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 154
+24 V DC, Finisher
Link to—diagnostic Table 33, +24 V DC, Finisher
Problem—+24V dc is missing from some or all finisher components, and there is no error code displayed.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
LVPS, finisher (100-110 v ac)
11L5453
5030–4, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 998
LVPS, finisher (220 v ac)
11L5502
5030–4, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 998
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
Harness, printer
11L5460
5031–20, p. 1234
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
¹An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 33. +24 V DC, Finisher Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Disconnect the finisher from the printer.
1.
Print a test print page, fed from tray 1.
Yes
No
Reconnect the finisher to the
printer, and then go to 2.
Go to “Printer Not Working” on
page 129.
Does the test print run and is it fed into the facedown output
bin?
Prepare for finisher voltage check:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the finisher top cover (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
2.
c. Close the finisher front cover or operate the front cover interlock.
d. Close the compiler cover or operate the compiler cover interlock switches.
e. Go to step 3 on page 156.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 155
Table 33. +24 V DC, Finisher Diagnostic (continued)
hc3m1111
Check the AC input to LVPS:
a. Power on the printer.
b. Measure the voltage between J2-3
and J2-4 on the LVPS PCB.
Yes
1
3.
Actions and Questions
4
Step
1
3
No
Go to step 4.
Go to “Printer Not Working” on
page 129.
Go to step 5.
Replace the LVPS PCB (see
“LVPS, Finisher” on page 998).
Go to step 6 on page 157.
Go to “Printer Not Working” on
page 129.
4
Is there 110Vac between J2-3 and
J2-4?
Check the +24V dc output from the
LVPS:
4.
hc3m1114
1
Measure the voltage between J502-1
and frame ground on the LVPS PCB.
Is there +24V dc between J502-1 and
frame ground?
5.
hc3m1112
Check the +24V dc input from the MCU
PCB:
Measure the voltage between J265-8
and frame ground on the finisher PCB.
Is there +24V dc between J265-8 and
frame ground?
8
1
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 156
Table 33. +24 V DC, Finisher Diagnostic (continued)
Actions and Questions
Check the +24V dc output from the
finisher PCB:
6.
Measure the voltage between J897-13
and frame ground on the finisher PCB.
Is there +24V dc between J897-13 and
frame ground?
7.
Yes
13
No
If a problem remains, go to
step 7.
1
Replace the finisher PCB (see
“PCB Asm., Finisher” on
page 1021).
hc3m1117
Step
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 157
Finisher Pause...
Link to—diagnostic Table 34, Finisher Pause
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Pause switch
11L5439
5050–22, p. 1238
Cable asm.
11L5436
5050–22, p. 1238
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 743
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
Table 34. Finisher Pause
Step
Actions and Questions
Press the Pause button on top of the finisher.
1.
Does the LED above the Pause button go off and does the
Finisher Pause message clear from the operator panel?
Power off the printer, then power it on.
2.
3.
Yes
No
Problem solved. Reprint the
original customer job.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved. Reprint the
original customer job.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
Go to step 4 on page 159.
Is the LED above the Pause button lit?
a. Power off the printer.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 1435 (test Pause button).
Does the LED above the Pause button change states each time v Finisher PCB
the diag/switch is activated?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 158
Table 34. Finisher Pause (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check and reseat the following P/J cable connectors:
v P/J 836, P/J878, P/J896
Power off the printer, then power it on.
4.
Is the LED above the Pause button lit?
Yes
No
Problem solved. Reprint the
original customer job.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
v Finisher pause switch
v Finisher PCB
v Cable assembly
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 159
Error Codes and Messages
This section lists all error code diagnostics for the printer, the duplex asm., the envelope feeder, the input unit, and
the finisher, in numerical order.
002—Toner Low (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 35, 002—Toner Low (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the toner sensor active for longer than the specified time when the main drive motor
(M10) started.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
Toner empty sensor
90H3676¹
(400–99)
400–14, p. 1114
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
User’s guide
p. 740
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 35. Error Code 002 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Install a new EP cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide).
1.
Do you still have an error code 002?
Yes
No
Reinstall the old EP
cartridge, and then go to
step 2 on page 161.
Problem solved.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 160
Table 35. Error Code 002 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the toner sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0904.
2.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Open the left upper cover.
Remove the EP cartridge.
Install a new EP cartridge; press Enter, an L should display.
Remove the new EP cartridge; press Enter, an H should display.
Yes
Go to step 3.
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Toner sensor
v Connector P/J127
v MCU PCB
Does an L display when you install the new EP cartridge and an H
when you remove the new EP cartridge?
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 161
003—Toner Cart / Replace Cart (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 36, 003—Toner Cart / Replace Cart (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the EP (toner) cartridge has printed a specified number of prints and should be
replaced.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
User’s guide
p. 813
Table 36. Error Code 003 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Install a new EP (toner) cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s
Guide).
Do you still have error code 003?
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
2.
3.
Do you still have error code 003?
Yes
No
Reinstall the original EP
cartridge, and then go to
step 2.
Problem solved.
If a problem remains, go to
step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 162
004—Toner Cart / Reseat Cart (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 37, 004—Toner Cart / Reseat Cart (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the EP cartridge interlock switch not activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
Switch asm., EP cartridge
90H3678
400–23, p. 1114
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Table 37. Error Code 004 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Remove and then reinstall the EP cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint 32/40:
User’s Guide).
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Go to step 3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Do you still have error code 004?
Check the EP cartridge interlock switch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0902 (EP cartridge interlock switch).
2.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Open the left upper cover.
Remove the EP cartridge.
Install an EP cartridge; press Enter, an H should display.
Remove the EP cartridge; press Enter, an L should display.
v EP cartridge interlock
switch
v Cabling P/J127, P/J 456
v MCU PCB
Does an H display when you install the EP cartridge and an L when
you remove the EP cartridge?
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 163
005—Toner Cart / Wrong Cart (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 38, 005—Toner Cart / Wrong Cart (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the wrong EP cartridge installed.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
User’s guide
p. 813
Table 38. Error Code 005 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Ensure you have the correct type of EP cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint
32/40: User’s Guide). The InfoPrint 32 and InfoPrint 40 require an
IBM EP cartridge or an equivalent cartridge that has the same
electronic interface/key.
b. Install a new EP cartridge.
Yes
No
Reinstall the original EP
cartridge, and then go to
step 2.
Problem solved.
If a problem remains, go to
step 3.
Problem solved.
Do you still have error code 005?
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
2.
3.
Do you still have error code 005?
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 164
006—Toner Cart / Reseat Cart (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 39, 006—Toner Cart / Reseat Cart (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic could not read EP cartridge memory data.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
LVPS (100-110 V ac)
90H4197
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
LVPS (220 V ac)
90H4198
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Table 39. Error Code 006 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
Check the +5 V dc:
a. Remove the rear cover (see “Rear Upper
Cover, Printer” on page 778).
1.
b. Measure the voltage between J400-7
and frame ground, and between J400-8
and frame ground on the MCU PCB.
Go to step 2.
Replace the LVPS (see
“LVPS, Printer” on
page 804).
Reinstall the original EP
cartridge, and then go to
step 3 on page 166.
Problem solved.
hc3m1106
1
No
8
7
Is there +5 V dc between J400-7 and
frame ground, and +5 V dc between
J400-8 and frame ground?
Replace the EP cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide).
2.
Do you still have error code 006?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 165
Table 39. Error Code 006 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
3.
4.
Do you still have error code 006?
Yes
No
If a problem remains, go to
step 4.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 166
007—Toner Cart / Replace Cart (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 40, 007—Toner Cart / Replace Cart (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic could not access EP cartridge memory data.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
LVPS (100-110 V ac)
90H4197
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
LVPS (220 V ac)
90H4198
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Table 40. Error Code 007 Diagnostic
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
Check the +5 V dc:
a. Remove the rear cover.
b. Measure the voltage between J400-7
and frame ground, and between J400-8
and frame ground on the MCU PCB.
1
No
Go to step 2.
Replace the LVPS (see
“LVPS, Printer” on
page 804).
Reinstall the original EP
cartridge, and then go to
step 3 on page 168.
Problem solved.
hc3m1106
Step
8
7
Is there +5 V dc between J400-7 and
frame ground, and +5 V dc between
J400-8 and frame ground?
Replace the EP cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide).
2.
Do you still have error code 007?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 167
Table 40. Error Code 007 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
3.
4.
Do you still have error code 007?
Yes
No
If a problem remains, go to
step 4.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 168
009—Stapler / Check Staples (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 41, 009—Stapler / Check Staples (Finisher)
Problem—The 200-sheet finisher staple cartridge is empty or there is a staple jam.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Stapler cartridge
Customer
supply
Stapler asm.
11L5424
5140–1, p. 1261
Harness
11L5425
5140–3, p. 1261
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 720
p. 1038
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
Table 41. Error Code 009 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the stapler assembly:
a. Remove the stapler asm. (see “Stapler Asm., Finisher” on
page 1038).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
If a problem remains, go to
step 3 on page 170.
Problem solved.
b. Remove any damaged or jammed staples from the stapler cartridge.
c. Reinstall the stapler cartridge.
Do you still have error code 009?
Replace the stapler asm. (see “Stapler Asm., Finisher” on page 1038).
2.
Do you still have error code 009?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 169
Table 41. Error Code 009 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a customer job that
requires stapling.
v Finisher PCB asm.
v Harness
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 170
010—Stapler / Check Cart (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 42, 010—Stapler / Check Cart (Finisher)
Problem—The staple cartridge is missing or it is not seated correctly.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Stapler cartridge
Customer
supply
Stapler asm.
11L5424
5140–1, p. 1261
Harness
11L5425
5140–3, p. 1261
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
PCB asm., Finisher
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 720
p. 1038
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
Table 42. Error Code 010 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the stapler cartridge.
Yes
No
Problem solved.
Replace the stapler asm.
(see “Stapler Asm., Finisher”
on page 1038). If a problem
remains, go to step 2.
1.
Do you still have error code 010?
2.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a customer job that
requires stapling.
v PCB asm., Finisher
v Harness
v Harness, dc main
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 171
011—Load <paper> / In <tray> (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 43 on page 174, 011—Load <paper> / In <tray> (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic detected a no paper or incorrect paper size condition in the specified tray.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
4020–10, p. 1194
Locations
Removal
Procedures
PCB, Input unit
90H4230
p. 745
p. 865
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Sensor, tray 1 no paper
63H2477
1032–5, p. 1149
p. 740
Sensor, tray 2 no paper
63H2477
1042–5, p. 1159
p. 740
Sensor, tray 3 no paper
63H2477
4030–4, p. 1200
p. 742
p. 868
Sensor, tray 4 no paper
63H2477
4030–4, p. 1200
p. 742
p. 862
Sensor, tray 5 no paper
63H2477
4040–3, p. 1202
p. 742
p. 862
Sensor, tray 1 paper level
63H2477
1032–5, p. 1149
p. 740
Sensor, tray 2 paper level
63H2477
1042–5, p. 1159
p. 740
Sensor, tray 3 paper level
63H2477
4030–4, p. 1200
p. 742
p. 862
Sensor, tray 4 paper level
63H2477
4030–4, p. 1200
p. 742
p. 862
Sensor, tray 5 paper level
63H2477
4040–3, p. 1202
p. 742
p. 862
Harness, interlock/sensor
06L9949
1041–22, p. 1156
Harness, registration sensor
90H4215
700–18, p. 1124
Harness, rear
90H4210
700–13, p. 1124
Harness, tray 3 and 4
06L9961
4020–22, p. 1194
Harness, tray 5
06L9960
4020–21, p. 1194
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 172
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Tray 1 size switch asm.
90H3624
1032–1, p. 1149
p. 740
Tray 2 size switch asm.
90H3624
1042–1, p. 1159
p. 740
Tray 3 size switch asm.
90H4233
4030–7, p. 1200
p. 742
Tray 4 size switch asm.
90H4234
4030–8, p. 1200
p. 742
Tray 5 size switch asm.
90H4234
4030–8, p. 1200
p. 742
Harness, size and exit
90H4216
700–19, p. 1124
Tray asm.
90H3538
1022–1, p. 1145
Harness, connector Input unit
06L9959
4020–20, p. 1194
Kit, tray cables
06L9940
1021–99, p. 1143
Wire, tray 4 bottom plate lift
06L9969
Wire, tray 5 bottom plate lift
06L9970
Removal
Procedures
p. 631
NP
Connector, input unit (call tech support to
obtain this part, see “Technical Support” on
page 1298.)
1110–22, p. 1165
Harness, tray
90H4211
700–14, p. 1124
Tray 4
06L9799
4063–1, p. 1212
p. 631
p. 884
Tray 5
06L9800
4074–1, p. 1222
p. 631
p. 898
Aux. tray and duplex support
06L9947
1012–99, p. 1139
Aux. tray feeder asm.
06L9946
1012–7, p. 1139
Envelope feeder asm.
90H3542
3000–0, p. 1182
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
Harness, drawer asm.
90H3649
1012–4, p. 1139
p. 783
p. 631
p. 838
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 173
Table 43. Error Code 011 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reload the specified tray or envelope feeder with the correct size paper
or envelopes. Make sure the paper size guides are against the paper or
envelopes. Close the tray.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Problem solved.
Do you still have an error code 011?
2.
3.
Is the problem with the auxiliary tray or envelope feeder?
Go to step 9 on page 177. Go to step 3.
No paper sensor test:
Go to step 4 on page 175. Repair/replace the following, one
at a time. After each
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
replacement, determine if the
the appropriate sensor check for the tray listed in the 011 message:
problem is fixed by running a
v Tray 1 = 0707
configuration page from the tray
v Tray 2 = 0708
listed in the 011 message:
v Tray 3 = 0709
v No paper sensor for the tray
v Tray 4 = 0710
listed in the 011 message
v Tray 5 = 0711
v Cabling from sensor to MCU
b. Block the sensor and press Enter. An H should appear.
v MCU PCB
c. Unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should appear.
Did an H appear when you blocked the sensor and an L appear
when you unblocked the sensor?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 174
Table 43. Error Code 011 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
4.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Paper level sensor test:
If the problem is with tray
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run 1, 2, or 3, go to step 5. If
the appropriate sensor check for the tray listed in the 011 message: the problem is with tray 4
or 5, go to step 6 on
v Tray 1 = 0713
page 176.
v Tray 2 = 0714
v Tray 3 = 0715
v Tray 4 = 0716
v Tray 5 = 0717
b. Open the problem tray and press Enter. An H should appear.
c. Close the tray and press Enter. An L should appear.
Repair/replace the following, one
at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by running a
configuration page from the tray
listed in the 011 message:
v Paper level sensor for the tray
listed in the 011 message
v Cabling from sensor to MCU
v MCU PCB
Did an H appear when you opened the tray and an L appear when
you closed the tray?
If the problem is with tray 1, 2, or 3, swap the problem tray with one of
the others.
Does the problem follow the tray?
5.
Replace:
v Kit, tray cables
v Tray 1, 2, or 3 asm.
Repair/replace the following, one
at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by running a
configuration page from the tray
listed in the 011 message:
v Paper size switch
v PCB input unit
v Cabling from paper size
switch to MCU
v MCU PCB
v Harness asm.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 175
Table 43. Error Code 011 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
If the problem is with tray 4 or 5, inspect the tray assembly for damage.
Is the tray damaged?
6.
7.
Check the size switch asm.:
a. Power off the printer and the 2500-sheet Input Unit (HCI).
b. Remove the back cover from the 2500-sheet Input Unit (HCI).
c. Locate size switches for trays 4 and 5.
d. Locate and disconnect P/J 115 from tray 4 size switch assembly.
e. Locate and disconnect P/J 120 from tray 5 size switch assembly.
f. Locate and lift the HCI driver PCB free of standoffs. Leave all cables
connected.
g. Loosen cable ties and cable clamps where required in order to plug
P/J 115 into P/J 120 and cable P/J 120 into P/J 115 connector.
h. Power on the printer and the 2500-sheet Input Unit (HCI).
Yes
No
Repair/replace the
following, one at a time.
After each replacement,
determine if the problem
is fixed by running a
configuration page from
the tray listed in the 011
message:
v Wire, tray 4 bottom
plate lift
v Wire, tray 5 bottom
plate lift
v Tray 4 asm.
v Tray 5 asm.
Go to step 7.
Replace the size switch
assembly for the failing
tray.
Restore the cabling and HCI
driver PCB to their original
loctions. Go to step 8 on
page 177.
Does error code 011 now call a different tray?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 176
Table 43. Error Code 011 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
8.
Actions and Questions
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed by running a configuration page from
the tray listed in the 011 message:
v PCB, input unit
v MCU PCB
v Harness asm.
Yes
No
Go to step 10.
Problem solved.
Repair/replace the
following, one at a time.
After each replacement,
determine if the problem
is fixed by running a
configuration page from
the tray listed in the 011
message:
v Cabling P/J403,
P/J603, P/J604
v Harness, bottom
v Harness, drawer asm.
v Aux. tray and duplex
support
v MCU PCB
Problem solved.
Do you still have an error code 011?
Replace the auxiliary tray or the envelope feeder and load with paper or
envelopes. After the replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by
printing a job from the tray or feeder.
Do you still have an error code 011?
9.
10.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 177
012—Load <Paper> / In Aux or Env <Tray> (Printer)
Problem—This message indicates that manual mode (MANUAL=ON) has been selected for the auxiliary tray or
the envelope feeder, and that the user must press the Continue key to print the next page. This message
displays after each page or envelope is printed. If the auxiliary tray or envelope feeder are empty when you press
the Continue key, the following message is displayed:
011 LOAD <paper>
IN <tray>
Message 012 should not result from a hardware failure. If you suspect a hardware problem, do the following:
1. Verify that manual mode is off. Manual mode can be selected from the operator panel (MANUAL=ON/OFF on
the Paper Menu) or the printer driver. If MANUAL=OFF on the Paper Menu, and manual printing still occurs,
check the printer driver setting.
2. With manual printing turned off, print a test page.
v If you suspect an auxiliary tray problem, print a configuration page from the auxiliary tray. Make sure
SOURCE=AUX on the Paper Menu before you print the configuration page.
v If you suspect an envelope feeder problem, ask the customer to submit a job to the envelope feeder.
3. Use the resulting error code to diagnose the problem.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 178
013—Load <Paper> / In Any Tray (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 44, 013—Load <Paper> / In Any Tray (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic detected either no paper or the incorrect paper size in the specified tray during a PostScript
job.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Table 44. Error Code 013 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Reload the specified tray with the correct paper size.
1.
2.
Go to step 2.
No
Problem solved.
Do you still have an error code 013?
Print a configuration page test print from the problem tray (see “Printing
Test Prints” on page 587).
Do you now have an error code 011?
3.
Yes
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed.
v MCU PCB
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
v Controller PCB
Do you still have an error code 013?
Go to “011—Load <paper> / Go to step 3.
In <tray> (Printer)” on
page 172.
Problem solved.
If a problem remains, it is
likely to be within the host
job setup. Try printing a
different PostScript job. Also
make sure that the PS
(PostScript) Menu is set
correctly.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 179
031—Output Full / Face-Down Bin (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 45, 031—Output Full / Face—Down Bin (Printer)
Problem—The MCU logic detected the full stack sensor actuated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Full stack sensor, main (printer)
90H3686
510–16, p. 1117
p. 740
Full stack actuator (printer)
90H3687
510–17, p. 1117
Full stack sensor, transport main output
11L5473
5090–19, p. 1247
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
PCB asm., Finisher
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 1021
Harness, exit
90H4218
700–21, p. 1124
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Harness asm., transport sensor
11L5466¹
(5090-0)
5090–6, p. 1247
Harness, printer
11L5460
5031–20, p. 1234
p. 745
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 45. Error Code 031 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Do you have a finisher attached?
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 181.
Go to step 3 on page 181.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 180
Table 45. Error Code 031 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the finisher (see “Finisher Asm.” on page 970).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 5 on page 182.
Go to step 4.
Replace the full stack
actuator and full stack
sensor.
c. Power on the printer.
d. Set the following Paper Menu items: SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=MAIN.
e. Print a configuration page.
Do you still have an error code 031?
3.
Check the printer full stack sensor:
a. Inspect the printer full stack sensor and actuator.
b. Manually move the actuator.
Are the sensor and actuator working correctly?
Check the printer full stack sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0730 (Full stack sensor).
4.
b. Lift up the full stack actuator, press Enter, an H should display.
c. Release the actuator, press Enter, an L should display.
Did you see an H when the actuator was up and an L was the
actuator was in the normal position?
Replace the MCU PCB (see Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
replacement, determine if
page 813).
the problem is fixed by
running a configuration page
using Tray 1 as the source
and MAIN as the output.
v Full stack sensor
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
v Cabling P/J 133, P/J 601,
P/J 462
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 181
Table 45. Error Code 031 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
1. Reattach the finisher to the printer.
2. Power on the printer.
3. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1244 (finisher transport main output full sensor check).
5.
Do you see an H when the sensor is blocked and an L when the
sensor is unblocked?
Yes
No
Replace the MCU PCB (see Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
replacement, determine if
page 813).
the problem is fixed by
running a configuration page
using Tray 1 as the source
and MAIN as the output.
v Full stack sensor,
transport main output
v PCB asm., Finisher
v Cabling P/J 259, P/J 268,
P/J 880, and P/J 896
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 182
032—Output Full / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 46, 032—Output Full / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher)
Problem—The MCU logic detected the upper bin full sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Upper-bin full sensor
06L9993
5191–26, p. 1279
p. 743
p. 961
Upper-bin paper sensor
11L5369
5191–5, p. 1279
p. 743
p. 963
Bin asm.
11L5389
5191–1, p. 1279
Harness, bin lift
11L5457
5031–17, p. 1234
PCB asm., Finisher
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
Harness, printer
11L5460
5031–20, p. 1234
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 952
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
Table 46. Error Code 032 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Remove all paper from the finisher bins.
b. Power off the printer.
c. Power on the printer.
Yes
No
Go to step 3 on page 184.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3 on page 184.
Problem solved.
Do you still have an error code 032?
2.
Print a configuration page job to the upper finisher bin
(OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper Menu).
Do you have an error code 032?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 183
Table 46. Error Code 032 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the upper-bin paper sensor:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Ensure that the upper-bin paper sensor and actuator are intact and
working correctly.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1219.
3.
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
to the upper finisher bin
(OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper Menu).
d. Block the upper-bin paper sensor and press Enter. An H should
display.
e. Unblock the upper-bin paper sensor and press Enter. An L should
display.
v Upper-bin paper sensor
v PCB asm., Finisher
v Cabling P/J250, P/J293,
P/J292, P/J264
Do you see an H when the sensor is blocked and an L when the
sensor is unblocked?
Check the upper-bin full sensor:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the upper bin, letting it rest on the middle tray, leaving the
cables connected. See “Bin Asm., Upper, Finisher” on page 952.
4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6 on page 185.
Go to step 7 on page 185.
You may have an
intermittent problem. Reseat
cable connections and verify
operations.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1225.
d. Block the upper-bin full sensor and press Enter. An H should display.
e. Unblock the upper-bin full sensor and press Enter. An L should
display.
Do you see an H when the sensor is blocked and an L when the
sensor is unblocked?
5.
a. Reinstall the upper bin.
b. Print a configuration page job to the upper finisher bin
(OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper Menu).
Do you still have an error code 032?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 184
Table 46. Error Code 032 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
6.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a configuration page
to the upper finisher bin (OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper Menu).
v Upper-bin full sensor
v Upper-bin paper sensor
v PCB asm., Finisher
v Harness, bin lift
v Harness, printer
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 185
033—Output Full / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 47, 033—Output Full / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher)
Problem—The MCU logic detected the middle bin full sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Middle-bin full sensor
06L9993
5181–26, p. 1273
p. 743
p. 934
Middle-bin paper sensor
11L5369
5181–5, p. 1273
p. 743
p. 950
Bin asm.
11L5380
5181–1, p. 1273
Harness, bin lift
11L5457
5031–17, p. 1234
PCB asm., Finisher
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
Harness, printer
11L5460
5031–20, p. 1234
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 942
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
Table 47. Error Code 033 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Remove all paper from the finisher bins.
b. Power off the printer.
c. Power on the printer.
Yes
No
Go to step 3 on page 187.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3 on page 187.
Problem solved.
Do you still have error code 033?
2.
Print a configuration page job to the middle finisher bin
(OUTPUT=FINISHR2 on the Paper Menu).
Do you have an error code 033?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 186
Table 47. Error Code 033 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the middle-bin paper sensor:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Ensure that the middle-bin paper sensor and actuator are intact and
working correctly.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1220.
3.
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
to the middle finisher bin
(OUTPUT=FINISHR2 on the
Paper Menu).
d. Block the middle-bin paper sensor and press Enter. An H should
display.
e. Unblock the middle-bin paper sensor and press Enter. An L should
display.
v Middle-bin paper sensor
v PCB asm., Finisher
v Cabling P/J856, P/J895,
P/J872, P/J894
Do you see an H when the sensor is blocked and an L when the
sensor is unblocked?
Check the middle-bin full sensor:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the middle bin, letting it rest on the lower tray, leaving the
cables connected. See “Bin Asm., Middle, Finisher” on page 942.
Go to step 5 on page 188.
Go to step 6 on page 188.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1432 to raise the middle bin to its highest position.
4.
d. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1226.
e. Block the middle-bin full sensor and press Enter. An H should display.
f. Unblock the middle-bin full sensor and press Enter. An L should
display.
Do you see an H when the sensor is blocked and an L when the
sensor is unblocked?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 187
Table 47. Error Code 033 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
a. Reinstall the middle bin.
b. Print a configuration page job to the middle finisher bin
(OUTPUT=FINISHR2 on the Paper Menu).
Yes
Go to step 7.
No
You may have an
intermittent problem. Reseat
cable connections and verify
operations.
Do you still have an error code 033?
6.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a configuration page
to the middle finisher bin (OUTPUT=FINISHR2 on the Paper Menu).
v Middle-bin full sensor
v Middle-bin paper sensor
v PCB asm., Finisher
v Harness, bin lift
v Harness, printer
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 188
034—Output Full / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 48, 034—Output Full / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher)
Problem—The MCU logic detected the lower bin full sensor actuated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Lower-bin full sensor
06L9993
5171–9, p. 1268
p. 743
p. 934
Lower-bin paper sensor
11L5369
5171–5, p. 1268
p. 743
p. 936
Bin asm.
11L5367
5171–1, p. 1268
Harness, bin lift
11L5457
5031–17, p. 1234
PCB asm., Finisher
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
Harness, printer
11L5460
5031–20, p. 1234
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 923
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
Table 48. Error Code 034 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Remove all paper from the finisher bins.
b. Power off the printer.
c. Power on the printer.
Yes
No
Go to step 3 on page 190.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3 on page 190.
Problem solved.
Do you still have an error code 034?
2.
Print a configuration page job to the lower finisher bin
(OUTPUT=FINISHR3 on the Paper Menu).
Do you have an error code 034?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 189
Table 48. Error Code 034 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the lower-bin paper sensor:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Ensure that the lower-bin paper sensor and actuator are intact and
working correctly.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1221.
3.
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
to the lower finisher bin
(OUTPUT=FINISHR3 on the
Paper Menu).
d. Block the lower-bin paper sensor and press Enter. An H should
display.
e. Unblock the lower-bin paper sensor and press Enter. An L should
display.
v Lower-bin paper sensor
v PCB asm., Finisher
v Cabling P/J859, P/J888,
P/J874, P/J894
Do you see an H when the sensor is blocked and an L when the
sensor is unblocked?
Check the lower-bin full sensor:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the lower bin, leaving the cables connected. See “Bin Asm.,
Middle, Finisher” on page 942.
4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6 on page 191.
Go to step 7 on page 191.
You may have an
intermittent problem. Reseat
cable connections and verify
operations.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1227.
d. Block the lower-bin full sensor and press Enter. An H should display.
e. Unblock the lower-bin full sensor and press Enter. An L should
display.
Do you see an H when the sensor is blocked and an L when the
sensor is unblocked?
5.
a. Reinstall the lower bin.
b. Print a configuration page job to the lower finisher bin
(OUTPUT=FINISHR3 on the Paper Menu).
Do you still have an error code 034?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 190
Table 48. Error Code 034 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
6.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a configuration page
to the lower finisher bin (OUTPUT=FINISHR3 on the Paper Menu).
v Lower-bin full sensor
v Lower-bin paper sensor
v PCB asm., Finisher
v Harness, bin lift
v Harness, printer
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 191
041—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 1 (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 49, 041—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 1 (Printer)
Problem—The MCU logic detected tray 1 open or missing.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Tray asm.
90H3538
1022–1, p. 1145
p. 631
Switch asm., paper size
90H3624
1032–1, p. 1149
p. 740
Harness, size and exit
90H4216
700–19, p. 1124
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Table 49. Error Code 041 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Remove tray 1.
b. Inspect tray 1 for damage. Make sure the cassette cable and the
actuator (1021-4 and 1021-3 on p. 1143) are intact and working
correctly.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 4 on page 193.
Go to step 4 on page 193.
Go to step 3.
Replace the tray in tray 2.
Go to step 4 on page 193.
Is tray 1 free of damage?
2.
a. Swap tray 1 with tray 2.
b. Print a configuration page from tray 1 (SOURCE=TRAY 1 on the
Paper Menu).
Do you still have error code 041?
3.
Print a configuration page from tray 2 (SOURCE=TRAY 2 on the Paper
Menu).
Do you have error code 042?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 192
Table 49. Error Code 041 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
4.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a configuration page
from tray 1 (SOURCE=TRAY 1 on the Paper Menu). Make sure tray switching is off (TRAY SWITCH = OFF on the Paper Menu).
v Switch asm., paper size
v Harness, size and exit
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 193
042—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 2 (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 50, 042—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 2 (Printer)
Problem—The MCU logic detected tray 2 open or missing.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Tray asm.
90H3538
1022–1, p. 1145
p. 631
Switch asm., paper size
90H3624
1042–1, p. 1159
p. 740
Harness, rear
90H4210
700–13, p. 1124
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Table 50. Error Code 042 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Remove tray 2.
b. Inspect tray 2 for damage. Make sure the cassette cable and the
actuator (1021-4 and 1021-3 on p. 1143) are intact and working
correctly.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 4 on page 195.
Go to step 4 on page 195.
Go to step 3.
Replace the tray in tray 1.
Go to step 4 on page 195.
Is tray 2 free of damage?
2.
a. Swap tray 2 with tray 1.
b. Print a configuration page from tray 2 (SOURCE=TRAY 2 on the
Paper Menu).
Do you still have error code 042?
3.
Print a configuration page from tray 1 (SOURCE=TRAY 1 on the Paper
Menu).
Do you have error code 041?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 194
Table 50. Error Code 042 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
4.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a configuration page
from tray 2 (SOURCE=TRAY2 on the Paper Menu). Make sure tray switching is off (TRAY SWITCH = OFF on the Paper Menu).
v Switch asm., paper size
v Harness, rear
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 195
043—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 3 (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 51, 043—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 3 (Input Unit)
Problem—The MCU logic detected tray 3 open or missing.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Tray asm.
90H3538
1022–1, p. 1145
p. 631
PCB, tray 3 paper size
90H4233
4030–7, p. 1200
p. 745
Harness, tray 3 and 4
06L9961
4020–22, p. 1194
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Table 51. Error Code 043 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Remove tray 3.
b. Inspect tray 3 for damage. Make sure the cassette cable and the
actuator (1021-4 and 1021-3 on p. 1143) are intact and working
correctly.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 4 on page 197.
Go to step 4 on page 197.
Go to step 3.
Replace the tray in tray 1.
Go to step 4 on page 197.
Is tray 3 free of damage?
2.
a. Swap tray 3 with tray 1.
b. Print a configuration page from tray 3 (SOURCE=TRAY 3 on the
Paper Menu).
Do you still have error code 043?
3.
Print a configuration page from tray 1 (SOURCE=TRAY 1 on the Paper
Menu).
Do you have error code 041?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 196
Table 51. Error Code 043 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
4.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a configuration page
from tray 3 (SOURCE=TRAY3 on the Paper Menu). Make sure tray switching is off (TRAY SWITCH = OFF on the Paper Menu).
v PCB, tray 3 paper size
v Harness, tray 3 and 4
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 197
044—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 4 (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 52, 044—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 4 (Input Unit)
Problem—The MCU logic detected tray 4 open or missing.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Tray 4
06L9799
4063–1, p. 1212
p. 631
PCB, tray 4 and 5 paper size
90H4234
4030–8, p. 1200
p. 745
Harness, tray 3 and 4
06L9961
4020–22, p. 1194
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
PCB, Input unit
90H4230
p. 865
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 884
Table 52. Error Code 044 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Remove tray 4.
b. Inspect tray 4 for damage. Make sure the end sheet indication sheet
(4063-18 on p. 1212) is intact and working correctly.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Replace tray 4 (see “Tray 4,
Input Unit” on page 884).
Go to step 4 on page 199.
Go to step 3.
Is tray 4 free of damage?
2.
a. Make sure tray 4 is removed.
b. Depress the switches on the PCB, tray 4 paper size, while looking at
the display.
Do you still have an error code 044?
3.
Readjust the Tray 4 guide (paper end) and close the tray, making sure it
has been seated completely.
Replace tray 4 (see “Tray 4, Problem solved.
Input Unit” on page 884).
Do you still have error code 044?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 198
Table 52. Error Code 044 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
4.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a configuration page
from tray 4 (SOURCE=TRAY4 on the Paper Menu). Make sure tray switching is off (TRAY SWITCH = OFF on the Paper Menu).
v PCB, tray 4 and 5 paper size
v Harness, tray 3 and 4
v PCB, Input unit
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 199
045—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 5 (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 53, 045—Tray Missing / Replace Tray 5 (Input Unit)
Problem—The MCU logic detected tray 5 open or missing.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Tray 5
06L9800
4074–1, p. 1222
p. 631
p. 898
PCB, tray 4 and 5 paper size
90H4234
4030–8, p. 1200
p. 745
Harness, tray 5
06L9960
4020–21, p. 1194
PCB, Input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 865
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Table 53. Error Code 045 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
a. Remove tray 3.
b. Open tray 5.
c. Inspect tray 5 for damage. Make sure the paper end guide slide sheet
indication sheet (4074-18 on p. 1222) is intact and working correctly.
Replace tray 5 (see “Tray 5,
Input Unit” on page 898).
Is tray 5 free of damage?
2.
a. Make sure tray 5 is removed.
b. Depress the switches on the PCB, tray 5 paper size, while looking at
the display.
Go to step 4 on page 201.
Go to step 3 on page 201.
Do you still have an error code 045?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 200
Table 53. Error Code 045 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Readjust the guide (paper end) and close the tray, making sure it has
been seated completely.
Do you still have error code 045?
4.
Yes
No
Replace tray 5 (see “Tray 5, Problem solved.
Input Unit” on page 898). If a
problem remains, go to step
4.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a configuration page
from tray 5 (SOURCE=TRAY5 on the Paper Menu). Make sure tray switching is off (TRAY SWITCH = OFF on the Paper Menu).
v PCB, tray 4 and 5 paper size
v Harness, tray 5
v PCB, Input unit
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 201
046—Aux-Env. Tray / Replace Tray (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 54, 046—Aux-Env. Tray / Replace Tray (Printer)
Problem—The MCU logic detected the auxiliary tray or envelope feeder either missing or not properly seated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Aux. tray feeder asm.
06L9946
1012–7, p. 1139
Envelope feeder asm.
90H3542
3000–0, p. 1182
p. 631
p. 838
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Aux. tray and duplex support
06L9947
1012–99, p. 1139
p. 783
Harness, drawer asm.
90H3649
1012–4, p. 1139
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
Table 54. Error Code 046 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Reseat the auxiliary tray feeder asm. or the envelope feeder:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the duplex unit. See “Duplex Asm.” on page 834.
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 203.
Problem solved.
c. Remove and re-install the auxiliary tray feeder asm. See “Auxiliary
Tray and Mounting Bracket, Printer” on page 783 or “Envelope
Feeder” on page 838. Make sure that the current connection is made
with the printer.
d. Re-install the duplex unit.
e. Power on the printer.
Do you still have an error code 046?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 202
Table 54. Error Code 046 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
2.
Actions and Questions
Replace the auxiliary tray feeder asm. (see “Duplex Asm.” on page 834)
or the envelope feeder (see “Envelope Feeder” on page 838).
Yes
Go to step 3.
No
Problem solved.
Do you still have an error code 046?
3.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, power on the printer. If message 046 does not appear, the
problem is solved.
v Cabling P/J 604, P/J 603, P/J 403
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
v Aux. tray and duplex support
v Harness, drawer asm.
v Harness, bottom
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 203
056—Tray 1 / Lift Failure (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 55 on page 205, 056—Tray 1 / Lift Failure (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed tray 1 did not raise into position.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Tray 1 lift motor (M1)
90H3625
1032–2, p. 1149
p. 714
Sensor, tray 1 paper level
63H2477
1032–5, p. 1149
p. 740
Tray asm.
90H3538
1022–1, p. 1145
p. 631
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
Harness, registration
90H4215
700–18, p. 1124
Removal
Procedures
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 204
Table 55. Error Code 056 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the Tray 1 lift motor (M1):
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the rear cover (see “Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Tray 1 lift motor
v MCU PCB
v Harness, bottom
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0718 (Tray 1 lift motor, M1).
Note: Do not press Enter to start the test yet!
d.
e.
f.
g.
Remove paper from tray 1.
Close tray 1.
Press Enter to run test 0718.
Listen for M1 running.
Does M1 run?
Slowly slide out tray 1.
2.
3.
Go to step 3.
Replace tray 1.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Can you hear the tray 1 bottom plate drop as you slide out the tray?
Check the Tray 1 paper level sensor:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Unload paper from Tray 1. Leave Tray 1 open.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0713 (tray 1 paper level sensor).
v
v
v
v
d. Press Enter, an H should display.
e. Close Tray 1 and then press Enter, an L should display.
Tray 1 paper level sensor
Cabling P/J103, P/J 459
MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
Harness, bottom
Does an L display when Tray 1 is closed, and an H with Tray 1
open?
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
4.
5.
Do you still have error code 056?
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 205
057—Tray 2 / Lift Failure (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 56, 057—Tray 2 / Lift Failure (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed tray 2 did not raise into position in feeder 2.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Tray 2 lift motor (M2)
90H3625
1042–2, p. 1159
p. 714
Sensor, tray 2 paper level
63H2477
1042–5, p. 1159
p. 740
Tray asm.
90H3538
1022–1, p. 1145
p. 631
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, rear
90H4210
Removal
Procedures
p. 813
700–13, p. 1124
Table 56. Error Code 057 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the Tray 2 lift motor (M2):
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the rear cover (see “Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
1.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0719 (Tray 2 lift motor, M2).
Note: Do not press Enter to start the test yet!
d.
e.
f.
g.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 207.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Tray 2 lift motor (M2)
v MCU PCB
v Harness, rear
Remove paper from tray 2.
Close tray 2.
Press Enter to run test 0719.
Listen for M2 running.
Does M2 run?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 206
Table 56. Error Code 057 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Slowly slide out tray 2.
2.
3.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Replace tray 2.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Can you hear the tray 2 bottom plate drop as you slide out the tray?
Check the Tray 2 paper level sensor:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Unload paper from Tray 2. Leave Tray 2 open.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0714 (tray 2 paper level sensor).
v
v
v
v
d. Press Enter, an H should display.
e. Close Tray 2 and then press Enter, an L should display.
Tray 2 paper level sensor
Cabling P/J141, P/J 408
MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
Harness, rear
Does an L display when Tray 2 is closed, and an H with Tray 2
open?
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
4.
5.
Do you still have error code 057?
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 207
058—Tray 3 / Lift Failure (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 57 on page 209, 058—Tray 3 / Lift Failure (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that the tray 3 paper level sensor did not activate within the specified time after the
tray 3 lift motor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Tray 3 lift motor (M3)
90H3625
4030–1, p. 1200
p. 716
p. 861
Sensor, tray 3 paper level
63H2477
4030–4, p. 1200
p. 742
p. 862
Tray asm.
90H3538
1022–1, p. 1145
p. 631
PCB, input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 865
Harness, tray 3 and 4
06L9961
4020–22, p. 1194
Harness, connector input unit
06L9959
4020–20, p. 1194
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 208
Table 57. Error Code 058 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the Tray 3 lift motor (M3):
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the input unit rear cover (see “Rear Cover, Input Unit” on
page 847).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Tray 3 lift motor (M3)
v MCU PCB
v Input unit PCB
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0720 (tray 3 lift motor, M3).
Note: Do not press Enter to start the test yet!
d.
e.
f.
g.
Remove paper from tray 3.
Close tray 3.
Press Enter to run test 0720.
Listen for M3 running.
Does M3 run?
Slowly slide out tray 3.
2.
Replace tray 3.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Can you hear the tray 3 bottom plate drop as you slide out the tray?
Check the Tray 3 paper level sensor:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Unload paper from Tray 3. Leave Tray 3 open.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0715 (tray 3 paper level sensor).
3.
Go to step 3.
v Tray 3 paper level sensor
v Cabling P/J112, P/J 483
v Harness, connector input
unit
v Harness, tray 3 and 4
v Input unit PCB
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
d. Press Enter, an H should display.
e. Close Tray 3 and then press Enter, an L should display.
Does an L display when Tray 3 is closed, and an H with Tray 3
open?
Replace the input unit PCB (see “PCB, Input Unit” on page 865).
4.
Go to step 5 on page 210.
Problem solved.
Do you still have error code 058?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 209
Table 57. Error Code 058 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
5.
6.
Do you still have error code 058?
Yes
No
If a problem remains, go to
step 6.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 210
059—Tray 4 / Lift Failure (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 58 on page 212, 059—Tray 4 / Lift Failure (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that the tray 4 paper level sensor did not activate within the specified time after the
tray 4 lift motor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Tray 4 lift motor (M4)
90H4235
4030–9, p. 1200
p. 716
p. 861
Sensor, tray 4 paper level
63H2477
4030–4, p. 1200
p. 742
p. 862
Tray 4
06L9799
4063–1, p. 1212
p. 631
p. 884
PCB, input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 865
Harness, tray 3 and 4
06L9961
4020–22, p. 1194
Harness, connector input unit
06L9959
4020–20, p. 1194
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 211
Table 58. Error Code 059 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the Tray 4 lift motor (M4):
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the input unit rear cover (see “Rear Cover, Input Unit” on
page 847).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
v
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0721 (tray 4 lift motor, M4).
Note: Do not press Enter to start the test yet!
d.
e.
f.
g.
Remove paper from tray 4.
Close tray 4.
Press Enter to run test 0721.
Listen for M4 running.
Tray 4 lift motor (M4)
MCU PCB
Input unit PCB
Harness, tray 3 and 4
Input unit connector
harness
Does M4 run?
Slowly slide out tray 4.
2.
3.
Go to step 3.
Replace tray 4 (see “Tray 4,
Input Unit” on page 884).
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Can you hear the tray 4 bottom plate drop as you slide out the tray?
Check the Tray 4 paper level sensor:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Unload paper from Tray 4. Leave Tray 4 open.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0716 (tray 4 paper level sensor).
v Tray 4 paper level sensor
v Harness, tray 3 and 4
v Harness, connector input
unit
v Input unit PCB
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
d. Press Enter, an H should display.
e. Close Tray 4 and then press Enter, an L should display.
Does an L display when Tray 4 is closed, and an H with Tray 4
open?
Replace the input unit PCB (see “PCB, Input Unit” on page 865).
4.
Go to step 5 on page 213.
Problem solved.
Do you still have error code 059?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 212
Table 58. Error Code 059 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
5.
6.
Do you still have error code 059?
Yes
No
If a problem remains, go to
step 6.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 213
060—Tray 5 / Lift Failure (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 59 on page 215, 060—Tray 5 / Lift Failure (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that the tray 5 paper level sensor did not activate within the specified time after the
tray 5 lift motor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Tray 5 lift motor (M5)
90H4235
4030–9, p. 1200
p. 716
p. 861
Sensor, tray 5 paper level
63H2477
4040–3, p. 1202
p. 742
p. 862
Tray 5
06L9800
4074–1, p. 1222
p. 631
p. 898
PCB, input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 865
Harness, tray 5
06L9960
4020–21, p. 1194
Harness, connector input unit
06L9959
4020–20, p. 1194
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 214
Table 59. Error Code 060 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the Tray 5 lift motor (M5):
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the input unit rear cover (see “Rear Cover, Input Unit” on
page 847).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
v
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0722 (tray 5 lift motor, M5).
Note: Do not press Enter to start the test yet!
d.
e.
f.
g.
Remove paper from tray 5.
Close tray 5.
Press Enter to run test 0722.
Listen for M5 running.
Tray 5 lift motor (M5)
Input unit PCB
MCU PCB
Harness, tray 5
Input unit connector
harness
Does M5 run?
Slowly slide out tray 5.
2.
Replace tray 5 (see “Tray 5,
Input Unit” on page 898).
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Can you hear the tray 5 bottom plate drop as you slide out the tray?
Check the Tray 5 paper level sensor:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Unload paper from Tray 5. Leave Tray 5 open.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0717 (tray 5 paper level sensor).
3.
Go to step 3.
v Tray 5 paper level sensor
v Harness, tray 5
v Harness, connector input
unit
v Input unit PCB
v MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
d. Press Enter, an H should display.
e. Close Tray 5 and then press Enter, an L should display.
Does an L display when Tray 5 is closed, and an H with Tray 5
open?
If a problem remains, go to
step 4.
Replace the input unit PCB (see “PCB, Input Unit” on page 865).
4.
Go to step 5 on page 216.
Problem solved.
Do you still have error code 060?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 215
Table 59. Error Code 060 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
5.
6.
Do you still have error code 060?
Yes
No
If a problem remains, go to
step 6.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 216
071—Cover Open / Close Cover C (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 60, 071—Cover Open / Close Cover C (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the input unit left cover open.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Input unit left cover interlock switch
90H3364
4012–9, p. 1192
Input unit left cover
06L9967
4012–1, p. 1192
PCB, Input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
Connector, Input unit
06L9959
4020–20, p. 1194
4020–22, p. 1194
Removal
Procedures
Locations
p. 742
p. 860
p. 844
p. 745
p. 865
Harness, tray 3 and 4
06L9961
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Table 60. Error Code 071 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open and close the input unit left cover.
1.
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Go to step 3.
Replace the input unit left
cover interlock switch (see
“Interlock Switch, Left Cover,
Input Unit” on page 860).
Go to step 4 on page 218.
Replace the left cover (see
“Left Cover Asm., Input Unit”
on page 844).
Do you still have error code 071?
Inspect the input unit left cover interlock switch for damage, such as a
broken or missing spring or a broken plunger.
Is the switch intact and free of damage?
3.
Open and close the left cover while observing the action of the left cover
interlock switch.
Is the left cover interlock actuator good?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 217
Table 60. Error Code 071 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the input unit left cover interlock switch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0110 (Area C cover interlock switch).
4.
b. Press and hold down the input unit left cover interlock switch plunger
and press Enter. An L should display.
c. Release the input unit left cover interlock switch actuator and press
Enter. An H should display.
Did you see an L when the left cover interlock switch was pressed
and an H when it was released?
5.
Yes
No
The problem could be
intermittent. Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Input unit left cover
interlock switch
v Cabling P/J114, P/J482,
P/J480, P/J613, P/J406
v Input unit PCB
v MCU PCB
v Harness, tray 3 and 4
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 218
072—Cover Open / Close Cover A (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 61, 072—Cover Open / Close Cover A (Printer)
Problem—the left cover is closed, but MCU logic sensed the left cover interlock switch indicated the cover open.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Left cover interlock switch
90H4203
1110–10, p. 1165
p. 740
Left upper cover, printer
90H3670
120–3, p. 1097
Harness, interlock switch
90H4217
700–20, p. 1124
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 772
p. 813
Table 61. Error Code 072 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open and close the printer upper left cover.
1.
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Do you still have an error code 072?
Check the left cover interlock switch:
Go to step 3 on page 220.
a. Remove the rear cover.
b. Inspect the left cover interlock switch for damage, such as a broken
or missing spring or a broken plunger.
c. Ensure that the screw holding the left cover interlock switch bracket is
tight.
Replace the left cover
interlock switch.
Is the switch intact and free of damage?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 219
Table 61. Error Code 072 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Open and close the printer left upper cover while observing the action of
the left upper cover actuator against the interlock switch spring.
3.
b. Press and hold down the left cover interlock switch actuator and
press Enter. An L should display.
c. Release the left cover interlock switch actuator and press Enter. An H
should display.
Did you see an L when the left cover interlock switch was pressed
and an H when it was released?
5.
No
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Is the left cover interlock actuator pressing against the interlock
switch spring and is the interlock switch pressing against the
interlock switch actuator?
Check the printer upper left cover interlock switch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0101 (Area A cover interlock switch).
4.
Yes
v Left upper cover
v Interlock switch spring
The problem could be
intermittent. Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Left cover interlock switch
v Cabling F5231, F5230,
P/J232, P/J233, P/J458
v MCU PCB
v Harness, interlock switch
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 220
073—Cover Open / Close Cover B (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 62, 073—Cover Open / Close Cover B (Printer)
Problem—the lower left cover is closed, but MCU logic sensed the lower left cover interlock switch indicated the
cover open.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Lower left cover interlock switch
90H3364
1041–15, p. 1156
Lower left cover, printer
90H3662¹
(1041–1)
1041–2, p. 1156
Harness, interlock/sensor
06L9949
1041–22, p. 1156
700–13, p. 1124
Removal
Procedures
Locations
p. 631
p. 770
Harness, rear
90H4210
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 62. Error Code 073 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open and close the printer lower left cover.
1.
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Go to step 3.
Replace the lower left cover
interlock switch.
Do you still have error code 073?
Inspect the left cover interlock switch for damage, such as a broken or
missing spring or a broken plunger.
Is the switch intact and free of damage?
3.
Inspect the lower left cover for damage that may prevent the cover from
operating the interlock when the cover closes.
Is the lower left cover damaged?
Replace the lower left cover Go to step 4 on page 222.
(see “Left Lower Cover,
Printer” on page 770).
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 221
Table 62. Error Code 073 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the printer lower left cover interlock switch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0111 (Area B cover interlock switch).
4.
b. Press and hold down the lower left cover interlock switch plunger and
press Enter. An L should display.
c. Release the lower left cover interlock switch plunger and press Enter.
An H should display.
Did you see an L when the lower left cover interlock switch was
pressed and an H when it was released?
5.
Yes
No
The problem could be
intermittent. Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Lower left cover interlock
switch
v Cabling P/J144, P/J607,
P/J408
v MCU PCB
v Harness, interlock/sensor
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 222
210—Paper Jam / Area A, Aux Tray (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 63, 210—Paper Jam / Area A, Aux Tray (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper fed from the auxiliary tray, the registration sensor did not activate
within the specified time after the auxiliary tray feed clutch activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Aux. tray feed asm.
06L9946
1012–7, p. 1139
Registration sensor
90H3665
920–7, p. 1130
Harness, registration sensor
90H4215
700–18, p. 1124
Paper path #1 sensor
90H3665
1031–12, p. 1147
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
Harness, drawer asm.
90H3649
1012–4, p. 1139
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 740
p. 740
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 63. Error Code 210 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper in the auxiliary tray.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 224.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 223
Table 63. Error Code 210 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the auxiliary tray feed roller:
a. Run a configuration page test print from the auxiliary tray
(SOURCE=AUXTRAY on the Paper Menu).
b. Observe the paper as it feeds from the auxiliary tray.
v
v
v
v
3.
Did the leading edge of the paper reach the registration sensor?
Check the registration sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0805 (registration sensor).
4.
b. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
unblocked?
Go to step 5 on page 225.
Auxiliary tray feed asm.
Harness, drawer asm.
Harness, bottom
MCU PCB (100-110 V ac)
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Registration sensor
v Cabling P/J 100, P/J 459,
v Harness, registration
sensor
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 224
Table 63. Error Code 210 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 0806 (paper path #1 sensor).
5.
Yes
No
Go to step 6.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
v
v
v
v
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
unblocked?
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
6.
7.
Do you still have error code 210?
If a problem remains, go to
step 7.
Paper path #1 sensor
Cabling P/J 101, P/J 403
Harness, bottom
MCU PCB
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 225
211—Paper Jam / Area A, Env. Feed (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 64 on page 227, 211—Paper Jam / Area A, Env. Feed (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the registration sensor did not activate within the specified time after the envelope
feed clutch activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Envelope feeder asm.
90H3542¹
(3000–0)
3000–0, p. 1182
p. 631
Paper path #1 sensor
90H3665
1031–12, p. 1147
p. 740
Registration sensor
90H3665
920–7, p. 1130
p. 740
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
Harness, registration sensor
90H4215
700–18, p. 1124
Harness, drawer asm.
90H3649
1012–4, p. 1139
Removal
Procedures
p. 838
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 226
Table 64. Error Code 211 (Envelope Feeder) Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Inspect the envelopes.
2.
Are the envelopes wrinkled or damaged?
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 0805 (registration sensor).
3.
Check the items listed under Go to step 3.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the envelopes.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
v Registration sensor
v Harness registration
sensor
v MCU PCB
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
unblocked?
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 0806 (paper path #1 sensor).
4.
b. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
unblocked?
Go to step 5 on page 228.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Paper path #1 sensor
Cabling P/J101, P/J 403
Harness bottom
MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 227
Table 64. Error Code 211 (Envelope Feeder) Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the envelope feeder.
5.
6.
Do you still have error code 211?
Yes
No
Replace the MCU PCB (see Problem solved.
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
page 813). If a problem
remains, go to step 6.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 228
212—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 65, 212—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper fed from tray 4, the paper path #1 sensor did not activate within
the specified time after the paper path #2 sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Paper path #1 sensor
90H3665
1031–12, p. 1147
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
Kit, tray 2 clutch
90H3642
1044–97, p. 1163
Kit, tray 2 separation and feed
90H3644
1043–98, p. 1161
Kit, tray 2 feed gears
06L9945
1043–99, p. 1161
Kit, feed drive
90H3645
320–99, p. 1108
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 740
p. 813
Table 65. Error Code 212 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 230.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 229
Table 65. Error Code 212 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path. Replace the Tray 2
separation and feed kit.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the paper path #1 sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0806 (paper path #1 sensor).
3.
b. Open the left upper cover.
c. Insert a small piece of paper into the paper path #1 sensor to
interrupt the sensor beam. Press Enter. An H should display.
d. Remove the paper and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
not blocked?
1. Remove the printer upper rear cover and lower rear cover.
2. Open the printer lower left cover to see the tray 2 feed drive rollers
and separation rollers.
3. Inspect the feed drive for tray 2.
4.
Is the drive working correctly?
v
v
v
v
Paper path #1 sensor
Cabling P/J 101, P/J 403
Harness, bottom
MCU PCB
Replace the MCU PCB (see Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
replacement, determine if
page 813).
the problem is fixed.
v Kit, tray 2 separation and
feed
v Kit, tray 2 feed gears
v Kit, feed drive
v Kit, tray 2 clutch
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 230
213—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 66, 213—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper fed from tray 5, the paper path #1 sensor did not activate within
the specified time after the paper path #2 sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Paper path #1 sensor
90H3665
1031–12, p. 1147
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
Kit, tray 2 clutch
90H3642
1044–97, p. 1163
Kit, tray 2 separation and feed
90H3644
1043–98, p. 1161
Kit, tray 2 feed gears
06L9945
1043–99, p. 1161
Kit, feed drive
90H3645
320–99, p. 1108
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 740
p. 813
Table 66. Error Code 213 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 232.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 231
Table 66. Error Code 213 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path. Replace the Tray 2
separation and feed kit.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the paper path #1 sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0806 (paper path #1 sensor).
3.
b. Open the left upper cover.
c. Insert a small piece of paper into the paper path #1 sensor to
interrupt the sensor beam. Press Enter. An H should display.
d. Remove the paper and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
not blocked?
1. Remove the printer upper rear cover and lower rear cover.
2. Open the printer lower left cover to see the tray 2 feed drive rollers
and separation rollers.
3. Inspect the feed drive for tray 2.
4.
Is the drive working correctly?
v
v
v
v
Paper path #1 sensor
Cabling P/J 101, P/J 403
Harness, bottom
MCU PCB
Replace the MCU PCB (see Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
replacement, determine if
page 813).
the problem is fixed.
v Kit, tray 2 separation and
feed
v Kit, tray 2 feed gears
v Kit, feed drive
v Kit, tray 2 clutch
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 232
214—Paper Jam / Area B, Tray 3 (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 67 on page 234, 214—Paper Jam / Area B, Tray 3 (Input Unit)
Problem—The MCU sensed the paper path #2 sensor did not activate within the specified amount of time when
paper was fed from tray 3.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Paper path #2 sensor
90H3665
1041–19, p. 1156
p. 740
Kit, feed, pick, separation
06L9941
4052–6, p. 1206
Kit, tray 3 separation and feed
90H4237
4051–99, p. 1204
Kit, tray 3 feed clutch
06L9962
4052–99, p. 1206
Harness, tray 3 and 4
06L9961
4020–22, p. 1194
PCB, Input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 865
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Connector, Input unit
06L9959
4020–20, p. 1194
Harness, interlock/sensor
06L9949
1041–22, p. 1156
Harness, rear
90H4210
700–13, p. 1124
Harness, tray
90H4211
700–14, p. 1124
Kit, tray 3 feed gears
11L5499
4051–98, p. 1204
Motor, Input unit feed (M6)
90H4228
4020–1, p. 1194
Belt, input unit drive
90H4229
4020–2, p. 1194
Input unit left cover
06L9967
4012–1, p. 1192
Kit, Input unit drive gear
90H4231
4020–99, p. 1194
p. 636
p. 716
p. 844
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 233
Table 67. Error Code 214 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 9 on page 235.
Go to step 5 on page 235.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper, burrs, or other foreign material
(especially near rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
3.
Check the feed roller:
a. Remove the input unit rear cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0802 (Input unit feed motor, M6).
Is the gear on the tray 3 feed clutch turning?
Check the paper path #2 sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0807 (paper path #2 sensor).
4.
b. Open the left lower cover.
c. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
d. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
not blocked?
v
v
v
v
v
v
Paper path #2 sensor
Input unit PCB
MCU PCB
Harness, interlock/sensor
Harness, rear
Cabling P/J 143, P/J 603,
P/J 408
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 234
Table 67. Error Code 214 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the Tray 3 feed clutch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0814 (tray 3 (Input unit) feed clutch).
5.
Yes
No
Go to step 6.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Remove the input unit rear cover.
c. Touch the tray 3 feed clutch, and press Enter.
v
v
v
v
v
Does the feed clutch activate?
6.
Replace the rollers (kit, feed, pick, and separation) and print a
configuration page test print (see “Printing Test Prints” on page 587).
Kit, tray 3 feed clutch
Input unit PCB
MCU PCB
Cabling P/J 211, P/J 482
Harness, tray 3 and 4
Go to step 7.
Problem solved.
Go to step 8.
Problem solved.
Go to step 10.
Problem solved.
Check that the gear train is
working properly. Then
replace as necessary:
Repair/replace the following:
Do you still have an error code 214?
Replace the HCI PCB.
7.
Do you still have an error code 214?
Replace the MCU PCB.
8.
Do you still have an error code 214?
Check the input feed motor:
a. Remove the input unit rear cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0802 (input unit feed motor (M6)).
9.
Does the input unit feed motor (M6) run?
v Belt, input unit drive
v Kit, Input unit drive gear
v Kit, tray 3 feed gears
v Motor, Input unit feed
(M6)
If the problem remains, go
to step 7.
If the problem remains, go
to step 7.
10.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 235
220—Paper Error / Source Tray, A
Link to—diagnostic Table 68, 220—Paper Error / Source Tray, Area A (Printer)
Problem—Paper arrived at the registration sensor correctly, however, MCU logic sensed the registration sensor
did not go inactive within the specified time after paper was fed from the registration roll.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Aux. tray feeder asm.
06L9946
1012–7, p. 1139
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Left upper cover asm.
90H3670
120–3, p. 1097
p. 772
Clutch asm., registration
90H3666
920–1, p. 1130
Harness, exit, dc rear
90H4218
700–21, p. 1124
Separation roller assembly
90H3660
1031–1, p. 1147
Roller, registration
90H3667
920–3, p. 1130
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
p. 634
User’s Guide
Table 68. Error Code 220 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the paper path in all location areas (see Figure 2 on page 69) for Go to step 2 on page 237.
fragments of paper (especially near sensors), for burrs (small projections)
on components, and for worn, contaminated, or broken parts that may
cause jams or skewing.
Remove obstructions or
contamination from the
paper path.
Is the paper path free of contamination or obstructions?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 236
Table 68. Error Code 220 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
2.
3.
4.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 3.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Check the BTR:
Go to step 4.
a. Open the left upper cover.
b. Check that the BTR is correctly seated in the inlet transport chute and
that there is no physical damage to the chute.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Is the BTR seated correctly and is there no physical damage?
v BTR
v Left upper cover asm.
Check registration clutch:
a. Remove the rear cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0810 (registration clutch).
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Registration clutch
v Harness, exit dc rear
v MCU PCB
c. Touch the registration clutch and press Enter.
Does the registration clutch activate?
Run configuration page test prints from all trays including the auxiliary
tray.
Does error 220 occur only when you run configuration page test
prints from the auxiliary tray?
5.
Replace the auxiliary tray
feeder assembly.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v MCU PCB
v Separation roller
assembly
If a problem remains, go to
step 6.
6.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 237
221—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray 1 (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 69 on page 239, 221—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray 1 (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the registration sensor did not activate within the specified time after the tray 1 feed
clutch activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Kit, tray 1 feed clutch
90H3634
1034–97, p. 1154
p. 634
Registration sensor
90H3665
920–7, p. 1130
p. 740
Tray 1 feed roller
90H3639
1033–98, p. 1151
p. 735
Tray 1 pick roller
06L9941
1033–5, p. 1151
p. 735
Tray 1 separation roller
06L9941
1033–5, p. 1151
p. 735
Tray 1 feed roller
06L9941
1033–5, p. 1151
p. 735
Tray 1 feed asm.
90H3632
1034–5, p. 1154
p. 721
Harness, exit
90H4218
700–21, p. 1124
Harness, registration
90H4215
700–18, p. 1124
Kit, tray 1 feed gears
06L9942
1033–99, p. 1151
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, bottom
90H4212
Removal
Procedures
p. 813
700–15, p. 1124
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 238
Table 69. Error Code 221 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
3.
Check the Tray 1 feed clutch:
a. Remove the rear upper cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0812 (tray 1 feed clutch).
c. Touch the Tray 1 feed clutch while you press Enter.
Can you feel the Tray 1 feed clutch activate?
Check the registration sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0805 (registration sensor). If the jam occurred during a duplex
operation, enter diagnostic mode and run 0832 (registration sensor,
duplex).
4.
b. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
not blocked?
v Kit, tray 1 clutch
v Harness, exit
v MCU PCB
Replace the MCU PCB (see Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
replacement, determine if
page 813).
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Registration sensor
Cabling P/J100, P/J459
Harness, registration
MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 5 on page 240.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 239
Table 69. Error Code 221 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 240
222—Paper Jam / Area B, Tray 2 (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 70, 222—Paper Jam / Area B, Tray 2 (Printer)
Problem—The MCU logic sensed that paper path #1 sensor and the registration sensor did not activate within the
specified time after the tray 2 clutch activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Kit, feed rollers
06L9941
1044–6, p. 1163
Kit, tray 2 feed gears
06L9945
1043–99, p. 1161
Kit, tray 2 clutch
90H3642
1044–97, p. 1163
Kit, tray 2 separation and feed
90H3644
1043–98, p. 1161
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, rear
90H4210
700–13, p. 1124
Paper path #1 sensor
90H3665
1031–12, p. 1147
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
Registration sensor
90H3665
920–7, p. 1130
Harness, registration
90H4215
700–18, p. 1124
Removal
Procedures
p. 813
p. 740
p. 740
Table 70. Error Code 222 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in Tray 2.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 242.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 241
Table 70. Error Code 222 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper path:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 4.
Inspect the tray 2 feed
gears, feed rollers, and the
clutch asm. for damage.
Repair or replace as
necessary.
Go to step 5 on page 243.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 0801 (main drive motor, M10).
3.
b. Open cover B.
c. Look at the tray 2 feed roller in the cover B opening.
Is the tray 2 feed roller turning?
Check the Tray 2 feed clutch:
a. Remove the printer upper and lower rear covers.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0813 (tray 2 feed clutch).
4.
c. Touch the tray 2 feed clutch, and press Enter.
Does the feed clutch activate?
v
v
v
v
Kit, tray 2 clutch
Cabling P/J 240, P/J 408
MCU PCB
Harness, rear
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 242
Table 70. Error Code 222 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the paper path #1 sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0806 (paper path #1 sensor).
5.
Yes
Go to step 6.
b. Block the sensor and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should display.
6.
b. Block the sensor and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when the sensor is blocked, and an L display
when the sensor is unblocked?
7.
Replace the feed rollers (pick, feed, and separation) in tray 2 and print a
configuration page test print (see “Printing Test Prints” on page 587).
Do you still have an error code 222?
8.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Does an H display when the sensor is blocked, and an L display
when the sensor is unblocked?
Check the registration sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0805 (registration sensor).
No
Go to step 7.
Paper path #1 sensor
Cabling P/J101, P/J403
Harness, bottom
MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Registration sensor
Cabling P/J100, P/J459
Harness registration
MCU PCB
Replace the MCU PCB (see Problem solved.
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
page 813). If a problem
remains, go to step 8.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 243
223—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 71, 223—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper fed from tray 2 either the registration sensor or the paper path #1
sensor (but not both) did not activate within the specified time after the tray 2 feed clutch activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Registration sensor
90H3665
920–7, p. 1130
p. 740
Paper path #1 sensor
90H3665
1031–12, p. 1147
p. 740
Kit, tray 1 feed gears
06L9942
1033–99, p. 1151
Kit, Tray 1 feed roller
90H3639
1033–98, p. 1151
p. 735
Kit, tray 1 feed clutch
90H3634
1034–97, p. 1154
p. 634
Harness, registration
90H4215
700–18, p. 1124
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 71. Error Code 223 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 245.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 244
Table 71. Error Code 223 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 4.
Inspect the feed gears, feed
rollers, and the clutch asm.
for damage. Repair or
replace as necessary.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6 on page 246.
Replace the MCU PCB (see
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
page 813). If a problem
remains, go to step 7 on
page 246.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
3.
Check the feed roller:
a. Remove paper tray 1.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0801 (main motor, M10).
Does the feed roller rotate?
4.
Print a configuration page test print (see “Printing Test Prints” on
page 587).
Did the paper travel past the registration rollers?
Check the paper path #1 sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0806 (paper path #1 sensor).
5.
b. Open the left upper cover.
c. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
d. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
not blocked?
v
v
v
v
Paper path #1 sensor
Cabling P/J101, P/J403
Harness, bottom
MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 245
Table 71. Error Code 223 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check registration sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0805 (registration sensor).
6.
7.
Repair/replace the following, Go to step 7.
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
v Registration sensor
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
v Cabling P/J100, P/J459
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when v Harness, registration
not blocked?
v MCU PCB
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 246
230—Paper Jam / Toner Cart (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 72 on page 248, 230—Paper Jam / Toner Cart (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the fuser exit sensor did not activate within the specified time after the registration
clutch activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Fuser exit sensor
90H3685
510–12, p. 1117
p. 740
Transport asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, exit
90H4218
700–21, p. 1124
Kit, frame asm., exit rear
90H4193
330–1, p. 1110
Main drive asm.
90H4192
340–1, p. 1112
p. 714
p. 813
p. 807
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 247
Table 72. Error Code 230 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Inspect the paper path between the registration sensor and the fuser exit Go to step 2.
sensor as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
1.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
2.
a. Remove the fuser full cover.
b. Check the transport asm. for pieces of paper or damage.
Go to step 3.
Clean or replace the
transport asm.
Is the transport asm. clean and undamaged?
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
3.
4.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
a. Print a configuration page continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on
the Test Menu) until error code 230 occurs.
b. Open the left upper cover and check the position of the paper.
Check the items listed under Go to step 4.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6 on page 249.
Reinstall the original EP
cartridge. Then replace the
main drive asm.
Problem solved.
Does the jammed paper stop between the the registration rollers
and the fuser?
5.
a. Replace the EP cartridge.
b. Print a configuration page test print (see “Printing Test Prints” on
page 587).
Do you still have error code 230?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 248
Table 72. Error Code 230 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
Check the fuser exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1023 (fuser exit sensor).
6.
Go to step 7.
b. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Go to step 8.
a.
b.
c.
d.
hcsf0225
CAUTION:
7.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
not blocked?
<2-25> High temperature; switch off the printer and allow at least 20 minutes
for parts in this area to cool before handling.
No
Fuser exit asm.
Cabling P/J104, P/J462
Harness, exit
MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Frame asm., exit rear
v Main drive asm.
Open the upper left cover.
Remove the upper rear cover.
Remove the fuser.
Manually rotate the main drive motor CCW and watch the fuser drive
gears.
Are the fuser gears intact and turning?
2. Print a configuration page test print (see “Printing Test Prints” on
page 587).
Repair/replace the following, Problem solved.
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Do you still have an error code 230?
v MCU PCB
1. Replace the fuser (see “Fuser, Printer” on page 793).
8.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 249
231—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 73, 231—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the face-up exit sensor was not activated within the specified time after the
registration clutch activated. Look for a paper jam between the fuser and the face-up exit sensor. This jam can
occur when a simplex print is sent to the face-up bin or after side 2 of a duplex page is completed and the print is
sent to the face-up bin.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Face-up exit sensor
90H4189
520–2, p. 1120
p. 740
Exit gate solenoid
90H3682
510–2, p. 1117
p. 634
Transport asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, exit
90H4218
p. 813
700–21, p. 1124
Table 73. Error Code 231 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the transport asm.:
a. Remove the fuser cover (see “Fuser Cover, Printer” on page 765).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 251.
Clean or replace the
transport asm.
b. Check the transport asm. for pieces of paper and damage.
Is the transport asm. clean and not damaged?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 250
Table 73. Error Code 231 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the face-up exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1024 (face-up exit sensor).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Trip the actuator, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Release the actuator, and press Enter. An L should display.
v Face-up exit sensor
v Cabling P/J109, P/J601,
P/J462
v Harness, exit
v Transport asm.
v MCU PCB
Does an H display when you trip the actuator, and an L when the
actuator is released?
Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run test If a problem remains, go to
1051 (exit gate solenoid).
step 4.
Does the exit gate solenoid activate?
v Exit gate solenoid
v Cabling P/J210, P/J601,
P/J462
v Harness, exit
v Transport asm.
v MCU PCB
3.
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
4.
5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Do you still have an error code 231?
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 251
241—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 74 on page 253, 241—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that while ouput was sent to the face-up bin, the face-up exit sensor did not
deactivate within the specified time after it activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Face-up exit sensor
90H4189
520–2, p. 1120
p. 740
Exit gate solenoid
90H3682
510–2, p. 1117
p. 634
Transport asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, exit
90H4218
700–21, p. 1124
Drive asm., duplex
06L9810
2040–4, p. 1177
p. 714
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
p. 745
Harness, printer connector
06L9971
2040–11, p. 1177
Harness, Duplex
90H4213
700–16, p. 1124
Connector, duplex (call tech support to
obtain this part)
NP
1110–24, p. 1165
Duplex asm.
90H3537
2000–0, p. 1171
p. 631
p. 813
p. 834
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 252
Table 74. Error Code 241 Diagnostic
Step
1.
2.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Do you have a duplex unit attached?
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
a. Disconnect the duplex assembly cable and detach the duplex
unit from the printer (see “Duplex Asm.” on page 834).
Go to step 3.
Go to step 7 on page 255.
Go to step 5 on page 254.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by printing a
configuration page from tray 1
to the face-up output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FACE-UP on the
Paper Menu).
v MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by printing a
configuration page from tray 1
to the face-up output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FACE-UP on the
Paper Menu).
v Face-up exit #1 sensor
v Cabling P/J109, P/J601,
P/J462
v Harness, exit
v Transport asm.
v MCU PCB
b. Print a configuration page from tray 1 to the face-up output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and OUTPUT=FACE-UP on the Paper
Menu).
Do you still have an error code 241?
3.
Check the paper jam:
a. Remove the fuser cover (see “Fuser Cover, Printer” on
page 765).
b. Observe the position of the paper jam.
Is the paper jam actuating the face-up exit sensor?
Check the face-up exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 1024 (face-up exit sensor).
b. Trip the actuator, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Release the actuator, and press Enter. An L should display.
4.
Does an H display when you trip the actuator, and an L when
the actuator is released?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 253
Table 74. Error Code 241 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the Inverter CW (face-up exit) clutch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 1053 (Inverter CW, face-up exit clutch).
5.
Yes
No
Go to step 6.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by printing a
configuration page from tray 1
to the face-up output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FACE-UP on the
Paper Menu).
b. Hand rotate the main drive motor (M10) CCW.
c. Observe the rollers in the exit roller asm. and offset rollers
(910–2 and 910–8, p. 1128).
Do the exit rollers and the offset rollers rotate correctly without
slipping?
Inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see
“Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on
page 721).
6.
v Transport asm.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by printing a
configuration page from tray 1
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
to the face-up output bin
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially (SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
near rollers and sensors).
OUTPUT=FACE-UP on the
Paper Menu).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper
v EP cartridge
path clear of obstructions?
v Fuser asm.
v MCU, PCB
Replace worn rollers/parts or
clear obstructions.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 254
Table 74. Error Code 241 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Reattach the duplex unit.
b. Remove the duplex unit cover.
c. Print a configuration page from tray 1 to the face-up output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and OUTPUT=FACE-UP on the Paper
Menu).
d. As the configuration page prints, observe the duplex drive asm.
7.
Yes
No
Go to step 8.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by printing a
configuration page from tray 1
to the face-up output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FACE-UP on the
Paper Menu).
Does the duplex motor rotate and drive the duplex exit roller?
v
v
v
v
v
v
Inspect the paper path in the duplex unit as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see
“Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on
page 721).
8.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by printing a
configuration page from tray 1
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
to the face-up output bin
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially (SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
near rollers and sensors).
OUTPUT=FACE-UP on the
Paper Menu).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper
v EP cartridge
path clear of obstructions?
v Fuser asm.
v MCU, PCB
Duplex drive asm.
Duplex PCB
Duplex asm. (complete)
Harness, printer connector
Harness, duplex
Connector duplex unit
Repair/replace the following:
v Duplex asm. (complete)
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 255
242—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 75 on page 257, 242—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Printer)
Problem—While output was being sent to the main output bin or to a finisher bin, MCU logic sensed the fuser exit
sensor did not deactivate within the specified time. Look for a paper jam near the fuser exit sensor.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Exit drive asm.
90H4190
310–1, p. 1106
p. 818
Transport asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, exit
90H4218
700–21, p. 1124
Fuser exit sensor
90H3685
510–12, p. 1117
p. 740
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
p. 745
Harness, printer connector
06L9971
2040–11, p. 1177
Harness, Duplex
90H4213
700–16, p. 1124
Connector, duplex (Call tech support to
obtain this part.)
NP
1110–24, p. 1165
Harness, exit wire
06L9954
310–19, p. 1106
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 256
Table 75. Error Code 242 Diagnostic
Step
1.
2.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Do you have a duplex unit attached?
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
a. Disconnect the duplex assembly cable and detach the duplex unit
from the printer (see “Duplex Asm.” on page 834).
Go to step 3.b.
Go to step 4 on page 258.
b. Print a continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on Test Menu) from
tray 1 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1, OUTPUT=MAIN
on the Paper Menu). Run the test until approximately 25 pages
print or until error code 242 occurs.
Do you still have an error code 242?
3.
Check the paper travel:
a. Print a continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on Test Menu) from
tray 1 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1, OUTPUT=MAIN
on the Paper Menu). Run the test until approximately 25 pages
print or until error code 242 occurs.
b. Remove the fuser cover (see “Fuser Cover, Printer” on page 765).
c. Open the upper left cover.
d. Observe the position of the paper.
Is the trailing edge of the paper lodged in the fuser?
Go to step 5 on page 259.
Repair/replace the
following, one at a time.
After each replacement,
determine if the problem is
fixed by printing a
configuration page from
tray 1 to the main output
bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=MAIN on the
Paper Menu).
v Fuser
v EP cartridge
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 257
Table 75. Error Code 242 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the duplex unit:
a. Reconnect the duplex unit to the printer.
b. Print a duplexed continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on Test
Menu) from tray 1 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper Menu).
Do you still have an error code 242?
4.
Yes
No
The problem may be
Repair/replace the
intermittent. Check cabling
following, one at a time.
P/J473, P/J611A+B, P/J404.
After each replacement,
determine if the problem is
fixed by printing a
configuration page from
tray 1 to the main output
bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=MAIN on the
Paper Menu).
v Cabling P/J473,
P/J611A+B, P/J404
v Duplex PCB
v Harness, printer
connector
v Connector, duplex
v Harness, duplex
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 258
Table 75. Error Code 242 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the inverter clutch (CCW, main exit):
a. Remove the upper rear cover (see “Left Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 772).
Yes
No
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by printing a
configuration page from tray 1
to the main output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=MAIN on the Paper
Menu).
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1054 (inverter clutch, CCW/main exit), rotate the
main drive motor (M10) CCW.
Do the offset rollers rotate?
5.
v Exit drive asm.
v Transport asm.
v Cabling P/J219, P/J602,
P/J462
v Harness, exit wire
v Harness, exit
v MCU PCB
Inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers in the transport asm. for wear, damage, and
contamination (see “Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and
Switches” on page 721).
6.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially
near rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper
path clear of obstructions?
7.
Repair/replace the
following, one at a time.
After each replacement,
determine if the problem is
fixed by printing a
configuration page from
tray 1 to the main output
bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=MAIN on the
Paper Menu).
v MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by printing a
configuration page from tray 1
to the main output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=MAIN on the Paper
Menu).
v Transport asm.
v Fuser
v EP cartridge
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 259
250—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 76 on page 261, 250—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that during duplex mode the face-up exit sensor did not deactivate within the
specified time after it activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
520–2, p. 1120
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Face-up exit sensor
90H4189
p. 740
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Duplex asm.
90H3537
2000–0, p. 1171
p. 834
Transport asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
Duplex chute asm., inner
06L9818
2020–1, p. 1173
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
Exit drive asm.
90H4190
310–1, p. 1106
Harness, printer connector
06L9971
2040–11, p. 1177
Connector, duplex (Call tech support to
obtain this part.)
NP
1110–24, p. 1165
Duplex wait clutch
06L9809
2040–3, p. 1177
p. 634
Drive asm., duplex
06L9810
2040–4, p. 1177
p. 714
Harness, exit wire
06L9954
310–19, p. 1106
Harness, exit, dc rear
90H4218
700–21, p. 1124
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 631
p. 745
p. 818
p. 793
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 260
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
Parts Catalog
400–30, p. 1114
Removal
Procedures
Locations
User’s guide
Table 76. Error Code 250 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Inspect the paper path from the fuser to the printer transport and duplex
assembly as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Go to step 3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Transport asm.
v Chute asm., inner
v Duplex asm.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the face-up exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1024 (face-up exit sensor).
3.
b. Move the actuator to activate the face-up exit sensor and press
Enter. An H should display.
c. Release the actuator, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you move the actuator, and an L when the
actuator is released?
Go to step 4 on page 262.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Face-up exit sensor
v Cabling P/J109, P/J601,
P/J462
v Harness, exit dc rear
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 261
Table 76. Error Code 250 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the face-up exit clutch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1053 (face-up exit clutch).
b. Hand rotate the main drive motor (M10) CCW.
4.
Yes
No
Check for worn or damaged Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
offset rollers. Replace if
replacement, determine if
necessary. Go to step 5.
the problem is fixed.
v Drive asm., exit
v Transport asm.
v Cabling P/J218, P/J602,
P/J462
v Harness, exit wire
v Harness, exit dc rear
v MCU PCB
Do the offset rollers rotate smoothly?
Go to step 6 on page 263.
a. Remove the duplex cover.
b. Print a configuration page continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on
Test Menu) from tray 1 to the main output bin with duplex on
(SOURCE=TRAY 1, OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
c. Observe the exit rollers in the printer offset roller asm. (910–2, p.
1128) and transport rollers in the duplex unit (2050–7, p. 1179) as the
paper moves into and through the duplex unit.
5.
Note: Downward pressure on the printer transport assembly is required.
(Or replace the fuser top cover.) Otherwise, the transport may not drive
the paper fully into the duplex unit.
Does the printer drive assembly rotate the exit rollers, does the
duplex drive asm. rotate and drive transport rollers, and do they
drive the paper onto the duplex lower transport roller and wait
roller?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Worn or damaged rollers
Transport asm.
Duplex asm.
Drive asm., duplex
Duplex PCB
Cabling P/J473,
P/J611A+B, P/J404
Harness, printer
connector
Harness, duplex
Connector, duplex
MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 262
Table 76. Error Code 250 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the duplex wait clutch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0837 (duplex wait clutch).
Yes
No
Go to step 7.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. As you start test 0837, touch or observe closely the wait clutch.
v Duplex wait clutch
v Duplex PCB
v Cabling P/J224, P/J473,
P/J611A+B, P/J404
v Harness, printer
connector
v Harness, duplex
v Connector, duplex
v MCU PCB
Can you feel or see the wait clutch activate?
6.
1. Print a configuration page continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on
the Test Menu) from tray 1 to the main output bin with duplex on
(SOURCE=TRAY 1, OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
2. Observe the lower transport and wait roller as the paper moves
through the duplex unit.
7.
Does the wait clutch activate and engage the transport and wait
roller?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Worn or damaged rollers
v Duplex asm., complete
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Duplex wait clutch
v Duplex PCB
v Cabling P/J224, P/J473,
P/J611A+B, P/J404
v Harness, printer
connector
v Harness, duplex
v Connector, duplex
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 263
251—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 77 on page 265, 251—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray (Printer)
Problem—During duplex printing, MCU logic sensed that side 1 printed, but the face-up exit sensor did not
activate within the specified time during the offset roller feed of side 2 into the duplex assembly.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Face-up exit sensor
90H4189
520–2, p. 1120
p. 740
Exit drive asm.
90H4190
310–1, p. 1106
p. 818
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Transport asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s Guide
Harness, exit wire
06L9954
310–19, p. 1106
Harness, exit
90H4218
700–21, p. 1124
Duplex chute asm., inner
06L9818
2020–1, p. 1173
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
p. 745
Duplex asm.
90H3537
2000–0, p. 1171
p. 631
p. 834
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 264
Table 77. Error Code 251 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Inspect the paper path from the fuser through the transport and duplex
assembly as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Go to step 3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Transport asm.
v Chute asm., inner
v Duplex asm.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the face-up exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1024 (face-up exit sensor).
3.
b. Trip the actuator, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Release the actuator, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you trip the actuator, and an L when the
actuator is released?
Go to step 4 on page 266.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Face-up exit sensor
v Cabling P/J109, P/J601,
P/J462
v Transport asm.
v Harness, exit
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 265
Table 77. Error Code 251 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the inverter CW (face-up) clutch:
Yes
Go to step 5.
Enter diagnostic mode and, while running test 0851 (invert clutch, CW),
rotate the main drive motor (M10) CCW.
4.
5.
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Do the offset rollers rotate?
v Cabling P/J218, P/J602,
P/J462
v Harness, exit wire
v Harness, exit
v Drive asm., exit
Go to step 6.
a. Remove the fuser top cover.
b. Print a duplexed continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on Test Menu)
from tray 1 to the face-up output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=FACE-UP, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper Menu).
c. Observe the operation of the transport asm.
Repair/replace the failing
parts.
Are the offset rollers feeding paper from the transport asm. into the
duplex asm., and is the face-up exit sensor correctly functioning?
6.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 266
253—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex)
Link to—diagnostic Table 78 on page 268, 253—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex)
Problem—While sending either simplex or duplex output to the face-up output bin, duplex logic sensed that the
duplex exit sensor did not activate within the specified time after the face-up exit sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Face-up exit sensor
90H4189
520–2, p. 1120
p. 740
Duplex exit sensor
63H3042
2030–9, p. 1175
p. 740
Exit drive asm.
90H4190
310–1, p. 1106
Duplex asm. exit gate solenoid
90H3682
2030–11, p. 1175
Exit gate and spring
06L9818¹
(2020–1)
2020–2&3, p. 1173
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Transport asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
Harness, exit, dc rear
90H4218
700–21, p. 1124
Duplex asm.
90H3537
2000–0, p. 1171
p. 818
p. 634
p. 813
p. 745
p. 631
p. 834
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 267
Table 78. Error Code 253 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Open the duplex module and inspect the paper path from the fuser
through the duplex unit to the face-up bin:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 4 on page 269.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the face-up exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1024 (face-up exit sensor).
3.
b. Insert a small piece of paper into the face-up exit sensor to move the
actuator, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you move the actuator, and an L when you
release the actuator?
v Face-up exit sensor
v Cabling P/J109, P/J601,
P/J462
v Harness, exit
v Transport asm.
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 268
Table 78. Error Code 253 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the duplex exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0830 (duplex exit sensor).
4.
Yes
Go to step 5.
b. Insert a small piece of paper into the duplex exit sensor to move the
actuator, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Go to step 6.
Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and, while
running test 1053 (inverter clutch, CW), hand rotate the main drive motor
(M10) CCW.
Do the exit rollers in the printer offset roller asm. (910–2, p. 1128)
rotate?
Replace the duplex PCB.
7.
Do you still have an error code 253?
Drive asm., exit
Harness exit wire
Harness exit dc rear
MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
v
6.
Duplex exit sensor
Cabling P/J124, P/J474
Duplex PCB
Duplex asm.
MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run test Go to step 7.
0836 (duplex exit gate solenoid).
Does the duplex exit gate solenoid activate when you start the test?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
v
Does an H display when you move the actuator, and an L when you
release the actuator?
5.
No
Duplex exit gate solenoid
Cabling P/J222
Duplex PCB
Duplex asm.
MCU PCB
Replace the MCU PCB (see If a problem remains, go to
step 8 on page 270.
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
page 813).
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 269
Table 78. Error Code 253 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
8.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 270
254—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex)
Link to—diagnostic Table 79 on page 272, 254—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex)
Problem—While sending simplex or duplex output to the face-up output bin, duplex logic sensed the duplex exit
sensor did not deactivate within the specified time after it activated. The face-up exit sensor did deactivate in time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Duplex exit sensor
63H3042
2030–9, p. 1175
p. 740
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
p. 745
Duplex drive asm.
06L9810
2040–4, p. 1177
p. 714
Exit drive asm.
90H4190
310–1, p. 1106
Duplex asm.
90H3537
2000–0, p. 1171
p. 631
p. 834
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Transport asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
Harness, printer connector
06L9971
2040–11, p. 1177
Connector, duplex (Call tech support to
obtain this part.)
NP
1110–24, p. 1165
Harness, Duplex
90H4213
700–16, p. 1124
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
p. 818
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 271
Table 79. Error Code 254 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
2.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
a. Print a continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on Test Menu) from tray Go to step 3.
1 to the face-up output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1, OUTPUT=FACE-UP
on the Paper Menu).
b. Observe the location of the last sheet of paper out of duplex unit
when error code 254 occurs.
Go to step 4.
Did the paper exit the duplex unit?
Check the duplex exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0830 (duplex exit sensor).
3.
b. Insert a small piece of paper into the duplex exit sensor to move the
actuator, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Remove the paper to release the actuator, and press Enter. An L
should display.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Duplex exit sensor
v Duplex PCB
Does an H display when you move the actuator, and an L when you
release the actuator?
Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run test Go to step 5 on page 273.
0838 (duplex motor (M7), slow speed).
4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Duplex exit sensor
v Cabling P/J124, P/J474,
P/J473, P/J611A+B,
P/J404
v Harness, printer
connector
v Connector, duplex
v Harness, duplex
v Duplex PCB
v MCU PCB
Replace the duplex drive
asm.
Does the M7 run and do the duplex drive gears and belt driving the
exit rollers rotate smoothly?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 272
Table 79. Error Code 254 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and, while
running test 0838 (duplex motor (M7), slow speed), check the exit roller.
Do the duplex exit and rollers rotate smoothly?
Yes
No
Check for worn or damaged
rollers. Replace if necessary.
If a problem remains, go to
step 6.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Duplex drive asm.
v Duplex asm., complete
5.
If a problem remains, go to
step 6.
6.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 273
255—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex)
Link to—diagnostic Table 80, 255—Paper Jam / Area A, D (Duplex)
Problem—While moving paper through the duplex unit and preparing to print side 2, duplex logic sensed the
duplex wait sensor did not activate within the specified time after the face-up exit sensor activated. The face-up
exit sensor did deactivate.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Duplex wait sensor
63H3042
2050–15, p. 1179
p. 740
Duplex wait clutch
06L9809
2040–3, p. 1177
p. 634
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
p. 745
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Duplex chute asm., inner
06L9818
2020–1, p. 1173
Duplex asm.
90H3537
2000–0, p. 1171
p. 631
Duplex drive asm.
06L9810
2040–4, p. 1177
p. 714
Removal
Procedures
p. 813
p. 834
Table 80. Error Code 255 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 275.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 274
Table 80. Error Code 255 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
2.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
a. Print a duplexed continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on Test Menu) Go to step 3.
from tray 1 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper Menu) until error code
255 occurs.
b. Open the inner chute and check the location of the jammed paper.
Check for worn or damaged
rollers. Replace if necessary.
Go to step 4 on page 276.
Did the paper activate the duplex wait sensor?
Check the duplex wait sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0831 (duplex wait sensor).
3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
b. Insert a small piece of paper into the duplex wait sensor to activate
printing a duplexed
the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
continuous test from tray 1
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
to the main output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
Does an H display when you activate the sensor, and an L when not OUTPUT=MAIN,
blocked?
DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
v Duplex PCB
v MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a duplexed
continuous test from tray 1
to the main output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
v Duplex wait sensor
v Cabling P/J123, P/J475
v Duplex PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 275
Table 80. Error Code 255 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the duplex wait clutch:
a. Remove the duplex cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0837 (duplex wait clutch).
c. As you start test 0837, touch or observe closely the wait clutch.
Can you feel or see the wait clutch activate?
4.
Yes
No
Go to step 5 on page 277.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a duplexed
continuous test from tray 1
to the main output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
v
v
v
v
Duplex wait clutch
Cabling P/J224
Duplex PCB
MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 5 on page 277.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 276
Table 80. Error Code 255 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Print a duplexed continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on the Test
Menu) from tray 1 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper Menu).
b. Observe the lower transport and wait roller as the paper moves
through the duplex unit.
Yes
No
Go to step 6.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a duplexed
continuous test from tray 1
to the main output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
Does the wait clutch activate and engage the lower transport roller
and wait roller?
5.
v
v
v
v
v
a. Print a duplexed continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on the Test
Menu) from tray 1 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper Menu).
b. Observe the lower transport and wait roller as the paper moves
through the duplex unit.
6.
Do the transport roller and wait roller drive the paper into the wait
sensor actuator?
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from tray 1 to the main
output bin with duplexing on
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
v Duplex PCB
v MCU PCB
Duplex wait clutch
Cabling P/J224
Duplex drive asm.
Duplex PCB
Duplex asm.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from tray 1 to the main
output bin with duplexing on
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
v Chute asm., inner
v Duplex asm., complete
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 277
256—Paper Jam / Area A (Duplex)
Link to—diagnostic Table 81, 256—Paper Jam / Area A (Duplex)
Problem—While printing side 2 of a page, MCU logic sensed the registration sensor did not activate within the
specified time after the duplex wait clutch and duplex wait sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Registration sensor
90H3665
920–7, p. 1130
p. 740
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
p. 745
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, registration
90H4215
700–18, p. 1124
Duplex asm.
90H3537
2000–0, p. 1171
p. 631
Duplex wait clutch
06L9809
2040–3, p. 1177
p. 634
Duplex chute asm., inner
06L9818
2020–1, p. 1173
Duplex drive asm.
06L9810
2040–4, p. 1177
Removal
Procedures
p. 813
p. 834
p. 714
Table 81. Error Code 256 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 279.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 278
Table 81. Error Code 256 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
2.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
a. Print a duplexed continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on Test Menu) Go to step 3.
from tray 1 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper Menu) until error code
256 occurs.
b. Open the duplex module, and check the location of the jammed
paper.
Go to step 4 on page 280.
Is the paper protruding a few inches out of the bottom of duplex
unit and reaching the registration sensor?
Check the registration sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0832 (registration sensor, duplex).
b. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
3.
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when not
blocked?
Go to step 4 on page 280.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from tray 1 to the main
output bin with duplexing on
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
v Registration sensor
v Cabling P/J100, P/J459
v Harness, registration
sensor
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 279
Table 81. Error Code 256 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the duplex wait clutch:
a. Remove the duplex cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0837 (duplex wait clutch).
c. As you start test 0837, touch or observe closely the wait clutch.
Can you feel or see the wait clutch activate?
4.
Yes
No
Go to step 5 on page 281.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
continuous test
(CONTINUOUS TEST on
the Test Menu) from tray 1
to the main output bin with
duplexing on
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
v
v
v
v
Duplex wait clutch
Cabling P/J224
Duplex PCB
MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 5 on page 281.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 280
Table 81. Error Code 256 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Print a duplexed continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on the Test
Menu) from tray 1 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper Menu).
b. Observe the duplex lower transport roller and wait roller as the paper
moves through the duplex unit.
Yes
No
Go to step 6.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
continuous test
(CONTINUOUS TEST on
the Test Menu) from tray 1
to the main output bin with
duplexing on
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
Does the duplex wait clutch activate and engage the lower transport
roller and wait roller?
5.
v
v
v
v
a. Print a duplexed continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on the Test
Menu) from tray 1 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper Menu).
b. Observe the duplex lower transport roller and wait roller as the paper
moves through the duplex unit.
6.
Do the duplex lower transport roller and wait roller drive the paper
into the duplex wait sensor actuator?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a duplexed
continuous test from tray 1
to the main output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
v Duplex PCB
v MCU PCB
Duplex
Duplex
Duplex
Duplex
wait clutch
drive asm.
PCB
asm. complete
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a duplexed
continuous test from tray 1
to the main output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN,
DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
v Chute asm., inner
v Duplex asm., complete
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 281
Table 81. Error Code 256 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
7.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 282
271—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 82, 271—Paper Jam / Area A (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the registration sensor active with the printer Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
920–7, p. 1130
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Registration sensor
90H3665
p. 740
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, registration
90H4215
p. 813
700–18, p. 1124
Table 82. Error Code 271 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Inspect the registration sensor for contamination, paper fragments that
may be interrupting the sensor beam, and damage.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Clean or replace the
registration sensor.
Go to step 3 on page 284.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Is the registration sensor clean and free of paper and not damaged?
Check the registration sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0805 (registration sensor).
2.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Open the left upper cover.
Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Enter diagnostic mode and run test 0832 (registration sensor, duplex).
Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
v
v
v
v
Registration sensor
Cabling P/J100, P/J459
Harness, registration
MCU PCB
Does an H display when you block the sensors, and an L when not
blocked?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 283
Table 82. Error Code 271 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
3.
4.
Do you still have an error code 271 when you switch on power?
Yes
No
If a problem remains, go to
step 4.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 284
272—Fuser Jam / Area A (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 83, 272—Fuser Jam / Area A (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the fuser exit sensor active while the printer was Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
510–12, p. 1117
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Fuser exit sensor
90H3685
p. 740
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, exit, dc main
90H4218
p. 813
700–21, p. 1124
Table 83. Error Code 272 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Inspect the fuser exit sensor for contamination or paper fragments that
may be actuating the sensor, and look for damage.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Clean or replace the fuser
exit sensor.
Go to step 3 on page 286.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Is the fuser exit sensor clean and free of paper and not damaged?
Check the fuser exit sensor:
a. If the finisher is attached, remove the docking station.
b. Remove the fuser cover (see “Fuser Cover, Printer” on page 765).
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1023 (fuser exit sensor).
2.
d. Insert a small piece of paper into the fuser exit sensor to activate the
sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
e. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you activate the sensor, and an L when not
blocked?
v
v
v
v
Fuser exit sensor
Cabling P/J104, P/J462
Harness, exit, dc main
MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 4 on page 286.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 285
Table 83. Error Code 272 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Replace the MCU PCB (see “MCU PCB, Printer” on page 813).
3.
b. Power on the printer.
Yes
No
If a problem remains, go to
step 4.
Problem solved.
Do you still have an error code 272?
4.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 286
273—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 84, 273—Paper Jam / Area A, Tray (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the face-up exit sensor active while the printer was Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
520–2, p. 1120
Locations
Face-up exit sensor
90H4189
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, exit, dc rear
90H4218
700–21, p. 1124
Transport asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
Removal
Procedures
p. 740
p. 813
Table 84. Error Code 273 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the face-up exit sensor for contamination, paper fragments that
may be interrupting the sensor beam, and damage.
1.
Is the face-up exit sensor clean, free of paper, and not damaged?
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 288.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Face-up exit sensor
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 287
Table 84. Error Code 273 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the face-up exit sensor:
1. If the finisher is attached, remove the docking station.
2. Remove the fuser cover (see “Fuser Cover, Printer” on page 765).
3. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1024 (face-up exit sensor).
2.
4. Insert a small piece of paper into the face-up sensor to move the
actuator, and press Enter. An H should display.
5. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you move the actuator and an L when you
unblock the sensor?
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Face-up exit sensor
v Cabling P/J109, P/J601,
P/J462
v Harness, exit, dc rear
v MCU PCB
v Transport asm.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 288
274—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 85, 274—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the paper path #1 sensor was on while the printer was Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
1041–19, p. 1156
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Paper path #1 sensor
90H3665
p. 740
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, bottom
90H4212
p. 813
700–15, p. 1124
Table 85. Error Code 274 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Paper path #1 sensor
a. Open the left upper cover (cover A).
b. Inspect the paper path #1 sensor for contamination or paper
fragments that may be interrupting the sensor beam, and damage.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Replace the paper path #1
sensor.
Go to step 3 on page 290.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Is the paper path #1 sensor clean and free of paper and not
damaged?
Check the paper path #1 sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0806 (paper path #1 sensor).
2.
b. Open the duplex and left upper cover.
c. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
d. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
not blocked?
v
v
v
v
Paper path #1 sensor
Cabling P/J101, P/J403
Harness, bottom
MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 289
Table 85. Error Code 274 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 290
280—Env Feed / Reseat Env Feed (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 86, 280—Env Feed / Reseat Env Feed (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the envelope feeder is not properly seated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Envelope feeder asm.
90H3542
3000–0, p. 1182
p. 838
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
Harness, drawer asm.
90H3649
1012–4, p. 1139
p. 631
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 86. Error Code 280 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Reseat the envelope feeder.
1.
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to step 4 on page 292.
Problem solved.
Do you still have an error 280?
Replace the envelope feeder (see “Envelope Feeder” on page 838).
3.
No
Do you still have an error 280?
Power off and then power on the printer.
2.
Yes
Do you still have an error 280?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 291
Table 86. Error Code 280 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
4.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a customer job that
requires the envelope feeder.
v Cabling P/J403, P/J603, P/J604, P/J700
v MCU PCB
v Harness, bottom
v Harness, drawer assembly
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 292
281—Paper Jam / Area A, Env Feed (Env Feeder)
Link to—diagnostic Table 87 on page 294, 281—Paper Jam / Area A, Env Feed (Env Feeder)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the tray 2 feed sensor did not activate within the specified time after the envelope
feed clutch activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Envelope feeder asm.
90H3542
3000–0, p. 1182
p. 631
Envelope feeder PCB
90H3542¹
3020–17, p. 1184
p. 745
Paper path #1 sensor
90H3665
1031–12, p. 1147
p. 740
Envelope feed sensor
90H3542¹
(3000–0)
3030–5, p. 1187
p. 740
Envelope feed clutch
90H3542¹
(3000–0)
3020–11, p. 1184
p. 634
Envelope transport rollers
90H3542¹
(3000–0)
3030–12, p. 1187
p. 735
Envelope feed motor (M11)
90H3542¹
(3000–0)
3020–2, p. 1184
p. 714
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Kit, tray 1 feed clutch
90H3634¹
1034–97, p. 1154
p. 634
Kit, Tray 1 feed roller
90H3639
1033–98, p. 1151
p. 735
Kit, tray 1 feed gears
06L9942
1033–99, p. 1151
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, bottom
90H4212
Removal
Procedures
p. 838
p. 813
p. 813
700–15, p. 1124
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 293
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Harness, drawer asm.
90H3649
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
1012–4, p. 1139
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 87. Error Code 281 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Are the envelopes wrinkled or damaged?
Check the items listed under Go to step 3.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the envelopes.
Check the tray 1 feed roller:
Go to step 4 on page 295.
Inspect the envelopes.
2.
Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run test
0401 (main drive motor, M10).
3.
Does the tray 1 feed roller rotate smoothly?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Tray 1 clutch kit
v Tray 1 feed roller kit
v Tray 1 feed gears
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 294
Table 87. Error Code 281 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
Check the paper path #1 sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0806 (paper path #1 sensor).
4.
Go to step 5.
b. Open the left upper cover.
c. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
d. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Paper path #1 sensor
v Cabling P/J143, P/J607,
P/J408
v MCU PCB
v Harness, bottom
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
not blocked?
Check the envelope feed motor:
a. Remove the bottom and left side cover of the envelope feeder and
connect the assembly to the printer.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0803 (envelope feed motor, M11).
No
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 7.
The envelope feed clutch is
not working. Replace:
Does M11 run?
6.
Check the envelope feed clutch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0817 (envelope feed clutch).
b. While manually rotating the envelope feed motor (M11), press Enter.
Does the envelope feed clutch activate?
7.
hc3m1109
Check the +24 v dc on envelope feeder
PCB:
Measure the voltage between J700-7 and
J700-12 on the envelope feeder PCB.
1
7
Is there +24 V dc between J700-7 and
J700-12?
12
v The envelope feeder asm.
v Harness, drawer asm.
v Harness, bottom
The envelope feeder motor Go to step 8 on page 296.
is not working. Replace:
v The envelope feeder asm.
v Harness, drawer asm.
v Harness, bottom
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 295
Table 87. Error Code 281 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
8.
Actions and Questions
Measure the voltage between P403-1 and P403-4 on the envelope MCU
PCB.
Is there +24 V dc between P403-1 and P403-4?
9.
Yes
No
Replace:
v Harness, drawer asm.
v Harness, bottom
Replace the MCU PCB. If a
problem remains, go to step
9.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 296
282—Paper Jam / Reseat Paper
Link to—diagnostic Table 88, 282—Paper Jam / Area A, Aux Tray (Printer)
Problem—While printing from the auxiliary tray, MCU logic sensed the paper path #1 sensor did not activate
within the specified time after the signal to activate the auxiliary feed clutch was sent. Note that paper path #1
sensor failures generate error code 210, not error code 282.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Auxiliary tray feeder asm.
06L9946
1012–7, p. 1139
Auxiliary tray feed roller
06L9946¹
1012–7/940–9, p.
1139
p. 735
Auxiliary tray pick roller
06L9946¹
1012–7/940–22, p.
1139
p. 735
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, drawer asm.
90H3649
Removal
Procedures
p. 813
1012–4, p. 1139
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 88. Error Code 282 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Print a configuration page from Tray 1 to the main output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1, OUTPUT=MAIN on the Paper Menu).
Did the configuration page print?
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 298.
Use the new error code or
symptom to diagnose the
problem.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 297
Table 88. Error Code 282 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
2.
Actions and Questions
a. Reseat the auxiliary tray, making sure it is seated properly.
b. Print a configuration page from the auxiliary tray to the main ouput
bin (SOURCE=AUXTRAY, OUTPUT=MAIN on the Paper Menu).
c. Observe the paper as it feeds from the auxiliary tray.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Problem solved, or use the
new error code or symptom
to diagnose the problem.
Go to step 4.
Replace the auxiliary tray
feeder asm.
Replace the auxiliary tray
feed asm.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Do you still have error code 282?
a. Remove the rear cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0801 (main motor, M10).
3.
c. Observe the main drive asm. and the auxiliary tray drive gear.
Do the main drive asm. and the auxiliary tray drive asm. operate
properly?
Check the auxiliary feed clutch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode and run test 0817 (auxiliary feed clutch).
b. Listen for the auxiliary feed clutch to activate.
4.
5.
Did the auxiliary feed clutch activate?
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
v Auxiliary tray feeder asm.
v Harness, drawer
assembly
v Harness, bottom
v MCU PCB
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 298
330—Paper Jam / Area B (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 89, 330—Paper Jam / Area B (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper fed from tray 3, the paper path #1 sensor did not activate within
the specified time after the tray 3 feed clutch activated. Note that the paper path #2 sensor did activate within the
specified time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Paper path #1 sensor
90H3665
1031–12, p. 1147
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
Kit, tray 2 feed gears
06L9945
1043–99, p. 1161
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 740
p. 813
Table 89. Error Code 330 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper in tray 3.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
1.
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 300.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source. To verify that
paper was the cause of the
problem, print a
configuration page from tray
3 (SOURCE=TRAY 3 on the
Paper Menu).
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 299
Table 89. Error Code 330 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper path from tray 3 to the registration roller as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3 on page 308.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from tray 3
(SOURCE=TRAY 3 on the
Paper Menu).
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the paper path #1 sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0806 (paper path #1 sensor).
3.
b. Open the left upper cover.
c. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
d. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when not
blocked?
4.
Print a configuration page from tray 1 to the main output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1, OUTPUT=MAIN on the Paper Menu).
v
v
v
v
Go to step 5.
Use the new error code or
symptom to diagnose the
problem.
Go to step 6.
Replace the kit, tray 2 feed
gears.
Did the page print without an error?
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0401 (main motor, M10).
5.
Paper path #1 sensor
Cabling P/J101, P/J403
MCU PCB
Harness, bottom
b. Inspect the tray 2 feed gears.
Is the drive train working correctly?
6.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 300
333—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 90, 333—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper fed from tray 3, the registration sensor did not activate within the
specified time after the paper path #1 sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Registration sensor
90H3665
920–7, p. 1130
p. 740
Kit, Tray 1 feed rollers
90H3639
1033–98, p. 1151
p. 735
Kit, tray 1 feed gears
06L9942
1033–99, p. 1151
Separation roller assembly
90H3660
1031–1, p. 1147
Kit, tray 1 feed clutch
90H3634¹
1034–97, p. 1154
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, registration
90H4215
Removal
Procedures
p. 634
p. 813
700–18, p. 1124
¹ an assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 90. Error Code 333 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 302.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 301
Table 90. Error Code 333 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper path from tray 3 to the registration roller:
v Check all rollers, including the separation roller assembly in the tray 1
left cover, for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper Path
Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the registration sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0805 (registration sensor).
3.
b. Block the registration sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the registration sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
v
v
v
v
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when not
blocked?
4.
Check the tray 1 feed roller assemblies:
a. Remove tray 1.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0401 (main drive motor (M10)).
c. Observe the tray 1 feed roller assemblies.
Do the tray 1 feed roller assemblies rotate smoothly?
5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
Registration sensor
Cabling P/J100, P/J459
MCU PCB
Harness, registration
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Kit, tray 1 feed gears
v Kit, tray 1 feed rollers
v Gear in kit, tray 1 feed
clutch
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 302
334—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 4 (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 91 on page 304, 334—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 4 (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper fed from tray 4, the paper path #3 sensor did not activate within
the specified time after the tray 4 feed clutch activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Paper path #3 sensor
90H3665
4012–10, p. 1192
p. 742
p. 876
PCB, Input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 865
Kit, tray 4 feed
06L9796
4061–99, p. 1208
Kit, tray 4 feeder asm
06L9963
4062–3, p. 1210
Kit, feed, pick, and separation rollers
06L9941
4061–4, p. 1208
Kit, tray 4 feed clutch
90H4238
4062–99, p. 1210
Harness, tray 3 and 4
06L9961
4020–22, p. 1194
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Motor, Input unit feed (M6)
90H4228
4020–1, p. 1194
Kit, Input unit drive gear
90H4231
4020–99, p. 1194
Harness, tray
90H4211
700–14, p. 1124
Connector, Input unit
06L9959
4020–20, p. 1194
Belt, input unit drive
90H4229
4020–2, p. 1194
Input unit left cover
06L9967
4012–1, p. 1192
p. 885
p. 636
p. 813
p. 716
p. 844
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 303
Table 91. Error Code 334 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Go to step 3.
Inspect the paper path from tray 4 to the paper path #3 sensor as
follows:
v Check all rollers, including the rollers in the input unit left cover, for
wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper Path Views with Rollers,
Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the tray 4 feed roller:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0802 (Input unit feed motor, M6).
3.
Go to step 4 on page 305.
Go to step 7 on page 306.
b. Open the input unit left cover asm.
c. Check the tray 4 roller asm. (4061–13, p. 1208).
Does the tray 4 feed roller asm. rotate smoothly?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 304
Table 91. Error Code 334 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the paper path #3 sensor:
a. Open the input unit left cover asm.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0808 (paper path #3 sensor).
4.
Yes
No
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Paper path #3 sensor
Cabling P/J121, P/J482
Input Unit PCB
Cabling P/J480, P/J613,
P/J406
v MCU PCB
c. Block the paper path #3 sensor and press Enter. An H should
display.
d. Unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when not
blocked?
Check the tray 4 feed clutch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0815 (tray 4 feed clutch).
5.
Go to step 6.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Remove the input unit rear cover.
c. Touch the tray 4 feed clutch and press Enter.
v
v
v
v
Kit, tray 4 feed clutch
Cabling P/J213, P/J482
Input unit PCB
Cabling P/J480, P/J613,
P/J406
v MCU PCB
Does the tray 4 feed clutch activate?
6.
Check the tray 4 feed gears:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0802 (input unit feed motor, M6).
b. Check the tray 4 feed clutch gear and drive gears.
Are the tray 4 feed clutch gear and drive gears rotating smoothly?
Go to step 7 on page 306.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Kit, tray 4 feed clutch
v Kit, input unit drive
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 305
Table 91. Error Code 334 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
7.
Actions and Questions
Check the tray 4 pick and feed rollers:
a. Open the input unit left cover (Cover C) and override the cover
interlock switch.
b. Print a configuration page from tray 4 to the main output bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 4, OUTPUT=MAIN on the Paper Menu).
c. Check the tray 4 pick and feed rollers.
Yes
No
Go to step 8.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Feeder asm., tray 4
v Kit, tray 4 feed
Are the tray 4 pick and feed rollers rotating smoothly?
8.
Replace the tray 4 rollers (kit, feed, pick, and separation) and print a
Go to step 10.
configuration page from tray 4 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 4,
OUTPUT=MAIN on the Paper Menu).
Problem solved.
Do you still get error code 334?
Check the input unit feed motor:
a. Remove the input unit rear cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0802 (Input unit feed motor, M6).
9.
Does the input unit feed motor (M6) run?
Check that the gear train is
working properly. Replace
as necessary:
v Belt, input unit drive
v Kit, input drive gear
v Kit, tray 4 feed
If a problem remains, go to
step 10.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Input unit feed motor (M6)
Cabling P/J217
Input unit PCB
MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 10.
10.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 306
340—Paper Jam / Area B, C, Tray 4 (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 92, 340—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper fed from tray 4, the paper path #2 sensor did not activate within
the specified time after the paper path #3 sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Paper path #2 sensor
90H3665
1041–19, p. 1156
p. 740
PCB, Input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
Kit, tray 3 separation and feed
90H4237
4051–99, p. 1204
Kit, tray 3 feed clutch
06L9962
4052–99, p. 1206
Kit, Input unit drive gear
90H4231
4020–99, p. 1194
Kit, tray 3 feed gears
11L5499
4051–98, p. 1204
Input unit left cover
06L9967
4012–1, p. 1192
p. 844
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Harness, interlock/sensor
06L9949
1041–22, p. 1156
Harness, rear
90H4210
700–13, p. 1124
p. 865
p. 636
Table 92. Error Code 340 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 308.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 307
Table 92. Error Code 340 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Inspect the paper path from tray 4 to the paper path #2 sensor as
Go to step 3.
follows:
v Check all rollers, including the rollers in the input unit left cover, for
wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper Path Views with Rollers,
Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the tray 3 feed roller:
a. Open the input unit left cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode and run test 0802 (Input unit feed motor, M6).
c. Observe the tray 3 feed roller.
3.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Kit, tray 3 feed gears
v Gear in the kit, tray 3
feed clutch
v Kit, input unit drive gear
Does the tray 3 feed roller rotate?
If a problem remains, go to
step 7 on page 309.
Check the paper path #2 sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0807 (paper path #2 sensor).
4.
b. Open the left upper cover.
c. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
d. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
not blocked?
Go to step 5 on page 309.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Paper path #2 sensor
v Cabling P/J143, P/J607,
P/J408
v Harness, interlock sensor
v Harness, rear
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 308
Table 92. Error Code 340 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
a. Print a simplex continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on the Test
Menu) from tray 4 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 4,
OUTPUT=MAIN, and DUPLEX=OFF on the Paper Menu) until error
code 340 occurs.
b. Check the location of the paper jam.
Yes
No
Go to step 6.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Kit, tray 3 separation and
feed (tray 3 feed roller)
v Input unit cover asm., left
Did the paper travel past paper path sensor #2?
If a problem remains, go to
step 6.
6.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Input unit PCB
v MCU PCB
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 309
341—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 4 (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 93, 341—Paper Jam / Area C (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the paper path #3 sensor is active while the printer is Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Paper path #3 sensor
90H3665
4012–10, p. 1192
p. 742
p. 876
PCB, input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 865
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Harness, tray 3 and 4
06L9961
4020–22, p. 1194
Table 93. Error Code 341 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Check the paper path #3 sensor:
a. Open the input unit left cover and check the paper path sensor #3.
b. Inspect the paper path #3 sensor for contamination or paper
fragments that may be interrupting the sensor beam, and damage.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 311.
Clean or replace the paper
path #3 sensor.
Is the paper path #3 sensor clean and not damaged?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 310
Table 93. Error Code 341 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the paper path #3 sensor:
1. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0808 (paper path #3 sensor).
2.
2. Block the paper path #3 sensor, and press Enter. An H should
display.
3. Unblock the paper path #3 sensor, and press Enter. An L should
display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when not
blocked?
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Input unit PCB
v MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Paper path #3 sensor
v Cabling P/J121, P/J482
v Harness, tray 3 and 4
v Input unit PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 311
342—Paper Jam / Tray 4 (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 94, 342—Paper Jam / Tray 4 (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed paper path #4 sensor active while the printer was Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Paper path #4 sensor
90H3665
4040–7, p. 1202
Harness, tray 3 and 4
06L9961
4020–22, p. 1194
PCB, input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
MCU PCB
Locations
Removal
Procedures
p. 742
p. 895
p. 745
p. 865
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Table 94. Error Code 342 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Inspect the paper path from tray 5 to the paper path #4 sensor, and
inspect the paper path #4 sensor:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Go to step 3 on page 313.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 312
Table 94. Error Code 342 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the paper path #4 sensor:
1. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0809 (paper path #4 sensor).
3.
2. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
3. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when not
blocked?
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Input unit PCB
v MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Paper path #4 sensor
v Cabling P/J126, P/J486
v Harness, tray 3 and 4
v Input unit PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 313
343—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 95, 343—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper fed from tray 4, the registration sensor did not activate within the
specified time after the paper path #1 sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Registration sensor
90H3665
920–7, p. 1130
Kit, tray 1 feed rollers
90H3639
1033–98, p. 1151
Kit, tray 1 feed clutch
90H3634¹
1034–97, p. 1154
Kit, tray 1 feed gears
06L9942
1033–99, p. 1151
Separation roller assembly
90H3660
1031–1, p. 1147
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, registration
90H4215
Removal
Procedures
p. 740
p. 634
p. 813
700–18, p. 1124
¹ an assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 95. Error Code 343 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 315.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 314
Table 95. Error Code 343 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper path from the paper path #1 sensor to the registration
sensor as follows:
v Check all rollers, including the separation roller assembly in the tray 1
left cover, for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper Path
Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the registration sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0805 (registration sensor).
3.
b. Block the registration sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the registration sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
v
v
v
v
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when not
blocked?
4.
Check the tray 1 feed roller:
a. Remove paper tray 1.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0401 (main drive motor, M10).
c. Observe the tray 1 feed roller assemblies.
Do the tray 1 feed roller assemblies smoothly rotate?
5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
Registration sensor
Cabling P/J100, P/J459
Harness, registration
MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Kit, tray 1 feed gears
v Kit, tray 1 feed roller
v Gear in the kit, tray 1
clutch.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 315
350—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 5 (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 96 on page 317, 350—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 5 (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper fed from tray 5, the paper path #3 sensor did not activate within
the specified time after the paper path sensor #4 activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Paper path #3 sensor
90H3665
4012–10, p. 1192
Harness, tray 3 and 4
06L9961
4020–22, p. 1194
Kit, tray 4 feed
06L9796
4061–99, p. 1208
Kit, Input unit drive gear
90H4231
4020–99, p. 1194
Kit, tray 5 transport asm.
11L5501
4072–99, p. 1218
Input unit left cover
06L9967
4012–1, p. 1192
PCB, input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 865
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Harness, tray
90H4211
700–14, p. 1124
Connector, Input unit
06L9959
4020–20, p. 1194
NP
Connector, input unit (call tech support to
obtain this part, see “Technical Support” on
page 1298.)
p. 742
Removal
Procedures
p. 876
p. 844
1110–22, p. 1165
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 316
Table 96. Error Code 350 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Inspect the paper path from tray 5 to the paper path #3 sensor as
follows:
v Check all rollers, including the rollers in the input unit left cover asm.,
for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper Path Views with
Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 4 on page 318.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the input unit feed motor (M6):
a. Open the input unit left cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0802 (Input unit feed motor, M6).
3.
c. Observe the tray 4 feed rollers.
Do the tray 4 feed rollers rotate smoothly?
v Kit, tray 4 feed
v Kit, input drive gear
v Kit, tray 5 transport asm.
If a problem remains, go to
step 6 on page 318.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 317
Table 96. Error Code 350 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the paper path #3 sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0808 (paper path #3 sensor).
Yes
No
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
v
v
v
v
v
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when not
blocked?
4.
v
v
v
v
5.
Paper path #3 sensor
Cabling P/J121, P/J482
Harness tray 3 and 4
Input unit PCB
Cabling P/J480, P/J481,
P/J613A-D, P/J406
Harness tray
Connector, Input unit (pn
06L9959)
Connector, input unit (no
pn, call tech support to
obtain this part)
MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Input unit PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 6.
6.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 318
351—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 97, 351—Paper Jam / Area A, B, C (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper fed from tray 5, the paper path #2 sensor did not activate within
the specified time after the paper path #3 sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Paper path #2 sensor
90H3665
1041–19, p. 1156
p. 740
Kit, tray 3 separation and feed
90H4237
4051–99, p. 1204
Kit, tray 3 feed clutch
06L9962
4052–99, p. 1206
Kit, tray 3 feed gears
11L5499
4051-98, p. 1204
Input unit left cover
06L9967
4012–1, p. 1192
Kit, Input unit drive gear
90H4231
4020–99, p. 1194
PCB, input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 865
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Harness, rear
90H4210
700–13, p. 1124
Harness, interlock/sensor
06L9949
1041–22, p. 1156
p. 636
p. 844
Table 97. Error Code 351 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 320.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 319
Table 97. Error Code 351 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Inspect the paper path from paper path #3 sensor to the paper path #2
Go to step 3.
sensor:
v Check all rollers, including the rollers in the input unit left cover, for
wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper Path Views with Rollers,
Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the tray 3 feed roller:
a. Open the input unit left cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0802 (input unit feed motor).
3.
c. Observe the tray 3 feed rollers.
Do the tray 3 feed rollers smoothly rotate?
Go to step 4 on page 321.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Kit, tray 3 feed gear
v Gear in the kit, tray 3
feed clutch
v Kit, input unit drive gear
If a problem remains, go to
step 7 on page 321.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 320
Table 97. Error Code 351 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the paper path #2 sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0807 (paper path #2 sensor).
4.
Yes
No
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Open the left cover.
c. Block the paper path #2 sensor, and press Enter. An H should
display.
d. Unblock the paper path #2 sensor, and press Enter. An L should
display.
v Paper path #2 sensor
v Cabling P/J143, P/J607,
P/J408
v Harness, interlock sensor
v Harness, rear
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
you unblock the sensor beam?
5.
a. Print a simplex continuous test (CONTINUOUS TEST on Test Menu)
from tray 5 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 5,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=OFF on the Paper Menu) until error code
351 occurs.
b. Check the location of the jam.
Go to step 6.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Kit, tray 3 separation and
feed (tray 3 feed roller)
v Input unit, cover asm., left
Did the paper travel past paper path sensor #2?
6.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Input unit PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 7.
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 321
352—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 98, 352—Paper Jam / Area B, C (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the paper path #2 sensor active with the printer Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
1041–19, p. 1156
Locations
Paper path #2 sensor
90H3665
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, rear
90H4210
700–13, p. 1124
Harness, interlock/sensor
06L9949
1041–22, p. 1156
Removal
Procedures
p. 740
p. 813
Table 98. Error Code 352 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the paper path #2 sensor:
Go to step 2 on page 323.
a. Open left cover.
b. Check the paper path #2 sensor for contamination or paper fragments
that may be interrupting the sensor beam, and damage.
Is the paper path #2 sensor clean and free of paper and not
damaged?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Paper path #2 sensor
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 322
Table 98. Error Code 352 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the paper path #2 sensor:
1. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0807 (paper path #2 sensor).
2.
2. Open the left cover.
3. Block the paper path #2 sensor, and press Enter. An H should
display.
4. Unblock the paper path #2 sensor, and press Enter. An L should
display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor beam, and an L when
not blocked?
Yes
No
Replace the MCU PCB (see Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
replacement, determine if
page 813).
the problem is fixed.
v Paper path #2 sensor
v Cabling P/J143, P/J607,
P/J408
v Harness, interlock sensor
v Harness, rear
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 323
353—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 99, 353—Paper Jam / Area A, B (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper fed from tray 5, the registration sensor did not activate within the
specified time after the paper path #1 sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Registration sensor
90H3665
920–7, p. 1130
Kit, Tray 1 feed roller
90H3639
1033–98, p. 1151
Kit, tray 1 feed clutch
90H3634¹
1034–97, p. 1154
Kit, tray 1 feed gears
06L9942
1033–99, p. 1151
Separation roller assembly
90H3660
1031–1, p. 1147
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, registration
90H4215
Removal
Procedures
p. 740
p. 634
p. 813
700–18, p. 1124
¹ an assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 99. Error Code 353 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2 on page 325.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 324
Table 99. Error Code 353 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper path from the paper path #1 sensor to the registration
sensor as follows:
v Check all rollers, including the separation roller assembly in the tray 1
left cover, for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper Path
Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the registration sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0805 (registration sensor).
3.
b. Block the registration sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the registration sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
v
v
v
v
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when not
blocked?
4.
Check the tray 1 feed roller:
a. Remove paper tray 1.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0401 (main drive motor, M10).
c. Observe the tray 1 feed roller assemblies.
Do the feed roller assemblies smoothly rotate?
5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
Registration sensor
Cabling P/J100, P/J459
Harness, registration
MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Kit, tray 1 feed rollers
v Kit, tray 1 feed gears
v Gear in kit, tray 1 feed
clutch
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 325
354—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 5 (Input Unit)
Link to—diagnostic Table 100 on page 327, 354—Paper Jam / Area C, Tray 5 (Input Unit)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that when paper was fed from tray 5 paper path #4 sensor did not activate within
the specified time after the tray 5 feed clutch activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
p. 742
Removal
Procedures
Paper path #4 sensor
90H3665
4040–7, p. 1202
Kit, tray 5 feed roller
06L9966
4071–98, p. 1215
Kit, tray 5 feeder asm
06L9963
4073–3, p. 1220
p. 899
Kit, tray 5 feed and separation rollers
06L9797
4071–99, p. 1215
p. 901
PCB, input unit
90H4230
4020–10, p. 1194
Harness, tray 3 and 4
06L9961
4020–22, p. 1194
Kit, tray 5 feed clutch
90H4238
4073–99, p. 1220
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Motor, Input unit feed (M6)
90H4228
4020–1, p. 1194
Kit, Input unit drive gear
90H4231
4020–99, p. 1194
Harness, tray 5
06L9960
4020–21, p. 1194
Tray 5
06L9800
4074–1, p. 1222
Harness, tray
90H4211
700–14, p. 1124
Connector, Input unit
06L9959
4020–20, p. 1194
Kit, tray 5 transport asm.
11L5501
4072–99, p. 1218
Belt, input unit drive
90H4229
4020–2, p. 1194
p. 745
p. 895
p. 865
p. 636
p. 813
p. 716
p. 631
p. 898
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 326
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Kit, feed, pick, and separation rollers (qty.
6)
06L9941
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
4061–4, p. 1215
Table 100. Error Code 354 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the paper source of the problem.
1.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Inspect the paper path from tray 5 to the paper path #4 sensor as
follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
2.
Yes
No
Check the items listed under Go to step 2.
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary,
replace the paper in the
paper source.
Go to step 3.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 4 on page 328.
Go to step 9 on page 329.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
3.
Check the tray 5 feed roller:
a. Remove tray 3.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0802 (Input unit feed motor, M6).
c. Check the tray 5 feed roller, which is located above tray 4.
Does the tray 5 feed roller asm. rotate smoothly?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 327
Table 100. Error Code 354 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the paper path #4 sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0809 (paper path #4 sensor).
4.
Yes
No
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
v
v
v
v
Paper path #4 sensor
Cabling P/J126, P/J486
Input unit PCB
Cabling P/J480, P/J613,
P/J406
v MCU PCB
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when not
blocked?
Check the tray 5 feed clutch:
a. Remove the input unit rear cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0816 (tray 5 feed clutch).
5.
Go to step 6.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Tray 5 feed clutch kit
Cabling P/J215, P/J485
Input unit PCB
Cabling P/J480, P/J613,
P/J406
v MCU PCB
c. Touch the tray 5 feed clutch and press Enter. Listen for the tray 5
feed clutch to pick.
Does tray 5 feed clutch activate?
6.
Check the tray 5 feed gears:
a. Remove the input unit rear cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0802 (input unit feed motor, M6).
c. Check the tray 5 feed clutch gear and drive gears.
Go to step 7 on page 329.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Tray 5 feed clutch kit
v Kit, input unit drive
Are the tray 5 feed clutch gear and drive gears rotating smoothly?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 328
Table 100. Error Code 354 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
7.
Actions and Questions
Check the tray 5 pick and feed rollers:
a. With tray 3 removed, print a configuration page from tray 5 to the
main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 5, OUTPUT=MAIN, on the Paper
Menu).
b. Check the tray 5 pick and feed rollers.
Yes
No
Go to step 8.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Kit,tray 5 feeder asm.
v Kit, tray 5 feed and
separation rollers
Are the tray 5 pick and feed rollers rotating smoothly?
8.
Replace the tray 5 rollers (kit, feed, pick, and separation) and print a
Go to step 10.
configuration page from tray 5 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 5,
OUTPUT=MAIN, on the Paper Menu).
Problem solved.
Do you still get error code 354?
Check the input unit feed motor:
a. Remove the input unit rear cover.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0802 (Input unit feed motor, M6).
Does the input unit feed motor (M6) run?
9.
Check that the gear train is
working properly. Replace
as necessary:
v Belt, input unit drive
v Kit, input drive gear
v Kit, tray 5 feed roller
If a problem remains, go to
step 10.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Input unit feed motor (M6)
Cabling P/J217
Input unit PCB
Cabling P/J480, P/J613,
P/J406
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 10.
10.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 329
361—Finisher Jam / Area D, E (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 101 on page 331, 361—Finisher Jam / Area D, E (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the finisher transport entrance sensor did not deactivate within the specified time
after it activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Transport entrance sensor
11L5433
5090–13, p. 1247
p. 743
p. 1065
Transport motor
11L5442
5060–1, p. 1240
p. 718
p. 1069
Transport drive belt
11L6537
5100–9, p. 1250
p. 1057
Top cover asm.
11L5470
5090–1, p. 1247
p. 922
Transport rollers / kit
11L5487¹
(5090–96)
5090–10, p. 1247
Kit, motor bracket
11L5448
5070–98, p. 1242
Kit, belt, drive gear,
11L5449¹
(5070–99)
5070–99, p. 1242
Kit, transport gear
11L5468¹
(5100–98)
5100–98, p. 1250
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 739
p. 1072
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 330
Table 101. Error Code 361 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Inspect the paper path from the fuser to the transport entrance sensor as Go to step 2.
follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
1.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
2.
Check the transport entrance sensor:
a. Open or remove the transport top cover.
b. Make sure the transport entrance sensor and actuator work correctly
and that the spring returns the actuator to the “no paper” position.
Go to step 3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Transport entrance
sensor
Are the transport entrance sensor and actuator working correctly?
Check the transport entrance sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1201 (transport entrance sensor).
3.
b. Insert a small piece of paper into the transport entrance sensor to
interrupt the sensor beam and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Remove paper and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an L
when not interrupted?
Go to step 4 on page 332.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Transport entrance
sensor
v Cabling P/J257, P/J262,
P/J879, P/J854
v Finisher PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 331
Table 101. Error Code 361 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the transport drive:
a. Remove the 2 screws holding the transport rear cover, and remove
the cover (see “Transport Asm., Finisher” on page 1061).
4.
Yes
No
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Remove the finisher rear cover (see “Rear Cover, Finisher” on
page 919).
v Transport motor
v Cabling P/J257, P/J298,
P/J267
v Finisher PCB
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1412 (transport motor).
Does the transport motor run?
5.
Go to step 6.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1412 (transport motor), carefully check the gears
and drive belt from the transport motor to the transport drive belt.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Drive gear belt kit
v Motor bracket kit
Do the transport gears and drive belt rotate smoothly?
Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and, while
running test 1412 (transport motor), carefully check the transport gears,
the transport drive belt, and the one-way pulleys it drives.
6.
Do the transport gears, the transport drive belt, and the one-way
pulleys run smoothly?
Go to step 7 on page 333.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Transport drive belt
v Transport gear kit
v Transport roller kit
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 332
Table 101. Error Code 361 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the transport rollers and the separation rollers (the separation
rollers are located in the transport top cover).
Are the transport rollers and the separation rollers clean, and not
worn or broken?
7.
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from Tray 1 to the upper
finisher bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper Menu):
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from Tray 1 to the upper
finisher bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper Menu):
v Transport roller kit
v Top cover asm.
If a problem remains, go to
step 8.
8.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 333
362—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 102 on page 335, 362—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the finisher transport entrance sensor did not activate within the specified time
after the fuser exit sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Transport entrance sensor
11L5433
5090–13, p. 1247
p. 743
p. 1065
In-gate solenoid
11L5469¹
(5100–99)
5100–14, p. 1250
p. 637
p. 1010
Kit, in-gate
11L5465¹
5020–99, p. 1230
Kit, transport gear
11L5468¹
5100–98, p. 1250
Belt, synchronous transport drive
11L6537
5100–9, p. 1250
Kit, motor bracket
11L5448
5070–98, p. 1242
Kit, belt, drive gear
11L5449¹
(5070–99)
5070–99, p. 1242
Transport motor
11L5442
5060–1, p. 1240
Transport asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 1009
p. 1057
p. 718
p. 1069
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 334
Table 102. Error Code 362 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Inspect the paper path from the fuser to the transport entrance sensor as Go to step 2.
follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
1.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the transport entrance sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1201 (transport entrance sensor).
b. Insert a piece of paper into the transport entrance sensor to activate
the sensor. Press Enter. An H should display.
c. Remove paper and press Enter. An L should display.
2.
Does an H display when you activate the sensor and an L with the
paper removed?
Go to step 3 on page 336.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from the upper finisher bin
(OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper menu):
v Transport entrance
sensor
v Cabling P/J257, P/J262,
P/J879, P/J854
v Finisher PCB
v Cabling P/J265, P/J612
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 335
Table 102. Error Code 362 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the in-gate solenoid:
Go to step 4.
a. Connect the transport asm. to the doc asm.
b. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1410 (in-gate solenoid, pull) and test 1411 (in-gate solenoid,
push).
Replace the following:
v In-gate solenoid
v Kit, in-gate
v Cabling P/J265, P/J297,
P/J267
v Finisher PCB
d. As you run the tests, see if the in-gate opens and closes.
Does the in-gate solenoid open and close?
Check the transport drive:
a. Remove the 2 screws holding the transport rear cover, and remove
the cover (see “Transport Asm., Finisher” on page 1061).
4.
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Remove the finisher rear cover (see “Rear Cover, Finisher” on
page 919).
v Transport motor
v Cabling P/J257, P/J298,
P/J267
v Finisher PCB
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1412 (transport motor).
Does the transport motor run?
5.
Go to step 6 on page 337.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1412 (transport motor), carefully check the gears
and drive belt from the transport motor to the transport drive belt.
Do the transport gears and drive belt rotate smoothly?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Drive gear belt kit
v Motor bracket kit
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 336
Table 102. Error Code 362 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and, while
running test 1412 (transport motor), carefully check the transport gears,
the transport drive belt, and the one-way pulleys it drives.
6.
Yes
No
Go to step 7.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Do the transport gears, the transport drive belt, and the one-way
pulleys run smoothly?
Check the transport rollers and the separation rollers (the separation
rollers are located in the transport top cover).
Are the transport rollers and the separation rollers clean, and not
worn or broken?
7.
v Transport drive belt
v Transport gear kit
v Transport roller kit
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from Tray 1 to the upper
finisher bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper Menu):
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from Tray 1 to the upper
finisher bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper Menu):
v Transport roller kit
v Top cover asm.
If a problem remains, go to
step 8.
8.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 337
410—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 103 on page 339, 410—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the finisher eject clamp sensor either did not activate or deactivate within the
specified time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Eject clamp sensor
06L9993
5080–5, p. 1244
p. 743
Eject bracket asm.
11L5450
5080–1, p. 1244
Eject clamp/offset motor
11L5450¹
(5080–1)
5080–2, p. 1244
Eject clamp actuator
11L5450¹
(5080–1)
5080–18, p. 1244
Harness, dc main
11L5458
5031–18, p. 1234
Harness
11L5451
5080–3, p. 1244
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 986
p. 980
p. 718
p. 984
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 338
Table 103. Error Code 410 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the eject clamp sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1216 (eject clamp sensor).
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from Tray 1 to the upper
finisher bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper menu):
b. Insert a small piece of paper into the eject clamp sensor to interrupt
the sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
c. Remove the paper and press Enter. An H should display.
1.
Does an H display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an L
when not interrupted?
v Eject clamp sensor
v Cabling P/J841, P/J884,
P/J893
v Finisher PCB
2.
Check the eject clamp sensor actuator:
a. Manually rotate clockwise (CW) the one-way gear that is attached to
the eject clamp actuator and check the action of the actuator. Make
sure that it can block and unblock the eject clamp sensor beam.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1216 (eject clamp sensor).
Go to step 3 on page 340.
c. Block the sensor beam with the actuator and press Enter. An L
should display.
d. Unblock the sensor beam and press Enter. An H should display.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from Tray 1 to the upper
finisher bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper menu):
Does an H display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an L
when not interrupted?
v Eject bracket asm.
v Eject clamp actuator
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 339
Table 103. Error Code 410 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
Check the eject clamp motor:
Go to step 4.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1422 (eject clamp motor, CCW).
3.
c. Observe the eject clamp actuator.
Does the eject clamp motor run, and does it rotate the eject clamp
sensor actuator to interrupt the sensor beam?
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from Tray 1 to the upper
finisher bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper menu):
v Eject clamp offset motor
v Cabling P/J863, P/J898
v Finisher PCB
4.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a configuration page
from Tray 1 to the upper finisher bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1, OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper menu):
v Eject bracket asm.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 5.
5.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 340
411—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 104 on page 342, 411—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic detected a problem at the tamper home sensor.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Tamper home sensor
11L5369
5160–8, p. 1265
p. 743
p. 1051
Tamper motor asm.
11L5398
5160–1, p. 1265
p. 718
p. 1054
Tamper motor drive belt
11L5490¹
(5160–99)
5160–22, p. 1265
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5458
5031–18, p. 1234
Harness asm., compiler
11L5490¹
(5160-99)
5160–47, p. 1265
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, dc main
11L5461
p. 1053
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
5031–21, p. 1234
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 341
Table 104. Error Code 411 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the tamper home sensor:
Go to step 2.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Remove the 4 screws holding the eject roller chute to the finisher and
remove the chute (see “Eject Shaft Asm., Finisher” on page 992).
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from Tray 1 to the upper
finisher bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper Menu):
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1204 (tamper home sensor).
1.
d. Gently pull the tamper motor drive belt to slide the tamper base that
contains the tamper sensor actuator into the sensor to interrupt the
sensor beam. Press Enter. An H should display.
e. Slide the tamper base away from the tamper sensor. An L should
display.
v Tamper home sensor
v Cabling P/J839, P/J883,
P/J893
v Finisher PCB
v Harness asm., compiler
v Harness, dc main
compiler
Does an H display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an L
when not interrupted?
2.
Check the tamper motor:
Go to step 3 on page 343.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1413 (tamper motor rotates CCW and drives to the front). Note
that the motor only moves a short distance each time you press
Enter.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1414 (tamper motor rotates CW and drives to the rear). Note that
the motor only moves a short distance each time you press Enter.
Does the tamper motor rotate correctly in both tests?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from Tray 1 to the upper
finisher bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper Menu):
v
v
v
v
Tamper motor
Cabling P/J867, P/J897
Finisher PCB
Harness, dc main
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 342
Table 104. Error Code 411 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
Check the tamper drive front:
Go to step 4.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1413 (tamper motor drives to the front).
3.
No
Adjust or replace the tamper
motor drive belt (see
“Tamper Motor Drive Belt,
Finisher” on page 1053).
c. Observe the movement of the tamper base and the tamper home
sensor actuator, which is located under the base.
Does the tamper motor drive the tamper base to the front of the
compiler tray so the actuator is not interrupting the tamper home
sensor beam?
Check the tamper drive rear:
Go to step 5.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1414 (tamper motor drives to the rear).
4.
Adjust or replace the tamper
motor drive belt (see
“Tamper Motor Drive Belt,
Finisher” on page 1053).
c. Observe the movement of the tamper base and the tamper home
sensor actuator, which is located under the base.
Does the tamper motor drive the tamper base to the rear of the
compiler tray so the actuator is interrupting the tamper home
sensor beam?
5.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 343
412—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 105 on page 345, 412—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the finisher offset home sensor either did not activate or deactivate within the
specified time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Offset home sensor
06L9993
5080–6, p. 1244
p. 743
Eject bracket asm.
11L5450
5080–1, p. 1244
Eject clamp offset motor asm.
11L5450¹
(5080–1)
5080–2, p. 1244
Harness
11L5451
5080–3, p. 1244
Harness, bin lift
11L5458
5031–18, p. 1234
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5457
Removal
Procedures
p. 1013
p. 980
p. 718
p. 984
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
5031–17, p. 1234
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 344
Table 105. Error Code 412 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the offset home sensor:
a. Remove the offset home sensor (see “Offset Home Sensor, Finisher”
on page 1013).
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1218 (offset home sensor).
1.
v Offset home sensor
v Cabling P/J844,
P/J280A/280B,
P/J885A/885B,
P/J893B/893
v Harness, 5080-3, p. 1244
c. Insert a small piece of paper into the offset home sensor to interrupt
the sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
d. Remove the paper and press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an H
when not interrupted?
v Harness, bin lift
v Finisher PCB
Check the offset home sensor actuator:
Go to step 3 on page 346.
a. Install the offset home sensor (see “Offset Home Sensor, Finisher” on
page 1013).
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1218 (offset home sensor).
2.
c. Manually rotate the eject clamp motor (5080-2, p. 1244) in a
clockwise (CW) direction and move the the offset and actuator offset
cam (5080-21, p. 1244) to block the offset home sensor. Press Enter.
An L should display.
d. Manually rotate the eject clamp motor drive gear in a clockwise (CW)
direction to unblock the offset sensor. Press Enter. An H should
display.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Eject bracket asm.
v Cabling P/J844,
P/J280A/280B,
P/J885A/885B,
P/J893B/893
v Harness, 5080-3, p. 1244
v Harness, bin lift
v Finisher PCB
Does an L display when you block the sensor beam and an H when
the sensor is unblocked?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 345
Table 105. Error Code 412 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1421 (offset motor, CW). Note that each time you press Enter,
the offset motor runs only until the offset mechanisms are toward the
front or the back of the printer.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Does the eject clamp motor run?
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
4.
5.
Do you still have an error code 412?
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
Eject clamp offset motor
Cabling P/J863, P/J898
Harness, bin lift
Finisher PCB
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 346
413—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 106 on page 348, 413—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the finisher bin ID sensor either did not activate or deactivate within the specified
time after the finisher bin elevator motor started.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Stacker bin ID sensor
06L9993
5120–8A, p. 1256
p. 743
p. 1031
Motor asm. stacker bin elevator
11L5496
5130–11, p. 1258
p. 718
p. 1033
Harness asm., bin ID
11L5364
5120–18, p. 1256
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5458
5031–18, p. 1234
Harness
11L5361
5120–15, p. 1256
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 347
Table 106. Error Code 413 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the stacker bin id sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1228 (stacker bin ID sensor).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed:
b. Insert a small piece of paper into the stacker bin ID sensor to
interrupt the sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
c. Remove the paper and press Enter. An H should display.
v Stacker bin ID sensor
v Cabling P/J837,
P/J881A/881B, P/J893
v Harness asm., bin ID
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Does an L display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an H
when not interrupted?
Go to step 3 on page 349.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1427 (stacker elevator bin motor drives up).
Note: Test 1427 does not run if the finisher bins are in the full up
position. If the bins are in the full up position, run test 1428 to try
lowering the bins, and then re-run test 1427.
2.
Does the elevator motor run, raising the finisher bins?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed:
v Stacker bin elevator
motor asm.
v Cabling P/J865, P/J889
v Harness P/J 889 to
P/J273, P/J274, and
P/J865 (5120–15, p.
1256)
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 348
Table 106. Error Code 413 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1428 (stacker elevator bin motor drives down).
Note: Test 1428 does not run if the finisher bins are in the full down
position. If the bins are in the full down position, run test 1427 to try
raising the bins, and then re-run test 1428.
3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed:
v Stacker bin elevator
motor asm.
v Cabling P/J865, P/J889
v Harness P/J 889 to
P/J273, P/J274, and
P/J865 (5120–15, p.
1256)
Does the elevator motor run, lowering the finisher bins?
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
4.
5.
Do you still have an error code 413?
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 349
414—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 107 on page 351, 414—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the finisher upper-limit switch is activated. Note that the finisher bins are not
necessarily at the upper limit.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Stacker upper-limit switch
06L9990
5120–3, p. 1256
p. 743
p. 1036
Motor asm. stacker bin elevator
11L5496
5130–11, p. 1258
p. 718
p. 1033
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
Harness
11L5361
5120–15, p. 1256
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5458
5031–18, p. 1234
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 350
Table 107. Error Code 414 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the stacker upper-limit switch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1229 (finisher upper-limit switch).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Activate the stacker upper-limit switch and press Enter. An H should
display.
Note: If the bins are at the upper limit, run diagnostic test 1428 to
lower the bins.
c. Release the stacker upper-limit switch and press Enter. An L should
display.
v Stacker upper-limit switch
v Cabling P/J273, P/J889,
P/J899
v Harness
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
Does an H display when you activate the switch, and an L when not
activated?
Check the stacker bin elevator motor:
Go to step 3.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1427 (stacker elevator motor drives up) to move the stacker bins
to the upper limit.
2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stacker bin elevator
motor asm.
v Cabling P/J865, P/J889,
P/J899
v Harness
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
c. Observe the stacker upper-limit switch to determine if the switch is
actuated by stacker bins.
d. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1428 (stacker elevator motor drives down).
Do the stacker bins activate the upper-limit switch when you raise
the bins to the upper limit?
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
3.
4.
Do you still have an error code 414?
If a problem remains, go to
step 4.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 351
415—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 108 on page 353, 415—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the finisher lower-limit switch is activated. Note that the finisher bins are not
necessarily at the lower limit.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Stacker lower-limit switch
06L9990
5120–3, p. 1256
p. 743
p. 1035
Motor asm. stacker bin elevator
11L5496
5130–11, p. 1258
p. 718
p. 1033
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
Harness
11L5361
5120–15, p. 1256
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5458
5031–18, p. 1234
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 352
Table 108. Error Code 415 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the stacker lower-limit switch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1230 (stacker lower-limit switch).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Activate the stacker lower-limit switch and press Enter. An H should
display.
Note: If the bins are at the lower limit, run diagnostic test 1427 to
raise the bins.
c. Release the stacker lower-limit switch and press Enter. An L should
display.
v Stacker lower-limit switch
v Cabling P/J274, P/J889,
P/J899
v Harness
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
Does an H display when you activate the switch, and an L when not
activated?
Check the stacker bin elevator motor:
Go to step 3.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1428 (stacker elevator motor drives down) to move the stacker
bins to the lower limit.
2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Motor asm., stacker bin
elevator
v Cabling P/J865, P/J889,
P/J899
v Harness
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
c. Observe the stacker lower-limit switch to determine if the switch is
actuated by stacker bins.
d. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1427 (stacker elevator motor drives up).
Do the stacker bins activate the lower-limit switch when you lower
the bins to the lower limit?
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
3.
4.
Do you still have an error code 415?
If a problem remains, go to
step 4.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 353
416—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 109, 416—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the stapler head home sensor does not activate.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Stapler asm.
11L5424
5140–1, p. 1261
p. 720
p. 1038
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness
11L5425
5140–3, p. 1261
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
p. 813
Table 109. Error Code 416 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the stapler head home sensor:
a. Remove the finisher front inner cover asm. (see “Front Inner Cover,
Finisher” on page 909)
1.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1212 (stapler head home sensor). The stapler head home sensor
is located on the stapler asm.
c. As you enter diagnostic 1212, an L should display.
d. Rotate the D shaped cam that is located next to the stapler cartridge
eject lever approximately 90° CCW and press Enter. An H should
display.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 355.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stapler asm.
v Cabling P/J862, P/J892,
J897, P897
v Harness
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
Can you detect a change from L to H?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 354
Table 109. Error Code 416 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
2.
3.
Do you still have an error code 416?
Yes
No
If a problem remains, go to
step 3.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 355
417—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 110, 417—Finisher / Power Off/On (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the stapler head home sensor does not activate within the specified time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Stapler asm.
11L5424
5140–1, p. 1261
p. 720
p. 1038
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness
11L5425
5140–3, p. 1261
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
p. 813
Table 110. Error Code 417 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the stapler head home sensor:
a. Remove the front inner cover asm. (see “Front Inner Cover, Finisher”
on page 909)
1.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1212 (stapler head home sensor). The stapler head home sensor
is located on the stapler asm.
c. As you enter diagnostic 1212 an H should display.
d. Rotate the D shaped cam that is located next to the stapler cartridge
eject lever approximately 90° CCW and press Enter. An L should
display.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 357.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stapler asm.
v Cabling P/J862, P/J892,
J897, P897
v Harness
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
Are you able to detect a change from an L to an H?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 356
Table 110. Error Code 417 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1420 (stapler head motor).
2.
4.
v Stapler asm.
v Cabling P/J862, P/J892,
J897, P897
v Harness
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
Does the stapler head motor run?
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Do you still have an error code 417?
If a problem remains, go to
step 4.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 357
418—Finisher / Stapler Failed (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 111 on page 359, 418—Finisher / Stapler Failed (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the stapler front corner sensor does not activate within the specified time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Stapler front corner sensor
11L5369
5140–13, p. 1261
p. 743
p. 1040
Stapler transport motor
11L5444
5060–14, p. 1240
p. 718
p. 1050
Stapler transport motor drive belt
11L5445
5060–15, p. 1240
p. 1049
Bracket asm., rail
11L5426
5140–6, p. 1261
p. 1045
Harness asm., stapler sensor
11L5427
5140–21, p. 1261
Harness, dc main
11L5456
5031–21, p. 1234
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
¹ an assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 358
Table 111. Error Code 418 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the stapler front corner sensor:
a. Remove the finisher front inner cover (see “Front Inner Cover,
Finisher” on page 909).
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1209 (stapler front corner sensor).
1.
v Stapler front corner
sensor
v Cabling P/J833,
P/J847A/847B,
P/J896B/896
v Harness asm., stapler
sensor
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
c. Insert a small piece of paper into the stapler front corner sensor to
interrupt the sensor beam and press Enter. An H should display.
Note: If the stapler asm. is positioned at the stapler front corner
sensor, you must push the stapler asm. towards the back of the
printer.
d. Remove the paper and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an L
when not interrupted?
2.
Check the stapler transport motor:
Go to step 3.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Remove the finisher rear cover (see “Rear Cover, Finisher” on
page 919).
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stapler transport motor
v Cabling P/J886, J897,
P897
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1418 (stapler transport motor, move to front).
Does the stapler transport motor run?
3.
Check the stapler motor drive belt:
Go to step 4 on page 360.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1418 (stapler transport motor, move to front).
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stapler motor drive belt
c. Carefully check the stapler motor drive belt.
Does the stapler motor drive belt rotate?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 359
Table 111. Error Code 418 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
4.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the stapler rail belt:
Go to step 5.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1418 (stapler transport motor, move to front).
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Bracket asm., rail
c. Carefully check the stapler rail belt, which is located in the rail bracket
asm.
Does the stapler rail belt rotate?
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
5.
6.
Do you still have an error code 418?
If a problem remains, go to
step 6.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 360
419—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 112 on page 362, 419—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the stapler front edge sensor does not activate within the specified time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Stapler front edge sensor
11L5369
5140–13, p. 1261
p. 743
p. 1040
Stapler transport motor
11L5444
5060–14, p. 1240
p. 718
p. 1050
Stapler transport motor drive belt
11L5445
5060–15, p. 1240
p. 1049
Bracket asm., rail
11L5426
5140–6, p. 1261
p. 1045
Harness asm., stapler sensor
11L5427
5140–21, p. 1261
Harness, dc main
11L5456
5031–21, p. 1234
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
¹ an assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 361
Table 112. Error Code 419 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the stapler front edge sensor:
a. Remove the finisher front inner cover (see “Front Inner Cover,
Finisher” on page 909) and the left cover (see “Left Cover, Finisher”
on page 912).
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stacker front edge sensor
v Cabling P/J834,
P/J877A/877B, J896B,
P896
v Harness asm., stapler
sensor
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1210 (stapler front edge sensor).
1.
c. Insert a small piece of paper into the stapler front edge sensor to
interrupt the sensor beam and press Enter. An H should display.
Note: If the stapler asm. is positioned at the stapler front corner
sensor, you must push the stapler asm. towards the back of the
printer.
d. Remove the paper and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an L
when not interrupted?
2.
Check the stapler transport motor:
Go to step 3 on page 363.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Remove the finisher rear cover (see “Rear Cover, Finisher” on
page 919).
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1418 (stapler transport motor, move to front).
Does the stapler transport motor run?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stapler transport motor
v Cabling P/J886, J897,
P897
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 362
Table 112. Error Code 419 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the stapler motor drive belt:
Go to step 4.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1418 (stapler transport motor, move to front).
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stapler motor drive belt
c. Carefully check the stapler motor drive.
Does the stapler motor drive belt rotate?
4.
Check the stapler rail belt:
Go to step 5.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1418 (stapler transport motor, move to front).
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Bracket asm., rail
c. Carefully check the stapler rail belt, which is located in the rail bracket
asm.
Does the stapler rail belt rotate?
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
5.
6.
Do you still have an error code 419?
If a problem remains, go to
step 6.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 363
420—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 113 on page 365, 420—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the stapler rear edge sensor does not activate within the specified time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Stapler rear edge sensor
11L5369
5140–13, p. 1261
p. 743
p. 1040
Stapler transport motor
11L5444
5060–14, p. 1240
p. 718
p. 1050
Stapler transport motor drive belt
11L5445
5060–15, p. 1240
p. 1049
Bracket asm., rail
11L5426
5140–6, p. 1261
p. 1045
Harness asm., stapler sensor
11L5427
5140–21, p. 1261
Harness, dc main
11L5456
5031–21, p. 1234
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 364
Table 113. Error Code 420 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the stapler rear edge sensor:
a. Remove the finisher front inner cover (see “Front Inner Cover,
Finisher” on page 909) and the finisher left cover (see “Left Cover,
Finisher” on page 912).
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stacker rear edge sensor
v Cabling P/J835,
P/J877A/877B, P/J896B,
P896
v Harness asm., stapler
sensor
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1211 (stapler rear edge sensor).
1.
c. Insert a small piece of paper into the stapler front edge sensor to
interrupt the sensor beam and press Enter. An H should display.
Note: If the stapler asm. is positioned at the stapler front corner
sensor, you must push the stapler asm. towards the back of the
printer.
d. Remove the paper and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an L
when not interrupted?
2.
Check the stapler transport motor:
Go to step 3 on page 366.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Remove the finisher rear cover (see “Rear Cover, Finisher” on
page 919).
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1418 (stapler transport motor, move to front).
Does the stapler transport motor run?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stapler transport motor
v Cabling P/J886, J897,
P897
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 365
Table 113. Error Code 420 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the stapler motor drive belt:
Go to step 4.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1418 (stapler transport motor, move to front).
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stapler motor drive belt
c. Carefully check the stapler motor drive
Does the stapler motor drive belt rotate?
4.
Check the stapler rail belt:
Go to step 5.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1418 (stapler transport motor, move to front).
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Bracket asm., rail
c. Carefully check the stapler rail belt, which is located in the rail bracket
asm.
Does the stapler rail belt rotate?
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
5.
6.
Do you still have an error code 420?
If a problem remains, go to
step 6.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 366
421—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 114 on page 368, 421—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the stapler set clamp home sensor does not activate or deactivate within the
specified time after the stapler transport motor starts.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Set clamp home sensor
06L9993
5060–11, p. 1240
p. 743
p. 1026
Set clamp motor
11L5447¹
(5060–99)
5060–5, p. 1240
p. 718
p. 1028
Kit, belt, drive gear
11L5446¹
5060–98, p. 1240
Pulley
11L5493
5160–42, p. 1265
Actuator, set clamp
11L5494
5160–43, p. 1265
Shaft asm. eject 1
11L5408
5160–45, p. 1265
Harness, bin lift
11L5457
5031–17, p. 1234
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5458
5031–18, p. 1234
Harness
11L5451
5080–3, p. 1244
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 367
Table 114. Error Code 421 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the set clamp home sensor:
a. Remove the finisher rear cover (see “Rear Cover, Finisher” on
page 919).
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1217 (set clamp home sensor).
1.
v Set clamp home sensor
v Cabling P/J842,
P/J884A/884B, J893B,
P/893
v Harness
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
c. Insert a small piece of paper into the sensor to interrupt the sensor
beam and press Enter. An L should display.
Note: If the set clamp actuator is positioned at the set clamp home
sensor, you must rotate the set clamp motor CCW to move the
actuator away from the sensor.
d. Remove the paper and press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an H
when not interrupted?
2.
Go to step 3 on page 369.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) run test
1426 (set clamp motor).
Does the set clamp motor run?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Set clamp motor
Cabling P/J864, P/J898
Harness, bin lift
Finisher PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 368
Table 114. Error Code 421 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the set clamp actuator position:
Go to step 4.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Run test 1426 (set clamp motor) once to position the set clamp
actuator.
c. Exit test 1426.
d. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1217 (set clamp home sensor).
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
Kit, belt, drive gear
Pulley
Actuator, set clamp
Shaft asm., eject 1
Does an L display?
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
4.
5.
Do you still have an error code 421?
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 369
422—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 115 on page 371, 422—Finisher Failed / Stapler Failed (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the stapler end wall sensor either does not activate or deactivate within the
specified time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
End wall open sensor
06L9993
5160–12, p. 1265
p. 743
p. 979
End wall motor
11L5441¹
(5050–99)
5050–21, p. 1238
p. 718
p. 977
Harness asm., compiler
11L5490¹
(5160-99)
5160–47, p. 1265
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5458
5031–18, p. 1234
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 370
Table 115. Error Code 422 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the end wall sensor:
a. Remove the finisher front inner cover (see “Front Inner Cover,
Finisher” on page 909).
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Remove the finisher left cover (see “Left Cover, Finisher” on
page 912).
1.
v End wall open sensor
v Cabling P/J840,
P/J883A/883B, J893A,
P893
v Harness asm., compiler
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1208 (end wall sensor).
d. Insert a small piece of paper into the sensor to interrupt the sensor
beam and press Enter. An L should display.
e. Remove the paper and press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an H
when not interrupted?
2.
Check the end wall motor:
Go to step 3.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1416 (end wall motor, forward).
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v End wall motor
v Cabling P/J868, P/J890,
J897, P897
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1417 (end wall motor, reverse).
Does the end wall motor raise and lower the end wall?
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
3.
4.
Do you still have an error code 422?
If a problem remains, go to
step 4.
Problem solved.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 371
430—Main Motor / Power Off/On (Printer, M10)
Link to—diagnostic Table 116 on page 373, 430—Main Motor / Power Off/On (Printer, M10)
Problem—MCU logic detected a problem with the main drive motor (M10).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
Aux. tray feeder asm.
06L9946
1012–7, p. 1139
LVPS (100-110 V ac)
90H4197
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
LVPS (220 V ac)
90H4198
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
Kit, Tray 1 feed roller
90H3639
1033–98, p. 1151
p. 735
Kit, tray 1 feed gears
06L9942
1033–99, p. 1151
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
Transport asm.
90H3681
510–1, p. 1117
Kit, feed drive
90H3645
320–99, p. 1108
Main drive asm.
90H4192
340–1, p. 1112
p. 714
p. 807
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Roller, registration
90H3667
920–3, p. 1130
p. 735
Clutch asm., registration
90H3666
920–1, p. 1130
p. 634
Kit, tray 2 feed gears
06L9945
1043–99, p. 1161
Kit, tray 2 clutch
90H3642
1044–97, p. 1163
Harness, main motor
90H4219
700–23, p. 1124
p. 793
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 372
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Kit, tray 1 feed clutch
90H3634¹
1034–97, p. 1154
p. 634
Frame asm., exit rear
90H4193
330–1, p. 1110
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
User’s Guide
Drive asm., exit
90H4190
310–1, p. 1106
p. 818
Table 116. Error Code 430 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Check the main drive asm.:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the upper rear cover.
c. Manually rotate the main drive motor (M10) in a counter-clockwise
direction (CCW).
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 4 on page 374 to
isolate the cause of the
bind.
Go to step 13 on page 376.
Go to step 3 on page 374.
Does the motor rotate and do all of the main drive gears smoothly
rotate?
2.
Check the main drive motor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0401 (main drive motor, M10).
Does the main drive rotate?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 373
Table 116. Error Code 430 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
Check the +24 v dc:
hc3m1104
1
Measure the voltage between J400-5 and
frame ground, and between J400-6 and
frame ground on the MCU PCB.
3.
6
5
Is there +24 V dc between J400-5 and
frame ground, and +24 V dc between
J400-6 and frame ground?
4.
Check the BTR:
a. Open the duplex and left upper cover.
b. Touching only the drive gear at the end of the BTR roller, manually
rotate the BTR.
No
Repair/replace the following, Replace the LVPS (see
“LVPS, Printer” on
one at a time. After each
page 804).
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration
page.
v Main drive asm.
v Cabling P/J205, P/J460
v MCU PCB
Go to step 5.
Replace the BTR.
Replace the EP cartridge.
Go to step 6.
Replace the fuser (see
“Fuser, Printer” on
page 793).
Go to step 7 on page 375.
Can you easily rotate the BTR?
5.
Check the EP cartridge:
a. Remove the EP cartridge.
b. Rotate the motor (M10) CCW.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
Check the fuser:
a. Open the duplex and left upper cover.
b. Remove the fuser asm. (see “Fuser, Printer” on page 793)
6.
c. Manually rotate the main drive motor (M10) counter-clockwise (CCW).
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 374
Table 116. Error Code 430 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
7.
Actions and Questions
Check the exit drive asm.:
a. Remove the rear cover.
b. Push upward on the exit gear #1 (310-4 on p. 1106) of the exit drive
asm. to disengage the exit drive asm. from the main drive asm.
Yes
No
Replace the exit drive asm.
or transport asm.
Go to step 8.
c. Manually rotate the main drive motor (M10) CCW.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
8.
Check Tray 2:
a. Remove the lower rear cover.
b. Push down on the link asm. (320-9 on p. 1108) of the feed drive
transmission to disengage the tray 2 feed drive from the main drive
asm.
c. Manually rotate the main drive motor (M10) CCW.
Repair/replace the following, Go to step 9.
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Kit, feed drive
v Kit, tray 2 feed gears
v Kit, tray 2 clutch
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
9.
Check the auxiliary tray:
a. Remove the auxiliary tray.
b. Manually rotate the main drive motor (M10) CCW.
Replace the auxiliary sheet
feeder.
Go to step 10.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
Check the tray 1 drive:
a. Remove the tray 1 feed clutch (1034-2 on p. 1154) and the 28T gear
(1034-3 on p. 1154).
10.
b. Manually rotate the main drive motor (M10) CCW.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
Repair/replace the following, Go to step 11 on page 376.
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Kit, tray 1 clutch
v Kit, tray 1 feed rollers
v Kit, tray 1 feed gears
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 375
Table 116. Error Code 430 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
11.
Actions and Questions
Check the registration clutch:
a. Remove the registration clutch.
b. Manually rotate the main drive motor (M10) CCW.
Can you easily rotate M10 and do all of the main drive gears
smoothly rotate?
12.
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, Go to step 12.
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Registration clutch asm.
v Roller, registration
Check the fuser drive:
Replace the following:
a. Open the duplex and upper left cover.
v Rear exit frame asm.
b. Remove the fuser.
c. Look in the fuser opening at the rear exit frame asm. gears (330-1 on
p. 1110.
The main drive for the
printer has been checked.
Look for other mechanisms
that could be causing the
bind.
d. Manually rotate the main drive motor (M10) CCW.
Are the rear exit frame gears binding?
a. Remove the upper rear cover (see “Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
13.
b. Enter diagnostic mode, but do not run a diagnostic.
c. Check the LVPS fan (F3) to see if it is turning.
Everything appears to be
working, the problem may
be intermittent.
Go to step 14.
Is F3 turning?
14.
Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run test Replace the MCU PCB (see Go to step 15.
0403 (LVPS fan, F3, mid to high speed).
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
page 813). If a problem
Is F3 turning?
remains, go to step 15.
Check the +24 v dc:
Measure the voltage on the MCU between P/J401-6 and frame ground.
15.
Is there +24 V dc between P/J401-6 and frame ground?
Repair/replace the following, Replace the MCU PCB.
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v LVPS fan (F3)
v Cabling P/J401, P/J235
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 376
451—Fan Failed / Power Off/On (Printer, F3)
Link to—diagnostic Table 117, 451—Fan Failed / Power Off/On (Printer, F3)
Problem—MCU logic detected a problem with the LVPS fan (F3).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
LVPS (100-110 V ac)
90H4197
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
LVPS (220 V ac)
90H4198
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Harness, dc main
90H4209
700–12, p. 1124
Table 117. Error Code 451 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Remove the upper rear cover (see “Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
1.
b. Enter diagnostic mode, but do not run a diagnostic.
c. Check the LVPS fan (F3) to see if it is turning.
Yes
No
The fan is working now, the Go to step 2.
problem may be intermittent.
If a problem remains, go to
step 2.
Is F3 turning?
2.
Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run test Replace the MCU PCB (see Go to step 3 on page 378.
0403 (LVPS fan, F3, mid to high speed).
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
page 813). If a problem
Is F3 turning?
remains, go to step 3 on
page 378.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 377
Table 117. Error Code 451 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the +24 v dc:
Measure the voltage on the MCU between P/J401-6 and frame ground.
3.
Is there +24 V dc between P/J401-6 and frame ground?
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, Replace the MCU PCB.
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v LVPS fan (F3)
v Cabling P/J401, P/J235
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 378
454—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 118, 454—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic received a fan alarm signal from the fuser fan (F1).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Fuser fan (F1)
90H3612
140–8, p. 1101
p. 714
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Harness, main motor
90H4219
700–23, p. 1124
Table 118. Error Code 454 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the fuser fan:
a. Enter diagnostic mode, but do not run a diagnostic.
b. Check the fuser fan (F1) to see if it is turning. Note that the fuser fan
has two speeds depending on the temperature of the fuser.
The fan is working correctly
now. The problem could be
intermittent. If the problem
continues go to step 2.
Go to step 2.
Is F1 turning?
2.
Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run test Replace the MCU PCB (see Go to step 3 on page 380.
0402 (fuser fan, F1).
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
page 813.
Is F1 turning?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 379
Table 118. Error Code 454 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the +24v dc:
a. Remove the upper rear cover (see “Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
3.
b. Measure the voltage between J460-1 on the MCU PCB and frame
ground.
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Fuser fan (F1)
v Cabling P/J204, P/J460
Replace the following:
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains go to
step 4.
Is there +24 V dc between J460-1 and frame ground?
4.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 380
501—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 120 on page 383, 501—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic detected the thermistor remained on for longer than the specified time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
AC driver PCB (100-110 V ac)
90H4199
1110–1, p. 1165
p. 745
AC driver PCB (220 V ac)
90H4200
1110–1, p. 1165
p. 745
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 793
p. 813
Table 119. Error Code 501 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the fuser (see “Fuser, Printer” on page 793).
1.
Do you still have an error code 501?
Yes
No
If a problem remains, go to
step 2 on page 382.
Problem solved.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 381
Table 119. Error Code 501 Diagnostic (continued)
Actions and Questions
Check the fuser AC power:
1. Remove the upper rear cover.
2. Switch on printer power.
3. Measure the AC voltage between:
v J23-6 and frame ground
2.
Yes
2 1
hc3m1102
Step
6
No
Repair/replace the following, Replace the AC driver PCB.
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v MCU PCB
v Cabling P/J23, P/J12
The test point is on the AC driver PCB.
Note: The AC voltage may cycle from
100/110 V ac. or 220 V ac. to 0 V ac. and
back during power on.
Is the AC voltage correct for your printer?
Machine Rating
(50-60 Hz)
100 V ac
120 V ac
220-240 V ac
Min Volt.
Max Volt.
90 V ac. 110 V ac.
104 V ac. 134 V ac.
200 V ac. 264 V ac.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 382
502—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 120, 502—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic detected the thermistor remained on for longer than the specified time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
AC driver PCB (100-110 V ac)
90H4199
1110–1, p. 1165
p. 745
AC driver PCB (220 V ac)
90H4200
1110–1, p. 1165
p. 745
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
LVPS (100-110 V ac)
90H4197
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
LVPS (220 V ac)
90H4198
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
Table 120. Error Code 502 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 383
Table 120. Error Code 502 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
Replace the fuser (see “Fuser, Printer” on page 793).
2.
Do you still have an error code 502?
Check the fuser AC power:
1. Switch on printer power.
2. Measure the AC voltage between:
v J23-6 and frame ground
The test point is on the AC driver PCB.
Note: The AC voltage may cycle from
100/110 V ac. or 220 V ac. to 0 V ac.
and back during power on.
2 1
hc3m1102
1.
6
No
If a problem remains, go to
step 2.
Problem solved.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v MCU PCB
v Cabling P/J23, P/J12
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v AC driver PCB
v Cabling P/J23, P/J20,
P/J477, P/J401
v LVPS
Is the AC voltage correct for your printer?
Machine Rating
(50-60 Hertz)
100 V ac
120 V ac
220-240 V ac
Min Volt.
Max Volt.
90 V ac.
104 V ac.
200 V ac.
110 V ac.
134 V ac.
264 V ac.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 384
503—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 121, 503—Fuser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic detected the fuser temperature exceeded the temperature set for fuser overheat.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
AC driver PCB (100-110 V ac)
90H4199
1110–1, p. 1165
p. 745
AC driver PCB (220 V ac)
90H4200
1110–1, p. 1165
p. 745
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Table 121. Error Code 503 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the fuser asm. (see “Fuser, Printer” on page 793).
1.
2.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Problem solved.
Do you still have an error code 503?
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a configuration page
test print.
v AC driver PCB
v MCU PCB
v Cabling P/J 502
If the problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 385
504—Fuser Failed / Replace Fuser (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 122, 504—Fuser Failed / Replace Fuser (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the fuser thermistor opened.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
AC driver PCB (100-110 V ac)
90H4199
1110–1, p. 1165
p. 745
AC driver PCB (220 V ac)
90H4200
1110–1, p. 1165
p. 745
Table 122. Error Code 504 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Replace the fuser asm. (see “Fuser, Printer” on page 793).
1.
2.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Problem solved.
Do you still have an error code 504?
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a configuration page
test print.
v MCU PCB
v AC driver PCB
v Cabling P/J462, P/J600
If the problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 386
511—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 123, 511—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic detected the time between signals from the start of scan sensor was shorter than specified.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
p. 797
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Harness, dc main
90H4209
700–12, p. 1124
Table 123. Error Code 511 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait two minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
The problem could be
intermittent. Go to step 3.
Do you still have an error code 511?
2.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v MCU PCB
v Laser asm.
v Harness, dc main
If the problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 387
512—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 124, 512—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic detected the laser motor (M9) did not come to full speed within the specified time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
p. 797
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Harness, dc main
90H4209
700–12, p. 1124
Table 124. Error Code 512 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait two minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
The problem could be
intermittent. Go to step 3.
Do you still have an error code 512?
2.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo page.
v MCU PCB
v Cabling P/J456, P/J207, P/J240
v Laser asm.
v Harness, dc main
If the problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 388
513—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 125, 513—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic detected the time between signals from the start of scan sensor was shorter than specified.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
p. 797
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Harness, dc main
90H4209
700–12, p. 1124
Table 125. Error Code 513 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait two minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
The problem could be
intermittent. Go to step 3.
Do you still have an error code 513?
2.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo page.
v MCU PCB
v Laser asm.
v Harness, dc main
If the problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 389
514—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 126, 514—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic detected the time between signals from the start of scan sensor was longer than specified.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
p. 797
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Switch asm., EP cartridge
90H3678
400–23, p. 1114
Harness, dc main
90H4209
700–12, p. 1124
Table 126. Error Code 514 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait 2 minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 391.
The problem could be
intermittent. Go to step 3 on
page 391.
Do you still have an error code 514?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 390
Table 126. Error Code 514 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the EP cartridge interlock switch asm.:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0902 (EP cartridge interlock switch).
b. Install an EP cartridge and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Remove the EP cartridge and press Enter. An L should display.
2.
Does an H display when you install the EP cartridge and an L when
you remove the EP cartridge?
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
running a configuration page
test print.
v MCU PCB
v Cabling P/J106, P/J407,
P/J234, P/J456, P/J430,
P/J416
v Laser asm.
v Harness, dc main
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Switch asm., interlock, EP
cartridge
v Cabling P/J234, P/J 456
v MCU PCB
v Harness, dc main
If the problem remains, go
to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 391
520—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 127, 520—Laser Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic received a constant ‘high’ signal from the start of scan (SOS) sensor.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
p. 797
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Harness, dc main
90H4209
700–12, p. 1124
Table 127. Error Code 520 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait 2 minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
The problem could be
intermittent. Go to step 3.
Do you still have error code 520?
2.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo page.
v MCU PCB
v Laser asm.
v Harness, dc main
If the problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 392
560—MCU Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 128, 560—MCU Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic had a problem with printer control.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Harness, dc main
90H4209
700–12, p. 1124
Table 128. Error Code 560 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait 2 minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
The problem could be
intermittent. Go to step 3.
Do you still have an error code 560?
2.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo page.
v MCU PCB
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
v Controller PCB
v Harness, dc main
If the problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 393
561—RAM Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 129, 561—RAM Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic had a problem reading information from the controller PCB RAM.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Table 129. Error Code 561 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait 2 minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
The problem could be
intermittent. Go to step 3.
Do you still have error code 561?
2.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo page.
v MCU PCB
v Cabling P/J423, P/J422, P/J402
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
v Controller PCB
If the problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 394
620—Memory SIMM / Reseat SIMM (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 130, 620—Memory SIMM / Reseat SIMM (Printer)
Problem—A controller SIMM module is not properly seated or is defective.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
DRAM SIMM
Parts Catalog
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Locations
Located on
printer
controller, p.
745
Removal
Procedures
p. 791
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 130. Error Code 620 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Remove the controller PCB and reseat all DRAM SIMMs.
c. Re-install the controller PCB.
d. Switch on printer power.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 396.
The problem could be
intermittent. Go to step 3 on
page 396.
Do you still have an error code 620?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 395
Table 130. Error Code 620 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
2.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a configuration page.
v DRAM SIMM
v OS/PCL/PS
v Controller PCB
If the problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 396
621—Memory Error / Check Memory (Printer)
Problem—Memory overflow. The printer has received more data than can fit into its memory. This can happen
when the printer receives too many soft fonts, macros, or complex graphics.
Action: This error code provides information to the customer and does not indicate a hardware failure. The
customer should perform the following:
If the AUTOCONTINU item in the Config Menu is set to ON, printing resumes in ten seconds. Otherwise, press
the Continue key. Check the current page for errors. See the User’s Guide for information on how much memory
various options require.
If the problem continues after adding more memory, replace the FRUs listed in the following table.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. Exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in the sequence
listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
DRAM SIMM
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Locations
Located on
printer
controller, p.
745
Removal
Procedures
p. 791
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 397
622—Memory Error / Check Config (Printer)
Problem—The printer cannot allocate the memory or has insufficient memory required to print a job.
Action: If the AUTOCONTINU item in the Config Menu is set to ON, printing resumes in ten seconds. Otherwise,
press the Continue key. Check the current page for errors.
If the problem continues, have the customer purchase more memory and install it on the controller PCB. If the
problem continues after installing more memory, replace the FRUs listed in the following table.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. Exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in the sequence
listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
DRAM SIMM
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Locations
Located on
printer
controller, p.
745
Removal
Procedures
p. 791
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 398
623—Print Overrun / Check Config (Printer)
Problem— The printer has insufficient memory to print the job. A page could be too complex to print at the current
resolution.
Actions:
v If QUALITY is set to REFINE, change it to something else and resubmit the job. Use the printer driver or the
Config Menu. The driver setting overrides the menu setting.
v If you are feeding paper long-edge first, change it to short-edge first.
v Have the customer add more memory. See the User’s Guide for information on how much memory various
options require.
If the problem remains, replace FRUs listed in the following table.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
DRAM SIMM
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Locations
Located on
printer
controller, p.
745
Removal
Procedures
p. 791
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 399
630—NVRAM Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 131, 630—NVRAM Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic had a problem with its NVRAM.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
MCU PCB
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 131. Error Code 630 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait 2 minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Yes
No
Replace the MCU PCB.
The problem could be
intermittent. If it recurs,
replace the MCU PCB and
then go to step 2.
Do you still have an error code 630?
2.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 400
631—NVRAM Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 132, 631—NVRAM Failed / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic had a problem reading information from its NVRAM.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
MCU PCB
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 132. Error Code 631 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait 2 minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Yes
No
Replace the MCU PCB.
The problem could be
intermittent. If it recurs,
replace the MCU PCB and
then go to step 2.
Do you still have an error code 631?
2.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 401
632—ROM Error / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 133, 632—ROM Error / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—Controller logic detected an error in the ROM checksum.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 133. Error Code 632 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait 2 minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Do you still have an error code 632?
2.
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, The problem could be
intermittent. If it recurs, go to
one at a time. After each
step 2.
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS)
SIMM
v Controller PCB
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 402
633—DRAM Error / Check DRAM SIMM
Link to—diagnostic Table 134, 633—DRAM Error / Check DRAM SIMM
Problem—Controller logic detected that the minimum amount of memory was not available in the controller PCB.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
DRAM SIMM
Parts Catalog
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Located on
printer
controller, p.
745
p. 791
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 134. Error Code 633 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Remove the controller PCB.
c. Check the DRAM SIMM.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
An incorrect DRAM SIMM is
installed. Printers were
shipped with at least 8MB.
Is the DRAM SIMM at least 8MB?
2.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v DRAM SIMM
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
v Controller PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 403
634—NVROM Error / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 135, 634—NVROM Error / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—The controller has detected a problem in its NVROM.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Table 135. Error Code 634 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait 2 minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Do you still have an error code 634?
2.
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, The problem could be
intermittent. If it recurs, go to
one at a time. After each
step 2.
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS)
SIMM
v Controller PCB
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 404
671—Disk Error / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 136, 671—Disk Error / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—The controller has detected a hard drive disk error.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Hard Drive
90H0610
User’s Guide
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Table 136. Error Code 671 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait 2 minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
The problem could be
intermittent. If the problem
recurs, go to step 3.
Do you still have an error code 671?
2.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a configuration page
test print.
v Hard drive
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
v Controller PCB
If the problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 405
672—Disk Error / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 137, 672—Disk Error / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—The controller detected a hard drive error.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Hard Drive
90H0610
User’s Guide
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Table 137. Error Code 672 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait 2 minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
The problem could be
intermittent. If the problem
recurs, go to step 3.
Do you still have an error code 672?
2.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a configuration page
test print.
v Hard drive
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
v Controller PCB
If the problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 406
673—Disk Error / Power Off/On (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 138, 673—Disk Error / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—The controller detected a hard drive disk error.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Hard Drive
90H0610
User’s Guide
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Table 138. Error Code 673 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Reset the printer:
a. Switch off printer power.
b. Wait 2 minutes.
c. Switch on printer power.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
The problem could be
intermittent. If the problem
recurs, go to step 3.
Do you still have an error code 673?
2.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a configuration page
test print.
v Hard drive
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
v Controller PCB
If the problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 407
711—Cover Open / Close Duplex (Duplex)
Link to—diagnostic Table 139, 711—Cover Open / Close Duplex (Duplex)
Problem—Duplex logic sensed the duplex interlock switch open.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
2050–16, p. 1179
Locations
Duplex interlock switch
90H3364
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
p. 745
Duplex asm.
90H3537
2000–0, p. 1171
p. 631
Harness, Duplex
90H4213
700–16, p. 1124
Harness, printer connector
06L9971
2040–11, p. 1177
Removal
Procedures
p. 740
p. 813
p. 834
Table 139. Error Code 711 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open and close the duplex cover.
1.
Do you still have an error code 711?
Yes
Go to step 2 on page 409.
No
The problem may be intermittent. If
the problem recurs, go to step 4 on
page 409.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 408
Table 139. Error Code 711 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the duplex interlock switch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on
page 566) and run test 0833 (duplex interlock switch).
Yes
Go to step 3.
b. Open the duplex module, and press Enter. An H
should display.
c. Close the duplex module, and press Enter. An L
should display.
2.
Does an H display when you open the duplex module,
and an L when closed?
No
Repair/replace the following, one at
a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed by
printing a duplexed continuous test
print from tray 1 to the main output
bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on
the Paper Menu).
v Duplex interlock switch
v Cabling P/J125, P/J474, P/J473,
P/J611A/B, P/J404
v Duplex PCB
v Harness, duplex
v Harness, printer connector
v Duplex asm., complete
v MCU PCB
3.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a duplexed
continuous test print from tray 1 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1, OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper Menu).
v Duplex PCB
v MCU PCB
4.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 409
712—Paper Jam / Duplex Unit (Duplex)
Link to—diagnostic Table 140, 712—Paper Jam / Duplex Unit (Duplex)
Problem—duplex logic sensed the duplex exit sensor active with the printer Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
2030–9, p. 1175
Locations
Duplex exit sensor
63H3042
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
p. 745
Duplex asm.
90H3537
2000–0, p. 1171
p. 631
Harness, Duplex
90H4213
700–16, p. 1124
Harness, printer connector
06L9971
2040–11, p. 1177
Removal
Procedures
p. 740
p. 813
p. 834
Table 140. Error Code 712 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Open the duplex cover and check the duplex exit sensor
for contamination or small pieces of paper. Also check for
damage such as a broken spring or actuator.
Yes
Go to step 2 on page 411.
No
Clean or replace the duplex exit sensor.
Is the duplex exit sensor clean and not damaged?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 410
Table 140. Error Code 712 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the duplex exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on
page 566) and run test 0830 (duplex exit sensor).
2.
b. Block the duplex exit sensor, and press Enter. An H
should display.
c. Unblock the duplex exit sensor, and press Enter. An L
should display.
Does an H display when you interrupt the sensor
beam, and an L when not interrupted?
3.
Yes
Go to step 3.
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time.
After each replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by printing a duplexed
continuous test print from tray 1 to the
main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the
Paper Menu).
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Duplex exit sensor
Cabling P/J124, P/J474
Duplex PCB
Harness, printer connector
Harness, duplex
Duplex asm., complete
MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a duplexed
continuous test print from tray 1 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1, OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper Menu).
v Duplex PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 411
713—Paper Jam / Duplex Unit (Duplex)
Link to—diagnostic Table 141, 713—Paper Jam / Duplex Unit (Duplex)
Problem—duplex logic sensed the duplex wait sensor active with the printer Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
2050–15, p. 1179
Locations
Duplex wait sensor
63H3042
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
p. 745
Duplex asm.
90H3537
2000–0, p. 1171
p. 631
Harness, Duplex
90H4213
700–16, p. 1124
Harness, printer connector
06L9971
2040–11, p. 1177
Removal
Procedures
p. 740
p. 813
p. 834
Table 141. Error Code 713 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the duplex wait sensor:
1.
Yes
Go to step 2 on page 413.
No
Clean or replace the duplex wait sensor.
Check the duplex wait sensor for contamination or small
pieces of paper, and for damage such as a broken spring
or actuator that may have locked the sensor on.
Is the duplex wait sensor clean and not damaged?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 412
Table 141. Error Code 713 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the duplex wait sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on
page 566) and run test 0831 (duplex wait sensor).
b. Block the duplex wait sensor, and press Enter. An H
should display.
c. Unblock the duplex wait sensor, and press Enter. An L
should display.
2.
3.
Does an H display when you interrupt the sensor
beam, and an L when not interrupted?
Yes
Go to step 3.
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time.
After each replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by printing a duplexed
continuous test print from tray 1 to the
main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the
Paper Menu).
v Duplex wait sensor
v Cabling P/J123, P/J475, P/J473,
P/J611A/B, P/J404
v Duplex PCB
v Harness, duplex
v Harness, printer connector
v Duplex asm., complete
v MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a duplexed
continuous test print from tray 1 to the main output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1, OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper Menu).
v Duplex PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 413
714—Duplex Error / Check Cable (Printer)
Link to—diagnostic Table 142 on page 415, 714—Duplex Error / Check Cable (Printer)
Problem—MCU logic could not initialize duplex within the specified time.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Duplex PCB
06L9808
2040–1, p. 1177
Harness, duplex
90H4213
700–16, p. 1124
Harness, printer connector
06L9971
2040–11, p. 1177
Connector, duplex unit (Call tech support to NP
obtain this part.)
Removal
Procedures
p. 813
p. 745
1110–24, p. 1165
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 414
Table 142. Error Code 714 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Power off and then power on the printer.
Do you still have an error code 714?
1.
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time.
After each replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by powering off/powering on
the printer and then printing a duplexed
continuous test print from tray 1 to the main
output bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=MAIN, DUPLEX=ON on the Paper
Menu).
v Cabling P/J473, P/J611A+B, P/J404
v Duplex PCB
v MCU PCB
v Harness, printer connector
v Harness, duplex
v Connector, duplex unit
The problem could be intermittent.
If the problem recurs, go to step 2.
If a problem remains, go to step 2.
2.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 415
751—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 143, 751—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the transport entrance sensor active during finisher initialization.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Transport entrance sensor
11L5433
5090–13, p. 1247
p. 743
p. 1065
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, transport sensor
11L5462
5031–22, p. 1234
Transport asm., finisher
11L5466
5090–0, p. 1247
p. 813
p. 1061
Table 143. Error Code 751 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open the transport cover (see Area E in Figure 2 on page 69) and
inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 417.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 416
Table 143. Error Code 751 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the transport entrance sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1201 (transport entrance sensor).
b. Insert a piece of paper into the transport entrance sensor, to actuate
the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Remove the paper and press Enter. An L should display.
2.
3.
Does an H display when you actuate the sensor, and an L when you
release the actuator?
Yes
Go to step 3.
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Transport entrance
sensor
v Cabling P/J275M,
P/J262A+B, P/J879A+B,
P/J854, P/J265, P/J612
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
v Harness, transport sensor
v Transport asm.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo page.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If the problem remains, go to step 4.
4.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 417
752—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 144, 752—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the transport entrance sensor active during finisher initialization while powering
on, or while the printer was Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Transport entrance sensor
11L5433
5090–13, p. 1247
p. 743
p. 1065
Harness asm., transport sensor
11L5462
5031–22, p. 1234
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Transport asm., finisher
11L5466
p. 1061
5090–0, p. 1247
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 144. Error Code 752 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open the transport cover (see Area E in Figure 2 on page 69) and
inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers in the finisher transport for wear, damage, and
contamination (see “Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and
Switches” on page 721).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 419.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 418
Table 144. Error Code 752 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the transport entrance sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1201 (transport entrance sensor).
b. Insert a piece of paper into the transport entrance sensor to actuate
the sensor and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Remove the paper and press Enter. An L should display.
2.
3.
Does an H display when you actuate the sensor, and an L when you
release the actuator?
Yes
Go to step 3.
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Transport entrance
sensor
v Cabling P/J275M,
P/J262A+B, P/J879A+B,
P/J854, P/J265, P/J612
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
v Harness, transport sensor
v Transport asm.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo page.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If the problem remains, go to step 4.
4.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 419
753—Finisher Jam / Area E, F (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 145 on page 421, 753—Finisher Jam / Area E, F (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the transport exit sensor did not deactivate within the specified time after it
activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Transport exit sensor
11L5433
5090–13, p. 1247
p. 743
p. 1067
Transport rollers
11L5487¹
(5090–96)
5090–10, p. 1247
p. 739
p. 1072
Transport drive belt
11L6537
5100–9, p. 1250
p. 1057
Transport motor drive belt
11L5449
5070–99, p. 1242
p. 1070
Transport motor asm.
11L5442
5060–1, p. 1240
Chute asm., upper, transport
11L5432
5150–9, p. 1263
Chute asm., lower, exit
11L5414
5040–11, p. 1236
Shaft asm., transport
11L5431
5150–7, p. 1263
Shaft asm., exit
11L5412
5040–9, p. 1236
Kit, belt, drive gear
11L5449
5070–99, p. 1242
Harness, transport sensor
11L5462
5031–22, p. 1234
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
Transport asm., finisher
11L5466
5090–0, p. 1247
p. 1061
Transport top cover asm.
11L5470
5090–1, p. 1247
p. 922
p. 718
p. 1069
p. 1078
p. 996
p. 745
p. 1021
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 420
Suspected FRUs
MCU PCB
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 145. Error Code 753 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open the transport cover (see Area E in Figure 2 on
page 69) and inspect the paper path as follows:
Yes
Go to step 2.
Replace rollers and other paper path
parts as necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper path.
Go to step 3 on page 422.
Repair/replace the following, one at a
time. After each replacement, determine
if the problem is fixed by printing a
configuration page from Tray 1 to the
upper finisher bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1
and OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper
Menu):
v Check all rollers in the finisher transport for wear,
damage, and contamination (see “Paper Path Views
with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
1.
No
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper
path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material
(especially near rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is
the paper path clear of obstructions?
Check the transport exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on
page 566) and run test 1202 (transport exit sensor).
2.
b. Actuate the transport exit sensor manually and press
Enter. An H should display.
c. Release the actuator and press Enter. An L should
display.
Does an H display when you actuate the sensor, and
an L when you release the actuator?
v Transport exit sensor
v Cabling P/J263, P/J262A+B,
P/J879A+B, P/J854, P/J265, P/J612
v Transport asm.
v Harness, transport sensor
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 421
Table 145. Error Code 753 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Print a configuration page test print from Tray 1 to the
upper finisher bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper Menu). When the
print is in the transport, open the transport cover and
check the position of the print.
3.
Is the paper skewed as it enters the compiler?
Check the compiler transport roller drive:
a. Inspect the paper path in the finisher transport as
follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and
contamination (see “Paper Path Views with
Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
4.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the
paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign
material (especially near rollers and sensors).
Open the transport cover.
Place a standard-size sheet of paper (short-edge
feed) on top of the transport rollers.
Close the transport cover.
Remove the rear cover, finisher.
Manually rotate the transport motor CCW.
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following, one
at a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed
by printing a configuration page
from Tray 1 to the upper finisher
bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper
Menu):
v Transport rollers
v Transport top cover asm.
v Transport asm. finisher
Repair/replace the following, one
at a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed
by printing a configuration page
from Tray 1 to the upper finisher
bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper
Menu):
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
v Transport asm.
v Transport motor
If a problem remains go to step 6
on page 423.
Repair/replace the following, one at a
time. After each replacement, determine
if the problem is fixed by printing a
configuration page from Tray 1 to the
upper finisher bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1
and OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper
Menu):
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Transport rollers
Chute asm., upper transport
Shaft asm., transport
Chute asm., lower exit
Shaft asm., exit
Transport motor drive belt
Transport drive belt
Kit, belt, drive gear (gear 5070-10)
Transport motor asm.
Is the paper driven into the compiler tray?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 422
Table 145. Error Code 753 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a configuration page
test print from Tray 1 to the upper finisher bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1 and OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper Menu):
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains go to step 6.
6.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 423
754—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 146 on page 425, 754—Finisher Jam / Area E (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the transport exit sensor did not activate within the specified time after the
transport entrance sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Transport exit sensor
11L5433
5090–13, p. 1247
p. 743
p. 1067
Transport rollers
11L5487¹
(5090–96)
5090–10, p. 1247
p. 739
p. 1072
Transport motor
11L5442
5060–1, p. 1240
p. 718
p. 1069
Kit, motor bracket (5070-98)
11L5448
5070–2, p. 1242
Kit, belt, drive gear
11L5449¹
5070–99, p. 1242
Kit, transport gear
11L5468¹
5100–98, p. 1250
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2 p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
Transport asm., finisher
11L5466
5090–0, p. 1247
p. 1061
Transport top cover asm.
11L5470
5090–1, p. 1247
p. 922
Harness, transport sensor
11L5462
5031–22, p. 1234
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 424
Table 146. Error Code 754 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open the transport cover (see Area E in Figure 2 on page 69) and
inspect the paper path as follows:
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
Go to step 3 on page 426.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed:
v Check all rollers in the finisher transport for wear, damage, and
contamination (see “Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and
Switches” on page 721).
1.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially
near rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper
path clear of obstructions?
Check the transport exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and
run test 1202 (transport exit sensor).
b. Actuate the sensor manually and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Release the actuator and press Enter. An L should display.
2.
Does an H display when you actuate the sensor, and an L when
you release the actuator?
v Transport exit sensor
v Cabling P/J263,
P/J262A+B, P/J879A+B,
P/J854, P/J265, P/J612
v Harness, transport sensor
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
v Transport asm., finisher
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 425
Table 146. Error Code 754 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the finisher transport drive:
a. Remove the finisher rear cover (see “Rear Cover, Finisher” on
page 919.
3.
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
b. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are
actuated.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1412 (transport motor), carefully check the
transport drive motor.
v Transport motor
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Does the transport drive motor run properly?
4.
Check the transport drive gear:
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
a. Power off the printer.
replacement, determine if
b. Remove the 2 screws holding the transport rear cover, and remove
the problem is fixed by
the cover (see “Transport Asm., Finisher” on page 1061).
printing a configuration page
c. Manually rotate the transport drive motor CCW.
test print from tray 1 to the
upper finisher bin
d. While rotating the transport drive motor, carefully check the
(SOURCE=TRAY 1,
transport drive gears and belts.
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Do the gears and belts rotate smoothly and drive the transport
Paper Menu).
assemblies?
v Finisher PCB
v Transport asm., finisher
v MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
v
Kit, motor bracket
Kit, belt, drive gear
Kit, transport gear
Top cover asm.
Transport asm., finisher
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
5.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 426
755—Finisher Jam / Area E, F (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 147, 755—Finisher Jam / Area E, F (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the transport exit sensor active during finisher initialization or when the printer
was Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Transport exit sensor
11L5433
5090–13, p. 1247
p. 743
p. 1067
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, transport sensor
11L5462
5031–22, p. 1234
Transport asm., finisher
11L5466
5090–0, p. 1247
p. 813
p. 1061
Table 147. Error Code 755 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open the transport cover (see Area E in Figure 2 on
page 69) and inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers in the finisher transport for wear,
damage, and contamination (see “Paper Path Views
with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
1.
Yes
Go to step 2 on page 428.
No
Replace rollers and other paper path parts
as necessary, and clear any obstructions
from the paper path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper
path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material
(especially near rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is
the paper path clear of obstructions?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 427
Table 147. Error Code 755 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the transport exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on
page 566) and run test 1202 (transport exit sensor).
2.
Yes
Go to step 3.
b. Actuate the sensor manually and press Enter. An H
should display.
c. Release the actuator and press Enter. An L should
display.
3.
Do you still have error code 755?
4.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time.
After each replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by printing a configuration
page from Tray 1 to the upper finisher bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper Menu):
v Transport exit sensor
v Cabling P/J263, P/J262A+B,
P/J879A+B, P/J854, P/J265, P/J612
v Harness, transport sensor
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
v Transport asm.
Does an H display when you actuate the sensor, and
an L when you release the actuator?
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on
page 1021).
No
Replace the MCU PCB (see Problem solved.
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
page 813). If a problem
remains, go to step 4.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 428
756—Finisher Jam / Area E, F (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 148, 756—Finisher Jam / Area E, F (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the transport exit sensor active during finisher initialization or when the printer
was Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Transport exit sensor
11L5433
5090–13, p. 1247
p. 743
p. 1067
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, transport sensor
11L5462
5031–22, p. 1234
Transport asm., finisher
11L5466
5090–0, p. 1247
p. 813
p. 1061
Table 148. Error Code 756 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open the transport cover (see Area E in Figure 2 on
page 69) and inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers in the finisher transport for wear,
damage, and contamination (see “Paper Path Views
with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
1.
Yes
Go to step 2 on page 430.
No
Replace rollers and other paper path parts
as necessary, and clear any obstructions
from the paper path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper
path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material
(especially near rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is
the paper path clear of obstructions?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 429
Table 148. Error Code 756 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the transport exit sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on
page 566) and run test 1202 (transport exit sensor).
2.
Yes
Go to step 3.
b. Actuate the transport exit sensor manually and press
Enter. An H should display.
c. Release the actuator and press Enter. An L should
display.
3.
Do you still have error code 756?
4.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time.
After each replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed by printing a configuration
page from Tray 1 to the upper finisher bin
(SOURCE=TRAY 1 and
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper Menu):
v Transport exit sensor
v Cabling P/J263, P/J262A+B,
P/J879A+B, P/J854, P/J265, P/J612
v Harness, transport sensor
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
v Transport asm.
Does an H display when you actuate the sensor, and
an L when you release the actuator?
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on
page 1021).
No
Replace the MCU PCB (see Problem solved.
“MCU PCB, Printer” on
page 813). If a problem
remains, go to step 4.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 430
757—Finisher Jam / Area F, G (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 149 on page 432, 757—Finisher Jam / Area F, G (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the compiler tray exit sensor did not deactivate within the specified time after it
activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Compiler tray exit sensor
11L5433
5150–11, p. 1263
p. 743
p. 973
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
Harness asm., compiler exit
11L5434
5150–21, p. 1263
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Kit, belt, drive gear
11L5449¹
5070–99, p. 1242
Kit, eject shaft
11L5422
5110–98, p. 1253
Shaft asm., transport
11L5431
5150–7, p. 1263
Chute asm., upper, transport
11L5432
5150–9, p. 1263
p. 1078
Shaft asm., exit
11L5412
5040–9, p. 1236
p. 996
Chute asm., lower, exit
11L5414
5040–11, p. 1236
Transport motor asm.
11L5442
5060–1, p. 1240
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 992
p. 718
p. 1069
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 431
Table 149. Error Code 757 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open the finisher transport cover and the finisher top cover (see Area E and
Area F in Figure 2 on page 69) and inspect the paper path as follows:
Yes
Go to step 2.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the
paper path.
v Check all rollers in the finisher transport for wear, damage, and
contamination (see “Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and
Switches” on page 721).
1.
No
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the compiler tray exit sensor:
Go to step 3 on page 433.
a. Make sure that the compiler tray exit sensor is mounted correctly and
that the actuator and spring are working correctly.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run test
1203 (compiler tray exit sensor).
2.
c. Open the finisher top cover asm., manually actuate the compiler tray exit
sensor and press Enter. An H should display.
d. Release the actuator and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you actuate the sensor, and an L when you
release the actuator?
Repair/replace the
following, one at a time.
After each replacement,
determine if the problem
is fixed.
v Compiler tray exit
sensor
v Cabling P/J838,
P/J866A+B, J896,
P896, P/J265, P/J612
v Harness asm., compiler
exit sensor
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 432
Table 149. Error Code 757 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
Check the finisher transport drive:
Go to step 4.
a. Remove the finisher rear cover (see “Rear Cover, Finisher” on page 919).
3.
Repair/replace the
following, one at a time.
After each replacement,
determine if the problem
is fixed.
b. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover interlock,
and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run test
1412 (transport motor).
v Transport motor
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Does the transport motor rotate CCW?
Check the transport drive:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the 2 screws holding the transport rear cover, and remove the
cover (see “Transport Asm., Finisher” on page 1061).
4.
c. Open the transport cover.
d. Place a standard-size sheet of paper (short-edge feed) on top of the
transport rollers.
e. Close the transport cover.
f. Manually rotate the transport drive motor CCW until the trailing edge of
the sheet of paper is past the compiler tray exit sensor.
g. While rotating the transport drive motor, carefully check the transport
drive assemblies and belts.
Does the transport drive belt run smoothly and drive the transport
assemblies?
5.
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
from tray 1 to the upper
finisher bin (SOURCE=TRAY
1, OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on
the Paper Menu).
v Transport asm., finisher
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to
step 5.
Repair/replace the
following, one at a time.
After each replacement,
determine if the problem
is fixed:
v Kit, belt, drive gear
v Shaft asm., transport
v Chute asm., upper
transport
v Transport motor asm.
v Kit, eject shaft
v Shaft asm., exit
v Chute asm., lower, exit
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 433
758—Finisher Jam / Area F, G (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 150 on page 435, 758—Finisher Jam / Area F, G (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the compiler tray exit sensor did not activate within the specified time after the
transport exit sensor activated.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Compiler tray exit sensor
11L5433
5150–11, p. 1263
p. 743
p. 973
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
Harness asm., compiler exit sensor
11L5434
5150–21, p. 1263
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Kit, belt, drive gear
11L5449¹
5070–99, p. 1242
Shaft asm., transport
11L5431
5150–7, p. 1263
Chute asm., upper, transport
11L5432
5150–9, p. 1263
Transport motor asm.
11L5442
5060–1, p. 1240
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 1078
p. 718
p. 1069
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 434
Table 150. Error Code 758 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open the finisher transport cover and the finisher top cover
(Area E and Area F in Figure 2 on page 69) and inspect the
paper path as follows:
1.
Yes
Go to step 2.
v Check all rollers in the finisher transport for wear, damage,
and contamination (see “Paper Path Views with Rollers,
Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
No
Replace rollers and other paper
path parts as necessary, and
clear any obstructions from the
paper path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material
(especially near rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the
paper path clear of obstructions?
Check the compiler tray exit sensor:
Go to step 3 on page 436.
a. Make sure that the compiler tray exit sensor is mounted
correctly and that the actuator and spring are working
correctly.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 1203 (compiler tray exit sensor).
2.
c. Open the finisher top cover asm., manually actuate the
compiler tray exit sensor and press Enter. An H should
display.
d. Release the actuator and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you actuate the sensor, and an L
when you release the actuator?
Repair/replace the following, one
at a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed.
v Compiler tray exit sensor
v Cabling P/J838, P/J866A+B,
J896, P896, P/J265, P/J612
v Harness asm., compiler exit
sensor
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 435
Table 150. Error Code 758 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the finisher transport drive:
a. Remove the finisher rear cover (see “Rear Cover, Finisher”
on page 919).
3.
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following, one
at a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed.
v Transport motor
v Finisher PCB
b. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front
cover interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock
switch are actuated.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566)
and run test 1412 (transport motor).
Does the transport motor rotate CCW?
Check the transport drive:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the 2 screws holding the transport rear cover, and
remove the cover (see “Transport Asm., Finisher” on
page 1061).
4.
c. Open the transport cover.
d. Place a standard-size sheet of paper (short-edge feed) on
top of the transport rollers.
e. Close the transport cover.
f. Manually rotate the transport drive motor CCW until the
trailing edge of the sheet of paper is past the compiler tray
exit sensor.
g. While rotating the transport drive motor, carefully check the
transport drive assemblies and belts.
Repair/replace the following, one
at a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed
by printing a configuration page
from tray 1 to the upper finisher
bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1,
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper Menu).
v Transport asm., finisher
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following, one
at a time. After each replacement,
determine if the problem is fixed:
v
v
v
v
Kit, belt, drive gear
Shaft asm., transport
Chute asm., upper transport
Transport motor, asm.
If a problem remains, go to step
5.
Does the transport drive belt run smoothly and drive the
transport assemblies?
5.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 436
759—Finisher Jam / Area G (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 151, 759—Finisher Jam / Area G (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the compiler tray exit sensor active during finisher initialization or when the
printer was Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Compiler tray exit sensor
11L5433
5150–11, p. 1263
p. 743
p. 973
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness asm., compiler exit sensor
11L5434
5150–21, p. 1263
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
p. 813
Table 151. Error Code 759 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open the finisher transport cover (Area E, see Figure 2 on page 69) and
inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers in the finisher transport for wear, damage, and
contamination (see “Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and
Switches” on page 721).
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 438.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 437
Table 151. Error Code 759 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
Check the compiler tray exit sensor:
Go to step 3.
a. Make sure that the compiler tray exit sensor is mounted correctly and
that the actuator and spring are working correctly.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1203 (compiler tray exit sensor).
2.
c. Open the finisher top cover asm., manually actuate the compiler tray
exit sensor and press Enter. An H should display.
d. Release the actuator and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you actuate the sensor, and an L when you
release the actuator?
3.
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Compiler tray exit sensor
v Cabling P/J838,
P/J866A+B, J896, P896,
P/J265, P/J612
v Harness asm., compiler
exit
v Harness, dc main
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a configuration page
from tray 1 to the upper finisher bin (SOURCE=TRAY 1, OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper Menu).
v Finsher PCB
v MCU PCB
If the problem remains, go to step 4.
4.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 438
760—Finisher Failed / Area G (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 152 on page 440, 760—Finisher Failed / Area G (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the compiler paper sensor either did not activate within the specified time after
the eject motor—reverse started, or the compiler paper sensor did not deactivate within the specified time after
the eject motor—forward started.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Compiler paper sensor
06L9993
5160–12, p. 1265
p. 743
p. 975
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
Eject/clamp motor asm.
11L5443
5060–12, p. 1240
Shaft asm. eject 1
11L5408
5160–45, p. 1265
Shaft asm. eject 2
11L5409
5160–46, p. 1265
Belt, synchronous
11L5446¹
(5060–98)
5060–9, p. 1240
Pulley, eject, 20T
11L5446¹
(5060–98)
5060–10, p. 1240
Gear, eject, Z, 20T
11L5492
5160–40, p. 1265
Shaft asm., eject separation
11L5417
5110–2, p. 1253
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness asm., compiler
11L5410
5160–47, p. 1265
Harness
11L5451
5080–3, p. 1244
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5458
5031–18, p. 1234
p. 988
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 439
Table 152. Error Code 760 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Open the compiler cover (see Area G in Figure 2 on page 69) and inspect Go to step 2.
the paper path from the compiler tray exit sensor (see Figure 10 on
page 78) to the compiler paper sensor (see Figure 11 on page 79):
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
1.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Check the compiler paper sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1205 (compiler paper sensor).
b. Push the actuator down to activate the compiler paper sensor and
press Enter. An H should display.
c. Release the actuator and press Enter. An L should display.
2.
Does an H display when you actuate the sensor, and an L when you
release the actuator?
Go to step 3 on page 441.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Compiler paper sensor
v Cabling P/J843,
P/J280A+B, P/J885A+B,
J893B, P893, P/J265,
J612
v Harness asm., compiler
v Harness
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 440
Table 152. Error Code 760 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the eject motor—forward:
Go to step 4.
a. Remove the finisher rear cover.
b. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1423 (eject motor, forward, low speed), check the
belt attached to the eject motor.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Eject/clamp motor asm.
v Finisher PCB
Does the eject motor rotate counter-clockwise (CCW) (viewed from
the back of the machine)?
4.
Check the eject motor—reverse:
Go to step 5.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1425 (eject motor, reverse), check the belt attached
to the eject motor.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Eject/clamp motor asm.
v Finisher PCB
Does the eject motor rotate clockwise (CW) (viewed from the back
of the machine)?
5.
Go to step 6 on page 442.
a. Check the eject roller for wear, contamination, or broken parts.
b. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1425 (eject motor, reverse), check the belt attached
to the eject motor.
Do the eject 1 shaft asm. and the eject 2 shaft asm. rotate?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
v
v
Shaft asm., eject 1
Shaft asm., eject 2
Belt, synchronous
Pulley, eject 20T
Gear, eject, Z, 20T
Shaft asm., eject
separation
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 441
Table 152. Error Code 760 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
6.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a configuration page
test print from tray 1 to the upper finisher bin (SOURCE=TRAY1, OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper Menu).
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 7.
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 442
761—Finisher Failed / Area G (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 153, 761—Finisher Failed / Area G (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the compiler paper sensor active during finisher initialization when powering-on
or when the printer was Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Compiler paper sensor
06L9993
5160–12, p. 1265
p. 743
p. 975
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness asm., compiler
11L5410
5160–47, p. 1265
Harness
11L5451
5080–3, p. 1244
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5458
5031–18, p. 1234
p. 813
Table 153. Error Code 761 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Open the compiler cover (see Area G in Figure 2 on page 69) and inspect Go to step 2 on page 444.
the paper path from the compiler tray exit sensor (see Figure 10 on
page 78) to the compiler paper sensor (see Figure 11 on page 79):
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
1.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as
necessary, and clear any
obstructions from the paper
path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 443
Table 153. Error Code 761 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the compiler paper sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1205 (compiler paper sensor).
b. Push the actuator down to activate the compiler paper sensor and
press Enter. An H should display.
c. Release the actuator and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you actuate the sensor, and an L when you
release the actuator?
Go to step 3.
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed by
printing a configuration page
test print from tray 1 to the
upper finisher bin
(SOURCE=TRAY1,
OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the
Paper Menu).
v Compiler paper sensor
v Cabling P/J843,
P/J280A+B, P/J885A+B,
J893B, P893, P/J265,
J612
v Harness asm., compiler
v Harness
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
2.
3.
Yes
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a configuration page
test print from tray 1 to the upper finisher bin (SOURCE=TRAY1, OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper Menu).
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 4.
4.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 444
762—Finisher / Reseat Finisher (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 154, 762—Finisher / Reseat Finisher (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the transport not correctly connected to the doc asm. during finisher initialization
when powering-on or when the printer was Ready (but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
In-gate sensor
06L9993
5100–17, p. 1250
p. 743
In-gate actuator
11L5465¹
(5020–99)
5020–6, p. 1230
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Harness asm.
11L5466¹
(5090-0)
5100–25, p. 1250
Harness asm.
11L5466¹
(5090-0)
5100–24, p. 1250
Removal
Procedures
p. 1002
p. 1009
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 154. Error Code 762 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Check the transport connection:
a. Move the finisher away from the printer.
b. Reseat the transport against the doc asm.
c. Ensure that the transport is correctly connected to the doc asm.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 446.
Problem solved.
Was the transport correctly connected?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 445
Table 154. Error Code 762 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
2.
Actions and Questions
Check the in-gate actuator:
a. Pull the finisher away from the doc asm.
b. Check the in-gate actuator.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Replace the in-gate actuator.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Is the actuator intact, free of damage, and able to activate the
in-gate sensor?
Check the in-gate interlock sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1234 (in-gate interlock switch).
b. Block the in-gate sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
c. Unblock the sensor and press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an H
when not interrupted?
3.
4.
v In-gate sensor
v Cabling P/J260,
P/J268A+B, P/J880A+B,
J896, P896, P/J265,
P/J612
v Harness asm. (both
harness assemblies are
located in the finisher
transport asm., 5100-24
and 5100-25)
v Harness, DC main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by printing a configuration page
test print from tray 1 to the upper finisher bin (SOURCE=TRAY1, OUTPUT=FINISHR1 on the Paper Menu).
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 5.
5.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 446
763—Cover Open / Area E (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 155, 763—Cover Open / Area E (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the finisher transport cover interlock sensor was active (transport cover open).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Transport cover interlock sensor
06L9993
5090–29, p. 1247
p. 743
Top cover asm.
11L5470
5090–1, p. 1247
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
Harness asm.
11L5466¹
(5090-0)
5100–25, p. 1250
Harness asm.
11L5466¹
(5090-0)
5100–24, p. 1250
Transport asm., finisher
11L5466
5090–0, p. 1247
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 1003
p. 922
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 1061
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 155. Error Code 763 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open and close the transport cover.
1.
Do you still have error code 763?
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 448.
Problem solved. If the
problem is intermittent go to
step 2 on page 448.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 447
Table 155. Error Code 763 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Open the transport cover and check the molded tab that activates the
transport cover interlock sensor.
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Replace the transport cover
asm.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Is the actuator intact, free of damage, and able to activate the
transport cover interlock sensor?
Check the transport cover interlock sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1235 (transport cover interlock sensor).
b. Open the transport cover, block the sensor beam and press Enter. An
L should display.
c. Unblock the sensor and press Enter. An H should display.
v Transport cover interlock
sensor
v Cabling P/J261,
P/J279A+B, P/J882A+B,
J896, P896
v Harness asm. (both
harness assemblies are
located in the finisher
transport asm., 5100-24
and 5100-25)
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
3.
Does an L display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an H
when not interrupted?
4.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 5.
5.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 448
764—Cover Open / Area H (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 156, 764—Cover Open / Area H (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the finisher front cover interlock switch was active (finisher front cover open).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Finisher front cover interlock switch
11L5435
5050–1, p. 1238
p. 743
p. 1007
Finisher front cover asm.
06L9978
5011–5, p. 1226
p. 631
p. 908
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
Harness asm., LVPS
11L5456
5031–16, p. 1234
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Harness asm., interlock
11L5440
5050–23, p. 1238
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Table 156. Error Code 764 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open and close the front cover.
1.
No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved. If the
problem is intermittent, go to
step 2.
Go to step 3 on page 450.
Replace the front cover.
Do you still have error code 764?
Open the front cover and check the molded tab that activates the front
cover interlock switch.
2.
Yes
Is the actuator intact, free of damage, and does it actuate the front
cover interlock switch?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 449
Table 156. Error Code 764 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the front cover interlock switch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1233 (front cover interlock switch).
3.
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Open the finisher front cover.
c. Activate the front cover interlock switch and press Enter. An L should
display.
d. Release the front cover interlock switch and press Enter. An H should
display.
v Front cover interlock
switch
v Cabling P/J270, P/J271,
P/J272A, P/J272B,
P/J846, P/J845, P/J897
v Harness asm., LVPS
v Harness, dc main
v Harness asm., interlock
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Does an L display when you activate the interlock switch, and an H
when the switch is released?
4.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 5.
5.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 450
765—Cover Open / Area F (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 157, 765—Cover Open / Area F (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the finisher top cover interlock switch was active (finisher top cover open).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Top cover interlock switch
11L5435
5050–1, p. 1238
p. 743
Top cover asm.
11L5429
5150–1, p. 1263
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness asm., LVPS
11L5456
5031–16, p. 1234
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Harness asm., interlock
11L5440
5050–23, p. 1238
p. 1007
p. 921
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
Table 157. Error Code 765 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Open and close the top cover.
1.
No
Go to step 2.
Problem solved. If the
problem is intermittent, go to
step 2.
Go to step 3 on page 452.
Replace the top cover asm.
Do you still have error code 765?
Open the top cover and check the molded tab that activates the top
cover interlock switch.
2.
Yes
Is the actuator intact, free of damage, and does it actuate the top
cover interlock switch?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 451
Table 157. Error Code 765 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the top cover interlock switch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1207 (top cover interlock switch).
3.
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Open the top cover interlock switch.
c. Activate the top cover interlock switch and press Enter. An L should
display.
d. Release the top cover interlock switch and press Enter. An H should
display.
v Top cover interlock switch
v Cabling P/J271, P/J270,
P/J272A, P/J272B
P/J846, P/J845, P/J897
v Harness asm., LVPS
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Does an H display when you open the cover, and an L when you
close the cover?
4.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 5.
5.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 452
767, 768—Cover Open / Area G (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 158, 767 or 768—Cover Open / Area G (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the eject chute open and the compiler cover interlock switch not activated (error
code 768) or the eject chute open and the compiler cover interlock switch activated (error code 767).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Compiler cover interlock switch
06L9990
5050–7B, p. 1238
p. 743
Eject chute asm.
11L5416
5110–1, p. 1253
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness asm., interlock
11L5440
5050–23, p. 1238
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Removal
Procedures
p. 1005
p. 982
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
Table 158. Error Code 767, 768 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Power off and then power on the printer.
b. Open and close the eject chute.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 454.
Problem solved. If the
problem is intermittent, go to
step 2 on page 454.
Do you still have error code 767 or 768?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 453
Table 158. Error Code 767, 768 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the actuator:
a. Remove the front inner cover (see “Front Inner Cover, Finisher” on
page 909).
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Check the molded tab on the eject chute that activates the compiler
cover interlock switch, and check the interlock actuator. (See 5050-8
on p. 1238.)
v Eject chute asm.
v Actuator, interlock
c. Raise and lower the eject chute.
Are the molded tab on the eject chute asm. and the interlock
actuator undamaged, and do they function correctly?
Check the compiler cover interlock switch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1246 (compiler cover interlock switch).
3.
Go to step 4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Lift the eject chute asm. (Area G) to deactivate the compiler cover
interlock switch.
c. With the eject chute asm. lifted, manually activate the compiler cover
interlock switch at P/J272B and press Enter. An L should display.
d. Deactivate the compiler cover interlock switch and press Enter. An H
should display.
v Compiler cover interlock
switch
v Cabling P/J272B, P/J845,
J897, P897
v Harness asm., interlock
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Does an L display when you activate the switch, and an H when you
release the switch?
4.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 5.
5.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 454
769—Finisher / Reseat Finisher (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 159 on page 456, 769—Finisher / Reseat Finisher (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed that the finisher is not correctly positioned against the printer and that either the
finisher interlock sensor or the in-gate sensor is not operating correctly.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Finisher interlock sensor
06L9993
5120–8B, p. 1256
p. 743
Actuator
06L9995
5120–10, p. 1238
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5458
5031–18, p. 1234
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Harness
11L5451
5080–3, p. 1244
Harness asm.
11L5466¹
(5090-0)
5100–25, p. 1250
Harness asm.
11L5466¹
(5090-0)
5100–24, p. 1250
Harness asm., F interlock sesnor
11L5363
5120–17, p. 1256
Harness asm., bin ID
11L5364
5120–18, p. 1256
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 1000
p. 1000
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 455
Table 159. Error Code 769 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Push the finisher against the printer and make sure it is properly seated Go to step 2.
against the printer.
Problem solved. If the
problem is intermittent, go to
step 2.
Do you still have an error code 769?
2.
Check the finisher interlock sensor:
a. Pull the finisher a few inches (or millimeters) away from the printer,
but do not disconnect the finisher interface cables.
b. Verify that the printer has the bracket assembly with two locating
pins installed correctly and that the interlock actuator 5120–10 is
present and operational.
Note that the bracket asm.is located on the printer where the
finisher power cord is plugged into the printer.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and
run test 1236 (finisher interlock sensor).
d. Manually activate the finisher interlock sensor by moving the
actuator to unblock the sensor, and then press Enter. An L should
display.
e. Release the actuator and make sure that the sensor is blocked.
Then press Enter. An H should display.
Go to step 3 on page 457.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
v Finisher interlock sensor
v Cabling P/J855M, P/J299,
P/J881, P/J893B, P/J893
v Harness asm., F interlock
sensor
v Harness asm., bin ID
v Harness, DC main compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If problems remain, go to step
4 on page 457.
Does an H display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an L
when not interrupted?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 456
Table 159. Error Code 769 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the in-gate interlock sensor:
a. Inspect the in-gate sensor and in-gate actuator to make sure they
are intact and operating correctly.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and
run test 1234 (in-gate interlock switch).
3.
c. Use a piece of paper to block the in-gate sensor beam and press
Enter. An L should display.
d. Unblock the sensor and press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an H
when not interrupted?
4.
Yes
Go to step 4.
No
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if the
problem is fixed.
v In-gate interlock sensor
v Cabling P/J260, P/J268,
P/J880, P/J896
v Finisher PCB
v Harness asm. (5100-25)
v Harness asm. (5100-24)
v Harness, DC main
v MCU PCB
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 457
771—Env Feed / Reseat Env Feed (Env Feed)
Link to—diagnostic Table 160, 771—Env Feed / Reseat Env Feed (Env Feed)
Problem—MCU logic sensed the envelope feed sensor active during power-on or while the printer was Ready
(but not printing).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Envelope feed sensor
90H3542¹
(3000–0)
3030–5, p. 1187
p. 740
Envelope feeder PCB
90H3542¹
(3000–0)
3020–17, p. 1184
p. 745
Envelope feeder asm.
90H3542
3000–0, p. 1182
p. 631
p. 838
Harness, bottom
90H4212
700–15, p. 1124
Harness, drawer asm.
90H3649
1012–4, p. 1139
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 160. Error Code 771 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the envelope feed sensor for contamination, small pieces of paper, Go to step 2 on page 459.
or obstructions that could be blocking the sensor.
Clean or replace the
envelope feed sensor.
Is the envelope feed sensor clean and not damaged?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 458
Table 160. Error Code 771 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the envelope feed sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 0820 (envelope feed sensor).
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Block the sensor, and press Enter. An H should display.
c. Unblock the sensor, and press Enter. An L should display.
2.
3.
v Envelope feed sensor
v Cabling P/J132, P/J702,
P/J700 P/J604E, P/J604P,
P/J603, P/J403
v Envelope feeder PCB
v Envelope feeder asm.
v Harness, bottom
v Harness, drawer
v MCU PCB
Does an H display when you interrupt the sensor beam, and an L
when not interrupted?
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Envelope feeder PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains go to step 4.
4.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 459
780—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 161 on page 461, 780—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the stack height sensor either did not activate within the specified time after the
upper Bin elevator motor started to raise the upper bin, or the sensor did not deactivate within the specified time
after the upper-bin elevator motor started to lower the upper bin.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Stack height sensor asm.
11L5418
5110–3, p. 1253
p. 743
p. 1030
Stack height sensor
11L5369
5110–7, p. 1253
p. 743
p. 1030
Upper-bin elevator motor
11L5375
5191–17, p. 1279
p. 958
Upper-bin asm.
11L5389
5191–1, p. 1279
p. 952
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5457
5031–17, p. 1234
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 460
Table 161. Error Code 780 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Remove the eject cover (see “Eject Cover, Finisher” on page 907),
and check the stack height sensor actuator.
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Replace the stack height
sensor asm.
Go to step 3 on page 462.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Check the compiler area for paper or obstructions that could affect
the operation of the stack height sensor.
c. Ensure that the stack height sensor actuator is hanging down by
rotating the eject bracket asm. gears.
Is the actuator intact, does it freely move between the sensor arms,
and does it have spring action return?
Check the stack height sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1243 (stack height sensor).
2.
b. Manually move the actuator for the stack height sensor assembly to
unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should display.
c. Manually move the actuator to block the stack height sensor and
press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you raise the sensor assembly, and an H
when you release the sensor assembly?
v Stack height sensor
v Cabling P/J832,
P/J876A+B, P/J269A+B,
J896, P896
v Stack height sensor asm.
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 461
Table 161. Error Code 780 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the upper-bin elevator motor:
Go to step 6 on page 463.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1429 (upper-bin elevator motor, CW), check to
make sure the upper elevator bin lowers. Note that if the bin is
already at its lowest position, diagnostic 1429 does not run. Complete
step c, and then return to step b.
Go to step 4.
c. Enter diagnostic mode and, while running test 1430 (upper-bin
elevator motor, CCW), check to make sure the elevator bin raises.
Does the upper-bin elevator motor lower and raise the bin?
Check the upper-bin elevator motor (continued):
Go to step 5 on page 463.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Remove the upper-bin asm., (see “Bin Asm., Upper, Finisher” on
page 952). Leave the wiring intact and place the upper-bin asm. on
the middle-bin asm.
4.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1429 (upper-bin elevator motor, CW), carefully
check the rotation of the upper-bin elevator motor as the bin lowers.
Note that if the bin is already at its lowest position, diagnostic 1429
does not run. Complete step d, and then return to step c.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Upper-bin elevator motor
v Cabling P/J255, P/J266
v Harness, dc main
compiler
If a problem remains go to
step 5 on page 463.
d. Enter diagnostic mode and, while running test 1430 (upper-bin
elevator motor, CCW), carefully check the rotation of the upper-bin
elevator motor as the bin raises.
Does the upper-bin elevator motor rotate in both directions?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 462
Table 161. Error Code 780 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
Check the upper-bin drive belt and gears:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1429 (upper-bin elevator motor, CW), carefully
check the upper-bin drive belts (front and back) and gears as the bin
lowers.
Yes
No
Go to step 6.
Replace the upper-bin asm.
b. Enter diagnostic mode and, while running test 1430 (upper-bin
elevator motor, CCW), carefully check the upper-bin drive belts (front
and back) and gears as the bin raises.
Do the upper-bin drive belts and gears raise and lower the bin?
6.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 7.
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 463
781—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 162 on page 465, 781—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the stack height sensor either did not activate within the specified time after the
middle bin elevator motor started to raise the middle bin, or the sensor did not deactivate within the specified time
after the middle-bin elevator motor started to lower the middle bin.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Stack height sensor asm.
11L5418
5110–3, p. 1253
p. 743
p. 1030
Stack height sensor
11L5369
5110–7, p. 1253
p. 743
p. 1030
Middle-bin elevator motor
11L5375
5181–17, p. 1273
p. 948
Middle-bin asm.
11L5389
5181–1, p. 1273
p. 942
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5457
5031–17, p. 1234
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 464
Table 162. Error Code 781 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Remove the eject cover (see “Eject Cover, Finisher” on page 907),
and check the stack height sensor actuator.
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Replace the stack height
sensor asm.
Go to step 3 on page 466.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Check the compiler area for paper or obstructions that could affect
the operation of the stack height sensor.
c. Ensure that the stack height sensor actuator is hanging down by
rotating the eject bracket asm. gears.
Is the actuator intact, does it freely move between the sensor arms,
and does it have spring action return?
Check the stack height sensor:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1243 (stack height sensor).
2.
b. Manually move the actuator for the stack height sensor assembly to
unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should display.
c. Manually move the actuator to block the stack height sensor and
press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you raise the sensor assembly, and an H
when you release the sensor assembly?
v Stack height sensor
v Cabling P/J832,
P/J876A+B, P/J269A+B,
J896, P896
v Stack height sensor asm.
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 465
Table 162. Error Code 781 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the middle-bin elevator motor:
Go to step 6 on page 467.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1431 (middle-bin elevator motor, CW), check to
make sure the middle elevator bin lowers. Note that if the bin is
already at its lowest position, diagnostic 1431 does not run. Complete
step c, and then return to step b.
Go to step 4.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1432 (middle-bin elevator motor, CCW), check to
make sure the middle elevator bin raises.
Does the middle-bin elevator motor lower and raise the bin?
Check the middle-bin elevator motor (continued):
Go to step 5 on page 467.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Remove the middle-bin asm., (see “Bin Asm., Middle, Finisher” on
page 942). Leave the wiring intact and place the middle-bin asm. on
the lower-bin asm.
4.
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1431 (middle-bin elevator motor, CW), carefully
check the rotation of the middle-bin elevator motor as the bin lowers.
Note that if the bin is already at its lowest position, diagnostic 1431
does not run. Complete step d, and then return to step c.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Middle-bin elevator motor
v Cabling P/J870, P/J898
v Harness, dc main
compiler
If a problem remains go to
step 5 on page 467.
d. Enter diagnostic mode and, while running test 1432 (middle-bin
elevator motor, CCW), carefully check the rotation of the middle-bin
elevator motor as the bin raises.
Does the middle-bin elevator motor rotate in both directions?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 466
Table 162. Error Code 781 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the middle-bin drive belt and gears:
Go to step 6.
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1431 (middle-bin elevator motor, CW), carefully
check the middle-bin drive belts (front and back) and gears as the bin
lowers.
Replace the middle-bin asm.
b. Enter diagnostic mode and, while running test 1432 (middle-bin
elevator motor, CCW), carefully check the middle-bin drive belts (front
and back) and gears as the bin raises.
Do the middle-bin drive belts and gears raise and lower the bin?
6.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 7.
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 467
782—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 163 on page 469, 782—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the stack height sensor either did not activate within the specified time after the
lower bin elevator motor started to raise the lower bin, or the sensor did not deactivate within the specified time
after the lower-bin elevator motor started to lower the lower bin.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Stack height sensor asm.
11L5418
5110–3, p. 1253
p. 743
p. 1030
Stack height sensor
11L5369
5110–7, p. 1253
p. 743
p. 1030
Lower-bin elevator motor
11L5375
5171–17, p. 1268
p. 931
Lower-bin asm.
11L5389
5171–1, p. 1268
p. 923
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5457
5031–17, p. 1234
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 468
Table 163. Error Code 782 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Remove the eject cover (see “Eject Cover, Finisher” on page 907),
and check the stack height sensor actuator.
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Replace the stack height
sensor asm.
Go to step 3 on page 470.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Check the compiler area for paper or obstructions that could affect
the operation of the stack height sensor.
c. Ensure that the stack height sensor actuator is hanging down by
rotating the eject bracket asm. gears.
Is the actuator intact, does it freely move between the sensor arms,
and does it have spring action return?
Check the stack height sensor:
a. Remove the lower-bin asm., (see “Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher” on
page 923). Leave the wiring intact and place it on the floor.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1243 (stack height sensor).
2.
c. Manually move the actuator for the stack height sensor assembly to
unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should display.
d. Manually move the actuator to block the stack height sensor and
press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you raise the sensor assembly, and an H
when you release the sensor assembly?
v Stack height sensor
v Cabling P/J832,
P/J876A+B, P/J269A+B,
J896, P896
v Stack height sensor asm.
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 469
Table 163. Error Code 782 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the lower-bin elevator motor:
Go to step 6 on page 471.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1433 (lower-bin elevator motor, CW), check to
make sure the lower elevator bin lowers. Note that if the bin is
already at its lowest position, diagnostic 1433 does not run. Complete
step c, and then return to step b.
Go to step 4.
c. Enter diagnostic mode and, while running test 1434 (lower-bin
elevator motor, CCW), check to make sure the lower elevator bin
raises.
Does the lower-bin elevator motor lower and raise the bin?
Check the lower-bin elevator motor (continued):
Go to step 5 on page 471.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Remove the lower-bin asm., (see “Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher” on
page 923). Leave the wiring intact and place the lower-bin asm. on
the floor.
4.
c. Enter diagnostic mode and, while running test 1433 (lower-bin
elevator motor, CW), carefully check the rotation of the lower-bin
elevator motor as the bin lowers. Note that if the bin is already at its
lowest position, diagnostic 1433 does not run. Complete step d, and
then return to step c.
d. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1434 (lower-bin elevator motor, CCW), carefully
check the rotation of the lower-bin elevator motor as the bin raises.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Lower-bin elevator motor
v Cabling P/J871, P/J898
v Harness, dc main
compiler
If a problem remains, go to
step 6 on page 471.
Does the lower-bin elevator motor rotate in both directions?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 470
Table 163. Error Code 782 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
Check the lower-bin drive belt and gears:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1433 (lower-bin elevator motor, CW), carefully
check the lower-bin drive belts (front and back) and gears as the bin
lowers.
Yes
No
Go to step 6.
Replace the lower-bin drive
belts.
b. Enter diagnostic mode and, while running test 1434 (lower-bin
elevator motor, CCW), carefully check the lower-bin drive belts (front
and back) and gears as the bin raises.
Do the lower-bin drive belts and gears raise and lower the bin?
6.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 7.
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 471
783—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 164 on page 473, 782—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the upper-bin upper-limit switch active.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
p. 743
Removal
Procedures
Upper-bin upper-limit sensor
11L5369
5191–5, p. 1279
Upper-bin elevator motor
11L5375
5191–17, p. 1279
p. 958
Bin asm., upper
11L5389
5191–1, p. 1279
p. 952
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Stack height sensor asm.
11L5418
5110–3, p. 1253
p. 743
p. 1030
Stack height sensor
11L5369
5110–7, p. 1253
p. 743
p. 1030
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5457
5031–17, p. 1234
p. 745
p. 966
p. 1021
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 472
Table 164. Error Code 783 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Remove the eject cover (see “Eject Cover, Finisher” on page 907),
and check the stack height sensor actuator.
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Replace the stack height
sensor asm.
b. Check the compiler area for paper or obstructions that could affect
the operation of the stack height sensor.
c. Rotate the eject bracket asm. gears to ensure that the stack height
sensor is hanging down.
Is the actuator intact, does it freely move between the sensor arms,
and does it have spring action return?
Check the stack height sensor:
Go to step 3 on page 474.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1243 (stack height sensor).
2.
c. Manually move the actuator for the stack height sensor assembly to
unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should display.
d. Manually move the actuator to block the stack height sensor and
press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you raise the sensor assembly, and an H
when you release the sensor assembly?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stack height sensor
v Cabling P/J832,
P/J876A+B, P/J269A+B,
J896, P896
v Stack height sensor asm.
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 473
Table 164. Error Code 783 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the upper-bin upper-limit paper switch:
Go to step 4.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Remove the upper-bin asm., (see “Bin Asm., Upper, Finisher” on
page 952). Leave the wiring intact and place the upper-bin asm. on
the middle-bin asm.
3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Upper-bin upper-limit
sensor
v Cabling P/J253,
P/J295A+B, P/J264
v Bin asm., upper
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1237 (upper-bin upper-limit switch).
d. Manually block the upper-bin upper-limit sensor beam and press
Enter. An H should display. Note that you may have to use diagnostic
test 1429 to lower the upper bin so that the limit actuator is not
blocking the sensor.
e. Unblock the sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when you
unblock the sensor?
Check the limit actuator travel:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1429 (upper-bin elevator motor, CW), carefully
check the limit actuator of the upper bin as the bin lowers.
4.
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
b. Enter diagnostic mode and, while running test 1430 (upper-bin
elevator motor, CCW), carefully check the limit actuator of the upper
bin as the bin raises.
Do the belt and gears on both sides of the bin always drive the limit
actuator into the upper-limit sensor?
5.
Upper-bin elevator motor
Cabling P/J255, P/J266
Upper-bin asm.
Harness, dc main
compiler
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 6 on page 475.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 474
Table 164. Error Code 783 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
6.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 475
784—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 165 on page 477, 784—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the middle-bin upper-limit switch active.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
p. 743
Removal
Procedures
Middle-bin upper-limit sensor
11L5369
5181–5, p. 1273
Middle-bin elevator motor
11L5375
5181–17, p. 1273
p. 948
Bin asm., middle
11L5380
5181–1, p. 1273
p. 942
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Stack height sensor asm.
11L5418
5110–3, p. 1253
p. 743
p. 1030
Stack height sensor
11L5369
5110–7, p. 1253
p. 743
p. 1030
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5457
5031–17, p. 1234
p. 745
p. 966
p. 1021
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 476
Table 165. Error Code 784 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Remove the eject cover (see “Eject Cover, Finisher” on page 907),
and check the stack height sensor actuator.
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Replace the stack height
sensor asm.
b. Check the compiler area for paper or obstructions that could affect
the operation of the stack height sensor.
c. Rotate the eject bracket asm. gears to ensure that the stack height
sensor is hanging down.
Is the actuator intact, does it freely move between the sensor arms,
and does it have spring action return?
Check the stack height sensor:
Go to step 3 on page 478.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1243 (stack height sensor).
2.
c. Manually move the actuator for the stack height sensor assembly to
unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should display.
d. Manually move the actuator to block the stack height sensor and
press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you raise the sensor assembly, and an H
when you release the sensor assembly?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stack height sensor
v Cabling P/J832,
P/J876A+B, P/J269A+B,
J896, P896
v Stack height sensor asm.
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 477
Table 165. Error Code 784 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the middle-bin upper-limit paper switch:
Go to step 4.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Remove the middle-bin asm., (see “Bin Asm., Middle, Finisher” on
page 942). Leave the wiring intact and place the middle-bin asm. on
the lower-bin asm.
3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Middle-bin upper-limit
sensor
v Cabling P/J848,
P/J887A+B, J894A, P894
v Bin asm., middle
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1238 (middle-bin upper-limit switch).
d. Manually block the middle-bin upper-limit sensor beam and press
Enter. An H should display. Note that you may have to use diagnostic
test 1431 to lower the middle bin so that the limit actuator is not
blocking the sensor.
e. Unblock the sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when you
unblock the sensor?
Check the limit actuator travel:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1431 (middle-bin elevator motor, CW), carefully
check the limit actuator of the middle bin as the bin lowers.
4.
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
b. Enter diagnostic mode and, while running test 1432 (middle-bin
elevator motor, CCW), carefully check the limit actuator of the middle
bin as the bin raises.
Do the belt and gears on both sides of the bin always drive the limit
actuator into the upper-limit sensor?
5.
Middle-bin elevator motor
Cabling P/J870, P/J898
Middle-bin asm.
Harness, dc main
compiler
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 6 on page 479.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 478
Table 165. Error Code 784 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
6.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 479
785—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 166 on page 481, 785—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the lower-bin upper-limit switch active.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
p. 743
Removal
Procedures
Lower-bin upper-limit sensor
11L5369
5171–5, p. 1268
Lower-bin elevator motor
11L5375
5171–17, p. 1268
p. 931
Bin asm., lower
11L5367
5171–1, p. 1268
p. 923
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Stack height sensor asm.
11L5418
5110–3, p. 1253
p. 743
p. 1030
Stack height sensor
11L5369
5110–7, p. 1253
p. 743
p. 1030
Harness, dc main
11L5461
5031–21, p. 1234
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5457
5031–17, p. 1234
p. 745
p. 940
p. 1021
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 480
Table 166. Error Code 785 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Remove the eject cover (see “Eject Cover, Finisher” on page 907),
and check the stack height sensor actuator.
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Replace the stack height
sensor asm.
b. Check the compiler area for paper or obstructions that could affect
the operation of the stack height sensor.
c. Rotate the eject bracket asm. gears to ensure that the stack height
sensor is hanging down.
Is the actuator intact, does it freely move between the sensor arms,
and does it have spring action return?
Check the stack height sensor:
Go to step 3 on page 482.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1243 (stack height sensor).
2.
c. Manually move the actuator for the stack height sensor assembly to
unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should display.
d. Manually move the actuator to block the stack height sensor and
press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you raise the sensor assembly, and an H
when you release the sensor assembly?
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stack height sensor
v Cabling P/J832,
P/J876A+B, P/J269A+B,
J896, P896
v Stack height sensor asm.
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 481
Table 166. Error Code 785 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the lower-bin upper-limit paper switch:
Go to step 4.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Remove the lower-bin asm., (see “Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher” on
page 923). Leave the wiring intact and place it on the floor.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Lower-bin upper-limit
sensor
v Cabling P/J850,
P/J830A+B, J894A, P894
v Bin asm., lower
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1239 (lower-bin upper-limit switch).
3.
d. Manually block the lower-bin upper-limit sensor beam and press
Enter. An H should display. Note that you may have to use diagnostic
test 1433 to lower the lower bin so that the limit actuator is not
blocking the sensor.
e. Unblock the sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you block the sensor, and an L when you
unblock the sensor?
Check the limit actuator travel:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1433 (lower-bin elevator motor, CW), carefully
check the limit actuator of the lower bin as the bin lowers.
4.
Go to step 5.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1434 (lower-bin elevator motor, CCW), carefully
check the limit actuator of the lower bin as the bin raises.
Do the belt and gears on both sides of the bin always drive the limit
actuator into the upper-limit sensor?
5.
Lower-bin elevator motor
Cabling P/J871, P/J898
Lower bin asm.
Harness, dc main
compiler
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 6.
6.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 482
786—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 167, 786—Finisher / (1) Upper Bin (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the upper-bin lower-limit switch active.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
p. 743
Removal
Procedures
Upper-bin upper- and lower-limit sensors
11L5369
5191–5, p. 1279
Upper-bin elevator motor
11L5375
5191–17, p. 1279
p. 958
Bin asm., upper
11L5389
5191–1, p. 1279
p. 952
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5457
p. 745
p. 966
p. 1021
p. 813
5031–17, p. 1234
Table 167. Error Code 786 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Remove the eject cover (see “Eject Cover, Finisher” on page 907),
and check the stack height sensor actuator.
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 484.
Replace the stack height
sensor asm.
b. Check the compiler area for paper or obstructions that could affect
the operation of the stack height sensor.
c. Rotate the eject bracket asm. gears to ensure that the stack height
sensor is hanging down.
Is the actuator intact, does it freely move between the sensor arms,
and does it have spring action return?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 483
Table 167. Error Code 786 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the stack height sensor:
Go to step 3.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1243 (stack height sensor).
2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stack height sensor
v Cabling P/J832,
P/J876A+B, P/J269A+B,
J896, P896
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
c. Manually move the actuator for the stack height sensor assembly to
unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should display.
d. Manually move the actuator to block the stack height sensor and
press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you raise the sensor assembly, and an H
when you release the sensor assembly?
Check the upper-bin lower-limit switch:
a. Remove the upper-bin asm., (see “Bin Asm., Upper, Finisher” on
page 952). Leave the wiring intact and place the upper-bin asm. on
the middle-bin asm.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1240 (upper-bin lower-limit switch).
3.
c. Manually block the upper-bin lower-limit sensor beam and press
Enter. An H should display. Note that you may have to use diagnostic
test 1430 to raise the upper bin so that the limit actuator is not
blocking the sensor.
d. Unblock the sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you activate the switch, and an L when not
activated?
Go to step 4 on page 485.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Upper-bin lower-limit
sensor
v Cabling P/J254,
P/J295A+B, P/J264
v Bin asm., upper
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 484
Table 167. Error Code 786 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the upper-bin upper-limit switch:
Go to step 5.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1237 (upper-bin upper-limit switch).
4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Upper-bin upper-limit
sensor
v Cabling P/J253,
P/J295A+B, P/J264
v Bin asm., upper
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
c. Manually block the upper-bin upper-limit sensor beam and press
Enter. An H should display. Note that you may have to use diagnostic
test 1429 to lower the upper bin so that the limit actuator is not
blocking the sensor.
d. Unblock the sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you activate the switch, and an L when not
activated?
5.
Check the limit actuator travel:
Go to step 6.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1429 (upper-bin elevator motor, CW), carefully
check the limit actuator of the upper bin as the bin lowers.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1430 (upper-bin elevator motor, CCW), carefully
check the limit actuator of the lower bin as the bin raises.
Upper-bin elevator motor
Cabling P/J255, P/J266
Upper-bin asm.
Harness, dc main
compiler
Do the belts and gears on both sides of the bin always drive the
limit actuator into the lower-limit switch?
6.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 7.
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 485
787—Finisher / (2) Middle Bin (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 168, 787—Finisher / (1) Middle Bin (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the middle-bin lower-limit switch active.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Middle-bin upper- and lower-limit sensors
11L5369
5181–5, p. 1273
p. 743
Middle-bin elevator motor
11L5375
5181–17, p. 1273
p. 948
Bin asm., middle
11L5380
5181–1, p. 1273
p. 942
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5457
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
5031–17, p. 1234
Table 168. Error Code 787 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Remove the eject cover (see “Eject Cover, Finisher” on page 907),
and check the stack height sensor actuator.
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 487.
Replace the stack height
sensor asm.
b. Check the compiler area for paper or obstructions that could affect
the operation of the stack height sensor.
c. Rotate the eject bracket asm. gears to ensure that the stack height
sensor is hanging down.
Is the actuator intact, does it freely move between the sensor arms,
and does it have spring action return?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 486
Table 168. Error Code 787 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the stack height sensor:
Go to step 3.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1243 (stack height sensor).
2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stack height sensor
v Cabling P/J832,
P/J876A+B, P/J269A+B,
J896, P896
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
c. Manually move the actuator for the stack height sensor assembly to
unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should display.
d. Manually move the actuator to block the stack height sensor and
press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you unblock the sensor assembly, and an H
when you release the sensor assembly?
Check the middle-bin lower-limit switch:
a. Remove the middle-bin asm., (see “Bin Asm., Upper, Finisher” on
page 952). Leave the wiring intact and place the middle-bin asm. on
the lower-bin asm.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1241 (middle-bin lower-limit switch).
3.
c. Manually block the middle-bin lower-limit sensor beam and press
Enter. An H should display. Note that you may have to use diagnostic
test 1432 to raise the middle bin so that the limit actuator is not
blocking the sensor.
d. Unblock the sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you activate the switch, and an L when not
activated?
Go to step 4 on page 488.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Middle-bin lower-limit
sensor
v Cabling P/J849,
P/J887A+B, P/J894A,
P894
v Bin asm., middle
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 487
Table 168. Error Code 787 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the middle-bin upper-limit switch:
Go to step 5.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1238 (middle-bin upper-limit switch).
4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Middle-bin upper-limit
sensor
v Cabling P/J848,
P/J887A+B, J894A, P894
v Bin asm., middle
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
c. Manually block the middle-bin upper-limit sensor beam and press
Enter. An H should display. Note that you may have to use diagnostic
test 1431 to lower the middle bin so that the limit actuator is not
blocking the sensor.
d. Unblock the sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you activate the switch, and an L when not
activated?
5.
Check the limit actuator travel:
Go to step 6.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1431 (middle-bin elevator motor, CW), carefully
check the limit actuator of the middle bin as the bin lowers.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1432 (middle-bin elevator motor, CCW), carefully
check the limit actuator of the lower bin as the bin raises.
Middle-bin elevator motor
Cabling P/J870, P/J898
Middle-bin asm.
Harness, dc main
compiler
Do the belts and gears on both sides of the bin always drive the
limit actuator into the lower-limit switch?
6.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 7.
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 488
788—Finisher / (3) Lower Bin (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 169, 788—Finisher / (1) Lower Bin (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the lower-bin lower-limit switch active.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
p. 743
Removal
Procedures
Lower-bin upper- and lower-limit sensors
11L5369
5171–5, p. 1268
Lower-bin elevator motor
11L5375
5171–17, p. 1268
p. 931
Bin asm., lower
11L5367
5171–1, p. 1268
p. 923
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5457
p. 745
p. 940
p. 1021
p. 813
5031–17, p. 1234
Table 169. Error Code 788 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
a. Remove the eject cover (see “Eject Cover, Finisher” on page 907),
and check the stack height sensor actuator.
1.
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 490.
Replace the stack height
sensor asm.
b. Check the compiler area for paper or obstructions that could affect
the operation of the stack height sensor.
c. Rotate the eject bracket asm. gears to ensure that the stack height
sensor is hanging down.
Is the actuator intact, does it freely move between the sensor arms,
and does it have spring action return?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 489
Table 169. Error Code 788 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the stack height sensor:
Go to step 3.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1243 (stack height sensor).
2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Stack height sensor
v Cabling P/J832,
P/J876A+B, P/J269A+B,
J896, P896
v Stack height sensor asm.
v Harness, dc main
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
c. Manually move the actuator for the stack height sensor assembly to
unblock the sensor and press Enter. An L should display.
d. Manually move the actuator to block the stack height sensor and
press Enter. An H should display.
Does an L display when you unblock the sensor assembly, and an H
when you release the sensor assembly?
Check the lower-bin lower-limit switch:
a. Remove the lower-bin asm., (see “Bin Asm., Upper, Finisher” on
page 952). Leave the wiring intact and place the lower-bin asm. on
the floor.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1242 (lower-bin lower-limit switch).
3.
c. Manually block the lower-bin lower-limit sensor beam and press
Enter. An H should display. Note that you may have to use diagnostic
test 1434 to raise the lower bin so that the limit actuator is not
blocking the sensor.
d. Unblock the sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you activate the switch, and an L when not
activated?
Go to step 4 on page 491.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Lower-bin lower-limit
sensor
v Cabling P/J851,
P/J830A+B, J894A, P894
v Bin asm., lower
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 490
Table 169. Error Code 788 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the lower-bin upper-limit switch:
Go to step 5.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1239 (lower-bin upper-limit switch).
4.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Lower-bin upper-limit
sensor
v Cabling P/J850,
P/J830A+B, J894A, P894
v Bin asm., lower
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
c. Manually block the lower-bin upper-limit sensor beam and press
Enter. An H should display. Note that you may have to use diagnostic
test 1433 to lower the lower bin so that the limit actuator is not
blocking the sensor.
d. Unblock the sensor beam and press Enter. An L should display.
Does an H display when you activate the switch, and an L when not
activated?
5.
Check the limit actuator travel:
Go to step 6.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1433 (lower-bin elevator motor, CW), carefully
check the limit actuator of the lower bin as the bin lowers.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v
v
v
v
c. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and,
while running test 1434 (lower-bin elevator motor, CCW), carefully
check the limit actuator of the lower bin as the bin raises.
Lower-bin elevator motor
Cabling P/J871, P/J898
Lower-bin asm.
Harness, dc main
compiler
Do the belts and gears on both sides of the bin always drive the
limit actuator into the lower-limit switch?
6.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 7.
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 491
789—Finisher / Elevator Failed (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 170 on page 493, 789—Finisher / Elevator Failed (Finisher)
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the lower-bin safety switch open.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Sensor, safety, lower-bin
06L9993
5171–9, p. 1268
p. 743
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
Bin asm., lower
11L5367
5171–1, p. 1268
Harness asm., low paper
11L5377
5171–36, p. 1268
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5457
5031–17, p. 1234
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
p. 1021
p. 923
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 492
Table 170. Error Code 789 Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the stacker lower safety switch:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on page 566) and run
test 1231 (stacker lower safety switch).
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
b. Lift up on and hold the lower bin and press Enter. An H should
display.
c. Release the lower bin and press Enter. An L should display.
1.
2.
v Safety sensor
v Cabling P/J831,
P/J888A+B, P/J874A+B,
J894, P894
v Bin asm., lower
v Harness asm., low paper
v Harness, dc main
compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
Does an H display when the bin is in the up position, and an L when
the bin is in the down position?
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 3.
3.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 493
790—Finisher / Safety Switches
Link to—diagnostic Table 171, 790—Finisher / Safety Switches
Problem—Finisher logic sensed the safety interlock is open, either upper or middle bin.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Switch, safety (upper bin and middle bin)
11L5386
5182–25, p. 1276 /
5192–25, p. 1282
p. 743
Kit, link
11L5388
5182–99, p. 1276
Bin asm., upper
11L5389
5191–1, p. 1279
p. 952
Bin asm., middle
11L5380
5181–1, p. 1273
p. 942
Harness, dc main compiler
11L5457
5031–17, p. 1234
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 745
p. 1021
p. 813
Table 171. Error Code 790 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Power off the printer.
b. Check the upper-bin safety switch to ensure that the switch and
actuator (5192–23, p. 1282) located on the bottom of the upper bin
are intact, unblocked, and operating mechanically correct.
Are the upper-bin safety switch and actuator intact and operating
correctly?
Yes
No
Go to step 2 on page 495.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Upper-bin safety switch
v Upper-bin asm.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 494
Table 171. Error Code 790 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the middle-bin safety switch to ensure that the switch and
shaft-plate actuator (5182–23, p. 1276) located on the bottom of the
middle bin are intact, unblocked, and operating mechanically correct.
2.
3.
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
Are the middle-bin safety switch and actuator intact and operating
correctly?
v Middle-bin safety switch
v Middle-bin asm.
Check the upper-bin safety switch:
Go to step 4.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Remove the finisher connector cover (5012–5, p. 1228), the upper
harness guide (5130–25, p. 1258), and the lower harness guide
(5130–27, p. 1258).
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Upper-bin safety switch
v Cabling P/J 852, P/J 296
v Upper-bin asm.
c. Disconnect finisher connector 296 and check for continuity on
connector 296 between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side of the
connector that goes to the upper-bin safety switch.
Is there connectivity between pins 1 and 2 on connector 296?
4.
Check the upper-bin safety switch:
a. With connector 296 still disconnected, lift and move the shaft plate
(5192–23, p. 1282) to activate the upper-bin safety switch and check
for continuity on connector 296 between pin 1 and 2 on the plug side
of the connector that goes to the upper-bin safety switch.
Is there connectivity between pins 1 and 2 on connector 296?
Repair/replace the following, Reconnect connector 296.
one at a time. After each
Go to step 5 on page 496.
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Upper-bin safety switch
v Cabling P/J 852, P/J 296
v Upper-bin asm.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 495
Table 171. Error Code 790 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the middle-bin safety switch:
Go to step 6.
a. Ensure that the finisher top cover interlock, finisher front cover
interlock, and compiler cover safety and interlock switch are actuated.
b. Disconnect finisher connector 285B and check for continuity on
connector 285B between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side of the
connector that goes to the middle-bin safety switch.
Repair/replace the following,
one at a time. After each
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Middle-bin safety switch
v Cabling P/J 285A, P/J
285B
v Middle-bin asm.
Is there connectivity between pins 1 and 2 on connector 285B?
6.
Check the middle-bin safety switch:
a. With connector 285B still disconnected, lift and move the shaft plate
(5182–23, p. 1276) to activate the middle-bin safety switch and check
for continuity on connector 285B between pin 1 and 2 on the plug
side of the connector that goes to the middle-bin safety switch.
Is there connectivity between pins 1 and 2 on connector 296?
7.
Repair/replace the following, Reconnect connector 296.
one at a time. After each
Go to step 7.
replacement, determine if
the problem is fixed.
v Middle-bin safety switch
v Cabling P/J 285A, P/J
285B
v Middle-bin asm.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Cabling P/J 296, P/J 266
v Harness, DC main compiler
v Finisher PCB
v MCU PCB
If a problem remains, go to step 8.
8.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 496
791—Finisher / No Comm (Finisher)
Link to—diagnostic Table 172 on page 498, 791—Finisher / No Comm (Finisher)
Problem—MCU logic sensed that the finisher PCB was not communicating.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Harness, output
90H4214
700–17, p. 1124
Harness, printer
11L5460
5031–20, p. 1234
NP
Connector, finisher (call tech support to
obtain this part, see “Technical Support” on
page 1298.)
1110–23, p. 1165
Output, AC to finisher (call tech support to NP
obtain this part, see “Technical Support” on
page 1298.)
1110–23, p. 1165
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Harness, AC drive (J478 to P499)
11L5507
LVPS, finisher (100-110 v ac)
11L5453
5030–4, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 998
LVPS, finisher (220 v ac)
11L5502
5030–4, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 998
Finisher PCB
11L5452
5030–2, p. 1232
p. 745
p. 1021
Harness, 100-110 V ac in/out
11L5454
5030–6, p. 1232
Harness, 220 V ac in/out
11L6542
5030–6, p. 1232
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 497
Table 172. Error Code 791 Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
Check cable connections:
Go to step 2.
a. Make sure the printer harness is properly connected to the printer and that it
is not damaged.
b. Make sure the AC in/out harness is properly connected to the printer and that
it is not damaged.
No
Reconnect or replace
the following:
v Harness, printer
v Harness, AC in/out
Are the cables connected properly and are they not damaged?
Check continuity:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the printer rear cover, the finisher PCB cover, and the finisher PCB
top cover.
c. Disconnect the printer harness at P/J265 and the output harness at P/J405.
d. Measure for continuity across the following pins:
2.
Go to step 3 on
page 499.
Replace the following:
v Harness, printer
v Harness, output
v Connector, finisher
J265
J405
1 ------ 1
2 ------ 3
3 ------ 5
4 ------ 7
5 ------ 9
6 ------ 11
7 ------ 2
8 ------ 4
9 ------ 6
10 ------ 8
11 ------ 10
12 ------ 12
Do you have continuity on all pins?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 498
Table 172. Error Code 791 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Make sure there is proper AC voltage at the AC to finisher connector outlet
(P/J13).
3.
Machine Rating
(50-60 Hertz)
100 V ac
120 V ac
220-240 V ac
Min Volt.
Max Volt.
90 V ac.
104 V ac.
200 V ac.
110 V ac.
134 V ac.
264 V ac.
Yes
Go to step 4.
No
Repair/replace the
following, one at a time.
After each replacement,
determine if the problem
is fixed.
v Outlet, AC to finisher
v Harness, AC drive
Do not continue until the voltages are in the correct range.
Is there proper AC voltage at the AC to finisher connector outlet (P/J13)?
4.
Check LVPS (finisher) voltage (5 volt dc check):
a. Power off the printer and reconnect the finisher.
b. Power on the printer and check for 5 volts dc on P/J291 between:
v Pin 7 and frame ground
v Pin 8 and frame ground
Go to step 5 on
page 500.
Repair/replace the
following, one at a time.
After each replacement,
determine if the problem
is fixed.
v LVPS (finisher)
Do you have 5 volts on these pins?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 499
Table 172. Error Code 791 Diagnostic (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
No
Check LVPS (finisher) voltage (24 volt dc check): Power on the printer and check Go to step 6.
for 24 volts dc on P/J291 between:
v Pin 1 and frame ground
v Pin 2 and frame ground
Repair/replace the
following, one at a time.
After each replacement,
determine if the problem
is fixed.
Do you have 24 volts on these pins?
v LVPS (finisher)
Replace the finisher PCB (see “PCB Asm., Finisher” on page 1021).
6.
Yes
Do you still have error code 791?
Replace the MCU PCB.
If a problem remains,
replace the remaining
FRUs.
Problem solved.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 500
821—PS Option / Reseat PS SIMM (Printer)
Problem—The printer detected a problem with the PostScript SIMM.
Action:
1. Power off the printer, wait twenty seconds, and then power on. If the error recurs, perform a cold reset as
follows (a cold reset restores most values in the printer to factory defaults):
v Print a printer configuration page.
v For the A4 paper group: power off and then power on the printer while simultaneously pressing the Cancel
Print key. Hold the Cancel Print key until you see the message COLD RESET A4.
v For the Letter paper group: power off and then power on the printer while simultaneously pressing the
Online key. Hold the Online key until you see the message COLD RESET LTR.
v Restore printer menu settings to the values on the configuration page you printed. The following values do
not need to be restored: IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, GATEWAY ADDRESS, and MAC ADDRESS.
2. If the error recurs, replace the controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM.
3. If the error recurs again, replace the Controller PCB.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 501
851—IPDS Option / Reseat SIMM (Printer)
Problem—The printer detected a problem with the IPDS SIMM.
Action:
1. Power off the printer, reseat the IPDS SIMM, and then power on.
2. If the error recurs, replace the IPDS SIMM.
3. If the error still recurs, replace the Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM; if the error still remains, replace the
controller PCB.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Locations
Removal
Procedures
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
IPDS SIMM
90H3593
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 502
852—IPDS Option / Add Memory (Printer)
Problem—The printer does not have enough memory to process IPDS jobs.
Action: Power off the printer, wait twenty seconds, and then power on. If the problem recurs, the customer may
need to purchase more memory.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 503
853—IPDS Option / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—The printer detected a problem with the IPDS SIMM.
Action:
1. Power off the printer, reseat the IPDS SIMM, and then power on.
2. If the error recurs, replace the IPDS SIMM.
3. If the error still recurs, replace the Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM; if the error still remains, replace the
controller PCB.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Locations
Removal
Procedures
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
IPDS SIMM
90H3593
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 504
854—PAGES Option / Power Off/On (Printer)
Problem—The printer does not have enough memory to process PAGES jobs.
Action:
1. Power off the printer, wait 20 seconds, and then power on.
2. If the error recurs, the customer may need to purchase more memory.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 505
855—PAGES Option / No Font SIMM (Printer)
Problem—The printer has detected that a Japanese Heisei Font SIMM is not installed.
Action: Power off the printer, install a Japanese Heisei Font SIMM, and then power on.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 506
861—Host Timeout / Check Printer (Printer)
Problem—The coax network interface card has sent an Intervention Required message to the host. This error
occurs when (a) the printer is OFFLINE for longer than the HLD TMEOUT setting in the Coax Setup Menu, or (b)
the printer has been in an intervention required state (such as, out of paper) for longer that the IRQ TMEOUT
setting.
Action: Solve the problem that caused the message (for example, press the Online key to put the printer online,
or add paper). To disable this error message, set the HLD TMEOUT and IRQ TMEOUT values in the Coax Setup
Menu to 0.
If the problem continues, replace the FRUS in the Suspected FRU list one at a time until the problem is solved.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Locations
Removal
Procedures
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
IBM Coax SCS Interface
11L6555
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 507
862—CX Send State (Printer)
Problem: Your coax host has placed your printer in “Send State” and is waiting for the printer to return a PA
signal.
Action: Press the Continue key to clear the message. (You may need to press the key more than once.) Then do
the following to send the PA signal.
1. Press the Online key to take the printer offline.
2. Press the Menu key until you see the Coaxial SCS Menu.
3. Press the Item key until you see PA1 or PA2 (whichever signal you want to send).
4. Press the Enter key to send the signal.
5. Press the Online key to resume printing.
If the problem continues, replace the FRUS in the Suspected FRU list one at a time until the problem is solved.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
Locations
Removal
Procedures
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
IBM Coax SCS Interface
11L6555
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 508
871—Network Option / Reseat Option (Printer)
Problem: The printer detected a network interface card in the right slot, but the card is not communicating.
Action:
1. Make sure the network interface card is properly installed and restart the printer.
2. If the message recurs, move the card to the left slot and restart the printer.
3. If the message still recurs, replace the network card. If no message occurs with the NIC in the left slot, replace
the controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM. If the problem still remains, replace the controller PCB.
Remove the network interface card from the printer if you want to print a printer configuration page or if you want
to print from the parallel port.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Ethernet NIC (10BaseT and 10Base2)
63H2837
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
Ethernet NIC (100BaseT)
11L6575
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
Token Ring NIC
63H2834
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 509
872—Network Option / Reseat Option (Printer)
Problem: The printer detected a network interface card in the left slot, but the card is not communicating.
Action:
1. Make sure the network interface card is properly installed and restart the printer.
2. If the message recurs, move the card to the right slot and restart the printer.
3. If the message still recurs, replace the network card. If no message occurs with the NIC in the right slot,
replace the controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM. If the problem still remains, replace the controller PCB.
Remove the network interface card from the printer if you want to print a printer configuration page or if you want
to print from the parallel port.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Ethernet NIC (10BaseT and 10Base2)
63H2837
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
Ethernet NIC (100BaseT)
11L6575
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
Token Ring NIC
63H2834
“Optional Features”
on page 1091
User’s Guide
User’s Guide
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 510
876—Network Option / Check Config (Printer)
Problem: The printer detected that two of the same network interface cards have been installed.
Action: Remove one of the NICs. If the message still recurs, replace the controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM. If the
problem still remains, replace the controller PCB.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure. When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time, and in
the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and continue.
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 511
Print Quality Diagnostics
This section discusses print quality defects.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 512
Background or Dark Image
Problem—there is toner contamination on all or part of
the page. The contamination can vary from a very light
gray dusting to a very dark print.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 173 on page 514, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 174 on page 514,
Background or Dark Image
Background
hc3m0808
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 513
Link to—diagnostic Table 174, Background
Table 173. Suspected FRUs, Background
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
EP cartridge contacts
11L5505
400–8, p. 1114
11L5484
400–27, p. 1114
p. 754
11L5485
400–28, p. 1114
p. 754
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
HVPS
90H4201
1110–4, p. 1165
p. 745
p. 795
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Interface PCB
90H4205
200–3, p. 1103
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
p. 735
p. 793
p. 745
p. 797
Table 174. Background or Dark Image Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
a. Check the density setting in the Configuration Menu to ensure that it Go to step 2.
is set at the default value of 3.
b. Run a demo page test print (see “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586).
The problem could be
intermittent. Verify that the
original job prints correctly.
Is there still background on the print?
2.
a. Install a new EP cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide).
b. Run a demo page test print (see “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586).
Go to step 3 on page 515.
Problem solved. Verify the
original job prints correctly.
Is there background on the print or is the image still dark?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 514
Table 174. Background or Dark Image Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Check the EP cartridge contacts:
a. Remove the EP cartridge.
b. Inspect the metal contact plates C and D (400-27 and 400-28, p.
1114) to ensure good contact with the EP cartridge.
Yes
Go to step 4.
No
Reform, clean, or replace the
contact plates.
Are the metal contacts intact and not deformed or contaminated?
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo test page
print. (See “Printing Demo Pages” on page 586.)
4.
v
v
v
v
v
v
Fuser asm.
BTR asm.
HVPS
MCU PCB
Interface PCB
Laser
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 515
Black Print
Problem—the entire page is black.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 175 on page 517, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 176 on page 517, Black Print
Black
hc3m0814
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 516
Link to—diagnostic Table 176, Black Print
Table 175. Suspected FRUs, Black Print
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
HVPS
90H4201
1110–4, p. 1165
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
LVPS (100-110 V ac)
90H4197
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
LVPS (220 V ac)
90H4198
1120–11, p. 1168
p. 745
p. 804
Interface PCB
90H4205
200–3, p. 1103
p. 745
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
p. 797
Harness, HVPS
90H4220
700–24, p. 1124
p. 745
p. 795
Table 176. Black Print Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Print a configuration page test print (see “Printing Test Prints” on
page 587).
Is the print image normal?
2.
a. Install a new EP cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s
Guide).
b. Print a demo page test print (see “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586).
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
The problem could be
intermittent or there could be a
problem with the application
software.
Problem solved. Verify the
Go to step 3 on page 518.
original job now prints correctly.
Is there a normal image on the paper?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 517
Table 176. Black Print Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a configuration page.
v HVPS
v Laser
v MCU PCB
v Interface PCB
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
v Controller PCB
v LVPS PCB
v HVPS harness
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 518
Blank Print
Problem—the entire page is blank.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 177 on page 520, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 178 on page 520, Blank Print
Blank
hc3m0813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 519
Link to—diagnostic Table 178, Blank Print
Table 177. Suspected FRUs, Blank Print
Illustrations
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
EP cartridge contacts
11L5505
400–8, p. 1114
11L5484
400–27, p. 1114
p. 754
11L5485
400–28, p. 1114
p. 754
HVPS
90H4201
1110–4, p. 1165
p. 745
p. 795
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
See Parts Catalog, 200–19, p. 1103
p. 791
Controller PCB
See Parts Catalog, 200–99, p. 1103 p. 745
p. 788
Interface PCB
90H4205
200–3, p. 1103
Harness, HVPS
90H4220
700–24, p. 1124
p. 735
p. 745
Table 178. Blank Print Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Verify the fix. Verify the
a. Load fresh, dry paper.
original job prints correctly.
b. Check the density setting in the Configuration Menu to ensure that it is
the default value of 3.
c. Run a demo page test print from the tray where you loaded dry paper
(see “Printing Demo Pages” on page 586).
Go to step 2.
Is there a normal image on the paper?
2.
Verify the fix. Verify that the Reinstall the original EP
a. Install a new EP cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide).
cartridge, and then go to
original job not prints
b. Run a demo page test print (see “Printing Demo Pages” on page 586).
step 3 on page 521.
correctly.
Is there a normal image on the paper?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 520
Table 178. Blank Print Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Check the laser window:
a. Remove the EP cartridge.
b. Inspect the laser window inside the EP cartridge opening on the right
side for contamination that could be blocking part of the laser beam
from reaching the drum.
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
Remove the obstruction.
Go to step 5.
Reform, clean, or replace
the contact plates.
Is the laser window clean?
4.
Check the EP cartridge contact:
a. Power off the printer.
b. Remove the EP cartridge.
c. Inspect the metal contact plates C and D (400–27 and 400–28, see
page 1114) and the metal contacts on the BTR/DTS guide asm.
(400–8, see page 1114) to ensure good contact with the EP cartridge.
v Contact plate C (400–27)
v Contact plate D (400–28)
v BTR/DTS guide asm.
(400–8)
Are the metal contacts intact, not contaminated and not deformed?
Check the BTR assembly:
5.
Inspect the BTR assembly.
Go to step 6.
Replace the BTR assembly
(see 400-1 on p. 1114).
Is the BTR intact and not contaminated?
6.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo page.
v HVPS
v MCU PCB
v Controller (OS/PCL/PS) SIMM
v Controller PCB
v Interface PCB
v HVPS harness
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 521
Damaged Page
Problem—the page is bent, wrinkled, or torn.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 179 on page 523, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 180 on page 523, Damaged
Print
Damaged Page
hc3m0810
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 522
Link to—diagnostic Table 180, Damaged Print
Table 179. Suspected FRUs, Damaged Print
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
Locations
Removal
Procedures
User’s guide
p. 735
p. 793
Table 180. Damaged Page Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the paper:
1.
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the tray that is the paper source
of the problem.
Yes
No
Check the items listed under
“Print Quality Problems” on
page 83. If necessary, replace
the paper in the paper source.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3 on page 524.
Replace rollers and other
paper path parts as necessary,
and clear any obstructions from
the paper path.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a
cockle finish?
Check the paper path:
Inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see
“Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on
page 721).
2.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially
near rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper
path clear of obstructions?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 523
Table 180. Damaged Page Diagnostic (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the paper feed:
Go to step 4.
a. Print a configuration page test print (see “Printing Test Prints” on
page 587) and power off the printer halfway through the print
cycle.
Go to “Skewed Image” on
page 539.
b. Open the left upper cover.
Is the paper feeding straight?
Inspect the paper path rollers:
4.
Go to step 5.
Replace any worn or damaged
rollers.
Inspect all of the rolls along the paper path, between the feed tray
and the exit tray, for contamination, wear, or damage.
Are the paper path rolls free of contamination, wear, or
damage?
5.
Check the EP cartridge:
v Replace the EP cartridge
a. Print a configuration page test print (see “Printing Test Prints” on
(see IBM InfoPrint 32/40:
page 587) and power off the printer before the page reaches the
User’s Guide.
fuser.
v Replace the BTR asm.
b. Open the left upper cover.
Go to step 6.
Is the paper damaged before it reaches the fuser?
Check the fuser:
Replace the fuser (see “Fuser,
a. Print a configuration page test print (see “Printing Test Prints” on Printer” on page 793).
page 587) and power off the printer halfway through the fuser.
6.
If a problem remains, go to
step 7.
b. Open the left upper cover.
c. Examine the paper before the image enters the fuser and after
the image exits the fuser.
Is paper undamaged before it enters the fuser, but there is
damage visible after it exits the fuser?
7.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 524
Fused, Not Fused or Partially Fused Image
Problem—the image is not completely fused (the toner
easily rubs off). If the image density is light, correct this
first (see “Light (Undertoned) Image” on page 528).
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 181 on page 526, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 182 on page 526, Fused,
Not Fused or Partially Fused
Fused, Not Fused or
Partially Fused Image
hc3m0811
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 525
Link to—diagnostic Table 182, Fused, Not Fused or Partially Fused
Table 181. Suspected FRUs, Fused, Not Fused or Partially Fused Image
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
AC driver PCB (100-110 V ac)
90H4199
1110–1, p. 1165
p. 745
AC driver PCB (220 V ac)
90H4200
1110–1, p. 1165
p. 745
Table 182. Fused, Not Fused or Partially Fused Image Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
Go to step 2.
a. Replace the paper with fresh, dry paper.
b. Run a demo page test print (see “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586).
No
Problem solved. Verify the
original job prints correctly.
Does the fusing problem still exist?
Replace fuser:
Go to step 3 on page 527. Problem solved. Verify the
original job prints correctly.
2.
<2-25> High temperature; switch off the printer and allow at least 20 minutes
for parts in this area to cool before handling.
hcsf0225
CAUTION:
a. Replace the fuser assembly (see “Fuser, Printer” on page 793).
b. Run a demo page test print (see “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586).
Does the fusing problem still exist?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 526
Table 182. Fused, Not Fused or Partially Fused Image Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo test page
print. (See “Printing Demo Pages” on page 586.)
3.
v MCU PCB
v AC driver PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 527
Light (Undertoned) Image
Problem—the overall image is light. The image may
also not be correctly fused because of insufficient
image density.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 183 on page 529, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 184 on page 529, Light
(Undertoned) Image
Light (Undertoned) Image
hc3m0800
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 528
Link to—diagnostic Table 184, Light (Undertoned) Image
Table 183. Light (Undertoned) Image
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
p. 735
HVPS
90H4201
1110–4, p. 1165
p. 745
Contact plates C and D
11L5484
400–27, p. 1114
11L5485
400–28, p. 1114
Plate, BTR lead
11L5505¹
(400-8)
400–10, p. 1114
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
p. 797
Harness, HVPS
90H4220
700–24, p. 1124
p. 795
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Table 184. Light (Undertoned) Image Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Load fresh, dry paper.
b. Check the density setting in the Configuration Menu to ensure that it
is the default value of 3.
c. Run a demo page test print from the tray where you loaded dry
paper (see “Printing Demo Pages” on page 586).
Yes
No
Verify the fix. Verify the
original job prints
correctly.
Go to step 2 on page 530.
Is the image at the normal print density?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 529
Table 184. Light (Undertoned) Image Diagnostic (continued)
Step
2.
Actions and Questions
a. Install a new EP cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide).
b. Run a demo page test print (see “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586).
Yes
No
Verify the fix. Verify the
original job prints
correctly.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Reform, clean, or replace the
contact plates.
Go to step 5.
Reform, clean, or replace the BTR
lead plate.
Verify the fix. Verify the
original job prints
correctly.
Go to step 6 on page 531.
Is the image at the normal density?
3.
Check the EP cartridge contact:
a. Remove the EP cartridge.
b. Inspect the metal contact plates C and D (400–27 and 400–28, see
page 1114) to ensure good contact with the EP cartridge.
Are the metal contacts intact, not contaminated and not deformed?
4.
Clean the BTR lead plate (contact):
a. Open the duplex unit.
b. Open the upper left side cover (Area A).
c. Inspect the BTR lead plate (400-10) to ensure good contact.
Is the metal contact intact, not contaminated, and not deformed?
5.
Clean the laser lens:
a. Remove the EP cartridge.
b. Clean the lens on the laser assembly. Access the lens in the slot
along the right side in the EP cartridge opening.
c. Run a demo page test print (see “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586).
Is the image at the normal density?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 530
Table 184. Light (Undertoned) Image Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo test page
print. (See “Printing Demo Pages” on page 586.)
6.
v
v
v
v
v
v
BTR asm.
HVPS
Fuser asm.
Laser
MCU PCB
HVPS harness
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 531
Registration, Image
Problem—the image is not correctly positioned on the
page. If the image is not parallel with the edges of the
page, see “Skewed Image” on page 539.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 185 on page 533, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 186 on page 534,
Registration, Image
Registration, Image
hc3m0812
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 532
Link to—diagnostic Table 186 on page 534, Registration, Image
Table 185. Registration, Image
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
Clutch asm., registration
90H3666
920–1, p. 1130
Roller, registration
90H3667
920–3, p. 1130
Separation roller assembly
90H3660
1031–1, p. 1147
Harness, exit
90H4218
700–21, p. 1124
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
Removal
Procedures
User’s guide
p. 634
p. 813
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 533
Table 186. Registration, Image Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Note: The following procedure is used to diagnose registration
problems. If you need to make registration adjustments for specific
customer applications, see “Leading Edge and Side Edge
Registration Adjustment Procedure” on page 576.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Incorrect positioning of the
paper guides or incorrect paper
loading was the cause of the
problem. Verify that the original
job prints correctly.
Load paper correctly:
1.
a. Check each tray including the 2500–sheet input unit trays (if
installed), and verify that the paper guides are adjusted correctly
to match the paper size in the tray.
b. Reload the paper correctly into the trays.
c. Print a configuration page test print from each tray including the
2500–sheet input unit trays (if installed) and the auxiliary tray
(see “Printing Test Prints” on page 587). When printing the
configuration page test print, use the same paper orientation
(short-edge feed or long-edge feed) that gave the customer
registration problems.
d. Determine which trays are having a registration problem.
Is there still a registration problem?
Is the registration problem occurring from all trays?
2.
3.
Replace the EP cartridge. Print Go to step 4 on page 535.
a configuration page from all
trays to determine if the
problem is fixed. If the problem
is not fixed, go to step 3.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed.
v Registration clutch
v Registration roller
v Separation roller asm.
v MCU PCB
v Harness exit, dc rear
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 534
Table 186. Registration, Image Diagnostic (continued)
Step
4.
Actions and Questions
If the registration problem is occurring in tray 1, tray 2, or tray 3,
replace the failing tray with a tray that is not having the problem.
Yes
Go to step 5.
No
Replace the failing tray.
Is the registration problem still occurring?
5.
The InfoPrint 32 and InfoPrint 40 have diagnostics that permit some registration adjustment in each tray. Making these adjustments
can cause other problems. If you need to make registration adjustments for specific customer applications, see “Leading Edge and
Side Edge Registration Adjustment Procedure” on page 576.
See “Technical Support” on page 1298.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 535
Residual Image or Ghosting
Problem—there are light, ghost images appearing
randomly on the page. The images may be either from
a previous page or the current page.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 187 on page 537, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 188 on page 537, Residual
Image or Ghosting
Residual Image
or Ghosting
hc3m0807
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 536
Link to—diagnostic Table 188, Residual Image or Ghosting
Table 187. Residual Image or Ghosting
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
Locations
Removal
Procedures
User’s guide
p. 735
p. 793
Table 188. Residual Image or Ghosting Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the residual images.
1.
2.
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 3.
Verify the fix. Verify that the
original problem job now prints.
Go to step 4.
Verify the fix. Verify that the
original problem job now prints.
Go to step 5 on page 538.
Replace the BTR assembly
(see 400-1 on p. Table 251 on
page 1114).
Was the customer printing numerous copies of the same
image?
a. Replace paper with fresh, dry standard paper.
b. Reprint the problem image or print a demo page (see “Printing
Demo Pages” on page 586).
Do residual images still appear?
3.
a. Install a new EP cartridge.
b. Print a demo page (see “Printing Demo Pages” on page 586).
Do residual images still appear?
Inspect the BTR assembly for contamination and wear.
4.
Is the BTR free of contamination and wear?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 537
Table 188. Residual Image or Ghosting Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
Go to step 6.
No
Problem solved. Verify that the
original problem job now prints.
<2-25> High temperature; switch off the printer and allow at least 20 minutes
for parts in this area to cool before handling.
5.
hcsf0225
CAUTION:
a. Replace the fuser assembly (see 793).
b. Run approximately 20 demo test prints. See “Printing Demo
Pages” on page 586.
Do residual images still appear?
6.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 538
Skewed Image
Problem—the image is not parallel with the edges of
the paper page. If the image is not positioned correctly
on the page, see “Registration, Image” on page 532.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 189 on page 540, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 190 on page 541, Skewed
Image
Skewed Image
hc3m0809
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 539
Link to—diagnostic Table 190 on page 541, Skewed Image
Table 189. Skewed Image
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
Feed roller, pick roller, separation roller kit
06L9941
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
400–30, p. 1114
Removal
Procedures
User’s guide
p. 735
1033–5,
1034–6,
1043–5,
1044–6,
4051–5,
4052–6,
4061–4,
4062–5,
4071–4,
4073–5,
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
1151
1154
1161
1163
1204
1206
1208
1210
1215
1220
Tray 1 feed roller
90H3660¹
(1031-1)
1031–6, 1147
Tray 2 feed roller
90H3644¹
(1043-98)
1043–15, 1161
Tray 3 feed roller
90H4237¹
(4051-99)
4051–13, 1204
Tray 4 feed roller
06L9796¹
(4061-99)
4061–13, 1208
Auxiliary feed roller
06L9946¹
(1012-7)
1010–9, 1134
p. 735
Auxiliary pick roller
06L9946¹
(1012-7)
1010–22, 1134
p. 735
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the suspected FRU.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 540
Table 190. Skewed Image Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the paper path:
1.
Yes
Go to step 2.
Check the paper path in all location areas (see Figure 2 on
page 69) for fragments of paper (especially near sensors), for burrs
(small projections) on components, and for worn, contaminated, or
broken parts that may cause jams or skewing.
Is the paper path free of contamination or obstructions?
2.
Load paper correctly:
Go to step 3.
a. Remove each tray, including the 2500–sheet input trays (if
installed), and verify that the paper guides are adjusted correctly
to match the paper size in the tray.
b. Reload the paper correctly into the tray.
c. Reinstall the tray.
d. Print a configuration page test print from each tray, including the
2500–sheet input trays (if installed) and the auxiliary tray (see
“Printing Test Prints” on page 587).
No
Remove obstructions or
contamination from the paper
path. Verify that this was the
cause of the skewing problem
by printing test prints from all
input trays including the
auxiliary tray.
Incorrect positioning of paper
guides or incorrect paper
loading was probably the
cause of the problem. Verify
that the duplex unit is not
causing skew by running test
prints through the duplex.
e. Determine which trays are having a skewing problem.
Is there still a skew problem?
Determine trays having skew.
3.
4.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 6 on page 542.
Does the skewed image occur from all trays including the
auxiliary tray?
Problem solved.
Reinstall the original EP
a. Install a new EP cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s
cartridge,
and
then
go
to
step
5
Guide).
on page 542.
b. Print a configuration page test print from each tray including the
auxiliary tray (see “Printing Test Prints” on page 587).
Is the image still skewed?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 541
Table 190. Skewed Image Diagnostic (continued)
Step
5.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
a. Replace the registration roll (see “Registration Roller, Printer” on Suspect a driver or application
problem. Contact your next
page 826).
level of technical support. See
b. Print a configuration page test print from each tray including the “Technical Support” on
auxiliary tray (see “Printing Test Prints” on page 587).
page 1298.
Problem solved.
Is the image still skewed?
6.
Replace feed, pick, and separation rollers:
Go to step 7.
a. Replace the feed roller, pick roller, and separation roller in the
trays having skew problems.
For auxiliary tray skew problems, check and replace the pick
roller (1010–2), feed roller (1010–9).
b. Print a configuration page test print from each tray including the
auxiliary tray (see “Printing Test Prints” on page 587).
Problem solved.
Is the image still skewed?
7.
Do you have a 2500–sheet input unit attached to the printer?
Go to step 8 on page 543.
Go to step 9 on page 543.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 542
Table 190. Skewed Image Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check feed rollers:
a. Use the following table to determine the feed roller and
associated hardware to be checked and replaced as required.
Tray 2, 3, 4, & 5 skewing problems
Tray 1 feed roller (1031–6 p. 1147)
Tray 3, 4, & 5 skewing problems
Tray 2 lower feed roller (1043–15 p. 1161)
8.
Yes
No
Problem solved.
Return to 1 on page 541 and
reverify the steps in this
diagnostic. If the skew problem
still exists, contact your next
level of technical support. See
“Technical Support” on
page 1298.
Tray 4 & 5 skewing problems
Tray 3 feed roller (4051–13 p. 1204)
Tray 5 skewing problems
Tray 4 feed roller (4061–13 p. 1208)
b. After checking and replacing defective parts, print a
configuration page test print from the trays having the skewing
problem (see “Printing Test Prints” on page 587).
Is there still a skew problem?
Check the feed rollers:
a. Check the tray 1 feed roller (1031–6 p. 1147) and associated
hardware. Repair or replace parts as required.
9.
b. Print a configuration page test print from tray 2 (see “Printing
Test Prints” on page 587).
Problem solved.
Return to 1 on page 541 and
reverify the steps in this
diagnostic. If the skew problem
still exists, go to step 10.
Is there still a skew problem?
10.
Go to “End of Diagnostic and a Problem Remains” on page 87.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 543
Spots on Prints
Problem—there are spots of toner randomly scattered
on the print side of a simplex page.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 191 on page 545, Suspected FRUs
Link to—Table 192 on page 545, Spots on Prints
Spots
hc3m0806
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 544
Link to—diagnostic Table 192, Spots on Prints
Table 191. Spots on Prints
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
Removal
Procedures
Locations
User’s guide
p. 735
p. 793
Table 192. Spots on Prints Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Install a new EP cartridge (see IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide).
b. Run a demo page test print. See “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586.
Yes
No
Problem solved.
Reinstall the original EP
cartridge and go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Go to step 3 on page 546.
Are the spots gone?
2.
Check the interior check and cleaning:
a. Remove the EP cartridge and check the interior of the printer for
toner contamination.
b. Vacuum or wipe all interior surfaces, including feed rollers.
c. Run 30 demo page test prints (see “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586).
d. Examine the last print.
Are the spots gone?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 545
Table 192. Spots on Prints Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Yes
Problem solved.
No
Go to step 4.
3.
<2-25> High temperature; switch off the printer and allow at least 20 minutes
for parts in this area to cool before handling.
hcsf0225
CAUTION:
a. Install a new fuser asm.
b. Run a demo page test print. See “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586.
Are the spots gone?
4.
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo page.
v BTR asm.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 546
Streaks, Horizontal
Problem—there are black lines running horizontally
across the page.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 193 on page 548, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 194 on page 548, Streaks,
Horizontal
Streaks, Horizontal
hc3m0804
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 547
Link to—diagnostic Table 194, Streaks, Horizontal
Table 193. Streaks, Horizontal
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
HVPS
90H4201
1110–4, p. 1165
p. 745
Interface PCB
90H4205
200–3, p. 1103
p. 745
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
p. 735
p. 793
p. 795
p. 797
Table 194. Streaks, Horizontal Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
a. Install a new EP cartridge.
b. Run a demo page test print. See “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586.
Yes
No
Problem solved.
Reinstall the original EP
cartridge, and then go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Replace the BTR asm. See
400-1 on 1114.
Are the horizontal streaks gone?
Remove and inspect the BTR asm.
2.
3.
Is the BTR assembly intact and free of surface defects and
contamination?
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo page.
v Fuser asm.
v HVPS
v Interface PCB
v Laser
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 548
Streaks, Vertical
Problem—there are black lines running vertically along
the page.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 195 on page 550, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 196 on page 550, Streaks,
Vertical
Streaks, Vertical
hc3m0803
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 549
Link to—diagnostic Table 196, Streaks, Vertical
Table 195. Streaks, Vertical
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 793
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
p. 797
HVPS
90H4201
1110–4, p. 1165
Harness, HVPS
90H4220
700–24, p. 1124
p. 745
p. 795
Table 196. Streaks, Vertical
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the paper path:
Inspect the paper path as follows:
v Check all rollers for wear, damage, and contamination (see “Paper
Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches” on page 721).
1.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Replace rollers and other paper
path parts as necessary, and
clear any obstructions from the
paper path.
v Check for loose, bent, or damaged parts in the paper path.
v Check for fragments of paper or other foreign material (especially near
rollers and sensors).
Are all rollers OK, other paper path parts OK, and is the paper path
clear of obstructions?
2.
Check the laser window:
a. Remove the EP cartridge.
b. Inspect the laser window for contamination that could be blocking
part of the laser beam from reaching the drum.
Go to step 3 on page 551. Clean the laser window.
Is the laser window clean?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 550
Table 196. Streaks, Vertical (continued)
Step
3.
Actions and Questions
a. Install a new EP cartridge.
b. Run a demo page test print. See “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586.
Yes
No
Problem solved
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Replace the BTR asm. See
400-1 on 1114.
Are the vertical streaks gone?
Check the BTR:
a. Remove and inspect the BTR asm.
4.
5.
Is the BTR assembly intact and free of surface defects and
contamination?
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo page.
v Fuser asm.
v HVPS
v Laser
v HVPS harness
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 551
Voids on Prints
Problem—there are areas of the image that are
extremely light, or missing entirely. These voids are
localized to small areas on the page.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 197 on page 553, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 198 on page 553, Voids on
Prints
Voids
hc3m0805
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 552
Link to—diagnostic Table 198, Voids on Prints
Table 197. Voids on Prints
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
HVPS
90H4201
1110–4, p. 1165
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
Removal
Procedures
Locations
User’s guide
p. 735
p. 793
p. 745
p. 795
p. 797
Table 198. Voids on Prints Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the tray that is having the source of
the problem.
1.
2.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
Replace EP cartridge
a. Install a new EP cartridge.
b. Run a demo page test print. See “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586.
Yes
No
Check the items listed
under “Print Quality
Problems” on page 83. If
necessary, replace the
paper in the paper
source.
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Reinstall the original EP
cartridge, and then go to step 3.
Are the voids gone?
Check the BTR:
a. Remove and inspect the BTR asm.
3.
Go to step 4 on page 554. Replace the BTR asm. See
400-1 on 1114.
Is the BTR assembly intact and free of surface defects and
contamination?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 553
Table 198. Voids on Prints Diagnostic (continued)
Step
4.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo page.
v Fuser asm.
v HVPS
v Laser
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 554
Voids, Horizontal Band
Problem—there areas of the image that are extremely
light, or missing entirely. These voids form bands that
run horizontally across the page, parallel with the
direction of paper travel.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 199 on page 556, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 200 on page 556, Voids,
Horizontal Band
Voids, Horizontal Band
hc3m0802
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 555
Link to—diagnostic Table 200, Voids, Horizontal Band
Table 199. Voids, Horizontal Band
Part
Numbers
Suspected FRUs
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Removal
Procedures
Locations
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
EP cartridge contacts
11L5505
400–8, p. 1114
11L5484
400–27, p. 1114
p. 754
11L5485
400–28, p. 1114
p. 754
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
HVPS
90H4201
1110–4, p. 1165
p. 745
p. 795
MCU PCB
See Parts Catalog, 1110–5, p. 1165 p. 745
p. 813
p. 793
Table 200. Voids, Horizontal Band Diagnostic
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the paper:
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the tray that is having the problem.
1.
2.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
a. Install a new EP cartridge.
b. Run a demo page test print. See “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586.
Yes
No
Check the items listed
under “Print Quality
Problems” on page 83. If
necessary, replace the
paper in the paper
source.
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Reinstall the original EP
cartridge, and then go to step 3
on page 557.
Are the horizontal voids gone?
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 556
Table 200. Voids, Horizontal Band Diagnostic (continued)
Step
Actions and Questions
Check the BTR:
a. Remove and inspect the BTR asm.
3.
4.
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
Replace the BTR asm. See
400-1 on 1114.
Go to step 5.
Reform, clean, or replace the
contact plates.
Is the BTR assembly intact and free of surface defects and
contamination?
Check the EP cartridge contacts:
a. Remove the EP cartridge.
b. Inspect the metal contact plates C and D (400-27 and 400-28, p.
1114) to ensure good contact with the EP cartridge.
Are the metal contacts intact and not deformed or contaminated?
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo test page
print. (See “Printing Demo Pages” on page 586.)
5.
v Fuser asm.
v HVPS
v MCU PCB
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 557
Voids, Vertical Band
Problem—there areas of the image that are extremely
light, or missing entirely. These voids form bands that
run vertically along the page in the direction of paper
travel.
Suspected FRUs—listed in order of probable failure.
When instructed, exchange the FRUs one at a time,
and in the sequence listed. Test each FRU. If the
problem remains, reinstall the original FRU and
continue.
Link to—Table 201 on page 559, Suspected FRUs
Link to—diagnostic Table 202 on page 560, Voids,
Vertical Band
Voids, Vertical Band
hc3m0801
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 558
Link to—diagnostic Table 202 on page 560, Voids, Vertical Band
Table 201. Voids, Vertical Band
Suspected FRUs
Part
Numbers
Illustrations
Parts Catalog
Locations
Removal
Procedures
EP cartridge
Customer
supply
400–30, p. 1114
User’s guide
Laser
90H3673
800–1, p. 1126
p. 797
BTR asm.
90H3674
400–1, p. 1114
Fuser asm.
Customer
supply
600–1, p. 1122
p. 735
p. 793
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 559
Table 202. Voids, Vertical Band Diagnostic
Step
1.
Actions and Questions
Yes
No
Check the laser window:
Go to step 2.
a. Remove the EP cartridge.
b. Inspect the laser window inside the EP cartridge opening on the right
side for contamination that could be blocking part of the laser beam
from reaching the drum.
Clean the laser window.
Is the laser window clean?
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the tray that is having the problem.
2.
Is the paper curled, bent, wrinkled, torn, or does it have a cockle
finish?
3.
a. Install a new EP cartridge.
b. Run a demo page test print. See “Printing Demo Pages” on
page 586.
Check the items listed
under “Print Quality
Problems” on page 83. If
necessary, replace the
paper in the paper
source.
Go to step 3.
Problem solved.
Reinstall the original EP
cartridge, and then go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Replace the BTR asm. See
400-1 on 1114.
Are the vertical voids gone?
a. Remove and inspect the BTR asm.
4.
Is the BTR assembly intact and free of surface defects and
contamination?
Repair/replace the following, one at a time. After each replacement, determine if the problem is fixed by running a demo test page
print. (See “Printing Demo Pages” on page 586.)
5.
v Fuser asm.
v Laser asm.
Chapter 2. Diagnosing Problems 560
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools
Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Power-On Sequence Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Power-On Sequence Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Initialization Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running Diagnostic Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leading Edge and Side Edge Registration Adjustment Procedure
Operator Panel Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Configuration Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Demo Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing the PAGES Demo Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Test Prints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.562
.562
.563
.564
.566
.567
.574
.575
.576
.579
.581
.582
.584
.586
.586
.587
This chapter contains detailed procedures such as printing test pages, printing a configuration page, working with
the error log, and performing checks and test necessary to support diagnostics.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 1999
561
Checks
Printer Power-On Sequence Check
The controller must have at least one DRAM SIMM installed in the group of two SIMM sockets (see “Controller
SIMMS” on page 791). Since no DRAM is built into the controller, the controller cannot operate without this added
DRAM SIMM. No DRAM results in a blank display or light, but solid, rectangles displayed on the top line of the
operator panel. After several minutes, unrequested blank pages, or pages with a pattern of black lines may print.
The following sequence of events should occur when printer power is switched on (no network card installed, and
no error codes):
1. IBM INFOPRINT 32 or IBM INFOPRINT displays.
2. Fuser fan (F1) and LVPS fan (F3) switch on.
3. All LEDs on the display panel momentarily light and, after approximately 10 seconds, WARMING UP...
displays.
4. If there is a finisher attached, it will perform a power-on sequence also (see “Finisher Power-On Sequence
Check” on page 563).
5. WARMING UP... continues to display until the fuser reaches operating temperature (can be longer than 1
minute if the fuser was cold).
6. The Online LED remains lighted, and after the fuser warms, READY... displays. If a NIC card is installed, I/O
INITIALIZING... may display for several minutes.
7. Pressing the Online key, causes the printer to go offline (OFFLINE... displays and the Online LED is off).
8. Menu, Item, and Value keys allow navigation.
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 562
Finisher Power-On Sequence Check
The following sequence of events should occur
when printer power is switched on (finisher
installed, and no error codes):
1. An audible “click” should be heard as a
relay on the finisher PCB picks.
2. Compiler cover drops [1].
3. Eject rollers clamp [2].
4. Eject rollers drive forward for 1 second [3].
5. End wall drives up (closes) and down
(opens) [4].
6. Stapler head [5] moves toward the front
and home position.
7. Tamper assembly moves front and back
[6].
8. Paddle shaft rotates one revolution [7].
9. Elevator assembly moves up and down.
10. Upper bin moves up and down.
11. Transport assembly drives for 2 seconds.
Tamper Assembly
6
Compiler Cover 1
(Raised)
Stack Height
Actuator
Upper Bin (1)
1 Compiler
Cover
6 Tamper
Assembly
Stack Height
Actuator
2 Eject
Rollers Clamp
Eject
Roller
3
(forward rotation)
7 Paddle Shaft
4 End Wall Open (Down)
4 End Wall Closed (Up)
5 Stapler
hc3m0893
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 563
Finisher Initialization Check
The following procedure verifies that the finisher is mechanically prepped to come to a Ready status:
1. Perform the “Finisher Power-On Sequence Check” on page 563.
2. Check in all paper location areas (see Figure 2 on page 69) for fragments of paper (especially near sensors),
for burrs (small projections) on components, and for worn, contaminated, or broken parts that may cause jams
or skewing.
3. Check that the stapler is in the front position and that the stapler cartridge is full and correctly installed.
4. Ensure that the tamper assembly is free to move and is located in the center of travel.
5. Check that the upper (1) and the middle (2) bin safety switches (located across the underside of the bins) are
free to move and that they are in the operating position.
6. Check that all finisher bins are free to move within the bin assemblies, and that the bins are not locked at
either extreme of travel. Use the following diagnostic routines (see “Running Diagnostic Routines” on
page 567) to drive the bins from either extreme:
Bin
Upper (1)
Middle (2)
Lower (3)
Lower
1429
1431
1433
Raise
1430
1432
1434
Finisher Initialization Check continues on page 565
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 564
7. Use the following diagnostic routines (see “Running Diagnostic Routines” on page 567) to
a. Verify that the elevator assembly has not been driven to either the upper or the lower extreme of travel,
holding either the upper limit or the lower limit switch transferred
b. Move the elevator away from either extreme, if necessary
Display Indication
Routine to Drive Elevator Away
from Transferred switch
Limit Switch
Checked
Routine
H (Switch
Transferred)
L (Switch Not
Transferred)
Upper
1229
H
L
1427 (drives elevator up)
Lower
1230
H
L
1428 (drives elevator down)
8. Check that paper jam area G cover (compiler safety cover) is free to move, and is at its lowest position of
travel. Listen for the safety switch to transfer as the cover is moved up and down, through its full range of
travel.
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 565
Diagnostic Mode
Diagnostic mode allows you to run diagnostic routines (see “Running Diagnostic Routines” on page 567). Enter
the diagnostic mode as follows:
1. Press and hold Item and Value together as you switch on printer power. Continue holding Item and Value
until WARMING UP... displays.
DIAG MENU displays on the first line and
↓TEST = 0101 displays on the second line, with the ↓ (down arrow) positioned above the first number.
Change the TEST number, perform the following:
Press Value for the desired first number.
Press Shift to position the ↓ over the second number.
Press Value for the desired second number.
Continue this until the desired number is displayed.
Press Enter to run the diagnostic.
Online
Continue
Buffer
Attention
*
Online
Continue
Enter
Menu
Item
Value
WARMING UP . . .
Cancel
Print
+
-
Shift
hc3m0847
To
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 566
Running Diagnostic Routines
Table 203. Diagnostic Test Routines
Test
Routine
Component
Comments
0101
Area A cover interlock switch
H = cover open, switch off
L = cover closed, switch on
0110
Area C cover interlock switch
H = cover open, switch off
L = cover closed, switch on
0111
Area B cover interlock switch
H = cover open, switch off
L = cover closed, switch on
0401
Main drive motor (M10)
0402
Fuser fan (F1)
Medium to high speed
0403
LVPS fan (F2)
Medium to high speed
0610
Laser motor (M9)
H = not ready
0615
Laser motor (M9)
600 DPI speed
0617
Laser motor (M9)
Standby speed
0701
Tray 1, paper size sensor
H = no paper sensed
L = paper sensed
0702
Tray 2, paper size sensor
H = no paper sensed
L = paper sensed
0703
Tray 3, paper size sensor
H = no paper sensor
L = paper sensor
0704
Tray 4, paper size sensor
H = no paper sensor
L = paper sensor
0705
Tray 5, paper size sensor
H = no paper sensor
L = paper sensor
0706
Env./aux. tray paper size sensed
H = no paper sensed
L = paper sensed
0707
Tray 1, no-paper sensor
H = no paper sensed
L = paper sensed
0708
Tray 2, no-paper sensor
H = no paper sensed
L = paper sensed
0709
Tray 3, no-paper sensor
H = no paper sensor
L = paper sensor
0710
Tray 4, no-paper sensor
H = no paper sensor
L = paper sensor
0711
Tray 5, no-paper sensor
H = no paper sensor
L = paper sensor
0712
Env./aux. no-paper sensed
H = no paper sensed
L = paper sensed
0713
Tray 1 level sensor
H = tray out , feeder not activated
L = tray in, feeder activated
L = ready
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 567
Table 203. Diagnostic Test Routines (continued)
Test
Routine
Component
Comments
0714
Tray 2 level sensor
H = tray out , feeder not activated
L = tray in, feeder activated
0715
Tray 3 level sensor
H = tray out , feeder not activated
L = tray in, feeder activated
0716
Tray 4 level sensor
H = tray out , feeder not activated
L = tray in, feeder activated
0717
Tray 5 level sensor
H = tray out , feeder not activated
L = tray in, feeder activated
0718
Tray 1 lift motor (M1)
0719
Tray 2 lift motor (M2)
0720
Tray 3 lift motor (M3)
0721
Tray 4 lift motor (M4)
0722
Tray 5 lift motor (M5)
0730
Stack full sensor
H = paper sensed
0801
Main drive motor (M10)
Alternate
0802
Input unit feed motor (M6)
0803
Envelope feed motor (M11)
0805
Registration sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
0806
Paper path 1 sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
0807
Paper path 2 sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
0808
Paper path 3 sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
0809
Paper path 4 sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
0810
Registration clutch
Stop test after 5 seconds
0812
Tray 1 feed clutch
Stop test after 5 seconds
0813
Tray 2 feed clutch
Stop test after 5 seconds
0814
Tray 3 (input unit) feed clutch
Stop test after 5 seconds
0815
Tray 4 (input unit) feed clutch
Stop test after 5 seconds
v Corresponding tray must be installed.
v When that tray no-paper sensor = L, the tray lift motor runs for 2 seconds and then
switches off.
v When the tray no-paper sensor = H, the tray lift motor does not run.
L = no paper sensed
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 568
Table 203. Diagnostic Test Routines (continued)
Test
Routine
Component
Comments
0816
Tray 5 (input unit) feed clutch
Stop test after 5 seconds
0817
Aux/Env feed clutch
Stop test after 5 seconds
0820
Envelope feed sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
0830
Duplex exit sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
0831
Duplex wait sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
0832
Registration sensor (duplex mode)
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
0833
Duplex interlock switch
H = interlock open
L = interlock closed
0834
Fuser exit sensor (duplex mode)
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
0836
Duplex exit-gate solenoid
Switches off after 3 seconds
0837
Duplex wait clutch
Switches off after 3 seconds
0838
Duplex drive motor (M7)
Slow speed
0839
Duplex drive motor (M7)
Fast speed
0850
Invert clutch, CCW
Controlled by the duplex PCB. Switches off after 3 seconds.
0851
Invert clutch, CW
Switches off after 3 seconds.
0901
Main drive motor (M10)
Alternate
0902
EP cartridge interlock switch
H = EP cartridge in place
L = EP cartridge not in place
0904
Toner sensor
H = toner empty
L = toner not low
0921
Developer bias
Switches on HVPS, developer bias
0923
BTR ac voltage
Switches on HVPS, BTR (ac)
0924
BTR dc voltage
Switches on HVPS, BTR (dc)
0926
BTR voltage
Switches on HVPS, BTR
0927
DTS voltage
Switches on HVPS, detack
0929
BTR voltage
Switches on HVPS, BTR (+dc)
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 569
Table 203. Diagnostic Test Routines (continued)
Test
Routine
Component
Comments
1001
1004
Fuser fan (F1)
Medium to high speed
1006
Exit drive/offset motor (M8)
Forward
1007
Exit drive/offset motor (M8)
Reverse
1023
Fuser exit sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1024
Face-up exit sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1050
Face-up exit clutch
Controlled by duplex PCB
1051
Exit-gate solenoid
Switches on gate to face-up tray
1053
Invert clutch, CW face-up exit clutch
Controlled by MCU
1054
Invert clutch, CCW/main exit
Controlled by MCU
1054
Invert clutch, CCW face-up exit clutch
Controlled by MCU
1060
Fuser fan (F1) monitor signal
H = fan failure
L = fan good
1201
Transport entrance sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1202
Transport exit sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1203
Compiler tray exit sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1204
Tamper home sensor
H = home position
L = off home position
1205
Compiler paper sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1206
Compiler cover safety switch
H = cover closed
L = cover open
1207
Top cover interlock switch
H = cover open
L = cover closed
1208
End wall open sensor
H = wall up
L = wall down
1209
Stapler front corner sensor
H = front corner position
L = off front corner position
1210
Stapler front edge sensor
H = front edge position
L = off front edge position
1211
Stapler rear edge sensor
H = rear edge position
L = off rear edge position
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 570
Table 203. Diagnostic Test Routines (continued)
Test
Routine
Component
Comments
1212
Stapler head home sensor
H = home position
L = off home position
1213
Stapler ready sensor
H = not ready
L = ready
1214
Low staple switch
H = staple level low
L = staple level not low
1215
Staple cartridge set switch
H = cartridge in place
L = cartridge not in place
1216
Eject clamp sensor
H = eject clamp down
L = eject clamp up
1217
Set clamp home sensor
H = home position
L = off home position
1218
Stacker offset home sensor
H = off home position
L = home position
1219
Upper bin paper sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1220
Middle bin paper sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1221
Lower bin paper sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1222
Upper bin half-full sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1223
Middle bin half-full sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1224
Lower bin half-full sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1225
Upper bin full sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1226
Middle bin full sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1227
Lower bin full sensor
H = paper sensed
L = no paper sensed
1228
Stacker bin ID sensor
H = not activated
L = activated
1229
Stacker upper limit switch
H = activated
L = not activated
1230
Stacker lower limit switch
H = activated
L = not activated
1231
Stacker lower safety switch
H = activated
L = not activated
1232
Unload while running
H = activated
L = not activated
1233
Front cover interlock switch
H = not activated
L = activated
1234
In-gate interlock switch
H = not activated
L = activated
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 571
Table 203. Diagnostic Test Routines (continued)
Test
Routine
Component
Comments
1235
Transport interlock switch
H = not activated
L = activated
1236
Finisher interlock switch
H = not activated
L = activated
1237
Upper bin upper limit switch
H = activated
L = not activated
1238
Middle bin upper limit switch
H = activated
L = not activated
1239
Lower bin upper limit switch
H = activated
L = not activated
1240
Top bin lower limit switch
H = activated
L = not activated
1241
Middle bin lower limit switch
H = activated
L = not activated
1242
Lower bin lower limit switch
H = activated
L = not activated
1243
Stack height sensor
H = activated
L = not activated
1244
Printer paper full sensor
H = activated
L = not activated
H = activated
L = not activated
L = activated
Top bin safety switch
1245
Middle bin safety switch
1246
Compiler cover interlock switch
H = not activated
1408
Finisher reset
Finisher does power on reset
1410
In-gate solenoid, pull
Opens in-gate
1411
In-gate solenoid, push
Closes in-gate
1412
Transport motor
1413
Tamper motor
Tamper to front
1414
Tamper motor
Tamper to rear
1415
Compiler tray up/down solenoid
1416
End wall motor
Forward
1417
End wall motor
Reverse
1418
Stapler transport motor
Move to front
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 572
Table 203. Diagnostic Test Routines (continued)
Test
Routine
Component
Comments
1419
Stapler transport motor
Move to rear
1420
Staple head motor
1421
Eject clamp/offset motor, CW
Clamp
1422
Eject clamp/offset motor, CCW
Offset
1423
Eject motor
Forward at low speed
1424
Eject motor
Forward at high speed
1425
Eject motor
Reverse
1426
Set clamp motor
1427
Stacker elevator motor
Raise
1428
Stacker elevator motor
Lower
1429
Tray 1 motor (M1), CW
lower
1430
Tray 1 motor (M1), CCW
raise
1431
Tray 2 motor (M2), CW
lower
1432
Tray 2 motor (M2), CCW
raise
1433
Tray 3 motor (M3), CW
lower
1434
Tray 3 motor (M3), CCW
raise
1435
Unload while running LED
1440
Tamper assembly
Movement distance (not recommended)
1441
Tamper assembly
Adjust start time (not recommended)
1442
Stapler
Home position adjustment (not recommended)
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 573
Factory Adjust Menu
The Factory Adjust (FACTORY ADJ) Menu allows you to change factory default settings in the printer.
Note: Do not change values in the Factory Adjust Menu (except for serial number or registration adjustments)
unless IBM Technical Support instructs you to do so.
Enter the Factory Adjust Menu as follows:
1. Press and hold Item and Value together as you switch on printer power. Continue holding Item and Value
until WARMING UP... displays. DIAG MENU displays on the first line.
2. Press Menu to select the Factory Adjust Menu.
3. Press Item to select the adjustment.
4. Press Value to change the test setting.
5. Press Enter to set the new test value. An asterisk appears next to the value to indicate it is set.
Continue
Buffer
Attention
*
Continue
Enter
Menu
Item
Value
WARMING UP . . .
Cancel
Print
+
-
Shift
hc3m0847
Online
Online
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 574
Resetting the Serial Number
The following procedure enters the printer serial number into the MCU NVRAM. Use this procedure only when you
install a new MCU PWB. Resetting the serial number allows you to print the correct serial number on the printer
configuration page. The serial number for the printer is located on the inside of the EP cartridge cover (p. 631).
1. Press and hold Item and Value together as you switch on printer power. Continue holding Item and Value
until WARMING UP... displays. DIAG MENU displays on the first line.
2. Press Menu to select the Factory Adjust Menu.
3. Simultaneously press Item and Shift until you see S/N=00-00000.
4. Press Value to select the value of the leftmost position of the serial number.
5. Press Enter to set the value and proceed to the next position.
6. Repeat the previous two steps for each position of the serial number. Approximately ten seconds after you set
the rightmost digit, an asterisk appears next to the serial number, indicating that it has been succesfully stored
into the MCU NVRAM.
7. Power off the printer and then power on.
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 575
Leading Edge and Side Edge Registration Adjustment Procedure
1. Run sample prints from all trays that need registration adjustments. You can use a sample print of the
customer job or the demo page to determine the amount of registration adjustment that is needed. Mark the
sample prints with the tray number from which it was printed.
2. Measure the distance from the leading edge of the page to a printed box or character and from the left side
edge to the same box or character.
3. Calculate the number of increments of leading edge and side edge registration adjust ment changes that are
needed to move the image from the current position to the desired position using the diagram and chart below.
4. To make the registration adjustments, enter the Factory Adjust Menu (see “Factory Adjust Menu” on page 574).
5. Press Item until you see the test number for the tray and type of registration adjustment (leading edge or side
edge) that you want to make. See Table 204 and Table 205 on page 577 for the test number.
6. Use the Value key to increase and the Shift and Value keys to decrease the registration value based on the
increment calculations that you made in Step 3.
Note: For long-edge feed paper:
v Increasing the leading-edge registration value moves the image towards the bottom of the page.
Decreasing the leading-edge registration value moves the image towards the top of the page.
v Increasing the side-edge registration value moves the image towards the right side of the page.
Decreasing the side-edge registration value moves the image towards the left side of the page.
7. Press ENTER to save the new registration value.
Note: Before pressing ENTER, check the test number and value to ensure that you are making the correct
changes.
Table 204. Leading Edge Registration Adjustment
Tray
Test
Nominal
Value
Increment
Description
1
2041
1 = .346mm (0 to 16)
8
Adjust leading edge registration for tray 1 only
2 to 5
2042
1 = .346mm (0 to 16)
8
Adjust leading edge registration for trays 2-5
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 576
Table 204. Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (continued)
Tray
Test
Nominal
Value
Increment
Description
Auxiliary
Tray
2043
1 = .346mm (0 to 16)
7
Adjust leading edge registration for auxiliary tray
Envelope
Tray
2044
1 = .346mm (0 to 16)
10
Adjust leading edge registration for envelope tray
Duplex
2045
1 = .346mm (0 to 16)
9
Adjust leading edge registration for duplex in all trays
Table 205. Side Edge Registration Adjustment
Tray
Test
Increment
Nominal
Value
Description
All
0620
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for all trays
1
0621
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for tray 1
2
0622
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for tray 2
3
0623
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for tray 3
4
0624
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for tray 4
5
0625
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for tray 5
Auxiliary tray 0626
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for auxiliary tray
Envelope
Tray
0627
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for envelope tray
Duplex all
0628
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for duplex (all trays)
Duplex Tray
1
0629
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for duplex (Tray 1 only)
Duplex Tray
2
0630
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for duplex (Tray 2 only)
Duplex Tray
3
0631
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for duplex (Tray 3 only)
Duplex Tray
4
0632
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for duplex (Tray 4 only)
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 577
Table 205. Side Edge Registration Adjustment (continued)
Tray
Test
Increment
Nominal
Value
Description
Duplex Tray
5
0633
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for duplex (Tray 5 only)
Duplex Aux
0634
1 = .258mm (1 to 99)
50
Adjust side edge registration for duplex (auxiliary tray)
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 578
Operator Panel Menus
This section gives an overview of the other functions available from the printer menus. See the IBM InfoPrint
32/40: User’s Guide for an in depth discussion of the operator panel menus.
To see a list of menus you can access and options you have installed, print a printer configuration page (see
“Printing Configuration Pages” on page 584). You can use the printer configuration page as a menu map. The IBM
InfoPrint 32/40: Quick Reference Card also contains a menu map.
Note that several of the menus and menu items listed in this book appear on your operator panel only if you have
a particular option installed. For example, the ETHERNET MENU appears only if you have installed the Ethernet
network interface card.
If you are unfamiliar with using the operator panel to work with menus, please read “Using the Operator Panel
Keys” and “Navigating Menus” in the IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide before continuing.
The following table describes the basic function of each menu. See “Chapter 6. Operator Panel Menus” in the IBM
InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide for an in depth discussion of the operator panel menus.
Table 206. Operator Panel Menus
Menu
Purpose
COAX DSC/DSE
MENU
Define how the printer handles DSC/DSE jobs sent through the coax attachment
COAXIAL SCS MENU
Define how the printer handles SCS jobs sent through the coax attachment
COAX SETUP MENU
Configure the coax attachment
CONFIG MENU
Define how the printer handles paper jams and certain other error conditions; define toner density, power savings
mode, and print quality
CUSTOM FORMS
MENU
Define custom paper sizes for IPDS jobs
ETHERNET MENU
Define the data stream, timeout, and network address values for the Ethernet attachment
ESC/P MENU
Define how the printer handles ESC/P jobs
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 579
Table 206. Operator Panel Menus (continued)
Menu
Purpose
IPDS MENU
Define how the printer handles IPDS jobs
LANGUAGE MENU
Define the language the printer uses to display operator panel messages and menus
MACHINE INFO MENU Displays page counts, the error log, and the toner and fuser usage counters
MEMCONFIG MENU
Define whether the printer saves PCL5e, PostScript, and PAGES information when it switches ports
PAGES MENU
Define how the printer handles PAGES jobs
PAPER MENU
Select input trays, output bins, duplex printing options, and other paper handling options
PARALLEL MENU
Define how the printer handles jobs sent through the parallel port, including the data stream, bi-directional
communications, and the timeout setting
PCL MENU
Define how the printer handles PCL5e jobs, including number of copies, page size, page orientation, lines per page,
font source, and default font
PS MENU
Define how the printer handles PostScript jobs, including number of copies and whether error messages are printed
RESET MENU
Reset the printer to cancel a job or to use factory defaults
TEST MENU
Print configuration pages, font lists, and printer test pages; print a hexadecimal dump for diagnostic purposes
TOKEN RING MENU
Define the data stream, timeout, and network address values for the token-ring attachment
TWINAX SCS MENU
Define how the printer handles SCS jobs sent through the twinax attachment
TWINAX SETUP
MENU
Configure the twinax attachment
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 580
Machine Information Menu
Use the MACHINE INFO MENU to display information about printer supply usage. The following table describes
the functions you can perform from the MACHINE INFO MENU.
To perform the action associated with the menu item you select, press Enter.
Table 207. Machine Information Menu
Menu Item
Description
PAGE COUNT
Displays the number of pages the printer has printed.
ERROR LOG
Displays the last ten error messages logged by the printer and the printer page count when each message occurred.
Use the Value key to scroll through the list. Not all error messages get logged, including some severe errors that halt
printer operations.
TONER CTR
Displays the toner cartridge counter. The toner cartridge counter automatically changes whenever you change the toner
cartridge.
Displays the fuser counter.
FUSER CTR
IBM recommends resetting this counter whenever you change the usage kit. To reset the counter to 0:
1. Press Shift and Value together.
2. Press Enter.
The new value will not be displayed until the next time you switch on printer power.
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 581
Test Menu
Use the TEST MENU to display basic information about the printer and to perform basic diagnostic tasks.
To perform the action associated with the menu item you select, press Enter.
The actual menu items you see depend on what options you have installed. To find out what options you have
installed, print a printer configuration page (see “Printing Configuration Pages” on page 584).
If you see the message WAIT FOR IDLE PRINTER while performing a TEST MENU item, wait until you see the
READY prompt and try again.
Table 208. Test Menu
TEST MENU Item
CX HEX PRT
CANCEL CX PRT
Description
CX HEX PRT prints a hexadecimal dump for diagnosing coax problems. After you select this item, it changes to
CANCEL CX PRT. To cancel the dump, select CANCEL CX PRT.
CONFIG PAGE
Prints the printer configuration page. Ensure that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the default tray
CONTINUOUS TEST
Prints continuous test pages. To stop the test, press Cancel Print.
FORMAT DISK
Formats the optional hard drive.
ONLINE HEX PRT
CANCEL HEX PRT
ONLINE HEX PRINT prints a hexadecimal dump for diagnostic purposes. After you select this item, it changes to
CANCEL HEX PRT. To cancel the dump, select CANCEL HEX PRT.
PRINT DEMO
Prints the demo page.
PRINT EN CONFIG
Prints a configuration page for the Ethernet network interface card.
PRINT ESC/P FONTS
Prints all characters used in ESC/P by the default font.
PRINT IPDS FONTS
Prints a list of IPDS fonts installed on the printer.
PRINT PCL FONTS
Prints a list of PCL5e fonts installed on the printer.
PRINT PS FONTS
Prints a list of PostScript fonts installed on the printer.
PRINT PAGES FONTS
Prints all characters used in PAGES by the default font.
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 582
Table 208. Test Menu (continued)
TEST MENU Item
Description
PRINT PAGES DEMO
Prints the PAGES demo page.
PRINT SCS CHARS
Prints the SCS code page (character set).
PRINT TR CONFIG
Prints a configuration page for the token-ring network interface card.
TX HEX PRT
CANCEL TX PRT
TX HEX PRT prints a hexadecimal dump for diagnosing twinax problems. After you select this item, it changes to
CANCEL TX PRT. To cancel the dump, select CANCEL TX PRT.
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 583
Printing Configuration Pages
There are three configuration pages available depending the printer configuration. For an in-depth discussion of
configuration pages and using the operator panel menus, see the IBM InfoPrint 32/40: User’s Guide.
v Printer Configuration Page
v Ethernet Network Interface Card Configuration Page
v Token-Ring Network Interface Card Configuration Page
Print a configuration page as follows:
1. Ensure that the printer is offline. If the printer is online, press Online to take it offline.
2. Press Menu once. TEST MENU displays.
3. Press Item until CONFIG PAGE displays.
PRT EN CONFIG displays for the Ethernet Network Interface Card Configuration Page
PRT TR CONFIG displays for the Token-Ring Network Interface Card Configuration Page
4. Press Enter.
5. Press Online to restore the printer to READY and online status, and print the configuration page. The printer
must be online to print the configuration page. This takes about a minute.
See Figure 14 on page 585 for a sample configuration page.
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 584
IBM InfoPrint 32
Configuration Page
SOURCE = TRAY 5
OUTPUT = FINISHR1
DUPLEX = ON
BINDING = LONG
TRAY SWITCH= ON
TRAY RENUM = OFF
MANUAL = OFF
PCL ORIENT = P
BLANK PG = PRINT
TRAY1 PROT = OFF
TRAY1TYPE = PLAIN
TRAY2 PROT = OFF
TRAY2TYPE = PLAIN
TRAY3 PROT = OFF
TRAY3TYPE = PLAIN
TRAY4 PROT = OFF
TRAY4TYPE = PLAIN
TRAY5 PROT = OFF
TRAY5TYPE = PLAIN
AUXTRAYPROT = OFF
AUXTYPE = PLAIN
AUXSIZE = LTR-LEF
CUSTOM FORMS
FORM1 UNITS = mm
FORM1LEN = 508
FORM1WIDTH = 330
FORM2 UNITS = mm
FORM2LEN = 508
FORM2WIDTH = 330
FORM3 UNITS = mm
FORM3LEN = 508
FORM3WIDTH = 330
FORM4 UNITS = mm
FORM4LEN = 508
MEMCONFIG MENU
PCL SAVE = OFF
PS SAVE = OFF
LANGUAGE MENU
LANG = ENGLISH
INSTALLED OPTIONS
PARALLEL MENU
PERSONALITY = AUTO
BI-DI = ON
PORT TIMEOUT = 15
PCL MENU
PAGEPROT = AUTO
COPIES = 1
EDGE-EDGE = OFF
FORM = 60 LINES
FNTSRC = INTERNAL
FONTNUM = 0
PT.SIZE = 12.00
PITCH = 10.00
SYMSET = ROMAN-8
AUTO RESET = ON
TRAY 3
TRAY 4
TRAY 5
AUX TRAY
FINISHER
FACE-UP TRAY
DUPLEX
IPDS
TOKEN RING
TOTAL MEMORY = 40MB
AUTOSENSED PAPER
TRAY 1
TRAY 2 = LTR-LEF
TRAY 3 = LTR-LEF
TRAY 4 = LTR-LEF
TRAY 5 = LTR-LEF
PS MENU
PAGEPROT = AUTO
COPIES = 1
PRINT ERRS = OFF
EDGE-EDGE = ON
IPDS MENU
PAGEPROT = AUTO
DEF CD PAG = 037
EMULATION = 4028
DEF FGID = 416
CPI = 10.0
VPA CHK = ON
X-OFFSET = 0
Y-OFFSET = 0
PRINTER DETAILS
PAGE COUNT = 5586
TONER CTR = 5502
FUSER CTR =5502
ERROR LOG
0:350 4700 1:254 4650
2:761 4301
CODE LEVELS
CTL 1.06F1
PCL 1.4.7
PS 4.08
TR 6.20
IPDS 2.11H
S/N XX-XXXXX
hc3m0845
PAPER MENU
Figure 14. Sample of a Printer Configuration Page
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 585
Printing Demo Pages
Print a demo page as follows:
1. Ensure that the printer is offline. If the printer is online, press Online to take it offline.
2. Press Menu once. TEST MENU displays.
3. Press Item until DEMO PAGE displays.
4. Press Enter to print the demo page.
5. Press Online to restore the printer to READY status.
Printing the PAGES Demo Page
If the PAGES/ESC/P SIMM is installed, you can print a PAGES demo page as follows:
1. Ensure that the printer is offline. If the printer is online, press Online to take it offline.
2. Press Menu once. TEST MENU displays.
3. Press Item until PAGES DEMO PAGE displays.
4. Press Enter to print the demo page.
5. Press Online to restore the printer to READY status.
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 586
Printing Test Prints
You can run a variety of test prints through the printer and the installed options. See “Test Menu” on page 582 for
a description of the various source jobs.
Examples of Test Prints: Following are two examples of test prints. Any available paper source or output can
be substituted in either example.
1. Example one:
“Running a Configuration Page from Tray 2 to the Face-Down (Main) Output Bin”
2. Example two:
“Running a Duplex Job from Tray 3 to the Finisher Upper Bin” on page 588
Running a Configuration Page from Tray 2 to the Face-Down (Main) Output Bin:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Press Online, if necessary, to take the printer OFFLINE.
Press Menu to select PAPER MENU.
Press Item to select SOURCE.
Press Value to select TRAY 2.
Press Enter. An * (asterisk) appears next to TRAY 2.
Press Item to select OUTPUT.
Press Value to select MAIN.
Press Enter. An * (asterisk) appears nest to MAIN.
Press Menu to select TEST MENU.
Press Item to select CONFIG PAGE.
Press Enter to run the job.
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 587
Running a Duplex Job from Tray 3 to the Finisher Upper Bin:
1. Press Online, if necessary, to take the printer OFFLINE.
2. Press Menu to select PAPER MENU.
3. Press Item to select SOURCE.
4. Press Value to select TRAY 3.
5. Press Enter. An * (asterisk) appears next to TRAY 3.
6. Press Item to select OUTPUT.
7. Press Value to select FINISHR1.
8. Press Enter. An * (asterisk) appears next to FINISHR1.
9. Press Item to select DUPLEX.
10. Press Value to select DUPLEX=ON.
11. Press Enter. An * (asterisk) appears next to DUPLEX=ON.
12. Press Menu to select TEST MENU.
13. Press Item to select PCL FONTS. This produces a multiple-page job.
14. Press Enter to run the job.
Chapter 3. Diagnostic Tools 588
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer, Duplex, Envelope Feeder, and the Input Unit . . . . . . . . .
Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinout Diagrams Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Pinout Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Input and Low Voltage Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutches, Sensors, Offset Motor, and Exit Gate Solenoid to MCU. .
Controller PCB and Interface PCB to MCU . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser Fan (F1), Main Motor (M10), Cover Interlocks SW1 and SW2
HVPS to MCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser and EP Cartridge Interlocks SW1 and SW2 to MCU . . . . .
Finisher PCB to MCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Panel to Interface PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toner Sensor and EP Cartridge to MCU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 1, Auxiliary Tray, and Envelope Feeder to MCU . . . . . . . .
Tray 1 Size, Registration, No-Paper, and Level Sensors to MCU . .
Tray 2 to MCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex Assembly Pinout Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Envelope Feeder Pinout Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Unit Pinout Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Unit PCB to MCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Unit Tray 3 and Tray 4 to MCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Unit Tray 4 and Tray 5 to MCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Size, Level, and Paper Sensors to Finisher PCB and MCU PCB . .
Finisher Pinout Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top and Upper Sensors to Finisher PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transport Entrance and Exit Sensors to Finisher PCB . . . . . . .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 1999
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
to MCU .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.591
.592
.593
.594
.595
.600
.600
.602
.603
.604
.605
.606
.607
.608
.609
.610
.611
.612
.613
.614
.615
.615
.617
.618
.619
.620
.620
.621
589
Stacker Sensors to Finisher PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compiler, Interlock, and Stapler Sensors to Finisher PCB. . . . . . . . . . .
Tamper, Interlock, and Stacker Sensors to Finisher PCB . . . . . . . . . . .
Finisher LVPS and Miscellaneous Interlocks to Finisher PCB . . . . . . . . .
Stapler, Compiler Tray Solenoid, and Miscellaneous Motors to Finisher PCB .
In-Gate Solenoid, Transport Motor, and Eject Motor to Finisher PCB . . . . .
Miscellaneous Motors to Finisher PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.622
.623
.624
.625
.626
.627
.628
The circuit diagrams begin with a block diagram of the printer. Next, there are two connector-to-connector wiring
diagrams. The first covers the printer, the duplex, the envelope feeder, and the input unit. The second covers the
finisher.
The pinout diagram index directs you to pinout diagrams (point-to-point wiring) for any unit or assembly of the
printer, the duplex asm., the envelope feeder, the input unit, or the finisher.
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 590
Block Diagram
1
2
Fuser Lamp 1
AC Drive PCB
3
MCU PCB
4
Toner Sensor
Fuser Lamp 2
EP
Laser
Size Sensor 1
SOS Sensor
Registration
Sensor
A
A
Laser Motor
M9
No Paper
Sensor 1
Laser Diode
Level
Sensor 1
Auxiliary Tray
+24VDC
HVPS
Size
Sensor
No Paper
Sensor
Feed
Clutch
B
EP
BTR
Main Drive
Motor
M10
Fuser Fan
F1
Lift Motor
M1
Feed Clutch
Feed
Roller Sensor 1
Registration
Clutch
B
Fuser Exit
Sensor
Main Interlock
Face Up
Exit Sensor
Feed Clutch 2
Full Stack
Sensor
No Paper
Sensor 2
Level
Sensor 2
Exit Gate
Solenoid
Invert CW
Clutch
Size Sensor 2
Invert CCW
Clutch
Feed
Roller Sensor 2
Lift Motor
M2
C
Offset Motor
M8
C
Duplex
Module
PCB
Left Cover
Interlock 2
Finisher
Interface PCB
Control Panel
Computer
Data
Input
1
Envelope
Feeder
Input Unit
PCB
Controller PCB
hc3m1310
2
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 591
Wiring Diagrams
See “Printer, Duplex, Envelope Feeder, and the Input Unit” on page 593 for the printer, duplex, envelope feeder,
and the input unit wiring diagram.
See “Finisher” on page 594 for the finisher wiring diagram.
See “Pinout Diagrams Index” on page 595 for an index to pinout diagrams.
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 592
Printer, Duplex, Envelope Feeder, and the Input Unit
1
2
3
TONER EMPTY
SENSOR
EP
P/J606
CARTRIDGE
SOS SENSOR
M9
LASER MOTOR
A
P/J240
P/J407
HVPS
PCB
P/J500
P/J454
P/J106
P/J207
LASER
DRIVE
PCB
4
P/J127
EP INTLK
SW2 SW1
P/J456
P/J202
P/J234
TRAY 1
FEED CLUTCH
A
P201
P/J457
F1 FUSER FAN
P/J204
M10
MAIN MOTOR
P/J205
P/J600
MCU PCB
P/J458
REGISTRATION
CLUTCH
FUSER EXIT
SENSOR
P/J104
P/J460
P/J232
P/J233
F5231
F5230
COVER INTLK SW1
COVER INTLK SW2
P/J200
P/J462
FUSER
FACE-UP EXIT
SENSOR
FULL STK
SENSOR
P/J109
P/J601
CONTROLLER PCB
P/J133
P/J210
EXIT GATE
SOLENOID
P/J218
ICW
CLUTCH
P/J219
ICCW
CLUTCH
P/J423
F2 ELECTRONICS FAN
ACNUT
TRANS OUT
ACHOT
T1
INLET
FINISHER
J13
AC I/F CONN
NOISE FILTERS
F55
F56
P/J19
DATA
LASER DRIVE P430
OPERATOR
PANEL
J21
P30
P/J424
P/J422
P/J421
P/J417
P/J602
INTERFACE PCB
P416
P/J402
P/J420
LVPS
T2
MAIN POWER SWITCH
F51
F53
T4
F52
F54
P/J1
P410
P/J502
P/J400
P/J501
B
PAPER PATH # 3
SENSOR
L/H
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
FEED 3
CLUTCH
M3
LIFT 3
MOTOR
M4
LIFT 4
MOTOR
FEED 4
CLUTCH
C
P/J114
P/J211
P/J482
P/J100
REGI
SENSOR
P/J102
NOP 1
SENSOR
P/J103
LVL 1
SENSOR
P/J107
5P/J1
P/J604
AC DRIVE
PCB
P/J208
P/J
603
L1
L2
TH1
P/J12
J600
P/J604P
P/J115
P/J117
LVL 4
SENSOR
M6
FEED
MOTOR
P/J118
P/J116
P/J701
LVL 5
SENSOR
P/J119
P/J215
P/J485
P/J216
P/J126
M1
LIFT TRAY1
MOTOR
P/J702
P/J132
FEED
SENSOR
P/J101
PAPER PATH #1
SENSOR
P/J703
P/J221
FEED
CLUTCH
P/J704
P/J217E
P/J613C
DUPLEX
PCB
P/J613D
P/J481
NOP 2
SENSOR
LVL 2
SENSOR
SIZE 2
SENSOR
P/J475
P/J404
P/J142
P/J473
DUPLEX
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
P/J124
DUPLEX EXIT
SENSOR
P/J123
DUPLEX WAIT
SENSOR
P/J224
DUPLEX WAIT
CLUTCH
P/J222
DUPLEX EXIT
GATE SOLENOID
P/J223
M7
DUPLEX
DRIVE
MOTOR
P/J611A
P/J143
P/J607
P/J408
P/J144
P/J240
P/J612A
P/J241
P/J405
P/J612
P/J612B
2
M11
ENVELOPE
MOTOR
P/J611B
P/J141
P/J486
P/J125
P/J474
P/J140
PAPER PATH
#2 SENSOR
L/H
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
TRAY 2 FEED
CLUTCH
M2
LIFT TRAY 2
MOTOR
NOP
SENSOR
SIZE
SENSOR
P/J700
P/J406
P/J484
P/J130
P/J613B
P/J480
B
AUX TRAY
FEED
CLUTCH
P/J203
P/J613A
P/J120
AUX TRAY
NOP
SENSOR
P/J131
P/J403
P/J604E
P/J217IU
SIZE 5
SENSOR
NOP 5
SENSOR
ENVELOPE
FEEDER
PCB
FG
P/J499
P/J483
NOP 4
SENSOR
AUX TRAY
SIZE
SENSOR
P/J235
P/J23
T3
P/J110
P/J108
P/J401
P/J213
SIZE 4
SENSOR
1
INPUT
UNIT
DRIVE
PCB
F3
LVPS
FAN
P/J478
P/J112
PAPER PATH # 4
SENSOR
P/J459
P/J105
SIZE 1
SENSOR
P/J477
P/J214
LVL 3
SENSOR
FEED 5
CLUTCH
P/J20
P/J212
P/J111
M5
LIFT 5
MOTOR
P/J461
P/J121
NOP 3
SENSOR
SIZE 3
SENSOR
M8
OFFSET
MOTOR
P/J209
3
C
TO
FINISHER PCB
hc3m0628
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 593
Finisher
1
A
B
TO
MCU PCB
2
UPPER BIN
PAPER SENSOR
P/J
250
UPPER BIN
HALF SENSOR
P/J
251
UPPER BIN
FULL SENSOR
P/J
252
UPPER BIN
LOWER LIMIT SENSOR
P/J
254
UPPER BIN
UPPER LIMIT SENSOR
P/J
253
MIDDLE BIN
PAPER SENSOR
P/J
856
MIDDLE BIN
HALF SENSOR
P/J
857
MIDDLE BIN
FULL SENSOR
P/J
858
MIDDLE BIN
UPPER LIMIT SENSOR
P/J
848
MIDDLE BIN
LOWER LIMIT SENSOR
P/J
849
LOWER BIN
PAPER SENSOR
P/J
859
LOWER BIN
SAFETY SENSOR
P/J
831
LOWER BIN
HALF SENSOR
P/J
860
LOWER BIN
FULL SENSOR
P/J
861
LOWER BIN
UPPER LIMIT SENSOR
P/J
850
LOWER BIN
LOWER LIMIT SENSOR
P/J
851
TAMPER HOME
SENSOR
P/J
839
ENDWALL OPEN
SENSOR
P/J
840
EJECT CLAMP SENSOR
P/J
841
SET CLAMP
HOME SENSOR
P/J
842
COMPILER
PAPER SENSOR
P/J
843
STACKER OFFSET
HOME SENSOR
P/J
844
STACKER
BIN ID SENSOR
P/J
837
FINISHER
INTERLOCK SENSOR
P/J
855M
P/J
292A
P/J
294B
P/J
295A
P/J
295B
P/J
872A
P/J
872B
P/J
873A
P/J
873B
P/J
887A
P/J
887B
P/J
888A
P/J
880A
P/J
268B
P/J
268A
P/J
882B
P/J
882A
P/J
279B
P/J
279A
P/J
895B
P/J
866B
P/J
866A
J894A
P/J
269B
P/J
269A
P/J
847B
P/J
847A
M
P/J
863
M
P/J
864
UPPER BIN
SAFETY SWITCH
P/J
852
MIDDLE BIN
SAFETY SWITCH
P/J
285A
P/J
888B
P/J
874A
P/J
874B
P/J
875A
P/J
875B
P/J
830A
P/J
830B
P/J
883A
P/J
883B
P/J
884A
P/J
884B
P/J
280A
P/J
280B
P/J
885A
P/J
885B
P/J
299A
P/J
299B
P/J
881A
P/J
881B
J896B
P/J
263
TRANSPORT
EXIT SENSOR
P/J
259
TRANSPORT MAIN
OUTPUT FULL
PAPER SENSOR
P/J
260
IN-GATE SENSOR
P/J
261
TRANSPORT COVER
INTERLOCK SENSOR
P/J
838
COMPILER TRAY
EXIT SENSOR
P/J
832
STACKER HEIGHT
SENSOR
P/J
833
STAPLER FRONT
CORNER SENSOR
P/J
834
STAPLER FRONT
EDGE SENSOR
P/J
835
J894B
STAPLER REAR
EDGE SENSOR
P/J
877B
P/J
877A
P/J
878B
P/J
878A
P/J
836
UNLOAD WHILE
RUN SWITCH
UNLOAD WHILE
RUN LED
P/J
892
P/J
862
STAPLER UNIT
P893
P897
A
P/J
890
M
STAPLER
TRANSPORT MOTOR
P/J
867
M
TAMPER MOTOR
P/J
868
M
END WALL MOTOR
P/J
869
P/J
846
B
COMPILER TRAY
UP/DOWN SOLENOID
P/J
270
FRONT COVER
INTERLOCK SWITCH
P/J
271
TOP COVER
INTERLOCK SWITCH
P/J272A
COMPILER COVER
INTERLOCK SWITCH
P/J
845
P/J272B
LVPS
P/J
502
P/J
291
P/J
285B
P/J
505
P/J
296
P/J
266
OUTLET
P889
P/J
899
C
P/J
2
J16
P/J
297
P/J
865
P/J
855
P/J
886
J897
P/J
898
P/J
255
P/J
273
P/J
274
M
P/J
876A
J893B
P/J
871
STACKER LOWER
LIMIT SWITCH
P/J
876B
TRANSPORT
ENTRANCE SENSOR
J893A
M
M
P/J
262A
P/J
880B
P/J
265
STACKER UPPER
LIMIT SWITCH
P/J
262B
P/J
275M
P894
STACKER LOWER BIN
MOTOR
COMPILER COVER
SAFETY SWITCH
P/J
879A
P/J
879B
P/J
854
P896
P/J
870
STACKER BIN
ELEVATOR MOTOR
Finisher
PCB
P/J
264
4
J896
P/J
895A
M
STACKER UPPER BIN
MOTOR
3
P/J
292B
J612
SET CLAMP
MOTOR
1
P/J
293B
P/J
294A
STACKER MIDDLE BIN
MOTOR
EJECT CLAMP
OFFSET MOTOR
C
P/J
293A
P/J
298
P/J
267
P13
IN-GATE
SOLENOID
P/J
256M
P/J
257
P/J
258
P/J
891
INLET
AC CABLE
M
TRANSPORT
MOTOR
M
EJECT
MOTOR
hc3m0618
2
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 594
Pinout Diagrams Index
Pinout diagrams show point-to-point wiring.
v Printer components, go to Table 209 on page 596
v Duplex components, go to Table 210 on page 598
v Envelope feeder components, go to Table 211 on page 598
v I nput unit components, go to Table 212 on page 598
v Finisher components, go to Table 213 on page 599
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 595
Table 209. Printer Components Pinout Diagrams
Printer Pinout Diagrams
Component
v
v
v
v
v
v
AC drive PCB
AC input
Fuser PCB
LVPS PCB
Noise filter
Operator panel PCB
v
v
v
v
Clutches
Exit gate solenoid
Offset motor
Sensors
See Pinout Diagram...
“AC Input and Low Voltage Distribution” on page 600
“Clutches, Sensors, Offset Motor, and Exit Gate Solenoid to MCU” on page 602
v Controller PCB
v Interface PCB
“Controller PCB and Interface PCB to MCU” on page 603
v Duplex PCB
“Duplex Assembly Pinout Diagram” on page 613
v Envelope feeder PCB
“Envelope Feeder Pinout Diagram” on page 614 and “Tray 1, Auxiliary Tray, and Envelope Feeder
to MCU” on page 610
v Finisher PCB
“Finisher PCB to MCU” on page 607
v Fuser Fan (F1)
v Interlocks SM1 & SM2
v Main motor
“Fuser Fan (F1), Main Motor (M10), Cover Interlocks SW1 and SW2 to MCU” on page 604
Table continues on page 597
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 596
Table 209. Printer Components Pinout Diagrams (continued)
Printer Pinout Diagrams
Component
See Pinout Diagram...
v HVPS
“HVPS to MCU” on page 605
v Laser
“Laser and EP Cartridge Interlocks SW1 and SW2 to MCU” on page 606
v Controller PCB
“Operator Panel to Interface PCB” on page 608
v Operator panel
v
v
v
v
Level 1 sensor
No-paper sensor
Registration sensor
Size 1 sensor
“Tray 1 Size, Registration, No-Paper, and Level Sensors to MCU” on page 611
v EP cartridge
v Toner sensor
“Toner Sensor and EP Cartridge to MCU” on page 609
v Auxiliary tray
v Envelope feeder
v Tray 1
“Tray 1, Auxiliary Tray, and Envelope Feeder to MCU” on page 610
v Tray 2
“Tray 2 to MCU” on page 612
Table continues on page 598 with duplex pinouts
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 597
Table 210. Duplex Components Pinout Diagrams
Duplex Pinout Diagrams
Component
v Duplex components
v Duplex PCB
See Pinout Diagram...
“Duplex Assembly Pinout Diagram” on page 613
Table 211. Envelope Feeder Components Pinout Diagrams
Envelope Feeder Pinout Diagrams
Component
v Envelope feeder components
v Envelope feeder PCB
See Pinout Diagram...
“Envelope Feeder Pinout Diagram” on page 614
Table 212. Input Unit Components Pinout Diagrams
Input Unit Pinout Diagrams
Component
See Pinout Diagram...
v Input unit PCB
“Input Unit PCB to MCU” on page 615
v Input unit tray 3 and tray 4
“Input Unit Tray 3 and Tray 4 to MCU” on page 617
v Input unit tray 4 and tray 5
“Input Unit Tray 4 and Tray 5 to MCU” on page 618
v Finisher size, level, and
paper sensors
“Size, Level, and Paper Sensors to Finisher PCB and MCU PCB” on page 619
Table continues on page 599 with finisher pinouts
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 598
Table 213. Finisher Components Pinout Diagrams
Finisher Pinout Diagrams
Component
See Pinout Diagram...
v Finisher top sensors
“Top and Upper Sensors to Finisher PCB” on page 620
v Transport entrance and
exit sensors
“Transport Entrance and Exit Sensors to Finisher PCB” on page 621
v Stacker sensors
“Stacker Sensors to Finisher PCB” on page 622
v Compiler, interlock, and
stapler sensors
“Compiler, Interlock, and Stapler Sensors to Finisher PCB” on page 623
v Tamper, interlock, and
stacker sensors
“Tamper, Interlock, and Stacker Sensors to Finisher PCB” on page 624
v Finisher LVPS and
miscellaneous interlocks
“Finisher LVPS and Miscellaneous Interlocks to Finisher PCB” on page 625
v Stapler, compiler tray solenoid, and
miscellaneous motors
“Stapler, Compiler Tray Solenoid, and Miscellaneous Motors to Finisher PCB” on page 626
v In-gate solenoid, transport motor,
and eject motor
“In-Gate Solenoid, Transport Motor, and Eject Motor to Finisher PCB” on page 627
v Miscellaneous motors
“Miscellaneous Motors to Finisher PCB” on page 628
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 599
Printer Pinout Diagrams
AC Input and Low Voltage Distribution
1
2
3
4
INTERFACE PCB
F2 ELECTRONICS FAN
P/J424
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
P/J420
LVPS
P/J502
A
P/J501
ACHOT
ACNUT
4
3
2
1
T4
J1
FINISHER
AC I/F CONN
ACHOT
ACNUT
F/G
1
2
3
B
CE11
1
2
4
5
P/J477
5
4
3
2
1
T2
J13
ACHOT
1
2
3
ACNUT
L N
F52
F54
3
4
7
1
2
6
11
12
9
10
5
6
P/J502
CE12
J20
P/J23
L
6
N
J19
2
4
1
3
5
1 2 3
C
A
+5V
GRY
+5V
GRY
+5V
GRY
5VRTN
VIO
5VRTN
VIO
5VRTN
VIO
+5V
GRY
+5V
GRY
5VRTN
VIO
5VRTN
VIO
NC (5VRTN)
NC (+5V)
OPERATOR
PANEL
5V
5V
RTN
RTN
7
8
3
4
24VRTN
24VRTN
+24V
+24V
RTN
RTN
24V
24V
1
2
5
6
VIO
VIO
ORN
ORN
RELAY$FUSER
FUSER$SUB
+5V
5VRTN
FUSER$MAIN
YEL
YEL
GRY
VIO
YEL
J/P235
1
2
3
4
F53
F51
P/J410
ORN
VIO
F3
FAN
LVPS
AC DRIVE
PCB
POWER SWITCH
+24V
24VRTN
6
3
FSR COMM
BLK
FSR MAIN
FSR SUB
WHT
WHT
NOISE FILTER
P/J478
F56
F55
L
N
T1
INLET
1
1
2
24V
RTN
RLY ORN
+
VIO
P30
P/J401
P/J12
7
1
YEL
2
T3
THERMOSTAT
6
5
J600
YEL
1
4
B
MCU
PCB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+24V
FAN$Hi
FAN#FAIL
24VRTN
ORN
BLU
BLU
VIO
P/J400
FUSER
LAMPS
SG
C
STS
FG
8
P499
1
2
J21
1
ACNUT
TRANS OUT 2
ACHOT
3
1
2
3
2
3
hc3m0601
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 600
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 601
Clutches, Sensors, Offset Motor, and Exit Gate Solenoid to MCU
1
2
P462
A
A
J462
+24V
ORN
CL$FEED 1
BLU
4
+24V
ORN
5
CL$TAROLL
BLU
1
2
3
6
7
MCU
PCB
B
B
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
+24V
ORN
CL$RGATE
BLU
SNA#FEXIT
5VRTN
YEL
VIO
STS##FSR
STS##FSR
5VRTN
5VRTN
YEL
YEL
VIO
VIO
SNR#FUT
5VRTN
YEL
VIO
J202
J201
6
7
+24V
J602
ORN
9
CL$ICW
BLU
10
+24V
ORN
CL$ICCW
BLU
OMOT$FWD
BLU
OMOT$REV
BLU
J104
1
2
P600
J600
P601
1
2
4
3
3
4
2
5
P602
J601 YEL J109
VIO
YEL J133
VIO
ORN J210
BLU
J602
1
4
3
3
1
4
P209
ORN J218
BLU
2
2
2
FUSER
6
1
J209
FUSER EXIT
SENSOR
1
2
3
4
6
5
BLU
REGISTRATION
CLUTCH
2
4
3
2
1
SOL$GATE
14
1
P104
J601
A
J200
P200
J600
ORN
13
2
2
1
+24V
11
12
1
1
5
C
1
J104
TRAY 1
FEED CLUTCH
J201
P201
2
YEL
VIO
8
1
2
3
2
J200
4
J202
P202
3
2
1
SNR#STK
5VRTN
3
4
3
ORN J219
BLU
P109
2
1
J109
1
2
P133
2
1
FACE-UP EXIT
SENSOR
FULL STACK
SENSOR
1
2
P210
J210
2
1
1
2
P218
EXIT GATE
SOLENOID
J218
1
2
ICW
CLUTCH
2
1
P219
J219
2
1
1
2
ICCW
CLUTCH
C
J209
1
M
1
B
J133
2
M8
OFFSET
MOTOR
hc3m0610
1
2
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 602
Controller PCB and Interface PCB to MCU
1
2
3
4
CONTROLLER PCB
A
A
P/J423
SBSY
/SBSY
STS
/STS
CMD
/CMD
PCLK
/PCLK
CCLK
/CCLK
CBSY
/CBSY
/PPRDY
SG
/CPRDY
SG
/RDY
SG
/START
SG
/PRFD
SG
TOP
/TOP
DSEL
SG
/BD
SG
VOUT
SG
A1
B15
A2
B14
A3
B13
A4
B12
A5
B11
A6
B10
A7
B9
A8
B8
A9
B7
A10
B6
A11
B5
A12
B4
A13
B3
A14
B2
A15
B1
B
INTERFACE PCB
C
P422
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLK
A1
B15
A2
B14
A3
B13
A4
B12
A5
B11
A6
B10
A7
B9
A8
B8
A9
B7
A10
B6
A11
B5
A12
B4
A13
B3
A14
B2
A15
B1
J402
J422
B
MCU PCB
C
P402
hc3m0603
1
2
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 603
Fuser Fan (F1), Main Motor (M10), Cover Interlocks SW1 and SW2 to MCU
1
2
P204
F1
FUSER FAN
J204
M
A
P205
M10
MAIN
DRIVE
MOTOR
M
FFAN$PWR
FAN$LOW
FAN$FAIL
24VRTN
4
BRN
BLU
BLU
VIO
J460
P460
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J233
1
1
COVER INTLK SW 1
A
MCU PCB
J205
P233
B
P204
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
3
P232
J232
P5231
J5231
MNOT$PWN
MC#CLK
+5V
5VRTN
24VRTN
24VRTN
+24VSO
+24VSO
BLU
BLU
GRY
VIO
VIO
VIO
ORN
ORN
+24V
ORN
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
B
2
COVER INTLK SW 2
+24VSO
P5230
J5230
ORN
3
J458
P458
hc3m0607
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 604
HVPS to MCU
1
2
P500
A
HVPS
J500
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
3
+24VSO
24VRTN
24VRTN
AGND
BTR#MON
BTR$SEL
BTR$RMT
DTS$ON
BCRAC$CLK
BCRDC$ON
DBAC$CLK
DB$ON
ORN
VIO
VIO
VIO
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
+5V
GRY
4
J457
P457
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
MCU PCB
B
B
hc3m0606
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 605
Laser and EP Cartridge Interlocks SW1 and SW2 to MCU
1
2
SOS
SENSOR
P/J106
1
2
3
P/J 240
P/J207
A
M9
LASER
MOTOR
M
LASER
PCB
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P/J407
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P/J234
2
3
4
+5V
ROS#SOS
5VRTN
GRY
YEL
VIO
+24V
24VRTN
RMOT$ON
5VRTN
RMOT$SP1
RMOT$SP2
RMOT#RDY
ORN
VIO
BLU
VIO
BLU
BLU
BLU
EP CARTRIDGE
INTERLOCK
SW2 SW1 J/P234
5V-LD
1
CRU (TTL)
3
5VRTN
DA$DATA
5VRTN
LD$ENB
5VRTN
APC$CONT
5VRTN
P456
J456
A10
A9
A8
A
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
MCU PCB
GRY
YEL
VIO
YEL
VIO
YEL
VIO
YEL
VIO
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B
hc3m0604
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 606
Finisher PCB to MCU
1
2
P405
A
MCU PCB
J405
1
3
5
7
9
11
2
4
6
8
10
12
3
J612
BLU A
A
A
A
A
BLU A
VIO B
ORN B
VIO B
GRY B
VIO B
GRY B
OPT$TX+
5VRTN
OPT#RX+
5VRTN
MBS#DET
FNSR#DET
24VRTN
+24V
5VRTN
+5V
5VRTN
+5V
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
P/J265
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
P612
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
FINISHER
PCB
B
B
FINISHER
J16
BLK
WHT
G/Y
J3
AC HOT
AC NUT
4
3
2
1
C
F/G
1
2
3
P13
1
2
3
C
G/Y
hc3m0611
1
2
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 607
Operator Panel to Interface PCB
1
2
3
LASER DRV
P430
P/J417
A
OPERATOR
PANEL
B
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
10
9
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
4
DATA
P416
+24V
5VRTN
5VRTN
5VRTN
CNPN$BUZR
+CNPN$LED
CNPN$PWR4
CNPN$PWR3
CNPN$PWR2
CNPN$PWR1
LCD$DATA7
LCD$DATA6
LCD$DATA5
LCD$DATA4
LCD$ENB
LCD$RS
CNPN#SW2
CNPN#SW1
5VRTN
5VRTN
ORN
VIO
VIO
VIO
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
VIO
VIO
+5V
+5V
GRY
GRY
P/J421
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
INTERFACE PCB
B
hc3m0602
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 608
Toner Sensor and EP Cartridge to MCU
1
2
TNR EMP
SENSOR
3
4
J127
+ 24V
TNR#EMP
24VRTN
P127
1
2
3
MCU PCB
A
EP
CARTRIDGE
P/J606
1
2
3
4
5VRTN
CRUM$PWR
CRU$CLK
CRU$DATA
VIO
VIO
YEL
YEL
J454
A
P454
1
2
3
4
hc3m0605
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 609
Tray 1, Auxiliary Tray, and Envelope Feeder to MCU
1
P403
A
MCU
PCB
1
4
3
2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
2
J403
+24V
24VRTN
+5V
+5V
SNR##SIZEM
5VRTN
ORN
VIO
GRY
GRY
YEL
VIO
SNR#NOPM
SNR#FEED
YEL
EMOT$ON
CL$FEEDM
MSI#DET
ENV#DET
BLU
BLU
YEL
YEL
24VRTN
VIO
YEL
MOT$LIFT1
BLU
5VRTN
SNR#TAROLL
+5V
VIO
YEL
GRY
J603
ORN
VIO
GRY
GRY
YEL
VIO
P604
7
12
1
9
2
5
YEL
7
YEL
8
BLU
BLU
YEL
YEL
9
10
11
12
P/J203
2
M
4
ORN
8
6
11
PAPER PATH #1 10
SENSOR
3
4
5
6
SNR#FEED
SNR#NOP
5VRTN
YEL
YEL
VIO
CL$FEED
BLU
+24V
7
ORG
1
2
3
3
4
5
3
2
1
P/J701
+5V
SNR#NO PAPER
5VRTN
P/J702
6
7
EMOT$ON
YEL
ENV#DET
YEL
24VRET
VIO
8
9
10
11
12
P604
P/J700
1
2
1
2
3
AUXILIARY
NOP
SENSOR
2
1
1
2
AUXILIARY
FEED
CLUTCH
AUXILIARY TRAY
1
2
C
8
9
10
11
12
P/J108
YEL
P/J131
GRY
YEL
MSI
SIZE
SENSOR
1
2
3
P/J208
3
2
1
ENVELOPE FEEDER
+5V
SNR#SIZE
3
2
1
3
M1
TRAY 1
LIFT
MOTOR
A
P/J107
GRY
GRY
YEL
VIO
1
3
VIO
2
4
YEL
5P/J1 JUMPER 5P/J1
B
1
2
4
J604
P603
1
4
3
2
5
6
1
P/J101
3
2
1
3
P/J703
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
+5V
SNR#SIZE
5VRTN
ENV
NOP
SENSOR
ENV
SIZE
SENSOR
+5V
SNR#FEED
5VRTN
J/P132
1
2
3
P/J221
1
2
3
4
+24V
CL$FEED
+24V
24VRTN
P/S
5VRTN
5
4
3
2
1
B
P/J130
1
2
3
4
5
P/J704
ENV
FEED
SENSOR
ENV
CLUTCH
C
M
M11
ENV
MOTOR
P/J217
3
hc3m0608
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 610
Tray 1 Size, Registration, No-Paper, and Level Sensors to MCU
1
2
P/J461
1
2
3
A
MCU
PCB
P/J459
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B
3
4
J105
5VRTN
BLK
SNR##SIZE 1 BLK
+5V
BLK
P105
3
2
1
TRAY 1
SIZE
SENSOR
A
5VRTN
SNR#REGI
+5V
VIO
YEL
GRY
5VRTN
SNR#NOP 1
+5V
VIO
YEL
GRY
5VRTN
SNR#LVL 1
+5V
VIO
YEL
GRY
P/J100
3
2
1
REGISTRATION
SENSOR
3
2
1
TRAY 1
NO PAPER
SENSOR
3
2
1
TRAY 1
LEVEL
SENSOR
P/J102
P/J103
hc3m0609
B
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 611
Tray 2 to MCU
1
2
1
2
3
A
4
5
6
MCU PCB
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
B
6
7
8
9
P/J408
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
3
4
P/J140
VIO
3
YEL
NOP 2
2
SENSOR
GRY
1
P/J141
5VRTN
VIO
3
LVL 2
SNR#LVL2
YEL
2
SENSOR
+5V
GRY
1
P/J142
5VRTN
VIO
3
SIZE 2
SNR##SIZE2 YEL
2
SENSOR
+5V
GRY
1
J607
P607 J607
5VRTN
VIO
1
5
SNR#TAROL2 YEL
2
4
+5V
GRY
3
3
5VRTN
SNR#NOP2
+5V
B
B
L/H#INTLK
5VRTN
VIO
YEL
B
+24V
J240
ORN
B
CL$FEED2
BLU
B
24VRTN
VIO
B
NOT$LIFT2
BLU
2
1
4
5
P240
3
2
1
A
P/J143
3
2
1
P/J144
2
1
PAPER PATH #2
SENSOR
1TM L/H
INTLK
B
J240
TRAY 2
FEED
CLUTCH
1
2
3
P/J241
2
M
1
M2
TRAY 2
LIFT MOTOR
hc3m0613
C
1
2
3
C
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 612
Duplex Assembly Pinout Diagram
1
2
3
DUPLEX
PCB
4
P/J474
5
4
A
+5V
GRY
SNR$DEXIT YEL
5VRTN
VIO
3
2
1
MCU PCB
P/J404
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
B
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
DUP#DET
BUL
+5V
5VRTN
+24V
24VRTN
INV SW
OREGI
GRY
VIO
ORN
VIO
BLU
BLU
5VRTN
OPT#RX+
5VRTN
OPT$TX+
VIO
BLU
VIO
BLU
CL#ICCW
CL#ICW
VIO
BLU
P/J611
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
5
4
6
3
7
2
8
1
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
P/J125
INTLK#DUP YEL
5VRTN
VIO
P/J475
P/J473
14
+5V
GRY
SNR#DWAIT YEL
5VRTN
VIO
3
2
1
13
12
2
1
7
6
P/J224
1
DUPLEX
INTERLOCK
A
DUPLEX EXIT
P/J124 SENSOR
1
2
3
DUPLEX WAIT
P/J123 SENSOR
1
2
3
DUPLEX WAIT
CL
GATE
SOLENOID
CL$DWAIT
2
11
10
9
8
+24V
1
2
B
P/J222
+24V
1
5
4
3
DUPLEX EXIT
SOL$DGATE
2
P/J223
1
2
3
4
5
6
C
/B
B
/A
A
24V
24V
M
M7
DUPLEX
DRIVE
MOTOR
C
hc3m0612
1
2
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 613
Envelope Feeder Pinout Diagram
1
2
3
3
4
5
P/J701
+5V
3
SNR#NO PAPER
2
5V RTN
1
P/J131
+5V
1
SNR#SIZE
2
5V RTN
3
P/J702
+5V
3
SNR#FEED
2
5V RTN
1
6
P/J703
+24V
2
ENVELOPE
FEEDER PCB
A
P604
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
8
9
10
11
12
+5V
SNR#SIZE
SNR#FEED
SNR#NOP
5VRTN
CL$FEED
+24V
EMOT$ON
ENV#DET
24VRTN
4
P/J700
1
2
7
8
10
12
1
P/J704
1
2
3
4
5
CL$FEED
P/J130
1
2
3
NO PAPER
SENSOR
A
SIZE
SENSOR
P/J132
1
2
3
P/J221
1
2
P/J217E
1
2
3
4
5
FEED
SENSOR
FEED
CLUTCH
B
M
M11
ENVELOPE
MOTOR
hc3m0695
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 614
Input Unit Pinout Diagrams
Input Unit PCB to MCU
1
2
P406
A
B
J406
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
MCU PCB
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
C
3
CABI##DET
L/H #INTLK
MOT$LIFT5
CL$FEED5
SNR#LVL5
SNR#NOP5
MOT$LIFT4
5VRTN
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
CL$FEED4
SNR#LVL4
SNR#NOP4
MOT$LIFT3
CL$FEED3
SNR#LVL3
SNR#NOP3
SNR# TAROLL 3
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
SNR# TAROLL 4
FMOT$ ON
FMOT$ CLK
SNR##SIZE 5
SNR##SIZE 4
SNR##SIZE 3
+5V
MCU$AST
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
+5V
+5V
5VRTN
5VRTN
24VRTN
24VRTN
+24V
+24V
GRY
GRY
VIO
VIO
VIO
VIO
ORN
ORN
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
P/J613
8 1
7 2
6 3
5 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1 8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4
J480
P480
24
22
21
20
16
15
14
12
10
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
INPUT UNIT
DRIVE PCB
8
6
4
2
23
21
19
17
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J481
C
P481
hc3m0614
1
2
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 615
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 616
Input Unit Tray 3 and Tray 4 to MCU
1
2
P406
A
J406
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
MCU
PCB
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
B
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
3
CABI##DET
L/H #INTLK
MOT$LIFT5
CL$FEED5
SNR#LVL5
SNR#NOP5
MOT$LIFT4
5VRTN
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
P/J613
8 1
7 2
6 3
5 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1 8
CL$FEED4
SNR#LVL4
SNR#NOP4
MOT$LIFT3
CL$FEED3
SNR#LVL3
SNR#NOP3
SNR# TAROLL 3
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SNR# TAROLL 4
FMOT$ ON
FMOT$ CLK
SNR##SIZE 5
SNR##SIZE 4
SNR##SIZE 3
+5V
MCU$AST
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+5V
+5V
5VRTN
5VRTN
24VRTN
24VRTN
+24V
+24V
GRY
GRY
VIO
VIO
VIO
VIO
ORN
ORN
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
J480
24
22
21
20
16
15
14
12
10
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
P480
INPUT
UNIT
DRIVE
PCB
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
L/H# INTLK
5VRTN
A
CL$FEED3
A
+24V
B
MOT$LIFT3
BLU
B
24VRTN
BLU
B
MOT$LIFT4
BLU
B
+24VRTN
BLU
YEL
VIO
A
1
2
3
PAPER PATH #3
SENSOR
P/J
114
L/H
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
J211-1 P211 J211-2 FEED 3
BLU
1
3
2
2
ORN
3
1
B
P/J
212
M
M3
TRAY 3
LIFT MOTOR
M
M4
TRAY 4
LIFT MOTOR
1
5
2
1
4
B
J482
2
P/J
214
B
3
2
1
P482
+5V
VIO
SNR#TAROL3 YEL
5VRTN
GRY
A
A
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J481
8
7
6
A
A
A
3
2
1
8
7
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
P/J
121
5
4
8
6
4
2
23
21
19
17
4
CL$FEED4
+24V
FEED 4
BLU
ORN
1
2
3
3
2
1
J213-1 P213 J213-2
C
P481
hc3m0615
1
2
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 617
Input Unit Tray 4 and Tray 5 to MCU
1
2
P406
A
J406
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
MCU
PCB
B
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
C
CABI##DET
L/H #INTLK
MOT$LIFT5
CL$FEED5
SNR#LVL5
SNR#NOP5
MOT$LIFT4
5VRTN
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
CL$FEED4
SNR#LVL4
SNR#NOP4
MOT$LIFT3
CL$FEED3
SNR#LVL3
SNR#NOP3
SNR# TAROLL 3
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
P/J613
8 1
7 2
6 3
5 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1 8
SNR# TAROLL 4 BLU C
FMOT$ ON
BLU C
FMOT$ CLK
BLU C
SNR##SIZE 5
BLU C
SNR##SIZE 4
BLU C
SNR##SIZE 3
BLU C
+5V
BLU C
MCU$AST
BLU C
+5V
+5V
5VRTN
5VRTN
24VRTN
24VRTN
+24V
+24V
GRY
GRY
VIO
VIO
VIO
VIO
ORN
ORN
3
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
J480
P480
24
22
21
20
16
15
14
12
10
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
4
CL$FEE
+ 24V
3
2
1
J215-1 P215 J215-2
3
1
2
2
ORN
1
3
BLU
MOT$L
BLU
24VRT
VIO
1
FEED 5
M
M5
TRAY 5
LIFT MOTOR
M
M6
FEED
MOTOR
2
P/J216
J217IU
P217IU
+24V
A
B
/A
/B
1
2
3
4
5
P486
B
J486
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J481
J485
P485
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
A
INPUT
UNIT
DRIVE
PCB
8
6
4
2
23
21
19
17
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
4
HCF ##DET
+5V
SNR#TAROLL4
5VRTN
YEL
GRY
YEL
VIO
PAPER PATH #4
SENSOR
1
2
3
P/J126
C
P481
hc3m0616
1
2
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 618
Size, Level, and Paper Sensors to Finisher PCB and MCU PCB
1
2
3
4
J483
P483
A
9
HCI
A
8
DRIVE
A
7
PCB
6
5
4
A
P406
P406
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
B
MCU PCB
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
C
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
CABI##DET
L/H #INTLK
MOT$LIFT5
CL$FEED5
SNR#LVL5
SNR#NOP5
MOT$LIFT4
5VRTN
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
CL$FEED4
SNR#LVL4
SNR#NOP4
MOT$LIFT3
CL$FEED3
SNR#LVL3
SNR#NOP3
SNR# TAROLL 3
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
SNR# TAROLL 4 BLU C
FMOT$ ON
BLU C
FMOT$ CLK
BLU C
SNR##SIZE 5
BLU C
SNR##SIZE 4
BLU C
SNR##SIZE 3
BLU C
+5V
BLU C
MCU$AST
BLU C
+5V
+5V
5VRTN
5VRTN
24VRTN
24VRTN
+24V
+24V
GRY
GRY
VIO
VIO
VIO
VIO
ORN
ORN
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
P/J613
8 1
7 2
6 3
5 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1 8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
J480
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
3
2
1
9
8
7
8
6
4
2
23
21
19
17
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J481
1
P480
24
22
21
20
16
15
14
12
10
P481
P484
+5V
SNR#NOP3
5V RTN
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J111
1
2
3
+5V
SNR#LVL3
5V RTN
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J112
1
2
3
A +5V
A SNR##SIZE3
A 5V RTN
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J110
1
2
3
B
B
B
+5V
SNR##SIZE4
5V RTN
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J115
1
2
3
B
B
B
+5V
SNR#NOP4
5V RTN
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J117
1
2
3
B
B
B
+5V
SNR#LVL4
5V RTN
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J118
1
2
3
A
A
A
9
8
7
+5V
SNR##SIZE 5
5VRTN
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J120
1
2
3
6
5
4
+5V
SNR#NOP 5
5VRTN
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J116
1
2
3
3
2
1
+5V
GRY
SNR#LEVEL 5 YEL
5VRTN
VIO
P/J119
1
2
3
LVL 3
A
SENSOR
SIZE 3
SENSOR
SIZE 4
SENSOR
NOP 4
SENSOR
B
LVL 4
SENSOR
SIZE 5
SENSOR
NOP 5
SENSOR
C
LVL 5
SENSOR
J484
3
NOP 3
SENSOR
hc3m0617
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 619
Finisher Pinout Diagrams
Top and Upper Sensors to Finisher PCB
1
2
3
4
Finisher
PCB
A
STACKER
UPPER PAPER
SENSOR
P/J250
P/J293
5V GRY A
1
3
YEL A
2
2
RTN VIO A
3
1
P/J251
STACKER
UPPER HALF
SENSOR
STACKER
UPPER FULL
SENSOR
1
2
3
STACKER TOP
UPPER LIMIT
SENSOR
1
2
3
STACKER TOP
LOWER LIMIT
SENSOR
1
2
3
1
2
3
P/J292
B 5V
GRY
B STACKER TOP PAPER SNR
B RTN VIO
P/J294
GRY A
6
YEL A
5
VIO A
4
GRY A
3
YEL A
2
VIO A
1
P/J294
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
5
B
6
P/J295
GRY A
6
YEL A
5
VIO A
4
5V
GRY A
3
STACKER LOWER LIMIT SNR YEL A
2
RTN
VIO A
1
P/J295
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
5
B
6
5V
STACKER TOP HALF SNR
RTN
5V
1
STACKER TOP FULL SNR
2
RTN
3
P/J252
P/J253
B
P/J293
P/J292
B 5V GRY A
1
3
B
YEL A
2
2
B RTN VIO A
3
1
5V
STACKER UPPER LIMIT SNR
RTN
RTN
5V
RTN
5V
YEL
VIO
GRY
YEL
YEL
VIO
GRY
YEL
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J264
11
10
9
A
8
7
6
5
B
4
3
2
1
P/J254
hc3m0619
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 620
Transport Entrance and Exit Sensors to Finisher PCB
1
2
3
4
Finisher
PCB
A
P/J854
TRANSPORT ENT SNR
4
RTN
3
5V
2
TRANSPORT EXT SNR
1
YEL
VIO
GRY
YEL
P/J879
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
P/J879
4
3
2
1
A
A RTN
A 5V
A
P/J262
N.C B
1
YEL B
2
VIO B
3
GRY B
4
YEL B
5
N.C B
6
P/J262
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
A
A
5V
GRY
YEL
RTN VIO
A
A
A
5V
GRY
YEL
RTN VIO
P/J275M
1
2
3
TRANSPORT
ENTRANCE
SENSOR
1
2
3
P/J263
TRANSPORT
EXIT
SENSOR
A
hc3m0620
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 621
Stacker Sensors to Finisher PCB
1
STACKER MID
PAPER
SENSOR
A
STACKER MID
HALF
SENSOR
STACKER MID
FULL
SENSOR
STACKER MID
UPPER LIMIT
SENSOR
STACKER MID
LOWER LIMIT
SENSOR
B
STACKER
LOW PAPER
SENSOR
STACKER
LOWER SAFETY
SENSOR
STACKER
LOW HALF
SENSOR
STACKER
LOW FULL
SENSOR
C
STACKER LOW
UPPER LIMIT
SENSOR
STACKER LOW
LOWER LIMIT
SENSOR
2
P/J895
P/J856
5V GRY A
1
3
A
YEL
2
2
RTN VIO A
3
1
3
P/J895
B 5V GRY
1
YEL
B
2
B RTN VIO
3
P/J857
5V
1
STACKER HALF SNR
2
RTN
3
5V
1
STACKER FULL SNR
2
RTN
3
P/J858
P/J848
5V
1
STACKER UPPER LIMIT SNR
2
RTN
3
5V
1
STACKER LOWER LIMIT SNR
2
RTN
3
P/J849
P/J888
P/J888
P/J859
GRY A
B
6
1
1
YEL A
B
5
2
2
VIO A
B
4
3
3
GRY A
B
3
4
1
YEL A
B
2
5
2
VIO A
B
1
6
3
P/J831
P/J860
5V
1
STACKER LOW HALF SNR
2
RTN
3
5V
1
STACKER LOW FULL SNR
2
RTN
3
P/J861
P/J850
5V
1
STACKER UPPPER LIMIT SNR
2
RTN
3
5V
1
STACKER LOWER LIMIT SNR
2
RTN
3
4
P/J872
A
3
A
2
A
1
P/J872
J894
P894
B
5V
GRY
A
1
11
B STACKER MID PAPER SNR YEL
A
2
10
B
RTN VIO
3
9
A
P/J873
A
6
A
5
A
4
A
3
A
2
A
1
P/J873
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
5
B
6
P/J887
A
6
A
5
A
4
A
3
A
2
A
1
P/J887
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
5
B
6
P/J874
A
4
A
3
A
2
A
1
P/J874
P/J875
A
6
A
5
A
4
P/J875
GRY
YEL
VIO
GRY
YEL
VIO
A
A
A
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J830
A
6
A
5
A
4
GRY
YEL
VIO
A
A
A
GRY
YEL
VIO
GRY
YEL
VIO
GRY
YEL
VI O
GRY
YEL
VIO
YEL
VIO
GRY
YEL
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
RTN
5V
RTN
5V
YEL
VIO
GRY
YEL
YEL
VIO
GRY
YEL
8
7
A
A
6
5
A
A
4
3
A
A
2
1
A
A
Finisher
PCB
B STACKER LOW PAPER SNR YEL
B
RTN VIO
12
11
B
B
10
9
B
B
YEL
VIO
8
7
B
B
GRY
YEL
6
5
B
B
4
3
B
B
2
1
B
B
B
5V
GRY
B STACKER LOW SAFTY SNR YEL
B
B
B
RTN
B
B
B
5V
P/J830
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
5
B
6
B
C
RTN
5V
YEL
VIO
GRY
YEL
J894B
P/J851
1
A
hc3m0621
2
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 622
Compiler, Interlock, and Stapler Sensors to Finisher PCB
1
Finisher PCB
P896
2
P/J880
N.C B
J896
1
YEL B
A
2
4
A RTN VIO B
3
3
GRY B
A 5V
2
4
YEL
B
A
1
5
N.C B
6
P/J880
A
6
A
5
A
4
A
3
A
2
A
1
3
5V
GRY
YEL
RTN VIO
5V
GRY
YEL
RTN VIO
P/J268
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
5
B
6
P/J268
A
5V
6
A IOT FULL PAPER SNR
5
A
RTN
4
5V
A
3
A GATE IN INTLOCK SNR
2
A
RTN
1
4
P/J259
GRY
YEL
VIO
GRY
YEL
VIO
A
10
9
8
7
6
5
11
12
13
B
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
P/J882
GRY B
1
YEL B
2
RTN VIO B
3
P/J882
A
3
A
2
A
1
P/J866
GRY B
1
YEL B
2
RTN VIO B
3
P/J866
A
3
A
2
A
1
P/J269
GRY B
1
YEL B
2
RTN VIO B
3
P/J269
A
3
A
2
A
1
P/J847
GRY B
1
YEL B
2
RTN VIO B
3
P/J847
A
3
A
2
A
1
P/J877
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
5
B
6
P/J877
A
6
A
5
A
4
A
3
A
2
A
1
P/J878
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
P/J878
A
4
A
3
A
2
A
1
A
A
A
5V
A
A
A
5V
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
5V
5V
YEL
A
A RTN VIO
A 5V
A
GRY
YEL
5V
GRY
YEL
RTN VIO
B
B
B
P/J279
1
2
3
P/J261
P/J279
5V GRY
A
1
3
TRANSPORT INTLOCK SNR YEL
A
2
2
RTN VIO
A
3
1
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J838
1
2
3
P/J876
A
3
A
2
A
1
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J832
1
2
3
5V
STAPLER F-CORNER SNR
RTN
GRY
YEL
VIO
P/J833
1
2
3
5V
STAPLER F-STRAIGHT SNR
RTN
GRY
YEL
VIO
5V
STAPLER R-STRAIGHT SNR
RTN
GRY
YEL
VIO
5V
STACK HEIGHT SNR
RTN
C
4
3
2
1
A 5V
A
A
A RTN
GRY
YEL
YEL
VIO
5V
UNLOAD W-RUN LED
UNLOAD W-RUN SW
RTN
J896B
1
2
1
2
3
P/J260
5V
COMPILER TRAY EXIT SNR
RTN
P/J876
GRY B
1
YEL B
2
RTN VIO B
3
5V
1
2
3
3
PRINTER FULL
PAPER
SENSOR
IN-GATE
INTERLOCK
SENSOR
A
TRANSPORT
INTERLOCK
SENSOR
COMPILER
TRAY EXIT
SENSOR
STACK HIGH
SENSOR
B
STAPLER FRONT
CORNER
SENSOR (9)
P/J834
1
2
3
STAPLER FRONT
EDGE
SENSOR
1
2
3
P/J835
STAPLER REAR
EDGE
SENSOR
P/J836
GRY
1
YEL
2
YEL
3
VIO
4
UNLOAD WHILE
RUN
SWITCH
C
UNLOAD WHILE
RUN
LED
hc3m0622
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 623
Tamper, Interlock, and Stacker Sensors to Finisher PCB
1
2
3
4
Finisher PCB
P/J839
A
1
2
3
TAMPER HOME
SENSOR
ENDWALL OPEN
SENSOR
1
2
3
P/J840
P/J841
1
2
3
EJECT CLAMP
SENSOR
1
2
3
P/J842
SET CLAMP
SENSOR
B
P/J843
COMPILER
PAPER
SENSOR
1
2
3
STACKER
OFFSET HOME
SENSOR
1
2
3
P/J844
5V
TAMPER HOME SNR
RTN
5V
ENDMALL OPEN SNR
RTN
5V
EJECT CLAMP SNR
RTN
5V
SET CLAMP HOME SNR
RTN
C
1
2
3
P/J884
GRY A
6
YEL A
5
VIO A
4
GRY A
3
YEL A
2
VIO A
1
P/J884
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
5
B
6
J893A
YEL A
8
VIO A
7
GRY A
6
YEL A
5
RTN
YEL A
VIO A
RTN
GRY A
YEL A
P893A
A
4
3
2
1
B
5V
P/J885
A
6
A
5
A
4
A
3
A
2
A
1
P/J881
A
6
A
5
A
4
B 5V GRY A
3
YEL A
B
2
B RTN VIO A
1
GRY
YEL
VIO
RTN
5V
GRY A
3
1
YEL A
2
2
RTN VIO A
1
3
P/J855M
P/J299
FINISHER
INTERLOCK
SENSOR
P/J883
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
5
B
6
P/J280A P/J280B
5V
GRY
GRY
1
3
RTN YEL
YEL
2
2
5V
VIO
RTN VIO
3
1
5V
GRY
OFF SET (TTL) YEL
RTN
VIO
P/J837
STACKER
TRAY ID
SENSOR
P/J883
GRY A
6
YEL A
5
VIO A
4
GRY A
3
YEL A
2
VIO A
1
1
2
3
P/J885
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
5
B
6
P/J881
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
5
B
6
YEL B
VIO B
COMPILER PAPER SNR
5V
RTN
GRY B
STACKER OFFSET HOME SNR YEL B
STACKER TRAY ID SNR
RTN
5V
FINISHER INTLOCK SNR
YEL
B
VIO B
8
7
6
5
4
3
GRY B
YEL B
2
1
J893B
C
P893B
P/J299
hc3m0623
1
2
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 624
Finisher LVPS and Miscellaneous Interlocks to Finisher PCB
1
2
TO
MCU PCB
A
3
J612
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
FRONT
COVER
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
TOP COVER
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
B
COMPILER
COVER
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
OPT $TX+
5V RTN
OPT #RX+
5V RTN
MBS # DET
FNSR # DET
24V RTN
(+24V)
5V RTN
(+5V)
5V RTN
+5V
P/J270
A1
B1
A2
B2
ORN
ORN
YEL
YEL
P/J271
A1
B1
A2
B2
ORN
ORN
YEL
YEL
P/J272
A
1
A
2
ORN
ORN
P/J272
B
1
B
2
YEL
YEL
OP11
OPR-4H
C
4
3
2
1
N.C
J16
P13
P/J2
3
2 OUTLET
1
3
INLET
2
AC CABLE
1
T1
1
2
P/J846
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
P/J845
P/J502
24V ORN
1
2
N.C
3
N.C
4
5
6
7
N.C
8
N.C
1
N.C
2
3
4
P/J505
4
P/J265
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5VRTN
FRONT COVER INTLOCK
P/J897
YEL
28
YEL
29
5VRTN
TOP COVER INTLOCK
YEL
YEL
5VRTN
COMPILER COVER INTLOCK
YEL
YEL
N.C
+24V ORN
+24V ORN
A
30
31
B
32
33
34
P/J291
1
2
VIO 24V RTN
VIO 24V RTN
VIO 24V RTN
N.C
YEL SQ+5V
YEL SQ+5V
Finisher
PCB
3
4
5
6
C
7
8
hc3m0624
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 625
Stapler, Compiler Tray Solenoid, and Miscellaneous Motors to Finisher PCB
1
2
P897
A
J897
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Finisher
PCB
12
13
14
15
16
17
B
18
19
20
21
22
23
3
P/J892
ORN
ORN
BLU
BLU
VIO
GRY
YEL
YEL
YEL
VIO
YEL
STPL MOT CW
STPL MOT CW
STPL MOT CCW
STPL MOT CCW
5V RTN
5V
LOW # STPL
CTRDGE#SET
SH # HOME
5V RTN
STPL # RDY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
TAMPER MOTOR # A
TAMPER MOTOR # A+24V COM
TAMPER MOTOR # B
TAMPER MOTOR # B+24V COM
BLU
BLU
ORN
BLU
BLU
ORN
P/J890
24
25
C
26
27
ORN
ORN
END WALL CLOSE CW
END WALL OPEN CCW
ORN
+24V
ORN
COMPILER TRAY DOWN
ORN
ORN
BLU
BLU
VIO
GRY
YEL
YEL
YEL
VIO
YEL
P/J886
1
2
3
4
5
6
P/J867
1
2
3
4
5
6
STAPLER MOVE MOTOR # A BLU
+24V COM
ORN
STAPLER MOVE MOTOR # A- BLU
STAPLER MOVE MOTOR # B BLU
+24V COM
ORN
STAPLER MOVE MOTOR # B- BLU
1
2
3
4
ORN
P/J862
M
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
A
STAPLER UNIT
STAPLER TRANSPORT
MOTOR
B
M
TAMPER
MOTOR
P/J868
1
M
ORN
ORN
4
2
END WALL
OPEN/CLOSE
MOTOR
C
P/J869
1
ORN
2
COMPILER TRAY
UP/DOWN
SOLENOID
hc3m0625
1
2
3
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 626
In-Gate Solenoid, Transport Motor, and Eject Motor to Finisher PCB
1
Finisher
PCB
2
P/J267
1
ORN
BLU
2
P/J297
1
2
3
GATE IN CLOSE PULL
ORN
GATE IN OPEN PUSH
BLU
4
P/J256
1
IN-GATE
SOLENOID
2
A
A
ORN
VIO
YEL
VIO
YEL
3
4
5
6
7
B
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
P/J298
1
2
3
4
5
EJECT MOTOR# A
+24V COM
EJECT MOTOR # AEJECT MOTOR # B
+24V COM
EJECT MOTOR # BN.C
+24V
24VRTN
TRANSPORT MOTOR ENBLE
24VRTN
TRANSPORT MOTOR ACTIVE
BLU
ORN
BLU
BLU
ORN
BLU
P/J258
1
2
3
4
5
6
ORN
VIO
YEL
VIO
YEL
P/J257
1
2
3
4
5
M
M
TRANSPORT
MOTOR
B
EJECT MOTOR
hc3m0626
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 627
Miscellaneous Motors to Finisher PCB
1
2
STACKER MID
MOTOR
STACKER
LOWER
MOTOR
A
EJECT CLAMP
OFFSET
MOTOR
SET CLAMP
MOTOR
P/J870
2
M
1
P/J871
2
M
1
P/J863
2
M
1
P/J864
2
M
1
ORN
STACKER MID UP CW
ORN
STACKER LOW DOWN CCW
ORN
STACKER LOW UP CW
ORN
EJECT CLAMP&OFFSET MOT CW
ORN
EJECT CLAMP&OFFSET MOT CCW
ORN
SET CLAMP MOT-
ORN
SET CLAMP MOT+
ORN
P/J852
ORN
1
ORN
2
MIDDLE BIN
SAFETY SWITCH
P/J285A
2
1
STACKER
UPPER
MOTOR
P/J296
1
2
P/J285B
2
1
P/J255
1
M
2
STACKER UPPER
LIMIT SWITCH
P/J273
1
2
ORN
ORN
STACKER LOWER
LIMIT SWITCH
P/J274
1
2
ORN
ORN
P/J865
1
ORN
C
STACKER BIN
UNIT ELEVATOR
MOTOR
COMPILER COVER
SAFETY SWITCH
M
2
P/J855
1
2
2
4
STACKER MID DOWN CCW
UPPER BIN
SAFETY SWITCH
B
1
3
ORN
ORN
ORN
P/J889
1
2
3
4
5
6
P/J891
1
2
P/J898
1
2
Finisher
PCB
3
A
4
5
6
7
8
P/J266
ORN
1
ORN
2
STACKER TOP SAFETY IN
B
STACKER TOP SAFETY OUT
STACKER TOP UP CW
ORN
STACKER TOP DOWN CCW
ORN
STAPLE +24V
STACKER UPPER LIMIT SW
P/J899
ORN
1
ORN
2
STAPLE +24V
STACKER LOWER LIMIT SW
ORN
ORN
STACKER UNIT UP CCW
ORN
STACKER UNIT DOWN CW
ORN
+24V
STAPLE +24V
ORN
ORN
3
3
4
3
4
C
5
6
7
8
hc3m0627
4
Chapter 4. Circuit Diagrams 628
Chapter 5. Locations
Locations Quick Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Covers, Trays, Controls, and Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . .
Clutches and Solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Quick Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer, Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex, Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Envelope Feeder, Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Unit, Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finisher, Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fans, Lamps, and Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Assemblies and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches . . . . .
Rollers and Restraint Pad—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder .
Rollers—Input Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rollers—Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensors and Switches—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder. . .
Sensors and Switches—Input Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensors and Switches—Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 1999
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.630
.631
.634
.639
.640
.664
.667
.670
.680
.714
.720
.721
.735
.738
.739
.740
.742
.743
.745
.754
629
Locations Quick Path
Table 214. Locations Quick Path
Looking For...
Quick Path To...
Areas, paper jam
“Paper Jam Areas Referenced By Error Codes” on page 69
Belt, stapler rail, installation
“Stapler Rail Belt, Finisher” on page 1045
Belt, transport asm. drive, installation
“Finisher Transport Asm. Drive Belt Installation” on page 1059
Connectors
Connector Quick Locator
Covers, trays, controls, and serial number
Front
Clutches
Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Fans
Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Finisher assemblies and components
Finisher Assemblies and Components
Hard drive
“Hard Drive, Printer” on page 790
Lamps, fuser (heaters)
Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Motors
Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Paper path views of rollers, sensors, and switches
Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches
Printed circuit boards (PCBs)
Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Input Unit
Finisher
Rollers
Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Input Unit
Finisher
Sensors
Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Input Unit
Finisher
SIMMs, DRAM, and flash memory
“SIMMs, Printer” on page 791
Solenoids
Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Input Unit
Finisher
Switches
Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Input Unit
Finisher
Other
Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Rear
Finisher
Input Unit
Finisher
Input Unit
Finisher
Chapter 5. Locations 630
Covers, Trays, Controls, and Serial Number
Table 215. Covers, Trays, Controls, and Serial Number—Front
Item
Ref.
Auxiliary paper tray
16
Cover B (lower left
cover)
14
Cover C
13
Cover, EP (toner)
cartridge
3
Docking station
1
Serial Number
(Open EP Cartridge Cover
Serial Number Located
in Lower Left Corner)
1
2
4
3
5
3
;
6
(1) Upper bin
F
H
Duplex unit
15
Envelope feeder
19
7
E
(2) Middle bin
e
Con
Enter
Finisher front cover
7
Finisher transport
2
17
Panel switch
18
Paper stopper
5
Paper tray 1
8
Paper tray 2
9
Paper tray 3
10
Paper tray 4
12
Paper tray 5
11
Pause (Unload While
Running)
6
Face-down output bin
4
cel
Can t
Prin
e
Valu
Item
+
-
Shift
u
Men
A
(3) Lower bin
18
8
19
Operator panel
*
tinu
Online
9
1
17
10
2
B
3
C
5
4
16
15
14
13
12
11
hc3m0420
Chapter 5. Locations 631
Table 216. Covers, Trays, Controls, and Serial Number—Rear
Item
Ref.
1
Connector, AC input
5
Connector, duplex unit
8
Connector, finisher
7
Connector, input unit
6
DRAM SIMMs
3
Ethernet card
9
Flash memory SIMMs
1
Hard drive
2
Outlet, AC to finisher
4
10
9
3
2
4
11
5
Parallel port
11
Token-ring card
10
6
7
8
hc3m0421
Chapter 5. Locations 632
Table 217. Covers, Trays, Controls, and Serial Number—Finisher
Item
Ref.
Cable protection bracket
2
Docking station
1
1
Finisher power cord
3
2
3
Guide rail
4
4
5
Thumbscrew
5
hc3m0422
Chapter 5. Locations 633
Clutches and Solenoids
Table 218. Clutches and Solenoids—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Item
Figure / Reference
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Auxiliary tray clutch
p. 635 / 8
p. 593 (B4)
p. 610 (B4)
p. 1134 1010–2
Duplex exit clutch
p. 635 / 4
–
–
p. 1179 2050–11
Duplex exit gate solenoid
p. 635 / 5
p. 593 (C4)
p. 613 (B4)
p. 1175 2030–11
Duplex wait clutch
p. 635 / 7
p. 593 (C4)
p. 613 (B4)
p. 1177 2040–3
Env clutch
p. 635 / 6
p. 593 (C4)
p. 610 (C4)
p. 1184 3020–11
Exit gate solenoid
p. 635 / 1
p. 593 (A4)
p. 602 (B4)
p. 1117 510–2
Registration clutch
p. 635 / 11
p. 593 (A3)
p. 602 (A3)
p. 1130 920–1
Tray 1 feed clutch
p. 635 / 9
p. 593 (A3)
p. 602 (A3)
p. 1154 1034–2
Tray 2 feed clutch
p. 635 / 10
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (B4)
p. 1163 1044–2
ICCW clutch
p. 635 / 2
p. 593 (B4)
p. 602 (C4)
p. 1106 310–10
ICW clutch
p. 635 / 3
p. 593 (A4)
p. 602 (C4)
p. 1106 310–9
Chapter 5. Locations 634
Exit Gate Solenoid 1
2 ICCW Clutch
3 ICW Clutch
4 Duplex Exit Clutch Asm.
5 Duplex Exit Gate Solenoid
6 Env Clutch
7 Duplex Wait Clutch
8 Auxiliary Tray Clutch
hc3m1387
FR
ON
9 Tray 1 Feed Clutch
T
Registration Clutch 11
10 Tray 2 Feed Clutch
Figure 15. Clutches and Solenoids—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Chapter 5. Locations 635
Table 219. Clutches and Solenoids—Input Unit
Item
Figure / Reference
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Tray 3 feed clutch
p. 636 / 1
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (B4)
p. 1206 4052–1
Tray 4 feed clutch
p. 636 / 2
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (C4)
p. 1210 4062–1
Tray 5 feed clutch
p. 636 / 3
p. 593 (B1)
p. 618 (A4)
p. 1220 4073–1
1 Tray 3 Feed Clutch
2 Tray 4 Feed Clutch
hc3m1388
FR
ON
T
3 Tray 5 Feed Clutch
Figure 16. Clutches and Solenoids—Input Unit
Chapter 5. Locations 636
Table 220. Clutches and Solenoids—Finisher
Item
Figure / Reference
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Compiler tray up/down solenoid
p. 638 / 1
p. 594 (B4)
p. 626 (C4)
p. 1265 5160–33
In-gate solenoid
p. 638 / 2
p. 594 (C4)
p. 627 (A4)
p. 1250 5100–14
Chapter 5. Locations 637
1 Compiler Tray
Up/Down Solenoid
2 In-Gate Solenoid
NT
FRO
hc3m1389
Figure 17. Clutches and Solenoids—Finisher
Chapter 5. Locations 638
Connector Quick Locator
In the following table, duplicate connector numbers have a following letter indicating in which unit the connector
resides; P=printer, D=duplex asm., E=envelope feeder, IU=input unit, and F=finisher.
Table 221. Links to Connector Information (Location, Pin Location, and Wiring Diagram Location)
1
2
12
13
19
20
23
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
132
133
140
141
142
143
144
200
202
203
204
205
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217E
217IU
218
219
221
222
223
224
232
233
234
235
240
241
250
251
252
253
254
255
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
265M
266
267
268
270
271
272A
272B
273
274
275
279
280
285A
285B
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
416
417
420
421
422
423
424
430
454
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
473
474
475
477
478
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
499
500
502
505
5P/J1
600
601
602
603
604P
604
604E
606
607
611P
611D
612P
612F
613P
613IU
700
701
702
703
704
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
847
848
849
850
851
852
854
855
855M
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
877
878
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
BTR
CB
DB
DTS
F51-54
F55
F56
F5230
F5231
T4
Chapter 5. Locations 639
Printer, Connectors
Table 222. Connectors—Printer
Location
Illustration
P/J1—P/J13, LVPS output to finisher
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
hc3m1155
Connector
Illustration
p. 663 / 3
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (B2)
hc3m1155
Connector
p. 663 / 3
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (B2)
p. 663 / 2
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (B1)
p. 659 / 4
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (C3)
p. 656 / 5
p. 593 (B1)
p. 594 (C3)
p. 600 (B1)
1
P/J1—
F52 and F54, AC input from power switch
P/J13, AC input to finisher
P/J20, AC input to ac drive PCB
T4
1
hc3m1211
P/JT4—P/J1, LVPS frame ground
P/J12—
hc3m1148
hc3m1168
P/J23AC drive PCB
Fuser lamps (L1 and L2) and
TH1
T3
FG (frame ground)
P/J13—P/J2, Finisher LVPS ac input
1
Chapter 5. Locations 640
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
hc3m1161
Pinout Diagram
p. 663 / 11
p. 593 (B1)
p. 600 (C1)
hc3m1161
Wiring Diagram
p. 663 / 7
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (B2)
p. 663 / 9
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (C2)
hc3m1170
P/J19—F51 and F53, AC noise filter to ac power
switch
Location
Illustration
p. 657 / 5
p. 593 (B3)
p. 611 (A3)
hc3m1170
Connector
Illustration
p. 657 / 7
p. 593 (C3)
p. 610 (B2)
hc3m1170
Connector
p. 657 / 6
p. 593 (B3)
p. 611 (A3)
1
P/J20—
F52 and F54, AC input from power switch
P/J13, AC input to finisher
P/J1, AC input to LVPS PCB
1
hc3m1163
1
P/J23—P/J12
P/J100—P/J459, MCU to registration sensor
1
P/J101—P/J403, Paper path #1 sensor to MCU
1
P/J102—P/J459, Tray 1 no-paper sensor to MCU
1
Chapter 5. Locations 641
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
Location
Illustration
P/J103—P/J459, Tray 1 level sensor to MCU
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 657 / 4
p. 593 (B3)
p. 611 (B3)
p. 659 / 5
p. 593 (A3)
p. 602 (A2)
p. 658 / 29
p. 593 (B3)
p. 611 (A4)
p. 656 / 1
p. 593 (A2)
p. 606 (A2)
hc3m1170
hc3m1170
Connector
Illustration
p. 657 / 1
p. 593 (B4)
p. 610 (A4)
hc3m1170
Connector
p. 657 / 8
p. 593 (B4)
p. 610 (A4)
p. 659 / 2
p. 593 (A3)
p. 602 (B3)
P/J104—P/J462, Fuser exit sensor to MCU
1
P/J105—P/J461, Tray 1 paper size sensor to MCU
hc3m1145
1
hc3m1134
hc3m1135
1
P/J106—P/J456, SOS sensor to MCU
1
P/J107—P/J604 and 5P/J1, Auxiliary paper size
sensor
1
P/J108—P/J604 and 5P/J1, Auxiliary no-paper
sensor
P/J109—P/J601, Face-up exit sensor to MCU
(P/J462)
1
hc3m1135
1
Chapter 5. Locations 642
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
Location
Illustration
P/J127—Toner empty sensor to MCU
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 658 / 11
p. 593 (A2)
p. 609 (A4)
p. 659 / 12
p. 593 (A3)
p. 602 (B3)
hc3m1170
hc3m1131
Connector
Illustration
p. 660 / 5
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (A2)
hc3m1170
Connector
p. 660 / 4
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (A2)
p. 660 / 1
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (A2)
p. 660 / 6
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (B4)
p. 660 / 7
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (B4)
1
hc3m1135
P/J133—P/J601, Full stack sensor to MCU
(P/J462)
1
P/J140—P/J408, Tray 2 no-paper sensor to MCU
1
P/J141—P/J408, Tray 2 level sensor to MCU
P/J142—P/J408, Tray 2 paper size sensor to MCU
hc3m1170
1
hc3m1134
1
P/J143—P/J408, Paper path sensor #2 to MCU
P/J144—P/J408, Tray 2 left cover interlock switch
to MCU
1
hc3m1135
1
Chapter 5. Locations 643
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
hc3m1135
Connector
P/J200—P/J462, MCU to registration clutch
hc3m1141
1
hc3m1135
P/J202—P/J462, MCU to tray 1 feed clutch
P/J203—P/J403, MCU to tray 1 lift motor (M1)
hc3m1169
1
P/J204—P/J460, MCU to Fuser fan (F1)
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 658 / 13
p. 593 (A3)
p. 602 (A3)
p. 658 / 17
p. 593 (A3)
p. 602 (A3)
p. 658 / 19
p. 593 (B3)
p. 610 (B2)
p. 659 / 3
p. 593 (A2)
p. 604 (A2)
p. 658 / 10
p. 593 (A2)
p. 604 (A1)
p. 656 / 6
p. 593 (A2)
p. 606 (A2)
p. 657 / 2
p. 593 (B4)
p. 610 (A4)
1
hc3m1121
1
hc3m1149
P/J205—P/J460, MCU to main drive motor (M10)
P/J207—P/J456, Laser motor (M9) to MCU
P/J208—P/J604, Auxiliary feed clutch
hc3m1142
1
Chapter 5. Locations 644
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
P/J210—P/J601, Exit gate solenoid to MCU
(P/J462)
1
P/J218—P/J602, Inverter CW clutch to MCU
(P/J462)
1
P/J219—P/J602, Inverter CCW clutch to MCU
(P/J462)
p. 593 (B3)
p. 602 (C2)
p. 659 / 1
p. 593 (A3)
p. 602 (B3)
p. 659 / 6
p. 593 (A3, B3)
p. 602 (C3)
p. 659 / 7
p. 593 (B3)
p. 602 (C3)
p. 593 (A2)
p. 604 (B1)
p. 593 (A2)
p. 604 (B1)
p. 658 / 6
p. 593 (A2)
p. 606 (B2)
p. 658 / 14
P/J233—P/J232, F5231, cover interlock SW1 to
MCU (in series with cover interlock SW1)
p. 658 / 15
P/J234—P/J456, EP cartridge interlock SW1 and
EP cartridge interlock SW2 to MCU
hc3m1128
P/J232—P/J233, P/J458, cover interlock SW1 to
MCU (in series with cover interlock SW2)
hc3m1140
p. 659 / 10
hc3m1140
1
Pinout Diagram
hc3m1135
1
Wiring Diagram
hc3m1135
P/J209—P/J462, MCU to offset motor (M8)
Location
Illustration
hc3m1135
Connector
Illustration
hc3m1135
Connector
Chapter 5. Locations 645
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
hc3m1160
Connector
P/J235—P/J401, MCU to LVPS fan (F3)
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 663 / 6
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (B3)
p. 660 / 9
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (B2)
p. 660 / 10
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (B2)
p. 658 / 3
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (A4)
p. 658 / 16
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (C4)
p. 658 / 27
p. 593 (B2)
p. 603 (C4)
hc3m1170
1
P/J240—P/J408, Tray 2 feed clutch to MCU
hc3m1135
1
P/J241—P/J408, MCU to tray 2 lift motor (M2)
1
hc3m1153
1
P/J400—P/J501, LVPS MCU
1
hc3m1133
P/J401—MCU to
P/J447, AC drive PCB
P/J235, LVPS fan (F3)
hc3m1138
A1
P/J402—P/J422, MCU to interface PCB
B1
Chapter 5. Locations 646
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
Connector
Connector
Illustration
P/J403—MCU to
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
hc3m1123
1
P/J603, Aux./env. feeder (via P/J604P)
P/J203, Tray 1 lift motor (M1)
P/J101, Paper path #1 sensor
p. 658 / 22
p. 593 (B3)
p. 610 (A1)
p. 658 / 25
p. 593 (C3)
p. 613 (B1)
p. 658 / 23
p. 593 (C3)
p. 594 (B1, C1)
p. 607 (A1)
p. 658 / 24
p. 593 (C2)
p. 615 (A1)
p. 656 / 2
p. 593 (A2)
p. 606 (B1)
1
hc3m1123
P/J404—P/J473, MCU to duplex asm. (via P/J
611A and B)
hc3m1122
1
P/J405—P/J612, MCU to Finisher
hc3m1125
1
hc3m1146
P/J406—P/J613P A–D, MCU to input unit drive
PCB (P/J480 and P/J481)
P/J407—P/J456, Laser drive PCB to MCU
1
Chapter 5. Locations 647
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
Connector
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
P/J408—MCU to
A1
hc3m1137
Tray 2 no paper sensor
Tray 2 level sensor
Tray 2 paper size sensor
Paper path #2 sensor (via P/J607)
Left cover interlock switch (via P/J607)
Tray 2 feed clutch
Tray 2 lift motor
p. 658 / 26
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (A1)
p. 661 / 6
p. 593 (B2)
p. 608 (A3)
p. 661 / 4
p. 593 (B2)
p. 608 (A2)
p. 661 / 5
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (A3)
p. 661 / 3
p. 593 (B2)
p. 608 (A3)
B1
hc3m1150
P/J140,
P/J141,
P/J142,
P/J143,
P/J144,
P/J240,
P/J241,
hc3m1152
P/J416—P/J430, Interface PCB to laser drive
P/J417—P/J421, interface PCB to operator panel
1
1
hc3m1153
P/J420—P/J501 and P/J502, Interface PCB to
LVPS PCB
P/J421—P/J417, Interface PCB to operator panel
hc3m1124
1
Chapter 5. Locations 648
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
Connector
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
P/J422—P/J402, Interface PCB to MCU
B1
hc3m1151
A1
hc3m1154
P/J423—Controller PCB to interface PCB
hc3m1156
1
31
61
91
P/J424—Interface PCB to electronics fan (F2)
p. 661 / 2
p. 593 (B2)
p. 603 (C2)
p. 661 / 7
p. 593 (A2)
p. 603 (A1)
p. 661 / 8
p. 593 (A2)
p. 600 (A2)
p. 656 / 3
p. 593 (B2)
p. 608 (A2)
p. 658 / 7
p. 593 (A2)
p. 609 (A3)
p. 658 / 2
p. 593 (A2)
p. 606 (A4)
hc3m1150
1
hc3m1130
P/J430—P/J416, Laser drive to interface PCB
P/J454—P/J606, MCU to EP cartridge
1
P/J106
P/J207
P/J234
P/J407
SOS sensor
Laser motor M9
EP cartridge interlocks SW1, SW2
Laser driver PCB
A1
hc3m1126
P/J456—MCU to
Chapter 5. Locations 649
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
Connector
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
1
p. 658 / 5
p. 593 (A2)
p. 605 (A4)
p. 658 / 4
p. 593 (A2)
p. 604 (B4)
p. 658 / 21
p. 593 (B3)
p. 611 (A2)
p. 658 / 9
p. 593 (A2)
p. 604 (A4)
p. 658 / 20
p. 593 (B3)
p. 611 (A2)
1
hc3m1127
P/J458—MCU to
hc3m1119
P/J457—P/J500, MCU to HVPS PCB
P/J232 and P/J233, Cover interlock SW1
F5231 and F5230, Cover interlock SW2
P/J100, Registration sensor
P/J102, Tray 1 no-paper sensor
P/J102, Tray 1 level sensor
hc3m1136
P/J459—MCU to
1
1
hc3m1120
P/J460—MCU to
P/J461—P/J105, Tray 1 paper size sensor to MCU
1
hc3m1134
P/J204, Fuser fan (F1)
P/J205, Main drive motor (M10)
Chapter 5. Locations 650
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
Connector
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
P/J462—MCU to
hc3m1132
A1
p. 658 / 12
p. 593 (A3)
p. 602 (A1)
p. 663 / 10
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (B2)
p. 663 / 8
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (C2)
p. 656 / 4
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (C4)
p. 658 / 1
p. 593 (A2)
p. 605 (A1)
B1
hc3m1164
P/J202, Tray 1 feed clutch
P/J200, Registration clutch
P/J104, Fuser exit sensor
P/J600, Fuser
P/J601, P/J109 (face-up exit sensor), P/J133
(full stack sensor), P/J210 (exit gate solenoid)
P/J602, P/J218 (inverter CW clutch), P/J219
(inverter CCW)
P/J209, Offset motor (M8)
P/J477—P/J401, AC drive PCB to MCU
hc3m1162
1
P/J478—P/J499, AC drive PCB to Output test
P/J499—P/J478, AC drive PCB output test
connector
hc3m1147
1
P/J500—P/J457, HVPS to MCU
hc3m1118
1
Chapter 5. Locations 651
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
hc3m1165
Connector
P/J600—P/J462, MCU to fuser
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 659 / 9
p. 593 (A3)
p. 602 (B3)
p. 659 / 8
p. 593 (A3)
p. 602 (B3)
p. 659 / 11
p. 593 (B3)
p. 602 (C3)
p. 657 / 9
p. 593 (B3)
p. 610 (A2)
p. 657 / 3
p. 593 (B4)
p. 610 (A2, C1)
1
P/J462,
P/J109,
P/J133,
P/J210,
hc3m1167
P/J601—
MCU
Face-up exit sensor
Full stack sensor
Exit gate solenoid sensor
1
hc3m1165
P/J602—
P/J462, MCU
P/J218, Inverter CW clutch
P/J219, Inverter CCW clutch
1
P/J603—
hc3m1122
1
P/J403, MCU
P/J604, Aux. tray
P/J700 Env. feeder (via P/J604E)
P/J604P—P/J403, MCU via P/J603 to
1
6
hc3m1212
P/J107, Aux tray size sensor
5P/J1, P/J107 and P/J108
P/J108, Aux tray no-paper sensor
P/J208, Aux tray feed clutch
P/J604E, Env. feeder or P/J604, aux. tray
7
12
Chapter 5. Locations 652
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
Connector
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
7
hc3m1171
P/J604—P/J403, Auxiliary feeder to MCU (via
P/J604P and P/J603)
p. 657 / 3
p. 593 (B4)
p. 610 (A2, C1)
hc3m1143
1
p. 658 / 8
p. 593 (A2)
p. 609 (A1)
p. 660 / 8
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (B3)
hc3m1144
6
Location
Illustration
p. 662 / 6
p. 593 (C3)
p. 613 (B2)
hc3m1144
Connector
p. 662 / 5
p. 593 (C3)
p. 594 (B2, C2)
p. 607 (A3)
12
P/J606—P/J454, EP cartridge to MCU
hc3m1175
P/J607—
P/J408, MCU
P/J143, Paper path #2 sensor
P/J144, Left cover interlock switch)
1
P/J611P—
P/J44, MCU
P/J473, Duplex PCB
1
P/J612P—
P/J405, MCU
P/J265M, Finisher PCB
1
Chapter 5. Locations 653
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
Connector
Illustration
Connector
Location
Illustration
hc3m1144
P/J613P A–D—
P/J406, MCU
P/J480 and P/J481, Input unit PCB (via P/J613IU)
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 662 / 7
p. 593 (C2)
p. 615 (A3)
p. 657 / 3
p. 593 (B4)
p. 610 (A3)
p. 660 / 3
p. 593 (A2)
p. 604 (B1)
p. 660 / 2
p. 593 (A2)
p. 604 (B1)
1
5P/J1—P/J403, MCU via P/J604, P/J604P, and
P/J603 and
6
hc3m1212
P/J107, Aux tray size sensor
P/J108, Aux tray no-paper sensor
P/J208, Aux tray feed clutch
1
7
12
P/J458, Cover interlock SW2 to MCU
F5231, Cover interlock SW2 (to cover
interlock SW1, P/J233)
hc3m1139
P/JF5230—
P/JBTR—HVPS to Bias transfer roller
hc3m1182
P/JCB—HVPS to CB (connection block) asm.
hc3m1182
P/JDB—HVPS to Magnetic roller
hc3m1182
P/J233, Cover interlock SW1
F5230, Cover interlock SW2 (to MCU, P/J233)
hc3m1139
P/JF5231—
p. 660 / 11
p. 662 / 4
p. 749 HVPS PCB
p. 660 / 13
p. 662 / 3
p. 749 HVPS PCB
p. 662 / 2
p. 749 HVPS PCB
—
—
—
—
—
—
Chapter 5. Locations 654
Table 222. Connectors—Printer (continued)
P/JDTS—DTS plate to HVPS
Connector
Illustration
hc3m1182
Connector
Location
Illustration
p. 662 / 1
p. 749 HVPS PCB
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
—
—
hc3m1140
p. 663 / 1
P/JF55—AC input to noise filters
hc3m1182
p. 663 / 13
P/JF56—AC input to noise filters
hc3m1182
P/JF51–54—Main power switch to
p. 663 / 12
P/J1, LVPS
P/J13, AC input to finisher
P/J20, AC input to ac drive PCB
p. 593 (B1)
p. 600 (B1, C1)
p. 593 (B1)
p. 600 (C1)
p. 593 (B1)
p. 600 (C1)
Chapter 5. Locations 655
P/J106
P/J407
P/J430
1
2
3
6
P/J207
5
J13
4
P499
hc3m0200
Figure 18. Connectors, Printer (1 of 8)
Chapter 5. Locations 656
P/J603
P/J103
9
4
P/J100
5
P/J604
P/J208
P/J107
3
P/J102
2
6
1
7
P/J101
8
P/J108
hc3m0203
Figure 19. Connectors, Printer (2 of 8)
Chapter 5. Locations 657
P/J454
P/J234
P/J457
P/J458
P/J400
P/J456
P/J500
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P/J606
P/J460
P/J205
8
9
10
28
11
P/J127
12
P/J462
13
P/J200
14
P/J232
15
P/J233
16
P/J401
17
P/J202
18
P/J201
19
P/J203
20
P/J461
P/J410
29
P/J105
27
26
P/J402 P/J408
25
24
P/J404
P/J406
23
P/J405
22
21
P/J459
P/J403
hc3m0204
Figure 20. Connectors, Printer (3 of 8)
Chapter 5. Locations 658
P/J210
1
P/J109
2
P/J204
3
P/J12
4
P/J104
5
P/J218
6
7
P/J219
8
P/J601
9
12
11
10
P/J602
P/J209
P/J600
hc3m0205
P/J133
Figure 21. Connectors, Printer (4 of 8)
Chapter 5. Locations 659
P/J142
1
F5231
F5230
P/J141
P/J140
3
4
5
2
BTR
DTS
CB
11
12
13
P/J143
6
7
P/J144
hc3m0221
P/J241
10
9
P/J240
8
P/J607
Figure 22. Connectors, Printer (5 of 8)
Chapter 5. Locations 660
P/J422
2
P/J421
P/J417
P/J420
3
4
5
8
P/J424
6
P/J416
7
P/J423
hc3m0220
Figure 23. Connectors, Printer (6 of 8)
Chapter 5. Locations 661
1
DTS
2
DB
3
CB
4
BTR
hc3m0222
5
7
J613A-D
6
J612A,B
J611A,B
Figure 24. Connectors, Printer (7 of 8)
Chapter 5. Locations 662
T4
F51~54
2
1
P/J1
3
P/J501
4
P/J502
5
P/J235
6
P/J20
7
P/J478
8
9
10
11
P/J23
P/J477
P/J19
12 F56
13 F55
hc3m0219
Figure 25. Connectors, Printer (8 of 8)
Chapter 5. Locations 663
Duplex, Connectors
Table 223. Connectors—Duplex
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
hc3m1187
Figure / Reference
P/J123—P/J475, Duplex wait sensor to duplex PCB
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 666 / 10
p. 593 (C4)
p. 613 (B4)
p. 666 / 2
p. 593 (C4)
p. 613 (A4)
p. 666 / 1
p. 593 (C4)
p. 613 (A4)
p. 666 / 3
p. 593 (C3)
p. 613 (B3)
p. 666 / 5
p. 593 (C3)
p. 613 (C3)
p. 666 / 9
p. 593 (C3)
p. 613 (B3)
hc3m1187
1
P/J124—P/J474, Duplex exit sensor to duplex PCB
1
P/J125—P/J474, Duplex interlock to duplex PCB
P/J222—Duplex exit sensor to duplex PCB
hc3m1209
1
hc3m1135
hc3m1129
1
P/J223—Duplex PCB to duplex motor (M7)
P/J224—Duplex PCB to duplex wait clutch solenoid
1
hc3m1135
1
Chapter 5. Locations 664
Table 223. Connectors—Duplex (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
hc3m1152
P/J473—P/J404, Duplex PCB to MCU (via P/J611A
and B)
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 666 / 6
p. 593 (C3)
p. 613 (B3)
p. 666 / 4
p. 593 (C3)
p. 613 (A3)
p. 666 / 8
p. 593 (C3)
p. 613 (B3)
p. 666 / 7
p. 593 (C3)
p. 613 (B2)
1
hc3m1210
P/J474—Duplex PCB to
P/J125, Duplex interlock switch
P/J124, Duplex exit sensor
hc3m1187
1
P/J475—P/J123, Duplex wait sensor to duplex PCB
P/J404, MCU
P/J473, Duplex PCB
hc3m1184
P/J611D—
hc3m1182
1
Chapter 5. Locations 665
1
P/J125
2
P/J124
3
P/J222
4
P/J474
5
P/J223
6
P/J473
7
P611
10
P/J123
9
P/J224
8
P/J475
hc3m0202
Figure 26. Connectors, Duplex
Chapter 5. Locations 666
Envelope Feeder, Connectors
Table 224. Connectors—Envelope Feeder
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
hc3m1164
Figure / Reference
P/J130—P/J701, No-paper sensor to env. feeder PCB
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 669 / 10
p. 593 (B4)
p. 614 (A3)
p. 669 / 2
p. 593 (B4)
p. 614 (A3)
p. 669 / 9
p. 593 (B4)
p. 614 (A3)
p. 593 (C4)
p. 614 (B3)
p. 669 / 8
p. 593 (C4)
p. 614 (B3)
p. 669 / 7
p. 593 (B4)
p. 614 (A1)
hc3m1187
1
P/J131—Size sensor to env. feeder PCB
hc3m1187
1
P/J132—P/J702, Feed sensor to env. feeder PCB
hc3m1175
1
P/J217E—P/J704, Env. feeder PCB to env. motor
(M11)
hc3m1165
1
P/J221—P/J703, Env. feeder PCB to feed clutch
1
P/J403, MCU (via P/J604P and P/J603)
P/J700, Env. feeder PCB
6
1
7
hc3m1171
P/J604E—
12
Chapter 5. Locations 667
Table 224. Connectors—Envelope Feeder (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
1
hc3m1187
hc3m1120
P/J700—P/J403, Env. feeder PCB to MCU PCB (via
P/J604E, P/J604P, and P/J603)
P/J701—P/J130, Env. feeder no-paper sensor to env.
feeder PCB
p. 669 / 4
p. 593 (B4)
p. 614 (A2)
p. 669 / 3
p. 593 (B4)
p. 614 (A3)
p. 669 / 5
p. 593 (B4)
p. 614 (A3)
p. 669 / 1
p. 593 (C4)
p. 614 (B3)
p. 669 / 6
p. 593 (C4)
p. 614 (B3)
hc3m1187
1
P/J702—P/J132, Env. feed sensor to env. feeder PCB
1
hc3m1190
1
P/J703—P/J221, Env. feed clutch to env. feeder PCB
hc3m1175
1
P/J704—P/J217, Env. feeder PCB to env. motor (M11)
1
Chapter 5. Locations 668
P/J704 P/J702
6
5
P/J700
4
3
P/J604
P/J701
1
2
P/J703
P/J131
7
P/J704 6
8 P/J221
P/J702 5
P/J700 4
P/J701 3
P/J132
9
P/J131 2
P/J703 1
10 P/J130
hc3m0683
Figure 27. Connectors, Envelope Feeder
Chapter 5. Locations 669
Input Unit, Connectors
Table 225. Connectors—Input Unit
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
hc3m1170
Figure / Reference
P/J110—P/J483, Tray 3 size sensor to input unit PCB
hc3m1170
1
P/J111—P/J483, Tray 3 no-paper sensor to input unit
PCB
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 676 / 2
p. 679 / 1
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (A4)
p. 675 / 2
p. 593 (B1)
p. 619 (A4)
p. 675 / 1
p. 677 / 3
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (A4)
p. 675 / 8
p. 677 / 9
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (A4)
p. 676 / 1
p. 679 / 10
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (B4)
p. 675 / 5
p. 677 / 2
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (C4)
hc3m1170
1
P/J112—P/J483, Tray 3 level sensor to input unit PCB
hc3m1170
1
P/J114—P/J482, Left cover interlock switch to input
unit PCB
hc3m1170
1
P/J115—P/J483, Tray 4 size sensor to input unit PCB
hc3m1170
1
P/J116—P/J484, Tray 5 no-paper sensor to input unit
PCB
1
Chapter 5. Locations 670
Table 225. Connectors—Input Unit (continued)
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
hc3m1170
Figure / Reference
P/J117—P/J483, Tray 4 no-paper sensor to input unit
PCB
hc3m1170
1
P/J118—P/J483, Tray 4 level sensor to input unit PCB
hc3m1170
1
P/J119—P/J484, Tray 5 level sensor to input unit PCB
hc3m1170
1
P/J120—P/J484, Tray 5 size sensor to input unit PCB
hc3m1170
1
P/J121—P/J482, Tray 3 feed sensor to input unit PCB
hc3m1170
1
P/J126—P/J486, Paper path #4 sensor to input unit
PCB
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 675 / 4
p. 677 / 7
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (B4)
p. 675 / 6
p. 677 / 8
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (B4)
p. 675 / 7
p. 677 / 1
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (C4)
p. 676 / 17
p. 679 / 16
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (C4)
p. 675 / 3
p. 677 / 6
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (A4)
p. 677 / 5
p. 593 (C1)
p. 618 (B4)
p. 676 / 6
p. 679 / 3
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (B4)
hc3m1170
1
P/J211—P/J482, Input unit PCB to tray 3 feed clutch
1
Chapter 5. Locations 671
Table 225. Connectors—Input Unit (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
hc3m1135
P/J212—P/J482, Input unit PCB to tray 3 lift motor
(M3)
Location
Illustration
hc3m1141
1
P/J213—P/J482, Input unit PCB to tray 4 feed clutch
hc3m1135
P/J214—P/J482, Input unit PCB to tray 4 lift motor
(M4)
hc3m1170
1
P/J215—P/J485, Input unit PCB to tray 5 feed clutch
1
hc3m1135
P/J216—P/J485, Input unit PCB to tray 5 lift motor
(M5)
hc3m1174
1
P/J217IU—Input unit PCB to feed motor (M6)
1
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 676 / 7
p. 679 / 4
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (B4)
p. 676 / 8
p. 679 / 7
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (C4)
p. 676 / 9
p. 679 / 9
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (C4)
p. 676 / 10
p. 679 / 17
p. 593 (C1)
p. 618 (A4)
p. 676 / 11
p. 679 / 15
p. 593 (C1)
p. 618 (B4)
p. 676 / 12
p. 679 / 8
p. 593 (C1)
p. 618 (B3)
p. 593 (C2)
p. 615 (A3)
P/J480—P/J406, Input unit PCB to MCU PCB (via
P/J613IU)
hc3m1176
1
p. 676 / 4
p. 679 / 5
Chapter 5. Locations 672
Table 225. Connectors—Input Unit (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
hc3m1173
1
P/J481—P/J406, Input unit PCB to MCU PCB (via
P/J613IU)
p. 676 / 5
p. 679 / 6
p. 593 (C2)
p. 615 (C4)
p. 676 / 14
p. 679 / 12
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (C3)
p. 676 / 15
p. 679 / 13
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (A3)
p. 676 / 3
p. 679 / 2
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (C3)
p. 676 / 16
p. 679 / 14
p. 593 (C1)
p. 618 (A3)
P/J482—Input unit PCB to
A1
Paper path #3 sensor
Left cover interlock switch
Tray 3 feed clutch
Tray 3 lift motor (M3)
Tray 4 lift motor (M4)
Tray 4 feed clutch
hc3m1172
P/J121,
P/J114,
P/J211,
P/J212,
P/J214,
P/J213,
B1
P/J483—Input unit PCB to
Tray
Tray
Tray
Tray
Tray
Tray
3
3
3
4
4
4
no-paper sensor
level sensor
size sensor
size sensor
no-paper sensor
level sensor
A1
hc3m1137
P/J111,
P/J112,
P/J110,
P/J115,
P/J117,
P/J118,
B1
P/J120, Tray 5 size sensor
P/J116, Tray 5 no-paper sensor
P/J119, Tray 5 level sensor
1
hc3m1136
P/J484—Input unit PCB to
P/J215, Tray 5 feed clutch
P/J216, Tray 5 lift motor (M5)
hc3m1165
P/J485—Input unit PCB to
1
Chapter 5. Locations 673
Table 225. Connectors—Input Unit (continued)
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
hc3m1175
Figure / Reference
P/J486—P/J126, Paper path #4 sensor to input unit
PCB
P/J406, MCU (via P/J613P)
P/J480 and P/J481 Input unit PCB
p. 676 / 13
p. 679 / 11
p. 593 (C1)
p. 618 (B3)
p. 679 / 18
p. 593 (C2)
p. 615 (A3)
hc3m1184
P/J613IU A–D—
Pinout Diagram
hc3m1182
1
Wiring Diagram
Chapter 5. Locations 674
2
P/J112
P/J111
1
3
P/J114
8
P/J119
7
P/J121
hc3m0206
4
5
6
P/J117
P/J116
P/J118
Figure 28. Connectors, Input Unit (1 of 4)
Chapter 5. Locations 675
P/J115
1
P/J120
17
P/J110
P/J484
2
P/J480
4
3
16
P/J485
P/J481
15
P/J483
5
14
P/J482
13
6
P/J211
7
P/J212
8
P/J213
9
P/J214
10
P/J215
11
P/J216
12
P/J217
P/J486
hc3m0207
Figure 29. Connectors, Input Unit (2 of 4)
Chapter 5. Locations 676
P/J119
P/J116
P/J112
P/J111
P/J126
1
2
3
4
5
6
P/J121
hc3m0208
7
8
9
P/J117
P/J118
P/J114
Figure 30. Connectors, Input Unit (3 of 4)
Chapter 5. Locations 677
Chapter 5. Locations 678
P/J110
1
P/J484
2
P/J211
18
P613IU
3
P/J215
P/J120
P/J216
P/J485
17
4
P/J212
5
P/J480
6
P/J481
7
P/J213
8
P/J217
16
15
14
13
P/J483
12
P/J482
11
P/J486
10
P/J115
9
P/J214
hc3m0209
Figure 31. Connectors, Input Unit (4 of 4)
Chapter 5. Locations 679
Finisher, Connectors
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher
Connector
Illustration
Figure / Reference
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
1
p. 709 / 3
p. 594 (C3)
p. 593 (B1)
p. 625 (C1)
p. 701 / 6
p. 594 (A1)
p. 620 (A1)
p. 701 / 4
p. 594 (A1)
p. 620 (A1)
p. 701 / 3
p. 594 (A1)
p. 620 (B2)
p. 701 / 5
p. 594 (A1)
p. 620 (B1)
p. 701 / 1
p. 594 (A1)
p. 620 (B1)
p. 701 / 2
p. 710 / 12
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (B2)
1
hc3m1187
P/J13, AC input to LVPS from P/J13 in printer
P/J16, Outlet
hc3m1199
4
P/J2—
P/J250—P/J264, Upper-bin paper sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J293 and P/J292)
hc3m1187
1
P/J251—P/J264, Stacker top half sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J294)
hc3m1187
1
P/J252—P/J264, Stacker top full sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J294)
hc3m1187
1
P/J253—P/J264, Stacker top upper-limit sensor to
finisher PCB (via P/J295)
hc3m1187
1
P/J254—P/J264, Stacker top lower-limit sensor to
finisher PCB (via P/J295)
hc3m1192
1
P/J255—P/J266, Finisher PCB to Bin 1 stacker motor
1
Chapter 5. Locations 680
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
hc3m1191
Figure / Reference
P/J257—P/J267, Finisher PCB to transport motor PCB
(via P/J298)
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 707 / 3
p. 594 (C3)
p. 627 (A4)
p. 707 / 5
p. 711 / 4
p. 594 (C3)
p. 627 (B3)
p. 708 / 5
p. 594 (A3)
p. 623 (A4)
p. 708 / 1
p. 594 (A3)
p. 623 (A4)
p. 708 / 2
p. 594 (A3)
p. 623 (A4)
p. 708 / 8
p. 594 (A3)
p. 621 (A4)
p. 708 / 4
p. 594 (A3)
p. 621 (A4)
1
hc3m1195
1
hc3m1187
P/J258—P/J267, Finisher PCB to eject motor
P/J259—P/J896, Printer full paper sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J268 and P/J880)
hc3m1187
1
P/J260—P/J896, In-gate interlock sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J268 and P/J880)
hc3m1187
1
P/J261—P/J896, Transport interlock sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J279 and P/J882)
1
hc3m1191
P/J262—
P/J854, Finisher PCB (via P/J879)
P/J257M, Transport entrance sensor
P/J263, Transport exit sensor
hc3m1187
1
P/J263—P/J854, Transport exit sensor to finisher PCB
(via P/J262 and P/J879)
1
Chapter 5. Locations 681
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
P/J250, Upper-bin paper sensor (via P/J292
and P/J293)
P/J251, Stacker top half sensor (via P/J294)
P/J252, Stacker top full sensor (via P/J294)
P/J254, Stacker top lower-limit sensor (via P/J295)
P/J253, Stacker top upper-limit sensor (via P/J295)
hc3m1206
P/J264—Finisher PCB to
p. 594 (A2)
p. 620 (A4)
p. 712 / 17
p. 594 (C3)
p. 607 (A4)
p. 708 / 3
p. 594 (C3)
p. 627 (A4)
p. 710 / 19
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (B4)
p. 711 / 3
p. 594 (C3)
p. 627 (A1)
hc3m1208
1
p. 710 / 18
P/J265—P/J267, In-gate solenoid to finisher PCB (via
P/J297)
hc3m1192
1
P/J265M—P/J267, Finisher PCB to in-gate solenoid
(via P/J297)
1
P/J267—Finisher PCB to
P/J265M, In-gate solenoid (via P/J297)
P/J257M, Transport motor (via P/J298)
P/J258, Eject motor
1
1
hc3m1202
P/J285A, Middle bin safety switch
(via P/J296 and P/J285B)
P/J852, Upper bin safety switch (via P/J296)
P/J255, Bin 1 motor
hc3m1207
P/J266—Finisher PCB to
Chapter 5. Locations 682
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
hc3m1191
P/J268—
P/J896, Finisher PCB (via P/J880)
P/J259, Printer full paper sensor
P/J260, In-gate interlock sensor
p. 594 (C3)
p. 625 (A2)
p. 594 (C3)
p. 625 (B2)
p. 594 (C3)
p. 625 (B2)
p. 594 (C3)
p. 625 (B2)
1
hc3m1196
1B
p. 706 / 6
hc3m1196
Finisher PCB (via P/J846)
LVPS PCB (via P/J846)
Finisher PCB (via P/J845)
Top cover interlock switch
p. 623 (A3)
p. 706 / 1
1
hc3m1185
P/J291,
P/J502,
P/J897,
P/J271,
p. 594 (A3)
p. 706 / 3
1
hc3m1185
P/J270—Front cover interlock switch
p. 708 / 7
p. 706 / 3
1A
P/J271—Top cover interlock switch to
1B
P/J270, Front cover interlock switch
P/J272A, Compiler cover interlock switch
P/J897, Finisher PCB (via P/J845)
1A
finisher PCB (P/J897)
P/J272A—Compiler cover interlock switch (located
next to frame) to
P/J271, Top cover interlock switch
P/J291, Finisher PCB (via P/J846)
P/J272B—P/J897, Compiler cover interlock switch
(P/J272A is next to frame) to finisher PCB (via P/J845)
Chapter 5. Locations 683
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
1
Pinout Diagram
hc3m1185
P/J274—P/J899, Lower-bin limit switch to finisher PCB
(via P/J 889)
Wiring Diagram
p. 700 / 2
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (B2)
hc3m1185
1
p. 700 / 3
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (C2)
p. 708 / 6
p. 594 (A3)
p. 621 (A4)
p. 708 / 9
p. 594 (A3)
p. 623 (A3)
p. 705 / 9
p. 594 (B2)
p. 624 (B2)
p. 702 / 8
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (B4)
p. 710 / 20
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (B4)
hc3m1187
P/J273—P/J899, Stacker upper limit switch to finisher
PCB (via P/J889)
Location
Illustration
hc3m1188
Connector
Illustration
hc3m1188
Figure / Reference
P/J275M—P/J854, Transport entrance sensor to
finisher PCB (via P/J262 and P/J879)
1
hc3m1187
P/J279—
P/J896, Finisher PCB (via P/J882)
P/J260, In-gate interlock sensor
P/J261, Transport interlock sensor
1
hc3m1187
P/J280—
P/J893, Finisher PCB (via P/J855M)
P/J843, Compiler paper sensor
P/J844, Stacker offset home sensor
1
P/J285A—
P/J266, Middle-bin bin safety switch
to finisher PCB (via P/J285B and P/J296)
1
P/J285B—
P/J266, to finisher PCB
P/J266, to finisher PCB (via P/J296)
P/J285A, Middle-bin bin safety switch
1
Chapter 5. Locations 684
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
P/J272A, Compiler cover interlock switch (via P/J846)
P/J502, LVPS
P/J505, LVPS
hc3m1198
P/J291—
p. 709 / 4
p. 594 (C3)
p. 625 (C4)
p. 710 / 11
p. 594 (A2)
p. 620 (A4)
p. 701 / 8
p. 594 (A2)
p. 620 (A2)
p. 710 / 10
p. 594 (A2)
p. 620 (A2)
p. 710 / 9
p. 594 (A2)
p. 620 (B2)
p. 710 / 13
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (B2)
1
hc3m1187
P/J292—
P/J264, Finisher PCB
P/J250, Upper-bin paper sensor (via P/J293)
1
hc3m1187
P/J293—
P/J264, Finisher PCB (via P/J292)
P/J250, Upper-bin paper sensor
1
hc3m1191
P/J294—
P/J264, Finisher PCB
P/J251, Stacker top half sensor
P/J252, Stacker top full sensor
1
hc3m1191
P/J295—
P/J264, Finisher PCB
P/J254, Stacker top lower-limit sensor
P/J253, Stacker top upper-limit sensor
1
P/J266, Finisher PCB
P/J852, Upper bin safety switch
P/J285A, Middle bin safety switch (via P/J285B)
hc3m1188
P/J296—
1
Chapter 5. Locations 685
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
hc3m1192
P/J297—
Location
Illustration
P/J265M, In-gate solenoid
P/J267, Finisher PCB
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 711 / 6
p. 594 (C3)
p. 627 (A2)
p. 711 / 5
p. 594 (C3)
p. 627 (A2)
p. 700 / 7
p. 594 (B2)
p. 624 (C2)
p. 709 / 1
p. 594 (C3)
p. 625 (C2)
p. 709 / 8
p. 594 (C3)
p. 625 (C2)
p. 712 / 16
p. 594 (B1, C1)
p. 625 (A2)
1
1
hc3m1201
P/J298—
hc3m1187
P/J267, Finisher PCB
P/J257M, Transport motor
P/J299—P/J893, Finisher interlock sensor (P/J855M)
to finisher PCB (via P/J881)
1
hc3m1198
P/J502—
P/J291, Finisher PCB
P/J270, Front cover interlock switch (via P/J846)
LVPS PCB to finisher PCB/interlocks
hc3m1200
1
P/J505—P/J291, LVPS PCB to finisher PCB
hc3m1184
P/J612F—P/J265M, Printer input to finisher PCB (via
MCU P/J405 and P/J612P)
hc3m1182
1
Chapter 5. Locations 686
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
hc3m1191
P/J830—
P/J894, Finisher PCB (via P/J896)
P/J850, Lower-bin upper-limit sensor
P/J851, Lower-bin lower-limit sensor
p. 710 / 1
p. 594 (B2)
p. 622 (C3)
p. 703 / 7
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (B1)
p. 705 / 3
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (B4)
p. 704 / 3
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (B4)
p. 704 / 2
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (C4)
p. 704 / 1
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (C4)
p. 706 / 2
p. 594 (B4)
p. 623 (C4)
p. 700 / 1
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (C1)
hc3m1187
1
P/J831—P/J894, Lower-bin safety sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J888, P/J847, P/J896)
hc3m1187
1
P/J832—P/J896, Stack high sensor to finisher PCB
(via P/J876 and P/J269)
hc3m1187
1
P/J833—P/J896, Stapler front corner sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J847)
hc3m1187
1
P/J834—P/J895, Stapler front straight sensor to
finisher PCB (via P/J877)
hc3m1187
1
P/J835—P/J895, Stapler rear straight sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J877)
hc3m1191
1
P/J836—P/J896, Pause (unload while run switch) and
LED to finisher PCB (via P/J878)
hc3m1187
1
P/J837—P/J893, Stacker tray ID sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J881)
1
Chapter 5. Locations 687
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
hc3m1187
Figure / Reference
P/J838—P/J896, Compiler tray exit sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J866)
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 705 / 2
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (A4)
p. 705 / 1
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (A1)
p. 705 / 6
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (A1)
p. 707 / 2
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (B1)
p. 707 / 7
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (B1)
p. 705 / 5
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (B1)
p. 707 / 1
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (C1)
hc3m1187
1
P/J839—P/J893, Tamper home sensor to finisher PCB
(via P/J883)
hc3m1187
1
P/J840—P/J893, End wall open sensor to finisher PCB
(via P/J883)
hc3m1187
1
P/J841—P/J893, Eject clamp sensor to finisher PCB
(via P/J884)
hc3m1187
1
P/J842—P/J893, Set clamp sensor to finisher PCB (via
P/J884)
hc3m1187
1
P/J843—P/J893, Compiler paper sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J280 and P/J885)
hc3m1187
1
P/J844—P/J893, Stacker offset home sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J280 and P/J885)
1
Chapter 5. Locations 688
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
P/J897, Finisher PCB
P/J270, Front cover interlock switch
P/J271, Top cover interlock switch
P/J272B, Compiler cover interlock switch
hc3m1209
P/J845—
p. 712 / 10
p. 594 (C3)
p. 625 (C4)
p. 709 / 5
p. 594 (C3)
p. 625 (A3)
p. 712 / 12
p. 594 (A3)
p. 623 (B2)
p. 702 / 5
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (A1)
p. 702 / 1
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (B1)
p. 703 / 5
p. 594 (B1)
p. 622 (C1)
p. 703 / 1
p. 594 (B1)
p. 622 (C1)
1
P/J291, Finisher PCB
P/J502, LVPS
P/J272A, Compiler cover interlock switch
P/J270, Front cover interlock switch
hc3m1188
P/J846—
1
1
hc3m1187
P/J896, Finisher PCB
P/J833, Stapler front corner sensor
hc3m1187
P/J847—
P/J848—P/J894, Middle-bin upper-limit sensor to
finisher PCB (via P/J887 and P/J896)
hc3m1187
1
P/J849—P/J894, Middle-bin lower-limit sensor to
finisher PCB (via P/J887 and P/J896)
hc3m1187
1
P/J850—P/J894, Lower-bin upper-limit sensor to
finisher PCB (via P/J830 and P/J896)
hc3m1187
1
P/J851—P/J894, Lower-bin lower-limit sensor to
finisher PCB (via P/J830 and P/J896)
1
Chapter 5. Locations 689
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
hc3m1186
P/J852—P/J266, Upper bin safety switch (in series
with middle bin safety switch) to finisher PCB (via
P/J296)
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 701 / 7
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (B2)
p. 712 / 18
p. 594 (A3)
p. 621 (A1)
p. 706 / 4
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (C2)
p. 700 / 5
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (B3)
p. 702 / 6
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (A1)
p. 702 / 4
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (A1)
p. 702 / 3
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (A1)
1
hc3m1185
P/J855M—P/J899, Compiler cover safety switch to
finisher PCB (via P/J891)
1
hc3m1187
P/J257M, Transport entrance sensor
(via P/J879 and P/J262)
P/J263, Transport exit sensor
(via P/J879 and P/J262)
hc3m1210
P/J854—Finisher PCB to
P/J855M—P/J893, Finisher interlock sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J299 and P/J881)
hc3m1187
1
P/J856—P/J894, Middle-bin paper sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J895, P/J872, and P/J896)
hc3m1187
1
P/J857—P/J894, Middle-bin half sensor to finisher PCB
(via P/J873 and P/J896)
hc3m1187
1
P/J858—P/J894, Middle-bin full sensor to finisher PCB
(via P/J873 and P/J896)
1
Chapter 5. Locations 690
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
hc3m1187
Figure / Reference
P/J859—P/J894, Lower-bin paper sensor to finisher
PCB (via P/J888, P/J874 and P/J896)
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 703 / 6
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (B1)
p. 703 / 4
p. 594 (B1)
p. 622 (B1)
p. 703 / 3
p. 594 (B1)
p. 622 (C1)
p. 704 / 4
p. 594 (B3)
p. 626 (A3)
p. 707 / 8
p. 710 / 15
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (A1)
p. 707 / 6
p. 710 / 14
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (B1)
p. 700 / 4
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (C1)
hc3m1187
1
P/J860—P/J894, Lower-bin half sensor to finisher PCB
(via P/J875 and P/J896)
hc3m1187
1
P/J861—P/J894, Lower-bin full sensor to finisher PCB
(via P/J875 and P/J896)
P/J862—P/J897, Stapler to finisher PCB (via P/J892)
hc3m1193
1
hc3m1197
1
P/J863—P/J898, Finisher PCB to eject clamp offset
motor
hc3m1197
1
P/J864—P/J898, Finisher PCB to set clamp motor to
finisher PCB
hc3m1188
1
P/J865—P/J899, Finisher PCB to stacker tray elevator
motor (via P/J889)
1
Chapter 5. Locations 691
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
P/J896, Finisher PCB
P/J838, Compiler bin exit sensor
hc3m1187
P/J866—
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 712 / 5
p. 594 (A3)
p. 623 (B4)
p. 705 / 7
p. 712 / 13
p. 594 (B4)
p. 626 (B3)
p. 706 / 5
p. 594 (B4)
p. 626 (C3)
p. 705 / 4
p. 712 / 4
p. 594 (B3)
p. 626 (C4)
p. 702 / 2
p. 710 / 8
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (A3, A4)
p. 703 / 2
p. 710 / 4
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (A2)
p. 710 / 7
p. 594 (A2)
p. 622 (A3)
1
hc3m1195
1
hc3m1192
P/J867—P/J897, Finisher PCB to tamper motor
P/J868—P/J897, Finisher PCB to end wall open/close
motor (via P/J890)
hc3m1192
1
P/J869—P/J897, Finisher PCB to compiler tray
up/down solenoid (via P/J890)
hc3m1192
1
P/J870—P/J898, Finisher PCB to Middle-bin motor
hc3m1192
1
P/J871—P/J898, Finisher PCB to stacker low motor to
finisher PCB
1
P/J894, Finisher PCB (via P/J896)
P/J856, Middle-bin paper sensor (via P/J895)
hc3m1187
P/J872—
1
Chapter 5. Locations 692
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
hc3m1191
P/J873—
P/J894, Finisher PCB (via P/J896)
P/J857, Middle-bin half sensor
P/J858, Middle-bin full sensor
P/J894, Finisher PCB (via P/J896)
P/J859, Lower-bin paper sensor (via P/J888)
P/J831, Lower-bin safety sensor (via P/J888)
p. 594 (A2)
p. 622 (A3)
p. 710 / 3
p. 594 (A2)
p. 622 (B3)
p. 710 / 2
p. 594 (B2)
p. 622 (B3)
p. 712 / 9
p. 594 (A3)
p. 623 (C2)
p. 712 / 6
p. 594 (B3)
p. 623 (C4)
p. 712 / 3
p. 594 (A3)
p. 623 (A2)
1
1
hc3m1190
P/J874—
p. 710 / 6
1
hc3m1191
P/J875—
P/J894, Finisher PCB (via P/J896)
P/J860, Lower-bin half sensor
P/J861, Lower-bin full sensor
1
hc3m1191
P/J877—
P/J896, Finisher PCB
P/J834, Stapler front edge sensor
P/J835, Stapler rear edge sensor
1
P/J896, Finisher PCB
P/J836, Pause (unload while run switch) and LED
hc3m1187
P/J878—
1
P/J896, Finisher PCB
P/J259, Printer full paper sensor (via P/J268)
P/J260, In-gate interlock sensor (via P/J268)
hc3m1191
P/J880—
1
Chapter 5. Locations 693
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
hc3m1191
P/J881—
P/J893, Finisher PCB
P/J837, Stacker tray ID sensor
P/J855M, Finisher interlock sensor
1
P/J896, Finisher PCB
P/J261, Transport interlock sensor (via P/J279)
hc3m1187
P/J882—
p. 700 / 8
p. 711 / 7
p. 594 (B2)
p. 624 (C2)
p. 712 / 11
p. 594 (A3)
p. 623 (A2)
p. 705 / 10
p. 711 / 12
p. 594 (B2)
p. 624 (A2)
p. 711 / 11
p. 594 (B2)
p. 624 (B1)
p. 711 / 8
p. 594 (B2)
p. 628 (C2)
p. 707 / 4
p. 712 / 14
p. 594 (B3)
p. 626 (B3)
1
P/J893, Finisher PCB
P/J839, Tamper home sensor
P/J840, End wall open sensor
hc3m1191
P/J883—
1
P/J893, Finisher PCB
P/J841, Eject clamp sensor
P/J842, Set clamp sensor
hc3m1191
P/J884—
1
P/J893, Finisher PCB
P/J843, Compiler paper sensor (via P/J280)
P/J844, Stacker offset home sensor (via P/J280)
hc3m1191
P/J885—
1
P/J886—P/J897, Finisher PCB to stapler transport
motor
hc3m1195
1
Chapter 5. Locations 694
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
hc3m1191
Figure / Reference
P/J887—Finisher PCB to middle-bin upper- and
lower-limit sensors
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
p. 710 / 5
p. 594 (A2)
p. 622 (A3)
p. 703 / 8
p. 594 (A2)
p. 622 (B2)
p. 703 / 6
p. 711 / 9
p. 594 (B3)
p. 628 (C2)
p. 712 / 7
p. 594 (B3)
p. 626 (C4)
p. 711 / 10
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (C2)
p. 704 / 5
p. 712 / 8
p. 594 (B3)
p. 626 (A2)
1
hc3m1187
P/J888—
P/J894, Finisher PCB (via P/J874)
P/J859, Lower-bin paper sensor
P/J831, Lower-bin safety sensor
1
P/J889—
hc3m1189
1
P/J273, Stacker upper limit switch
P/J274, Lower-bin limit switch
P/J899, Finisher PCB
hc3m1203
P/J890—
P/J897, Finisher PCB
P/J868, End wall open/close motor
P/J869, Compiler bin up/down solenoid
1
P/J892—
P/J897, Finisher PCB
P/J862, Stapler unit
1
1
hc3m1194
P/J899, Finisher PCB
P/J855M, Compiler cover safety switch
hc3m1188
P/J891—
Chapter 5. Locations 695
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
P/J893—Finisher PCB to
A1
hc3m1172
P/J839, Tamper home sensor (via P/J883)
P/J840, End wall open sensor (via P/J883)
P/J841, Eject clamp sensor (via P/J884)
P/J842, Set clamp sensor (via P/J884)
P/J843, Compiler paper sensor
(via P/J885, and P/J280)
P/J844, Stacker offset home sensor
(via P/J885, P/J280)
P/J837, Stacker bin ID sensor (via P/J881)
P/J855M, Finisher interlock sensor
(via P/J881, and P/J299)
p. 711 / 1
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (A4)
B1
Chapter 5. Locations 696
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
P/J894—Finisher PCB to
A1
hc3m1205
P/J856, Middle-bin paper sensor
(via P/J896, P/J872, and P/J895)
P/J857, Middle-bin half sensor
(via P/J896, and P/J873)
P/J858, Middle-bin full sensor
(via P/J896, and P/J873)
P/J848, Middle-bin upper limit sensor
(via P/J896, and P/J887)
P/J849, Middle-bin lower limit sensor
(via P/J896, and P/J887)
P/J859, Lower-bin paper sensor
(via P/J896, P/J874, and P/J888)
P/J831, Lower-bin safety sensor
(via P/J896, P/J874, and P/J888)
P/J860, Lower-bin half sensor
(via P/J896, and P/J875)
P/J861, Lower-bin full sensor
(via P/J896, and P/J875)
P/J850, Lower-bin upper limit sensor
(via P/J896, and P/J830)
P/J851, Lower-bin lower limit sensor
(via P/J896, and P/J830)
p. 594 (A2, B2)
p. 622 (A4)
p. 702 / 7
p. 594 (A2)
p. 622 (A2)
B1
hc3m1187
P/J895—
P/J894, MCU (via P/J872 and P/J896)
P/J856, Middle-bin paper sensor
p. 710 / 17
1
Chapter 5. Locations 697
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
P/J896—Finisher PCB to
A13
A1
hc3m1116
P/J259, Printer full paper sensor
(via P/J880 and P/J268)
P/J260, In-gate interlock sensor
(via P/J880 and P/J268)
P/J261, Transport interlock sensor
(via P/J882, and P/J279)
P/J838, Compiler tray exit sensor (via P/J866)
P/J832, Stack high sensor
(via P/J869, and P/J876)
P/J833, Stapler front corner sensor (via P/J847)
P/J834, Stapler front edge sensor (via P/J877)
P/J835, Stapler rear edge sensor (via P/J877)
P/J836, Pause (unload while run switch) and LED
(via P/J878)
p. 712 / 1
p. 594 (A3)
p. 623 (A1)
p. 712 / 2
p. 594 (B4, C4)
p. 626 (A1)
p. 625 (A2, B2)
p. 710 / 16
p. 594 (C2)
p. 628 (A3, A4)
B1
B13
P/J897—Finisher PCB to
13
1
hc3m1117
P/J862, Stapler unit (via P/J892)
P/J886, Stapler transport motor
P/J867, Tamper motor
P/J868, End wall open/close motor (via P/J890)
P/J869, Compiler tray up/down solenoid (via P/J890)
P/J270, Front cover interlock switch (via P/J845)
P/J271, Top cover interlock switch (via P/J845)
P/J272B, Compiler cover interlock switch
(via P/J845)
P/J870,
P/J871,
P/J863,
P/J864,
Stacker mid motor
Stacker low motor
Eject clamp offset motor
Set clamp motor
1
hc3m1204
P/J898—Finisher PCB to
Chapter 5. Locations 698
Table 226. Connectors—Finisher (continued)
Figure / Reference
Connector
Illustration
Location
Illustration
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
P/J273, Stacker upper limit switch (via P/J889)
P/J274, Lower-bin limit switch (via P/J889)
P/J865, Stacker bin elevator motor (via P/J889)
P/J855M, Compiler cover safety switch (via P/J891)
hc3m1198
P/J899—Finisher PCB to
p. 711 / 2
p. 594 (C2)
p. 625 (C4)
1
Chapter 5. Locations 699
P/J837
1
P/J881
P/J273
8
2
P/J889
6
P/J274
3
P/J855M
5
P/J299
7
4
P/J865
hc3m0700
Figure 32. Connectors, Finisher (1 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 700
P/J250
6
P/J253
5
4
P/J251
3
P/J252
2
P/J255
1
P/J254
8
P/J293
hc3m0701
7
P/J852
Figure 33. Connectors, Finisher (2 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 701
P/J856
6
P/J848
5
4
P/J857
3
P/J858
2
P/J870
1
P/J849
7
P/J895
hc3m0702
8
P/J285A
Figure 34. Connectors, Finisher (3 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 702
P/J859
6
P/J850
5
4
P/J860
3
P/J861
2
P/J871
1
P/J851
8
P/J888
7
P/J831
hc3m0703
Figure 35. Connectors, Finisher (4 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 703
P/J835
1
P/J834
2
5
3
P/J833
P/J892
4
P/J862
hc3m0704
Figure 36. Connectors, Finisher (5 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 704
P/J839
P/J838
P/J832
P/J838
1
2
3
2
NT
FRO
P/J832
3
5
P/J843
6
P/J840
T
N
O
FR
7
P/J867
6
P/J840
5
P/J843
4
8
P/J869
P/J876
7
P/J867
1
P/J839
P/J883
hc3m0705
10
P/J280
9
Figure 37. Connectors, Finisher (6 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 705
1 P/J271
2
P/J836
6
P/J270
3
P/J272A/B
4
P/J855
5
P/J868
hc3m0706
Figure 38. Connectors, Finisher (7 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 706
1 P/J844
P/J863 8
2 P/J841
3 P/J257
P/J842 7
P/J864 6
4 P/J886
5 P/J258
hc3m0707
Figure 39. Connectors, Finisher (8 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 707
7
P/J268
P/J268
8
P/J261
P/J262
2
9
3
P/J256M
P/J279
P/J262
8
7
P/J279
9
P/J260
P/J256M
1
3
6
4
P/J275M
5
P/J259
P/J263
hc3m0708
Figure 40. Connectors, Finisher (9 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 708
5
P/J846
4
P/J291
3
P/J2
2
P/J505
1
P/J502
hc3m0709
Figure 41. Connectors, Finisher (10 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 709
P/J296
13
P/J255
12
P/J292
11
P/J294
10
P/J295
9
P/J285B
P/J864
14 P/J863
15
20
P/J870
8
P/J872
7
P/J873
6
P/J887
5
P/J871
4
P/J874
3
P/J875
2
P/J830
1
16 P/J898
17 P/J894
18 P/J264
19 P/J266
hc3m0710
Figure 42. Connectors, Finisher (11 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 710
P/J297
6
P/J881 P/J885 P/J889
P/J891
8
10
7
9
P/J298 5
P/J258 4
P/J267 3
11 P/J884
P/J899 2
12 P/J883
P/J893 1
hc3m0711
Figure 43. Connectors, Finisher (12 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 711
P/J890
7
P/J878
6
P/J866
5
P/J869
4
P/J880
3
P/J897
2
P/J896
1
18
P/J854
17
P/J265
8
P/J892
9
P/J877
10
P/J845
11
P/J882
12
P/J847
13
P/J867
14
P/J886
16
P/J611
hc3m0712
Figure 44. Connectors, Finisher (13 of 13)
Chapter 5. Locations 712
Chapter 5. Locations 713
Fans, Lamps, and Motors
Table 227. Fans, Lamps, and Motors—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Item
Figure / Reference
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Duplex drive motor (M7)
p. 715 / 7
p. 593 (C4)
p. 613 (C4)
p. 1177 2040–5
Electronics fan (F2)
p. 715 / 1
p. 593 (A2)
p. 600 (A2)
p. 1103 200–6
Envelope motor (M11)
p. 715 / 6
p. 593 (B3)
p. 614 (B3)
p. 1184 3020–2
Fuser fan (F1)
p. 715 / 5
p. 593 (A2)
p. 604 (A1)
p. 1101 140–8
Fuser lamp 1 (L1)
p. 715 / 2
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (C3)
p. 1122 600–1¹
Fuser lamp 2 (L2)
p. 715 / 3
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (C3)
p. 1122 600–1¹
Laser motor (M9)
p. 715 / 12
p. 593 (A1)
p. 606 (A1)
p. 1126 800–1¹
LVPS fan (F3)
p. 715 / 11
p. 593 (B2)
p. 600 (B2)
p. 1168 1120–11¹
Main motor (M10)
p. 715 / 10
p. 593 (A2)
p. 604 (A1)
p. 1112 340–1
Offset motor (M8)
p. 715 / 4
p. 593 (B3)
p. 602 (C4)
p. 1117 510–5
Tray 1 lift motor (M1)
p. 715 / 8
p. 593 (B3)
p. 610 (B2)
p. 1149 1032–2
Tray 2 lift motor (M2)
p. 715 / 9
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (C3)
p. 1159 1042–2
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the item.
Chapter 5. Locations 714
2 Fuser Lamp (L1)
3 Fuser Lamp (L2)
Electronics Fan (F2)
1
4 Offset Motor (M8)
5 Fuser Fan (F1)
6 Envelope Motor (M11)
7 Duplex Drive Motor (M7)
8 Tray 1 Lift Motor (M1)
FR
ON
T
hc3m1384
9 Tray 2 Lift Motor (M2)
10 Main Motor (M10)
Laser Motor (M9) 12
11 LVPS Fan (F3)
Figure 45. Fans, Lamps, and Motors—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Chapter 5. Locations 715
Table 228. Motors—Input Unit
Item
Figure / Reference
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Feed motor (M6)
p. 717 / 3
p. 593 (C1)
p. 618 (B4)
p. 1194 4020–1
Tray 3 lift motor (M3)
p. 717 / 1
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (B4)
p. 1200 4030–1
Tray 4 lift motor (M4)
p. 717 / 2
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (B4)
p. 1200 4030–9
Tray 5 lift motor (M5)
p. 717 / 4
p. 593 (C1)
p. 618 (A4)
p. 1200 4030–9
Chapter 5. Locations 716
1 Tray 3 Lift Motor (M3)
2 Tray 4 Lift Motor (M4)
FR
ON
hc3m1385
T
3 Feed Motor (M6)
4 Tray 5 Lift Motor (M5)
Figure 46. Motors—Input Unit
Chapter 5. Locations 717
Table 229. Motors—Finisher
Item
Figure / Reference
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Eject clamp offset motor
p. 719 / 8
p. 594 (C1)
p. 628 (A1)
p. 1244 5080–2
Eject motor
p. 719 / 11
p. 594 (C4)
p. 627 (B4)
p. 1240 5060–12
End wall motor
p. 719 / 2
p. 594 (B4)
p. 626 (C4)
p. 1238 5050–21
Lower bin (3) motor
p. 719 / 6
p. 594 (C1)
p. 628 (A1)
p. 1268 5171–18
Middle bin (2) motor
p. 719 / 7
p. 594 (C1)
p. 628 (A1)
p. 1273 5181–18
Set clamp motor
p. 719 / 10
p. 594 (C1)
p. 628 (B1)
p. 1240 5060–5
Stacker bin elevator motor
p. 719 / 5
p. 594 (C1)
p. 628 (C1)
p. 1258 5130–15
Stapler transport motor
p. 719 / 4
p. 594 (B4)
p. 626 (B3)
p. 1240 5060–14
Tamper motor
p. 719 / 3
p. 594 (B4)
p. 626 (B3)
p. 1265 5160–1
Transport motor
p. 719 / 1
p. 594 (C4)
p. 626 (A4)
p. 1240 5060–1
Upper bin (1) motor
p. 719 / 9
p. 594 (C1)
p. 628 (B1)
p. 1279 5191–18
Chapter 5. Locations 718
Figure 47. Motors—Finisher
Eject Motor 11
1 Transport Motor
Set Clamp Motor 10
Upper Bin (1) Motor 9
Eject Clamp
Offset Motor
2 End Wall Motor
8
3 Tamper Motor
Middle Bin (2) Motor 7
4 Stapler Transport Motor
Lower Bin (3) Motor 6
NT
FRO
5 Stacker Bin Elevator Motor
hc3m1386
Chapter 5. Locations 719
Finisher Assemblies and Components
Table 230. Assemblies and Components—Finisher
Item
Figure / Reference
Compiler tray
p. 730 / 4
End wall (closed)
p. 730 / 8
End wall (open)
p. 731 / 1
Docking
p. 729 / 1
Paddle assemblies
p. 729 / 9 and 12
Stapler
p. 731 / 2
Transport assembly
p. 729 / 2
Chapter 5. Locations 720
Paper Path Views with Rollers, Sensors, and Switches
The following illustrations show the various paper paths of the printer, the input unit, and the finisher. Rollers,
sensors, and switches are included in each view.
Paper Path
Illustration
Printing from tray-1, tray-2, or the auxiliary tray, in simplex mode
Figure 48 on page 722
Printing from tray-1, tray-2, tray-3, tray-4, or tray-5 (showing rollers)
Figure 49 on page 723
Printing from tray-1, tray-2, tray-3, tray-4, or tray-5 (showing sensors and switches)
Figure 50 on page 724
Printing an envelope
Figure 51 on page 725
Printing side-1 in duplex mode
Figure 52 on page 726
Printing side-2 in duplex mode
Figure 53 on page 727
Exiting paper on to the face-down output bin or on to the face-up output bin in duplex mode
Figure 54 on page 728
Feeding paper through the finisher
Figure 55 on page 729
Finisher sensors
Figure 59 on page 733
Finisher sensors
Figure 60 on page 734
Feeding paper onto the compiler tray, in stapler mode
Figure 56 on page 730
Moving the stack into the stapler in stapler mode
Figure 57 on page 731
Ejecting the stack from the stapler in stapler mode
Figure 58 on page 732
Chapter 5. Locations 721
Duplex Exit Sensor 2
Fuser Pressure Roller 1
4 Face-Up Exit Sensor
5 Fuser Exit Sensor
6 Full Stack Sensor
Exit Gate
(up) 3
7 Offset Roller
Paper partially fed into output tray
Bias Transfer Roller (BTR) 27
Separation Roller 26
8
Fuser Heat Roller
9 Drum Printing side 1
Aux/Env Tray Separation Roller 25
Duplex Wait Sensor 24
10 Registration Roller
Aux Tray Feed Roller 23
11 Registration Sensor
12 Tray 1 Feed Roller
Aux Tray Pick Roller 22
13 Tray 1 Pick Roller
Tray 1
Aux Tray Size Sensor 21
Aux Tray No-Paper Sensor 20
Tray 2
hc3m0882
Aux Tray Restraint Pad 19
Aux/Env Feed Roller 18
15 Tray 2 Pick Roller
14 Tray 1 Separation Roller
16 Tray 2 Feed Roller
17 Tray 2 Separation Roller
Figure 48. Printing from Tray-1, Tray-2, or the Auxiliary Tray in Simplex Mode
Chapter 5. Locations 722
Separation Rollers (Face-Up Exit) 36
Exit Roller Asm 35
1 Offset Roller
Fuser Heat Roller 34
2 Separation Rollers (Face-Down Exit)
Fuser Pressure Roller 33
BTR 32
3 EP Cartridge
Registration Roller 31
4 Drum
Separation Roller 30
5 Tray 1 Feed Roller
Aux/Env Feed Roller 29
6 Tray 1 Pick Roller
Aux/Env Separation Roller 28
7 Tray 1 Separation Roller
8 Tray 2 Feed Roller
9 Tray 2 Pick Roller
Separation Roller 27
10 Tray 2 Separation Roller
Feed Roller 26
11 Tray 3 Feed Roller
Feed Roller 25
12 Tray 3 Pick Roller
Separation Roller 24
13 Tray 3 Separation Roller
Separation Roller 23
14 Tray 5 Feed Roller
15 Tray 5 Pick Roller
Drive Roller 22
16 Tray 5 Separation Roller
Tray 4 Feed Roller 21
Tray 4 Pick Roller 20
Tray 4 Separation Roller 19
17 Feed Roller
18 Separation Roller
hc3m0891
Figure 49. Printing from Tray-3, Tray-4, or Tray-5
Chapter 5. Locations 723
Full Stack Sensor 24
Face-Up Tray Exit Sensor 23
Fuser Exit Sensor 22
Registration Sensor 21
1 Tray 1 No-Paper Sensor
Tray 1 Level Sensor 20
Paper Path #1 Sensor 19
2 Tray 1 Paper Size Sensors
3 Tray 2 No-Paper Sensor
Tray 2 Level Sensor 18
4 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensors
Paper Path #2 Sensor 17
5 Tray 3 No-Paper Sensor
Tray 3 Level Sensor 16
6 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensors
Paper Path #3 Sensor 15
7 Tray 5 Level Sensor
Cover C Interlock 14
8 Tray 5 No-Paper Sensor
Paper Path #4 Sensor 13
Tray 4 Level Sensor 12
9
Tray 4 No-Paper Sensor 11
Tray 5 Paper Size Sensors
Tray 4 Paper Size Sensors 10
hc3m0892
Figure 50. Printing from Tray-3, Tray-4, or Tray-5
Chapter 5. Locations 724
Aux/Env Separation Roller 1
Envelope Feed Sensor 2
Envelope Separation Roller 3
Feed Roller 4
Envelope Stack 5
No-Paper Sensor 6
Envelope Size 7
Sensor Asm
Feed Belt 8
Envelope Feed Roller 9
Envelope Bottom Roller 10
Envelope Transport Roller 11
hc3m0883
12 Aux/Env Feed Roller
Figure 51. Printing an Envelope
Chapter 5. Locations 725
3 Offset Roller
Pressure Roller 1
Exit Gate
(up) 2
Paper partially fed into output tray
4 Heat Roller
Duplex Cover 8
Interlock
5 Drum Printing side 1
6 Bias Transfer Roller
7 Registration Roller
hc3m0884
Figure 52. Printing Side-1 in Duplex Mode
Chapter 5. Locations 726
Duplex
Exit Gate
(up)
1
Separation Rollers
(Face-Up)
Exit Gate
3
(down)
Exit Roller
2
5 Offset Roller (reverse)
Paper fed in reverse
4
Separation Rollers 14
(Face-Up Exit)
Duplex Exit Roller 13
Duplex Transport Roller 12
Printing side 2
6 Drum
7 Bias Transfer Roller (BTR)
Duplex Wait Roller 11
8 Registration Roller
Duplex Wait Sensor 10
hc3m0885
9 Duplex Separation Rollers
Figure 53. Printing Side-2 in Duplex Mode
Chapter 5. Locations 727
Duplex Exit
Gate (down)
Duplex Exit Sensor 2
Exit Roller 1
3
Exit Gate
(up for Output Tray)
(down for Face-Up Tray)
5
Exit Roller
4
6 Face Up Exit Sensor
7 Full Stack Sensor
8 Offset Roller (forward)
Two sided sheet fed to
the Face-Down Output Tray
Two sided sheet fed to
the Face Up Tray
Pressure Roller 11
Heat Roller 10
9 Fuser Exit Sensor
hc3m0886
Figure 54. Exiting Paper on to the Face-Down Output Bin or on to the Face-Up Output Bin in Duplex Mode
Chapter 5. Locations 728
Docking
Transport
1
2
18 Fuser
Separation Rollers (3 sets)
IOT Full Paper
Sensor 3
Transport Roller &
Separation Roller
6
4
Exit Roller
7
In-Gate
16
Transport Entrance Sensor
8
9 Paddle Asm
Transport Cover
Interlock 5
10 Separation Roller
11 Eject Roller
15
17
Compiler
Transport Rollers
14
(3 sets)
Transport Exit
Sensor
hc3m0887
Compiler Tray Exit 13
Sensor
12 Paddle Asm
Figure 55. Feeding Paper through the Finisher
Chapter 5. Locations 729
1 Stack Height Sensor
2 Stack Height Actuator
3 Eject Roller
(reverse rotation)
End Wall closed 8
4 Compiler Tray
5 Compiler Paper Sensor
6 End Wall Open Sensor
Stapler 7
hc3m0888
Figure 56. Feeding Paper onto the Compiler Tray in Stapler Mode
Chapter 5. Locations 730
1 End Wall open
Stapler 2
hc3m0889
Figure 57. Moving the Stack into the Stapler in Stapler Mode
Chapter 5. Locations 731
1 Stapled Paper Set
2 Eject Roller
(forward rotation)
hc3m0890
Figure 58. Ejecting the Stack from the Stapler in Stapler Mode
Chapter 5. Locations 732
Eject Clamp Sensor 20
Set Clamp Home Sensor 19
1 Stacker Offset Home Sensor
2 Stacker Bin ID Sensor
3 Stacker Upper Limit Switch
Tamper Home Sensor 18
Stapler Rear Edge Sensor 17
4 Stacker Height Sensor
In-Gate Sensor 16
5 Compiler Tray Exit Sensor
6 Endwall Open Sensor
7 Compiler Paper Sensor
Transport Cover Interlock Sensor 15
8 Stapler Front Corner Sensor
Transport Entrance Sensor 14
Transport Main Output 13
Full Paper Sensor
9 Stapler Front Edge Sensor
Transport Exit Sensor 12
Finisher Interlock Sensor 11
10 Stacker Lower Limit Switch
hc3m0894
Figure 59. Ejecting the Stack from the Stapler in Stapler Mode
Chapter 5. Locations 733
Upper Bin Upper Limit Sensor 43
21 Unload While Run Switch
Upper Bin Half Sensor 42
22 Top Cover Interlock Switch
Upper Bin Full Sensor 41
23 Compiler Cover Interlock Switch
Upper Bin Lower Limit Sensor 40
24 Compiler Cover Safety Switch
Middle Bin Upper Limit Sensor 39
25 Upper Bin Paper Sensor
Middle Bin Half Sensor 38
26 Front Cover Interlock Switch
Middle Bin Full Sensor 37
Middle Bin Lower Limit Sensor 36
27 Upper Bin Safety Switch
Lower Bin Upper Limit Sensor 35
28 Middle Bin Paper Sensor
Lower Bin Half Sensor 34
29 Lower Bin Paper Sensor
Lower Bin Full Sensor 33
30 Middle Bin Safety Switch
Lower Bin Lower Limit Sensor 32
31 Lower Bin Safety Switch
hc3m0895
Figure 60. Ejecting the Stack from the Stapler in Stapler Mode
Chapter 5. Locations 734
Rollers and Restraint Pad—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Table 231. Rollers and Restraint Pad—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Item
Figure / Reference
Offset roller
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
p. 1128 910–8
p. 722 / 7
p. 723 / 1
p. 727 / 5
Fuser bias transfer roller (BTR)
p. 1114 400–4
p. 722 / 27
p. 723 / 32
p. 727 / 7
Fuser heat roller
p. 1122 600–1¹
p. 722 / 8
p. 723 / 34
Fuser pressure roller
p. 1122 600–1¹
p. 722 / 1
p. 723 / 33
Fuser separation roller
p. 722 / 26
Registration roller
p. 1122 600–¹
p. 1130 920–3
p. 722 / 10
p. 723 / 31
p. 727 / 8
Tray 1 feed roller
p. 1154 1034–6
p. 722 / 12
p. 723 / 5
Tray 1 pick roller
p. 1154 1034–6
p. 722 / 13
p. 723 / 6
Tray 1 separation roller
p. 1151 1033–5
p. 722 / 14
p. 723 / 7
Chapter 5. Locations 735
Table 231. Rollers and Restraint Pad—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder (continued)
Item
Figure / Reference
Tray 2 pick roller
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
p. 1163 1044–6
p. 722 / 15
p. 723 / 9
Tray 2 feed roller
p. 1163 1044–6
p. 722 / 16
p. 723 / 8
Tray 2 separation roller
p. 1161 1043–5
p. 722 / 17
p. 723 / 10
Aux/env feed roller
p. 1151 1033–15
p. 722 / 18
p. 723 / 29
p. 725 / 12
Auxiliary tray restraint pad
p. 722 / 19
p. 1137 1011–6
Auxiliary tray pick roller
p. 722 / 22
p. 1134 1010–22
Auxiliary tray feed roller
p. 722 / 23
p. 1134 1010–9
Aux/env tray separation roller
p. 1147 1031–6
p. 722 / 25
p. 723 / 28
p. 725 / 1
Separation rollers (face-up exit)
p. 1120 520–7 and 8
p. 723 / 36
p. 727 / 3
Separation rollers (face-up exit) (with duplex)
p. 727 / 14
Exit roller (face-up)
p. 1175 2030–7 and 8
p. 1128 910–2
p. 723 / 35
p. 727 / 2
Separation roller
p. 723 / 27
p. 1156 1041–6
Feed roller
p. 723 / 26
p. 1161 1043–15
Chapter 5. Locations 736
Table 231. Rollers and Restraint Pad—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder (continued)
Item
Figure / Reference
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Separation rollers (face-down exit)
p. 723 / 2
p. 1117 510–10 and 11
Envelope separation roller
p. 725 / 3
p. 1187 3030–7
Envelope feed roller
p. 725 / 9
p. 1184 3020–26
Envelope feed roller
p. 725 / 4
p. 1187 3030–16
Envelope bottom roller
p. 725 / 10
p. 1184 3020–24
Envelope transport roller
p. 725 / 11
p. 1184 3020–27
Duplex separation rollers
p. 727 / 9
p. 1173 2020–4
Duplex wait roller
p. 727 / 11
p. 1179 2050–12
Duplex transport roller
p. 1179 2050–7
p. 727 / 12
Duplex exit roller
p. 727 / 13
p. 1179 2050–2
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the item.
Chapter 5. Locations 737
Rollers—Input Unit
Table 232. Rollers—Input Unit
Item
Figure / Reference
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Tray 3 feed roller
p. 723 / 11
p. 1206 4052–6
Tray 3 pick roller
p. 723 / 12
p. 1206 4052–6
Tray 3 separation roller
p. 723 / 13
p. 1204 x4051–5
Tray 5 feed roller
p. 723 / 14
p. 1220 4073–5
Tray 5 pick roller
p. 723 / 15
p. 1220 4073–5
Tray 5 separation roller
p. 723 / 16
p. 1215 4071–4
Feed roller
p. 723 / 17
p. 1218 4072–6
Separation roller
p. 723 / 18
p. 1218 4072–11
Tray 4 separation roller
p. 723 / 19
p. 1208 4061–4
Tray 4 pick roller
p. 723 / 20
p. 1210 4062–5
Tray 4 feed roller
p. 723 / 21
p. 1210 4062–5
Drive roller
p. 723 / 22
p. 1208 4061–13
Separation roller
p. 723 / 23
p. 1192 4012–3
Separation roller
p. 723 / 24
p. 1192 4012–3
Feed roller
p. 723 / 25
p. 1204 x4051–13
Chapter 5. Locations 738
Rollers—Finisher
Table 233. Rollers—Finisher
Item
Figure / Reference
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Finisher transport separation rollers (3 sets)
p. 729 / 4
p. 1247 5090–4
Finisher transport rollers (3 sets)
p. 729 / 15
p. 1247 5090–10
Finisher transport/separation rollers
p. 729 / 6
p. 1263 5150–16
Finisher exit roller
p. 729 / 7
p. 1236 5040–9
Finisher offset separation roller
p. 729 / 10
p. 1253 5110–14
Finisher eject roller
p. 1265 5160–45
p. 729 / 11
p. 730 / 3
p. 732 / 2
Chapter 5. Locations 739
Sensors and Switches—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Table 234. Sensors and Switches—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Item
Figure / Reference
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Fuser exit sensor
p. 724 / 22
p. 593 (A4)
p. 602 (A4)
p. 1117 510–12
Face-up exit sensor
p. 724 / 23
p. 593 (A4)
p. 602 (B4)
p. 1120 520–2
Full stack sensor
p. 724 / 24
p. 593 (A4)
p. 602 (B4)
p. 1117 510–16
Tray 1 size sensors
p. 724 / 2
p. 593 (B3)
p. 611 (A4)
p. 1149 1032–1
Registration sensor
p. 724 / 21
p. 593 (B3)
p. 611 (A4)
p. 1130 920–7
Tray 1 no-paper sensor
p. 724 / 1
p. 593 (B3)
p. 611 (B4)
p. 1149 1032–5
Tray 1 level sensor
p. 724 / 20
p. 593 (B3)
p. 611 (B4)
p. 1149 1032–5
Paper path #1 sensor
p. 724 / 19
p. 593 (C3)
p. 610 (B2)
p. 1147 1031–12
Paper path #2 sensor
p. 724 / 17
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (B4)
p. 1156 1041–19
Tray 2 size sensors
p. 724 / 4
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (A3)
p. 1159 1042–1
Tray 2 level sensor
p. 724 / 18
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (A3)
p. 1159 1042–5
Tray 2 no-paper sensor
p. 724 / 3
p. 593 (C2)
p. 612 (A3)
p. 1159 1042–5
SOS sensor
p. 593 (A2)
p. 606 (A2)
p. 1126 800–1¹
Toner empty sensor
p. 593 (A2)
p. 609 (A1)
p. 1114 400–14
Duplex exit sensor
p. 728 / 2
p. 593 (C4)
p. 613 (A4)
p. 1175 2030–9
Duplex wait sensor
p. 727 / 10
p. 593 (C4)
p. 613 (B4)
p. 1179 2050–15
Envelope feeder no-paper sensor
p. 725 / 6
p. 593 (B4)
p. 610 (B4)
p. 1184 3020–19
Envelope feeder size sensor
p. 725 / 7
p. 593 (B4)
p. 610 (B4)
p. 1182 3010–16
Envelope feed sensor
p. 725 / 2
p. 593 (B4)
p. 610 (C4)
p. 1187 3030–5
Auxiliary tray size sensor
p. 722 / 21
p. 593 (B4)
p. 610 (A4)
p. 1141 1013–4
Auxiliary tray no-paper sensor
p. 593 (B4)
p. 610 (A4)
p. 1134 1010–10
Duplex interlock switch
p. 593 (C4)
p. 613 (A4)
p. 1179 2050–16
Chapter 5. Locations 740
Table 234. Sensors and Switches—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder (continued)
Item
Figure / Reference
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Main power switch
p. 593 (B1)
p. 600 (B1)
p. 1168 1120–7
Left cover interlock switch
p. 593 (A2)
p. 604 (B1)
p. 1165 1110–10
Cover interlock switch 1
p. 593 (A2)
p. 604 (B1)
p. 1114 400–23
EP interlock switch 2
p. 593 (A2)
p. 606 (B2)
p. 1114 400–23
EP interlock switch 1
p. 593 (A2)
p. 606 (B2)
p. 1114 400–23
Chapter 5. Locations 741
Sensors and Switches—Input Unit
Table 235. Sensors and Switches—Input Unit
Item
Figure / Reference
Left cover interlock switch
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (A4)
p. 1192 4012–9
Paper path #4 sensor
p. 724 / 13
p. 593 (C1)
p. 618 (B4)
p. 1202 4040–7
Tray 5 paper level sensor
p. 724 / 7
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (C4)
p. 1202 4040–3
Tray 5 no-paper sensor
p. 724 / 8
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (C4)
p. 1202 4040–3
Tray 5 paper size sensors
p. 724 / 9
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (C4)
p. 1200 4030–8
Tray 4 paper level sensor
p. 724 / 12
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (B4)
p. 1200 4030–4
Tray 4 no-paper sensor
p. 724 / 11
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (B4)
p. 1200 4030–4
Tray 4 paper size sensors
p. 724 / 10
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (B4)
p. 1200 4030–8
Tray 3 paper size sensors
p. 724 / 6
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (A4)
p. 1200 4030–7
Tray 3 paper level sensor
p. 724 / 16
p. 593 (C1)
p. 619 (A4)
p. 1200 4030–4
Tray 3 no-paper sensor
p. 724 / 5
p. 593 (B1)
p. 619 (A4)
p. 1200 4030–4
Paper path #3 sensor
p. 724 / 15
p. 593 (B1)
p. 617 (A4)
p. 1192 4012–10
Chapter 5. Locations 742
Sensors and Switches—Finisher
Table 236. Sensors and Switches—Finisher
Item
Figure / Reference
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Upper-bin paper sensor
p. 734 / 25
p. 594 (A1)
p. 620 (A1)
p. 1279 5191–5
Upper-bin half sensor
p. 734 / 42
p. 594 (A1)
p. 620 (A1)
p. 1279 5191–26
Upper-bin full sensor
p. 734 / 41
p. 594 (A1)
p. 620 (B1)
p. 1279 5191–26
Upper-bin lower limit sensor
p. 734 / 40
p. 594 (A1)
p. 620 (B1)
p. 1279 5191–5
Upper-bin upper limit sensor
p. 734 / 43
p. 594 (A1)
p. 620 (B1)
p. 1279 5191–5
Middle-bin paper sensor
p. 734 / 28
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (A1)
p. 1273 5181–5
Middle-bin half sensor
p. 734 / 38
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (A1)
p. 1273 5181–26
Middle-bin full sensor
p. 734 / 37
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (A1)
p. 1273 5181–26
Middle-bin upper-limit sensor
p. 734 / 39
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (A1)
p. 1273 5181–5
Middle-bin lower-limit sensor
p. 734 / 36
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (B1)
p. 1273 5181–5
Lower-bin paper sensor
p. 734 / 29
p. 594 (A1)
p. 622 (B1)
p. 1268 5171–5
Lower-bin safety sensor
p. 734 / 31
p. 594 (C1)
p. 622 (B1)
p. 1268 5171–9
Lower-bin half sensor
p. 734 / 34
p. 594 (B1)
p. 622 (C1)
p. 1268 5171–9
Lower-bin full sensor
p. 734 / 33
p. 594 (B1)
p. 622 (C1)
p. 1268 5171–9
Lower-bin upper-limit sensor
p. 734 / 35
p. 594 (B1)
p. 622 (C1)
p. 1268 5171–5
Lower-bin lower-limit sensor
p. 734 / 32
p. 594 (B1)
p. 622 (C1)
p. 1268 5171–5
Tamper home sensor
p. 733 / 18
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (A1)
p. 1265 5160–8
End wall open sensor
p. 733 / 6
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (A1)
p. 1265 5160–12
Eject clamp sensor
p. 733 / 20
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (B1)
p. 1244 5080–5
Set clamp home sensor
p. 733 / 19
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (B1)
p. 1240 5060–11
Compiler paper sensor
p. 733 / 7
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (B1)
p. 1265 5160–12
Offset home sensor
p. 733 / 1
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (B1)
p. 1244 5080–6
Chapter 5. Locations 743
Table 236. Sensors and Switches—Finisher (continued)
Item
Figure / Reference
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
Stacker bin ID sensor
p. 733 / 2
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (C1)
p. 1256 5120–8A
Finisher interlock sensor
p. 733 / 11
p. 594 (B1)
p. 624 (C1)
p. 1256 5120–8B
Transport entrance sensor
p. 733 / 14
p. 594 (A4)
p. 621 (A4)
p. 1247 5090–13
Transport exit sensor
p. 733 / 12
p. 594 (A4)
p. 621 (A4)
p. 1247 5090–13
Transport main output full stack
sensor
p. 733 / 13
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (A4)
p. 1247 5090–19
In-gate sensor
p. 733 / 16
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (A4)
p. 1250 5100–17
Transport cover interlock sensor
p. 733 / 15
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (A4)
p. 1247 5090–29
Compiler tray exit sensor
p. 733 / 5
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (B4)
p. 1263 5150–11
Stack height sensor
p. 733 / 4
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (B4)
p. 1253 5110–7
Stapler front corner sensor
p. 733 / 8
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (B4)
p. 1261 5140–13
Stapler front edge sensor
p. 733 / 9
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (C4)
p. 1261 5140–13
Stapler rear edge sensor
p. 733 / 17
p. 594 (A4)
p. 623 (C4)
p. 1261 5140–13
Stacker upper limit switch
p. 733 / 3
p. 594 (C1)
p. 628 (C1)
p. 1256 5120–3
Lower-bin limit switch
p. 733 / 10
p. 594 (C1)
p. 628 (C1)
p. 1256 5120–3
Compiler cover safety switch
p. 734 / 4
p. 594 (C1)
p. 628 (C1)
p. 1238 5050–7A
Unload while run switch
p. 734 / 1
p. 594 (B4)
p. 623 (C4)
p. 1238 5050–22
Front cover interlock switch
p. 734 / 26
p. 594 (C4)
p. 625 (B1)
p. 1238 5050–1
Top cover interlock switch
p. 734 / 22
p. 594 (C4)
p. 625 (B1)
p. 1238 5050–1
Compiler cover interlock switch
p. 734 / 23
p. 594 (C4)
p. 625 (B1)
p. 1238 5050–7B
Upper bin safety switch
p. 734 / 27
p. 594 (C1)
p. 625 (B1)
p. 1282 5192–25
Middle bin safety switch
p. 734 / 30
p. 594 (C1)
p. 625 (B1)
p. 1276 5182–25
¹ An assembly or a kit containing the item.
Chapter 5. Locations 744
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)
Table 237. Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)
Item
Board Layout
Figure /
Reference
Wiring Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Parts Catalog
Asm.–Index
AC drive
—
p. 746 / 4
p. 593 (B2)
p. 1165 1110–1
Controller
p. 747
p. 746 / 3
p. 593 (A1)
p. 1103 200–13
Interface
—
p. 746 / 2
p. 593 (B2)
p. 1103 200–3
HVPS
p. 749
p. 746 / 8
p. 593 (A2)
p. 1165 1110–4
LVPS
—
p. 746 / 10
p. 593 (B2)
p. 1168 1120–11
MCU
p. 748
p. 746 / 7
p. 593 (A3)
p. 1165 1110–5
Noise filter
—
p. 746 / 9
p. 593 (B1)
p. 1168 1120–2
Operator panel (with overlay)
—
p. 746 / 1
p. 593 (B1)
p. 1101 140–99
Duplex
—
p. 746 / 5
p. 593 (C3)
p. 1177 2040–1
Envelope feeder
—
p. 746 / 6
p. 593 (B4)
Input unit
p. 751
p. 750 / 1
p. 593 (B2)
p. 614 (A2)
p. 1184 3020–17
p. 1194 4020–10
p. 615
p. 617
p. 618
Tray 3 paper size
—
p. 750 / 3
p. 593 (B2)
p. 619 ()
p. 1200 4030–7
Tray 4 and 5 paper size
—
p. 750 / 2
p. 593 (C4)
p. 619 ()
p. 1200 4030–8
Finisher
p. 753
p. 752 / 1
p. 594 (A2)
p. 619–628
p. 1232 5030–2
Finisher LVPS
—
p. 752 / 2
p. 594 (C3)
p. 625 (C2)
p. 1232 5030–4
Chapter 5. Locations 745
3 Controller PCB
4 AC Drive PCB
Interface PCB 2
Operator Panel PCB 1
5 Duplex PCB
6
Envelope Feeder PCB
10
hc3m1381
LVPS
(Under Interface PCB)
FR
ON
T
9
Noise Filter PCB
7 MCU PCB
8
HVPS
(Behind MCU PCB)
Figure 61. Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)—Printer, Duplex, and Env. Feeder
Chapter 5. Locations 746
DRAM SIMMs
(Either Slot)
Flash memory,
DBCS SIMMs
or IPDS SIMMs
(Any SIMM in any
of 4 Slots)
45°
hc3m0484
Figure 62. Printer Controller
Chapter 5. Locations 747
P400
P457
1
2
P458 P460
3
4
P454
5
6 P127
TP13
DGND
7 P462
F1
8 P456
9 P410
10 P401
CR2
RESET
11 P461
12 P402
13 P459
14 P405
15 P403
TP14
DGND
18 P408 17 P406 16 P404
hc3m0861
Figure 63. MCU PCB
Chapter 5. Locations 748
4
1 CB
P500
2 DTS
3 BTR
hc3m0866
Figure 64. Printer HVPS
Chapter 5. Locations 749
hc3m1382
FR
ON
T
1 Input Unit PCB
3 Tray 3
Paper Size PCB
2 Tray 4 and 5
Paper Size PCB
Figure 65. Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)—Input Unit
Chapter 5. Locations 750
1 P484
2 P480
3 P481
P485 7
4 P217
P483 6
5 P486
hc3m0867
5 P482
Figure 66. Input Unit PCB
Chapter 5. Locations 751
Finisher PCB 1
LVPS PCB 2
NT
FRO
hc3m1383
Figure 67. Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)—Finisher
Chapter 5. Locations 752
F4
F3
TP2
GND
5 P896
F5
4 P897
2 P899 3 P893
F8
6 P265
CR9
P898 12
CR10
1 P267
7 P854
F10
F6
P894 11
F11
F9
P264 10
TP4
VCC
TP5
RST
TP1
GND
CR7
F7
FL3
CR8
F2
P266 9
F1
P291 8
TP3
GND
hc3m0865
Figure 68. Finisher PCB
Chapter 5. Locations 753
Other
Table 238. Other
Item
Parts Catalog Asm.–Index
Contact plate D
p. 1114, 400–27
Contact plate C
p. 1114, 400–28
Connector, EP cartridge
p. 1114, 400–16
CB (connector block) asm.
p. 1114, 400–22
Chapter 5. Locations 754
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text and Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Different Types of Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Removal Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Covers, Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EP (Toner) Cartridge Door and Front Cover, Printer .
Fuser Cover, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Lower Cover, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Middle Cover, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Upper Cover, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Lower Cover, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Upper Cover, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Cover, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top Cover, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Tray and Mounting Bracket, Printer . . . . .
Controller PCB, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Drive, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMMs, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full Stack Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HVPS, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser Exit Sensor, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lower Feed Roller Asm., Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
LVPS, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Drive Motor (M10), Printer . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU PCB, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset/Exit Asm., Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 1999
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.761
.761
.761
.762
.763
.763
.765
.770
.771
.772
.777
.778
.779
.780
.783
.788
.790
.791
.792
.793
.795
.797
.798
.800
.804
.807
.813
.817
755
Offset/Exit Drive, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset Motor, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset Roller, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registration Chute, Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registration Clutch, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registration Roller, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Separation Roller, Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex Asm. Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex Asm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Envelope Feeder Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . .
Envelope Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2500-Sheet Input Unit Removal Procedures. . . . . .
Covers, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Cover, Tray 4, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . .
Front Cover, Tray 5, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . .
Front Lower Cover Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Cover Asm., Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Cover, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cover, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Cover, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Unit Asm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Belt, Input Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feed Clutch, Tray 3, 4, and 5, Input Unit . . . . .
Feed Motor, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interlock Switch, Left Cover, Input Unit . . . . . .
Lift Motor, Trays 3, 4, and 5, Input Unit . . . . .
Paper Level Sensor, Trays 3, 4, and 5, Input Unit
Paper Size PCB, Trays 4 and 5, Input Unit. . . .
PCB, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No-Paper Actuator, Trays 3, 4 and 5, Input Unit .
No-Paper Sensor, Trays 3, 4, and 5, Input Unit .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.818
.819
.820
.822
.824
.826
.831
.833
.834
.837
.838
.840
.841
.841
.842
.843
.844
.846
.847
.848
.849
.852
.856
.857
.860
.861
.862
.864
.865
.866
.868
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 756
Tray 3, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feed Asm., Tray 3, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feed, Pinch, and Separation Rollers, Tray 3, Input Unit
Paper Path Sensor 3, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Size Sensor, Tray 3, Input Unit. . . . . . . . . .
Separation Asm., Tray 3, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 4, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feed Asm., Tray 4, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feed Roller Asm., Tray 4, Input Unit. . . . . . . . . . .
Feed, Pinch, and Separation Rollers, Tray 4, Input Unit .
Paper Path Sensor 4, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . .
Separation Asm., Tray 4, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 5, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feed Asm., Tray 5, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feed, Pinch, and Separation Rollers, Tray 5, Input Unit
Separation Asm., Tray 5, Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . .
2000-Sheet Finisher Removal Procedures. . . . . . . . . .
Covers, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Docking Cover Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eject Cover, Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Cover, Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Inner Cover, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Lower Cover, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Harness Cover, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Cover, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Lower Cover, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCB Cover and Connector Cover, Finisher . . . . . . .
Rack Cover, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cover, Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear, Lower Cover, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top Cover Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.870
.870
.874
.876
.877
.878
.884
.885
.887
.893
.895
.896
.898
.899
.901
.903
.905
.906
.906
.907
.908
.909
.910
.911
.912
.913
.914
.916
.919
.920
.921
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 757
Transport Top Cover Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bins, Lower and Middle, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Belts, Lower Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elevator Motor, Lower Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Cover, Lower and Middle Bins, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Half and Full Sensors, Lower and Middle Bins, Finisher. . . . . . . . . .
Paper Sensor, Lower Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Sensors, Lower and Middle Bins, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upper and Lower Limit Paper Sensors, Lower and Middle Bins, Finisher .
Bin Asm., Middle, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Belts, Middle Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elevator Motor, Middle Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Sensor, Middle Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bin Asm., Upper, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Belts, Upper Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elevator Motor, Upper Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Cover, Upper Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Half and Full Sensors, Upper Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Sensor, Upper Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Switch, Upper Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upper and Lower Limit Paper Sensors, Upper Bin, Finisher. . . . . . . .
Upper Bin, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finisher Asm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compiler Tray Exit Sensor, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compiler Tray Solenoid Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compiler Paper Sensor, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End Wall Motor, Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End Wall Open Sensor, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eject Bracket Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eject Chute Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.922
.923
.925
.927
.931
.933
.934
.936
.938
.940
.942
.944
.948
.950
.952
.954
.958
.960
.961
.963
.965
.966
.968
.970
.973
.974
.975
.977
.979
.980
.982
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 758
Eject Clamp Offset Motor, Finisher . . . . . . . .
Eject Clamp Sensor, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . .
Eject Motor, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eject Pinch Roller Shaft Asm., Finisher . . . . . .
Eject Shaft Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Shaft, Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LVPS, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interlock Sensor and Actuator, Finisher . . . . . .
Sensor, In-Gate, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interlock Sensor, Transport Cover, Finisher . . . .
Interlocks, Compiler Cover and Safety, Finisher . .
Switches, Interlock, Top and Front Cover, Finisher
In-Gate Actuator, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-Gate Solenoid Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . .
In-Gate Support Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . .
Offset Home Sensor, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . .
Paddle Drive Belt, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paddle Shaft Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pause (Unload While Run) Switch, Finisher . . . .
PCB Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Paper Full Sensor, Finisher . . . . . . . .
Roller Unit, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Clamp Home Sensor, Finisher. . . . . . . . .
Set Clamp Motor Drive Belt, Finisher . . . . . . .
Set Clamp Motor, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stack Height Sensor, Finisher . . . . . . . . . . .
Stacker Bin ID Sensor, Finisher . . . . . . . . . .
Stacker Bin Elevator Motor, Finisher. . . . . . . .
Stacker Lower Limit Switch, Finisher . . . . . . .
Stacker Upper Limit Switch, Finisher . . . . . . .
Stapler Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .984
. .986
. .988
. .990
. .992
. .996
. .998
. 1000
.
. 1002
.
. 1003
.
. 1005
.
. 1007
.
. 1009
.
. 1010
.
. 1012
.
. 1013
.
. 1014
.
. 1016
.
. 1020
.
. 1021
.
. 1023
.
. 1025
.
. 1026
.
. 1027
.
. 1028
.
. 1030
.
. 1031
.
. 1033
.
. 1035
.
. 1036
.
. 1038
.
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 759
Stapler Position Sensors, Finisher . . .
Stapler Rail Belt, Finisher . . . . . . .
Stapler Transport Motor Belt, Finisher .
Stapler Transport Motor, Finisher . . .
Tamper Home Sensor, Finisher . . . .
Tamper Motor Drive Belt, Finisher . . .
Tamper Motor, Finisher . . . . . . . .
Transport Asm. Drive Belt, Finisher . .
Transport Asm., Finisher . . . . . . . .
Transport Entrance Sensor, Finisher. .
Transport Exit Sensor, Finisher . . . .
Transport Motor, Finisher . . . . . . .
Transport Motor Drive Belt, Finisher . .
Transport Roller, Finisher . . . . . . .
Upper Exit Chute Asm., Finisher. . . .
Upper Transport Chute Asm., Finisher.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1040
.
. 1045
.
. 1049
.
. 1050
.
. 1051
.
. 1053
.
. 1054
.
. 1057
.
. 1061
.
. 1065
.
. 1067
.
. 1069
.
. 1070
.
. 1072
.
. 1076
.
. 1078
.
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 760
General Information
Text and Illustrations
Numeric callouts in text use a bold number enclosed in square brackets. The corresponding callout number in the
illustration is enclosed in a circle. Unless otherwise noted, all text callouts refer to the illustration to the left of that
text. The callout numbering sequence begins at 1 [1] for each procedure.
Different Types of Screws
Look at all screws as you remove them. The type screw shown at [1] threads in to plastic; the type at [2] threads
in to metal. Some parts require longer or shorter screws than other parts; when installing a part, ensure that you
use the correct screw. When installing a cover, ensure that all tabs and cover edges are correctly seated and the
cover is flat against the mounting brackets and the holes are centered, not as shown at [3].
2
1
3
hc3m1623
Used for Plastic
hc3m1624
Used for metal
hc3m1663
Holes Not Aligned
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 761
Printer Removal Procedures
For a complete listing of printer removal procedures, go to the “Contents” under “Chapter 6. Removal Procedures”
on page 755.
For other removal procedures, see
“Duplex Asm. Removal Procedure” on page 833
“Envelope Feeder Removal Procedure” on page 837
“2500-Sheet Input Unit Removal Procedures” on page 840
“2000-Sheet Finisher Removal Procedures” on page 905
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 762
Covers, Printer
EP (Toner) Cartridge Door and Front Cover, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 110–1, PN 90H3614, Table 242 on page 1095
Removal Procedure
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 110–3, PN 90H3616, Table 242 on page 1095
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the fuser cover (see “Fuser
Cover, Printer” on page 765).
1
3
3. Remove the top cover (see “Top
Cover, Printer” on page 780).
4. Remove the right cover (see “Right
Cover, Printer” on page 779).
2
5. Perform the following:
a. Remove spring [1].
b. Slide the EP door [2] up to remove
it from the front cover [3].
c. Remove screw [4].
4
hc3m1607
Go to step 6 on page 764.
Front, EP Door Open with No EP Cartridge
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 763
6. Remove screw [5], and the front cover
[6].
Reverse the removal procedure.
6
5
hc3m1661
Right Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 764
Fuser Cover, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 140–9, PN 90H3613, Table 245 on page 1101
Removal
Procedure
CAUTION:
<2-25> High Temperature;
switch off the printer and allow
at least 20 minutes for parts in
this area to cool before
handling.
1
hc3m1651
1. Switch off printer power and unplug the
power cord.
2. Open the duplex assembly [1], and
then the left cover [2].
Go to step 3 on page 766.
2
hc3m1653
Left Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 765
3. Remove screw [3] from the left side of
the fuser cover [4], and then open the
EP cartridge door and remove screw
[5].
4
5
Go to step 4 on page 767.
3
hc3m1672
Left Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 766
4. Review the next step and 6 on
page 768. Perform these 2 steps
together.
6
5. From the left side of the printer, grasp
the fuser cover [6] and carefully pivot it
up.
Go to step 6 on page 768.
hc3m1614
Left Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 767
6. Unlatch the tabs at [7], [8], and [9]
removing the fuser cover.
See the “Installation Note” on
page 769 before installing the fuser cover.
9
7
8
hc3m1615
Top Left
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 768
Link to Fuser Cover, Printer removal procedure
Installation
Note
To install the fuser cover, hook tabs [7],
and then carefully pivot the cover down.
Ensure that tabs [7], [8], and [9] (shown in
the previous illustration) are correctly
positioned.
8
7
hc3m1616
Top Left (Near the Rear)
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 769
Left Lower Cover, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 1041–1, PN 90H3662, Table 270 on page 1156
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Open the left lower cover at B [1].
3. Remove the 2 screws [2] holding the
cover to the printer frame and remove
the cover.
Reverse the removal procedure.
1
2
hc3m0897
Left End
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 770
Left Middle Cover, Printer
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the auxiliary tray mounting
bracket [1] (see “Auxiliary Tray and
Mounting Bracket, Printer” on
page 783).
3. Remove the 4 screws [2] holding the
left middle cover to the printer frame,
and remove the cover.
Reverse the removal procedure.
2
1
hc3m0898
Left End
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 771
Left Upper Cover, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 120–3, PN 90H3670, Table 243 on page 1097
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Open paper tray 1.
3. Remove the duplex assembly (see
“Duplex Asm.” on page 834).
4. Remove the rear upper cover (see
“Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
5. Open the left cover [1].
Go to page 773.
1
hc3m1608
Left Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 772
Attention: Use care in 6 not to damage
the left-cover holding straps.
6. Remove the 2 screws [2] and [3] that
hold the left-cover holding straps to
the left cover.
Go to step 7 on page 774.
3
2
hc3m1611
Left Cover Strap, Rear
hc3m1612
Left Cover Strap, Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 773
Attention: Use care in 7 not to damage
the left-cover holding straps.
7. Using a small, flat-blade screwdriver,
pull the front claw hook [5] out of the
notch in the front hinge pin [6] and
push the hinge pin [7] far enough
toward the front to release the front of
the left cover [4].
4
8
5
Go to step 8 on page 775.
7
6
9
hc3m1670
Left Cover, Front Hinge Pin
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 774
8. Locate, but do not remove, the rear
lever [10] of the rear hinge pin.
Go to step 9 on page 776.
10
hc3m1673
Left Cover, Rear Hinge Pin
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 775
Attention: Use care in 9 not to damage
the left-cover holding straps.
9. Pull the rear claw hook [11] out of the
notch [12] in the rear hinge pin and
pull the rear hinge pin far enough
toward the rear to release the rear of
the left cover.
12
Installation Note
When installing the rear hinge pin,
position it vertically and move the left
cover up and down slightly, so that the flat
on the pin matches and enters the hole in
the left cover.
11
hc3m1610
Left Cover, Rear Hinge Pin
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 776
Rear Lower Cover, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 130–4, PN 90H3622, Table 244 on page 1099
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord [1].
2. Unplug the following power cords:
v Input unit [2]
v Finisher [3]
v Duplex [4]
3. Remove the 2 screws [5] and remove
the cover.
1
2
3
Removal Procedure
4
Reverse the removal procedure.
5
5
hc3m0896
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 777
Rear Upper Cover, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 130–3, PN 90H3621, Table 244 on page 1099
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Disconnect all option plugs from the
rear of the printer.
3. Remove the 2 screws [1], and lift
remove the rear cover [2] from the
printer.
Installation Note
1
When installing the rear cover, ensure
that no wires are trapped between the
lower left corner of the cover [2] and the
frame.
2
hc3m1618
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 778
Right Cover, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 130–2, PN 90H3620, Table 244 on page 1099
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the 2 screws [2] holding the
right side of the top cover [1].
3. If the finisher is attached, remove the
bracket asm. and 2 thumbscrews at
the same location as [4] (see 5011-17
on p. 1226).
1
4. Remove the 2 screws [4], and lift the
top cover enough to allow you to
remove the right cover [3].
3
2
Removal Procedure
Reverse the removal procedure.
4
hc3m1649
Right Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 779
Top Cover, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 140–1, PN 90H3608, Table 245 on page 1101
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the fuser cover (see “Fuser
Cover, Printer” on page 765).
1
3. Remove the 2 screws [2] holding the
right side of the top cover [1].
Go to step 4 on page 781.
2
hc3m1647
Right Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 780
4.
3
hc3m1658
Lift the top cover a few inches, and
disconnect the following:
a. From the front, underside of the
top cover, disconnect the
operator’s panel connector [3].
b. From the rear, top of the printer
(under the top cover), disconnect
the fan connector [4], and remove
the top cover.
See the “Installation Note” on
page 782 before installing the parts.
4
hc3m1656
Front, Under-Side of Top Cover and Top, Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 781
Link to Top Cover, Printer removal procedure
Installation Note
Carefully position the tabs [5], [6], and [7],
as you install the cover.
6
5
7
hc3m1617
Top Right
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 782
Auxiliary Tray and Mounting Bracket, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 1013–1, PN 90H3658, Table 263 on page 1141
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Close the auxiliary tray [1].
Go to step 3 on page 784.
1
hc3m1625
Auxiliary Tray, from Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 783
3. Grasp the underside of the tray in the
areas of [2] and [3], and pull the tray
[4] out from the mounting bracket [5]
(wiggle the tray; some force may be
required).
4
Go to step 4 on page 785.
2
3
5
hc3m1669
Auxiliary Tray, from the Under Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 784
4. Remove the rear upper cover (see
“Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
5. Unwrap the wire cable restraint [2]
and disconnect connector [3].
1
Go to step 6 on page 786.
2
3
hc3m1619
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 785
6. Remove 2 screws [4] and [5] from the
rear of the auxiliary tray mounting
bracket [6], and 2 screws [7] and [8]
from the front of the bracket. Pull out
to remove the bracket from the printer.
4
5
6
See the “Installation Note” on
page 787 before installing the parts.
7
8
hc3m1621
Left Side, Auxiliary Tray Mounting Bracket
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 786
Link to Auxiliary Tray and Mounting Bracket, Printer removal procedure
Installation Note
When installing the Auxiliary Tray and
Mounting Bracket, Printer, ensure that the
wire cable restraint [2] is wrapped so that
the wires are clear of the gear [1].
4
5
6
7
8
hc3m1621
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 787
Controller PCB, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 200–99, PN 90H4207, Table 246 on page 1103
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the interface cables from the
connectors on the controller drawer
panel.
3. Loosen the 2 thumbscrews that hold
the controller drawer panel to the
controller box.
Attention: This is an ESD sensitive area.
See “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Procedures” on page 23 before working
with parts that are sensitive to ESD.
hc3m0346
4. Slide the controller out of the
controller box, and place the controller
PCB and the attached drawer panel
on a flat, non-conductive surface.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 789 before installing the parts.
Top Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 788
Link to Controller PCB, Printer removal procedure
Installation Procedure
Attention: This is an ESD sensitive area.
See “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Procedures” on page 23 before working
with parts that are sensitive to ESD.
1. Place the controller PCB and the
attached drawer panel on a flat,
non-conductive surface.
2. Position the drawer panel so the three
legs are under the controller PCB and
the interface plug fits through the
cutout in the panel.
3. Slide the controller into the controller
box, and tighten the 2 thumbscrews.
4. Connect all necessary interface
cables.
hc3m0455
Top Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 789
Hard Drive, Printer
Link to “Optional Features” on page 1091
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
Attention: This is an ESD sensitive area.
See “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Procedures” on page 23 before working
with parts that are sensitive to ESD.
1
2
2. Perform the “Controller PCB, Printer”
on page 788 removal procedure.
3. Slide the hard drive out of the
connector (some force may be
required), positioning the shouldered
studs on the bottom of the drive so
that the drive can be lifted from the
controller.
hc3m0463
Reverse the removal procedure.
Top of Controller
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 790
SIMMs, Printer
Link to “Optional Features” on page 1091
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
Attention: This is an ESD sensitive area.
See “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Procedures” on page 23 before working
with parts that are sensitive to ESD.
DRAM SIMMs
(Either Slot)
Flash memory,
Data Stream
or Font SIMMs
(Any SIMM in any
of 4 Slots)
2. Perform the “Controller PCB, Printer”
on page 788removal procedure.
45°
hc3m0462
3. Pull the clips holding the SIMM away
to disengage them, and pivot the
SIMM to about 45° and lift out the
SIMM.
Installation Notes
1. Hold the SIMM with the notched edge
toward the socket and the notch
toward the network card slot.
2. Insert the SIMM at a 45° angle and
move it in to position in the socket.
3. Using your thumbs, press with even
pressure on both ends of the SIMM
until the SIMM is firmly seated in the
socket.
4. Ensure that the clips on either end of
the socket snap in to place to hold the
SIMM. If necessary, use your thumbs
to move the clips upright in to the
grooves to lock the SIMM in place.
Top Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 791
Full Stack Sensor
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 510–16, PN 90H3686, Table 252 on page 1117
P/J133
Full Stack Sensor
Exit Sensor Bracket
P/J133
Exit Sensor Actuator
Exit Sensor Spring
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the fuser cover (see “Fuser
Cover, Printer” on page 765).
3. Disconnect P/J133.
4. Remove the 2 screws holding the full
stack sensor to the exit sensor
bracket and remove the sensor.
5. Remove the 2 screws holding the exit
sensor bracket to the lower chute, and
remove the bracket.
6. Unhook the exit sensor spring from
the bracket, and remove the exit
sensor actuator.
Reverse the removal procedure.
hc3m0494
Front, Top, at Transport Exit
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 792
Fuser, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 600–1, Customer supply, Table 254 on page 1122
Removal
Procedure
CAUTION:
<2-25> High Temperature;
switch off the printer and allow
at least 20 minutes for parts in
this area to cool before
handling.
1. Unplug the power cord.
2. Open the left upper cover.
3. Pull out the handles that are located on
each end of the fuser assembly.
4. Loosen the two thumbscrews that hold
the fuser assembly to the printer frame.
5. Pull the fuser out of the printer.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 794 before installing the parts.
hc3m0327
Left Side, Top, Behind Cover A
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 793
Link to Fuser, Printer removal procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Open the left upper cover.
2. Open the EP (toner) cartridge
door.
3. Position the fuser assembly
with P/J12 on the left end of
the assembly aligned with
P/J12 mounted on the printer
frame.
4. Hold on to the fuser handles
and slide the fuser assembly
in to the printer frame.
5. Firmly push the fuser
assembly to make sure P/J12
is correctly connected.
6. Tighten the 2 thumb screws
to firmly hold the fuser
assembly.
7. Close all covers.
hc3m0327
Left Side, Top, Behind Cover A
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 794
HVPS, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 1110–4, PN 90H4201, Table 274 on page 1165
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the MCU PCB (see “MCU
PCB, Printer” on page 813).
Attention: The HVPS PCB is flexible,
and easily cracked. Use care when
disconnecting and connecting connectors.
hc3m0343
3. Disconnect the following 5 connectors
from the HVPS assembly:
v P/J500
v P/JDTS
v P/JDB
v P/JCB
v P/JBTR
4. Remove the 2 screws, 1 on the left
side and the 1 on the right side, that
hold the HVPS assembly to the printer
frame.
5. Pull out on the HVPS assembly while
releasing the 2 clips, 1 at the top and
1 on the right side, that hold the
HVPS to the printer frame, and
remove the HVPS assembly from the
frame.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 796 before installing the parts.
Behind MCU PCB, Centered Behind Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 795
Link to HVPS, Printer removal procedure
Installation Procedure
Attention: The HVPS PCB is flexible,
and easily cracked. Use care when
disconnecting and connecting connectors.
hc3m0343
1. Install the HVPS assembly onto the
printer frame.
2. Align the 2 positioning holes on the
HVPS with the 2 tabs on the frame.
Ensure you do not trap any wire
harnesses between the HVPS
assembly and the printer frame.
3. Push the HVPS against the frame
until the 2 clips snap in to place.
4. Use 2 screws to hold the HVPS
assembly in to place on the printer
frame.
5. Connect all connectors.
6. Install the MCU PCB.
Behind MCU PCB, Centered Behind Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 796
Laser, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 800–1, PN 90H3673, Table 256 on page 1126
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug the
power cord.
2. Remove the LVPS (see “LVPS, Printer”
on page 804).
1
3
3
2
3
3. Remove the 4 screws [1] holding laser
assembly [2].
4. Disconnect the following 4 connectors
from the laser assembly [3]:
v P/J106
v P/J207
v P/J407
v P/J430
5. Remove the laser assembly.
Reverse the removal procedure.
CAUTION:
<2-21> Do not disassemble or
attempt to adjust the laser
unit. Do not attempt to operate
the laser outside of the printer.
1
hc3m1632
Top, Rear, Below Controller
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 797
Fuser Exit Sensor, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.-Index 510-12, PN 90H3685, Table 252 on page 1117
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the offset roller assembly
(see “Offset Roller, Printer” on
page 820).
3. Remove the 5 screws holding the
lower chute to the exit assembly
frame, and separate the lower chute
from the frame.
4. Release the P/J104 wiring harness
from the harness clips.
5. Squeeze the latches to unlock the
fuser exit sensor, and remove the
sensor from the lower chute.
P/J104
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 799 before installing the parts.
Lower Chute
Fuser Exit Sensor
hc3m0263
Left Side, Top, Above Fuser (Part of Transport Assembly)
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 798
Link to Fuser Exit Sensor, Printer removal procedure
Installation Procedure
P/J104
1. Install the fuser exit sensor by
pressing the sensor latches in to the
cutouts in the lower chute. Install the
sensor with the wiring harness
positioned to the rear of the lower
chute. Ensure that the sensor actuator
moves freely though the cutout below
the sensor.
2. Hold the P/J104 wiring harness under
the harness clips located on the lower
chute.
3. Install the lower chute to the exit
assembly frame.
4. Use 5 screws to hold the lower chute.
5. Install the offset roller assembly.
Lower Chute
Fuser Exit Sensor
hc3m0263
Left Side, Top, Above Fuser (Part of Transport Assembly)
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 799
Lower Feed Roller Asm., Tray 1
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 1033–98, PN 90H3639, Table 268 on page 1151
Removal
Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug the
power cord.
2. Remove the EP cartridge.
3. Remove Tray 1 and Tray 2.
4. Remove the duplex assembly (see
“Duplex Asm.” on page 834).
5. Remove the left upper cover assembly
(see “Left Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 772).
6. Remove the rear upper cover (see
“Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
2
7. Remove the rear lower cover (see
“Rear Lower Cover, Printer” on
page 777).
2
hc3m1676
8. Remove the auxiliary tray and the
mounting bracket (see “Auxiliary Tray
and Mounting Bracket, Printer” on
page 783).
9. Remove the screw and clip at [2].
Go to step 10 on page 801.
Front, Tray 1 and Tray 2 Removed
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 800
10. Disconnect two connectors [6] and
remove the wiring harness from the
large clamp, remove the three screws
[4] to remove the tray 1 lift motor [5].
6
6
Go to step 11 on page 802.
5
4
4
hc3m1637
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 801
7
8A
CAUTION:
<2-26> The printer, not
including the 2500-Sheet Input
Unit (HCI) or the 2000-Sheet
Finisher (HCF), weighs
approximately 45 kg (100 lb).
Use three persons to carry the
printer. Use appropriate lifting
precautions.
8B
11. Disconnect connector [8B].
12. Remove the e-clip on the feed clutch
and remove the feed clutch [8A].
13. Remove 3 screws [7].
7
hc3m1677
Go to step 14 on page 803.
Rear, Printer Resting On Right Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 802
14. Remove the 2 screws [9]. They are located on the front, upper left
of tray 1 housing, just behind the EP cartridge cover.
15. Remove the 1 screw holding the inner left cover to the printer frame
and remove the inner left cover (see 130-1 on p. 1099).
16. Raise the printer engine to separate it from Tray 1 and put
approximately 2.5 reams (1250 sheets) of 20 pound paper into the
tray opening to support the printer engine. The left side of the printer
engine should now be separated from tray 1.
17. There are 2 plastic mounting pins holding the top of the lower feed
assembly [10] in to the lower of the printer engine. Apply enough
force to move these pins out of the mounting holes, and then
separate and remove the tray 1 lower feed assembly from the
printer.
Note that you may need to use a flathead screwdriver to pry the rear
mounting pin on the lower feed roller asm. from the printer frame
and remove the lower feed roller asm.
9
10
Installation Notes
When installing the Lower Feed Roller Asm., Tray 1, ensure the following:
1. The plastic mounting pins are seated in the mounting holes.
2. Correct routing of the connector disconnected in 11 on page 802.
3. All cables are routed correctly without pinch points.
hc3m1678
Front, Printer Resting on Right Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 803
LVPS, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.-Index 1120-11, PN 90H4197, Table 275 on page 1168
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the top cover (see “Top
Cover, Printer” on page 780).
1
1
3. Remove the right cover (see “Right
Cover, Printer” on page 779).
4. Perform the following:
a. Remove the 3 screws [1].
b. Remove screw [4] (located just
behind screw [3].
c. Move the controller cage [2] out of
the way.
It is not necessary to disconnect
the connectors.
1
Go to step 5 on page 805.
2
4
3
hc3m1631
Front, Top
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 804
10
5. Perform the following:
a. Disconnect the LVPS fan
connector [5].
b. Disconnect connectors P/J501 and
P/J502.
c. Remove the screw [6] from the
switch bracket.
d. Disconnect connector [7] (P1) from
the LVPS [8].
e. Remove the wiring harness from
the clamps along the left side of
the LVPS.
f. Remove 1 screw [9] next to the
groundwire at the lower left corner
of the LVPS.
g. Remove 2 screws [10] from the
upper left corner of the LVPS.
5
8
7
6
Go to step 6 on page 806.
9
hc3m1628
Front, Top
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 805
6.
Remove the 2 screws [11] from the
right side of the LVPS.
7. As you move the LVPS out of the way,
remove the switch [12] and associated
wiring from the LVPS. It is not
necessary to disconnect the
connectors.
12
11
Reverse the removal procedure.
hc3m1629
Right Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 806
Main Drive Motor (M10), Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.-Index 340-1, PN 90H4192, Table 250 on page 1112
1
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Open the duplex assembly.
3. Open the left cover assembly.
4. Remove the EP cartridge.
5. Remove the rear upper cover (see
“Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
2
6. Remove the fuser cover (see “Fuser
Cover, Printer” on page 765).
7. Remove the registration clutch (see
“Registration Clutch, Printer” on
page 824).
8. Remove screw [1] from the left-cover
interlock bracket [2] and allow the
bracket to hang from the printer.
Go to step 9 on page 808.
hc3m1605
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 807
9. Perform the following:
a. Remove 3 screws [3] that hold the
cable harness bracket to the lower
right edge of the drive assembly
plate and move the plate away
from the motor bracket.
b. Disconnect the 3 connectors [2] at
the top of the cable harness
bracket.
c. Remove the wires from the cable
clamp [5].
d. Disconnect connector [4].
3
5
2
4
3
Go to step 10 on page 809.
3
hc3m1633
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 808
7
6
6
7
10. Perform the following:
a. Remove 3 screws [6] from the
motor plate.
b. Noting the ground wire under
each screw, remove 2 screws
[7].
Also note that one screw is silver
and the other is black. You need
to know this during the
installation step.
c. Remove 1 screw [8] that holds
the copper ground strap to the
frame.
Go to step 11 on page 810.
6
8
hc3m1635
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 809
Perform 11 and 12 on page 811 together,
as you remove the motor and plate.
11. Raise the drive gear [9] for clearance
when removing the motor plate.
Go to step 12 on page 811.
9
hc3m1636
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 810
12. Guide the EP drive pin [10] out
through the rear frame.
See the “Installation Notes” on
page 812 before installing the parts.
10
hc3m1630
Left Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 811
Installation Notes
When installing the Main Drive Motor
(M10), Printer, ensure the following:
1. The tabs on the cable bracket engage
the clutch arms of the pick solenoid
[11] and the registration solenoid [12].
2. The 3 connectors disconnected in 9.b
on page 808 are not trapped behind
the motor plate.
3. The 2 ground wires removed in 10.b
on page 809 are not trapped behind
the motor plate.
12
11
4. Do not overtighten screws that mount
into plastic (the screws referenced in
10.a on page 809 and 10.b on
page 809).
hc3m1606
5. Ensure that the silver and black
screws [7] that were removed in step
10.b on page 809) are installed in the
correct location.
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 812
MCU PCB, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.-Index 1110-5, PN 90H4202, Table 274 on
page 1165
Removal Procedure
Note: If possible, print a configuration page before
you replace the MCU PCB (see “Printing
Configuration Pages” on page 584). Replacing the
MCU PCB resets the page count, toner count, and
fuser count to 0; therefore, to determine the page
count for a printer after you replace the MCU PCB,
you need to add the page count on the config page
you printed before the replacement to the page count
on the config page you print after the replacement.
1. Switch off printer power and unplug the power
cord.
2. Remove the rear upper cover (see “Rear Upper
Cover, Printer” on page 778).
Attention: This is an ESD sensitive area. See
“Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Procedures” on page
23 before working with parts that are sensitive to
ESD.
hc3m0345
3. Disconnect all connectors from the MCU PCB.
Note: P/J 410 does not have a connector.
4. Remove the 4 screws holding the MCU bracket
to the printer frame, and remove the bracket with
the MCU PCB.
Go to step 5 on page 814.
Centered Behind Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 813
Attention: This is an ESD sensitive area. See
“Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Procedures” on page
23 before working with parts that are sensitive to
ESD.
5. Remove the 6 screws holding the MCU cover to
the MCU bracket, and remove the cover.
6. Place the bracket and MCU on a flat,
non-conductive surface.
7. Remove the 4 screws holding the MCU PCB to
the MCU bracket.
8. Hold one of the plastic connectors mounted on
the PCB, and lift the MCU off of the Bracket.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 815 before installing the parts.
hc3m0345
Centered Behind Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 814
Link to MCU PCB, Printer removal procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Place the bracket on a flat, non-conductive
surface.
Attention: This is an ESD sensitive area. See
“Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Procedures” on page
23 before working with parts that are sensitive to
ESD.
hc3m0345
2. Hold on to the edges of the PCB or one of the
plastic connectors mounted on the board, and
install the MCU in to the bracket. Position the
MCU so the connectors are on the right.
Attention: In this step, do not overtighten the
4 screws. Overtightening may crack the PCB.
3. Use 4 screws, one in each corner, to hold the
MCU PCB to the bracket.
4. Install the MCU cover onto the MCU bracket.
Position the cover so the 3 screw tabs are on the
right and aligned over the 3 screw holes in the
center of the MCU PCB.
5. Use six screws to hold the MCU Cover to the
MCU Bracket.
Go to step 6 on page 816.
Centered Behind Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 815
6. Install the MCU PCB bracket onto the printer
frame. Make sure you do not trap any wire
harnesses between the bracket and the frame.
7. Use four screws to hold the bracket to the
printer frame.
8. Reconnect the 17 connectors to the MCU PCB.
9. Install the rear upper cover.
10. Update the serial number of the printer (see
“Resetting the Serial Number” on page 575).
Note: Installing a new MCU PCB resets the
toner count, fuser count, and page count to 0.
hc3m0345
Centered Behind Upper Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 816
Offset/Exit Asm., Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.-Index 510-1, PN 90H3681, Table 252 on page 1117
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the fuser cover (see “Fuser
Cover, Printer” on page 765).
3. Remove the rear upper cover (see
“Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
4. Open the duplex assembly.
5. Open the left upper cover.
6. Disconnect the following 4 connectors
from the offset assembly:
v P/J104
v P/J209
v P/J601
v P/J602
7. Remove the 3 screws (one screw at
the front of the assembly, next to the
solenoid, and 2 screws at the rear of
the assembly) holding the offset
assembly to the printer frame, and lift
the offset/exit assembly from the
printer frame.
Reverse the removal procedure.
hc3m0336
Left Side, Top Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 817
Offset/Exit Drive, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.-Index 310-1, PN 90H4190, Table 247 on page 1106
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the 3 screws holding the exit
drive assembly to the offset/exit
assembly.
3. Pull the exit drive assembly straight
out and away from the offset/exit
assembly.
hc3m0337
Installation Procedure
1. Align the exit drive assembly with the
offset/exit assembly so the white drive
gear and shaft fit through the
corresponding opening in the exit
drive assembly.
2. Press the exit drive assembly onto the
offset/exit assembly, slightly
repositioning the assembly so the
positioning pin on the upper right side
of the offset/exit assembly fits through
the corresponding hole in the exit
drive assembly. Ensure that you do
not trap any wire harnesses between
the exit drive assembly and the
offset/exit assembly.
Left Side, Top Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 818
Offset Motor, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 510–5, PN 90H3683, Table 252 on page 1117
Offset Motor Arm
Offset Roll Rack
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the fuser cover (see “Fuser
Cover, Printer” on page 765).
3. Remove the 2 screws holding the
motor to the offset/exit assembly.
4. Lift the motor off of the offset/exit
assembly and free the motor arm from
the offset roller rack.
5. Disconnect P/J209 from the offset
motor.
Offset Motor
Reverse the removal procedure.
P/J209
hc3m0492
Top, Rear of Transport Assembly, Above Fuser
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 819
Offset Roller, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.-Index 910-0, Table 257 on page 1128 (order 510-1 PN
90H3681)
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the offset/exit drive assembly
(see “Offset/Exit Drive, Printer” on
page 818).
3. Remove the offset motor (see “Offset
Motor, Printer” on page 819).
4. Remove the face-up exit sensor (see
“Full Stack Sensor” on page 792).
hc3m0496
5. Remove the gear located at the end
of the roller assembly.
6. Remove the K-clip holding the roller
shaft to the rear bearing.
7. Slide the bearing out of the offset/exit
assembly frame.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 821 before installing the parts.
Part of Transport Assembly, Above Fuser
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 820
Link to Offset Roller, Printer removal procedure
Installation Procedure
hc3m0496
1. Slide the rear of the roller shaft
through the rear bearing cutout in the
assembly frame.
2. Insert the front bearing, still attached
to the front of the shaft, in to the front
bearing cutout in the assembly frame.
3. Use a K-clip to hold the shaft to the
rear bearing.
4. Install the gear onto the rear of the
shaft. The gear snaps in to place.
5. Install the face-up exit sensor.
6. Install the offset motor.
7. Install the offset/exit drive assembly
(see “Offset/Exit Drive, Printer” on
page 818).
Part of Transport Assembly, Above Fuser
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 821
Registration Chute, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.-Index 920-4, PN 90H3668, Table 258 on page 1130
Magnet Plate
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the EP Cartridge.
3. Remove the left upper cover assembly
(see “Left Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 772).
4. Remove the registration clutch (see
“Registration Clutch, Printer” on
page 824).
Registration Clutch
Registration Chute
hc3m0482
Inner Cover
5. Remove the screw holding the inner
cover to the frame, and remove the
cover.
6. Remove the screw holding the magnet
plate to the frame, and remove the
plate.
7. Remove the 2 screws (under the
magnet plate) holding the front of the
registration chute to the printer frame.
8. Remove the 2 screws (under the
registration clutch) holding the rear of
the registration chute to the printer
frame, and remove the chute.
9. Disconnect P/J103 from the
registration sensor.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 823 before installing the parts.
Left Side, Behind Cover A
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 822
Link to Registration Chute, Printer removal procedure
Installation Procedure
Magnet Plate
Registration Clutch
Registration Chute
hc3m0482
Inner Cover
1. Connect P/J103 to the registration
sensor.
2. Install the registration chute assembly
in to the printer frame. Ensure that the
plastic strip is on the outside of the
chute.
3. Align the 4 screw holes (2 at each
end) in the registration chute with the
4 screw holes in the printer frame.
4. Use 2 screws to hold the chute to the
front of the frame, and use 2 screws
to hold the chute to the rear of the
frame.
5. Install the magnet plate to the printer
frame, and use one screw to hold the
plate.
6. Install the inner cover to the frame,
and use 1 screw to hold the cover.
7. Install the left upper cover assembly.
8. Install the registration clutch.
9. Install the EP Cartridge.
Left Side, Behind Cover A
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 823
Registration Clutch, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 920–1, PN 90H3666, Table 258 on page 1130
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the rear upper cover (see
“Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
1
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
4. Remove the C-clip [2] holding the
clutch [3] on the shaft.
Go to step 5 on page 825.
2
3
hc3m1601
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 824
5. Slide the clutch toward the end of the
shaft until the tab [4] detents in to the
C-clip slot. With a small screwdriver,
lift the tab from the slot and slide the
clutch off the shaft.
Reverse the removal procedure.
4
hc3m1602
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 825
Registration Roller, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.-Index 920-3, PN 90H3667, Table 258 on page 1130
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the duplex assembly (see
“Duplex Asm.” on page 834).
3. Open the left cover.
4. Remove the rear upper cover (see
“Rear Upper Cover, Printer” on
page 778).
1
5. Remove the registration clutch (see
“Registration Clutch, Printer” on
page 824).
2
Attention: Use care in not to damage the
plastic shields [1] and [2] when removing
the registration roller assembly.
hc3m1671
Go to step 6 on page 827.
Left End
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 826
6. Open the EP cartridge door and
remove screw [3] and the end cap [4].
Go to step 7 on page 828.
3
4
hc3m1603
Front, EP Door Open, EP Cartridge Removed
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 827
7. Remove screws [5] and [6] that hold
the front of the registration chute [7].
Go to step 8 on page 829.
5
7
6
hc3m1622
Left Front, EP Door Open, EP Cartridge Removed
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 828
8. Remove screws [8] and [9] from the
rear of the registration chute.
Go to step 9 on page 830.
8
9
hc3m1604
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 829
9. Perform the following:
a. Rotate the registration chute [11]
far enough out and onto the left
cover to expose the registration
roller shaft [10].
b. Remove the front C-clip [12] from
the registration roller shaft.
c. Remove the rear C-clip [13] from
the registration roller shaft.
d. Slide the shaft to the rear, swing
the front of the shaft out, and pull
the shaft forward, and out.
10
11
12
13
Reverse the removal procedure.
hc3m1626
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 830
Separation Roller, Printer
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.-Index 1031-1, PN 90H3660, Table 266 on page 1147
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the paper tray from the
appropriate feeder.
3. Press in on the front of the chute, and
remove the chute.
4. Pull out on the roller latch and slide
the roller off of the shaft.
5. Repeat 4 for the remaining two rollers.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 832 before installing the parts.
hc3m0309
Front, Upper Left Interior Of Each Tray
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 831
Link to Separation Roller, Printer removal procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Position the roller with the latch end
facing out, and slide the roller onto
the shaft.
2. Rotate and push the roller down the
shaft until the latch locks the roller in
to place.
3. Repeat 1 and 2 for the remaining
two rollers.
4. Install the chute by sliding the
opening in the rear of the chute in to
the tab on the frame, then slightly
squeezing the chute and hooking the
tab at the front of the chute in to the
opening on the frame.
5. Install the paper tray.
6. Reset the paper feeder usage log for
the feeder with the new rollers.
7. Enter the diagnostic mode (see
“Diagnostic Mode” on page 566).
8. Enter either 30-6 (Tray 1), 30-7 (Tray
2).
9. Press [4] to view the log.
10. Set each digit of the log number to 0.
11. Exit the diagnostic mode.
hc3m0309
Front, Upper Left Interior Of Each Tray
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 832
Duplex Asm. Removal Procedure
For a complete listing of printer removal procedures, go to the “Contents” under “Chapter 6. Removal Procedures”
on page 755.
For the duplex assembly removal procedure, go to “Duplex Asm.” on page 834.
For other removal procedures, see
“Printer Removal Procedures” on page 762
“Envelope Feeder Removal Procedure” on page 837
“2500-Sheet Input Unit Removal Procedures” on page 840
“2000-Sheet Finisher Removal Procedures” on page 905
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 833
Duplex Asm.
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.-Index 2000-0, PN 90H3537, Table 276 on page 1171
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. If you have a face-up tray [1], position
it at approximately the angle shown
here and lift it from the hinges.
1
Go to step 3 on page 835.
hc3m1674
Face-Up Delivery Tray, Left Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 834
3. Disconnect the duplex assembly cable
[2].
Go to step 4 on page 836.
2
hc3m1613
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 835
4. Open the duplex assembly [3] and
unhook the support cable [4]. While
supporting the duplex assembly, lift up
to unlatch the duplex latch [5] and lift
the duplex assembly from the pivots.
Reverse the removal procedure.
5
4
3
hc3m1609
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 836
Envelope Feeder Removal Procedure
For a complete listing of printer removal procedures, go to the “Contents” under “Chapter 6. Removal Procedures”
on page 755.
For the duplex assembly removal procedure, go to “Envelope Feeder” on page 838.
For other removal procedures, see
“Printer Removal Procedures” on page 762
“Duplex Asm. Removal Procedure” on page 833
“2500-Sheet Input Unit Removal Procedures” on page 840
“2000-Sheet Finisher Removal Procedures” on page 905
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 837
Envelope Feeder
Link to Parts Catalog, Asm.–Index 3000–0, PN 90H3542, Table 281 on page 1182
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Pull the envelope feeder up and out to
remove it from the auxiliary feeder
mounting bracket.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 839 before installing the parts.
hc3m0452
Left Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 838
Link to Envelope Feeder removal procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Remove the auxiliary tray (see
“Auxiliary Tray and Mounting Bracket,
Printer” on page 783).
2. Align the 2 pins on the envelope
feeder with the corresponding
openings in the auxiliary tray mounting
bracket, and slide the feeder in to the
bracket.
hc3m0453
Left Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 839
2500-Sheet Input Unit Removal Procedures
For a complete listing of printer removal procedures, go to the “Contents” under “Chapter 6. Removal Procedures”
on page 755.
For other removal procedures, see
“Printer Removal Procedures” on page 762
“Duplex Asm. Removal Procedure” on page 833
“Envelope Feeder Removal Procedure” on page 837
“2000-Sheet Finisher Removal Procedures” on page 905
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 840
Covers, Input Unit
Front Cover, Tray 4, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4063-22, PN 06L9968, Table 295 on page 1212
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Slide tray 4 a few inches out of the
input unit.
3. Remove the screw holding the tray 4
front cover to the tray frame.
4. Lift up and out to remove the front
cover.
Installation Procedure
1. Insert the 2 latches located on the
inside of the front cover in to the
2 slots in the tray frame.
2. Press the cover against the frame.
3. Use 1 screw to hold the cover to the
frame.
4. Slide tray 4 back in to the input unit.
hc3m0235
Front, Lower Left
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 841
Front Cover, Tray 5, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4072-14, PN 06L9801, Table 297 on page 1218
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Slide tray 5 out unit it stops.
3. Open tray 5 upper chute.
4. Remove the 2 screws holding the
tray 5 front cover to the tray frame.
5. Lift up and out to remove the front
cover.
hc3m0237
Installation Procedure
1. Insert the 2 latches located on the
inside lower of the front cover in to the
2 slots in the tray frame.
2. Press the cover against the frame.
3. Use 2 screws to hold the cover to the
frame.
4. Close tray 5 upper chute.
5. Slide tray 5 back in to the input unit.
Front, Lower right
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 842
Front Lower Cover Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4011-2, PN 90H4222, Table 284 on page 1190
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Slide trays 4 and 5 out of the input
unit far enough so you can access the
2 screws holding the front lower cover
to the input unit frame.
3. Remove the 2 screws holding the
cover to the input unit frame, and
remove the cover.
hc3m0223
Installation Procedure
1. Slide trays 4 and 5 out of the input
unit far enough so you can access the
2 screw holes located on both ends
of the front lower cover.
2. Install the cover on to the input unit
frame.
3. Use 2 screws to hold the cover to the
frame.
4. Close trays 4 and 5.
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 843
Left Cover Asm., Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4012-1, PN 06L9967, Table 285 on page 1192
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the input unit left cover (see
“Left Cover, Input Unit” on page 846).
3. Open the left cover assembly.
4. Remove the 2 screws holding the left
cover assembly to the left cover.
5. Remove the ends of the 2 straps from
the left cover assembly.
6. Remove the E-ring from the rear of
the cover assembly shaft.
7. Slide the left cover assembly to the
rear until the front of the assembly
clears the front shaft, and remove the
assembly.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 845 before installing the parts.
hc3m0366
Left Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 844
Link to Left Cover Asm., Input Unit removal procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Slide the front of the assembly onto
the front shaft.
2. Slide the rear of the assembly onto
the rear shaft.
3. Use 1 E-ring to hold the rear of the
assembly to the rear shaft.
4. Install the ends of the 2 straps to the
left cover assembly.
5. Use 2 screws to hold the straps to
the assembly.
6. Install the input unit left cover.
hc3m0366
Left Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 845
Left Cover, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4011-1, PN 90H4221, Table 284 on page 1190
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Slide trays 3 and 4 a few inches out
of the input unit.
3. Open the left cover door.
4. Remove 2 screws holding the left
cover to the input unit frame.
5. Lift up the left cover to free the
4 latching tabs from the input unit
frame, and remove the cover.
hc3m0351
Installation Procedure
1. Slide trays 3, 4, and 5 a few inches
out of the input unit.
2. Open the left cover door.
3. Align the left cover so the 4 latches
tabs on the back of the cover are
opposite the 4 openings in the input
unit frame.
4. Press the cover in to the frame, then
push down on the cover to lock the
tabs in place.
5. Use 2 screws to hold the left cover to
the input unit frame.
Left Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 846
Rear Cover, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4011-5, PN 90H4224, Table 284 on page 1190
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the 2 screws holding the
rear cover to the input unit frame.
3. Pull up on the rear cover and remove
it from the frame.
P/J613
hc3m0350
Installation Procedure
1. Slip the 2 tabs that are located at the
lower of the rear cover in to the
openings at the lower of the input unit
frame.
2. Slide the edges the rear cover in to
the groves in the left and right covers.
3. Use 2 screws to hold the rear cover
to the input unit frame.
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 847
Right Cover, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4011-4, PN 90H4223, Table 284 on page 1190
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the 2 screws holding the
right cover to the input unit frame.
3. Lift up the right cover to free the
2 latching tabs from the input unit
frame, and remove the cover.
hc2m0224
Installation Procedure
1. Hook the 2 latching tabs that are
located at the lower edge of the right
cover in to the openings at the lower
of the input unit frame.
2. Press the right cover against the
frame.
3. Use 2 screws to hold the right cover
to the input unit.
Right Side
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 848
Input Unit Asm.
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug the
power cord.
2. Lock the 2 front casters.
3. Disconnect the interface cable from
P/J613P located at the rear of the
printer.
4. Remove tray 2 from the printer.
5. Open tray 3 and remove the 2 screws
holding the left and right docking
brackets to the input unit frame, and
remove the brackets.
P/J613
Go to step 6 on page 850.
hc3m0450
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 849
CAUTION:
<2-26> The printer, not
including the 2500-Sheet Input
Unit (HCI) or the 2000-Sheet
Finisher (HCF), weighs
approximately 45 kg (100 lb).
Use three persons to carry the
printer. Use appropriate lifting
precautions.
P/J613
6. Lift the printer off the input unit.
7. Set the printer on a level and stable
surface.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 851 before installing the parts.
hc3m0450
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 850
Link to Input Unit Asm. removal procedure
Installation
Procedure
1. Lock the 2 front casters.
2. Remove tray 2 from the printer.
CAUTION:
<2-26> The printer, not
including the 2500-Sheet Input
Unit (HCI) or the 2000-Sheet
Finisher (HCF), weighs
approximately 45 kg (100 lb).
Use three persons to carry the
printer. Use appropriate lifting
precautions.
P/J613
hc3m0450
3. Lift the printer and align the
3 positioning holes in the lower of the
printer with the 3 metal position pins in
the top of the input unit.
4. Slowly lower the printer onto the input
unit.
5. Open tray 3.
6. Install the left and the right docking
brackets between the input unit and the
printer.
7. Close tray 3.
8. Install tray 2.
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 851
Drive Belt, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4020-2, PN 90H4229, Table 286 on page 1194
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the input unit rear cover (see
“Rear Cover, Input Unit” on page 847).
3. Remove the input unit feed motor (see
“Feed Motor, Input Unit” on page 857).
4. Remove 2 screws holding the feed
bracket to the frame and remove the
bracket.
Go to step 5 on page 853.
hc3m0354
Upper Right, Behind Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 852
5. Remove the E-ring holding input unit
drive gear 1 and the E-ring holding
tray 4 drive gear 1 and slide both
gears off of the shafts.
6. Remove the drive belt from the input
unit drive pulley.
HCF Drive Gear 1
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 854 before installing the parts.
HCF Drive Belt
hc3m0355
Tray 4 Drive Gear 1
Upper Right, Behind Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 853
Link to Drive Belt, Input Unit removal procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Install the drive belt over the input unit
drive pulley.
2. Install the input unit drive gear 1 and
the tray 4 drive gear 1 onto the
respective shafts, and use 1 E-ring to
hold each gear.
HCF Drive Gear 1
Go to step 3 on page 855.
HCF Drive Belt
hc3m0355
Tray 4 Drive Gear 1
Upper Right, Behind Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 854
3. Install the feed bracket to the frame,
making sure the bearing is still in
place on the end of the feed clutch,
and use 2 screws to hold the bracket.
4. Install the input unit feed motor.
5. Install the rear cover.
hc3m0354
Upper Right, Behind Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 855
Feed Clutch, Tray 3, 4, and 5, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4052-99, PN 06L9962, Table 292 on page 1206
Removal Procedure
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4062-99, PN 90H4238, Table 294 on page 1210
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4073-99, PN 90H4238, Table 298 on page 1220
Notch
Tab
P/J211
P/J213
P/J215
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the rear cover (see “Rear
Cover, Input Unit” on page 847).
3. Remove the associated paper tray.
4. Disconnect the P/J211 and P/J213
and P/J215 from the feed clutch.
5. Remove the E-ring holding the feed
clutch to the feed shaft and slide the
clutch off of the shaft.
Reverse the removal procedure.
hc3m0360
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 856
Feed Motor, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4020-1, PN 90H4228, Table 286 on page 1194
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the input unit rear cover (see
“Rear Cover, Input Unit” on page 847).
3. Disconnect P/J217IU from the input
unit PCB.
4. Hold on to the rear of the feed motor
while you remove the 2 screws
holding the motor bracket to the
frame.
5. Slide the feed motor out of the input
unit drive belt and remove the motor
from the frame.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 858 before installing the parts.
hc3m0352
P/J217
Behind Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 857
Link to Feed Motor, Input Unit removal procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Position the feed motor so the wire
harness is on the left side of the
motor.
2. Install the motor and slip the drive belt
over the feed motor gear.
3. Align the motor bracket with the frame
positioning tabs.
4. Use 2 screws to hold the motor
bracket to the frame, but do not
tighten fully.
Go to step 5 on page 859.
hc3m0352
P/J217
Behind Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 858
5. Tighten the drive belt tension by
pushing the motor bracket in the
direction of the arrow and fully
tightening the 2 screws holding the
bracket to the frame.
6. Connect P/J217IU to the input unit
PCB.
7. Install the rear cover.
hc3m0353
Behind Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 859
Interlock Switch, Left Cover, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4012-9, PN 90H3364, Table 285 on page 1192
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Open the left cover assembly.
3. Squeeze together the top and lower of
the interlock switch to release the
switch latches, and pull the switch
away from the input unit frame.
4. Disconnect P/J121 from the switch.
P/J121
Installation Procedure
1. Connect P/J121 to the left cover
interlock switch.
2. Squeeze together the top and lower of
the switch while inserting the lower of
the switch in to the opening in the
frame.
3. Insert the top of the switch in to the
opening. The switch snaps in to place.
4. Close the left cover.
hc3m0232
Left Side, Behind Cover C
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 860
Lift Motor, Trays 3, 4, and 5, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4030-1 (tray 3), PN 90H3625, Table 289 on
page 1200
Removal Procedure
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4030-9 (trays 4 and 5), PN 90H4235, Table 289 on
page 1200
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the paper trays 3, 4, and 5.
3. Remove the input unit rear cover (see
“Rear Cover, Input Unit” on page 847).
4. Disconnect one of the following
connectors from the lift motor:
v P/J212, lift motor tray 3
v P/J212, lift motor tray 4
v P/J216, lift motor tray 5
5. Remove the 3 long screws holding
the motor to the input unit frame.
6. Slide the motor out.
Installation Note
When installing the Lift Motor, Trays 3, 4,
and 5, Input Unit, be careful not to trap
any wires between the motor and the
frame.
hc3m0357
P/J212
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 861
Paper Level Sensor, Trays 3, 4, and 5, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4030-4, PN 63H2477, Table 289 on page 1200
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4040-3, PN 63H2477, Table 290 on page 1202
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the associated paper tray.
3. Squeeze the sensor latches and
remove the paper level sensor from
the frame.
4. Disconnect 1 of the following
connectors from the sensor:
v P/J112 (tray 3)
v P/J118 (tray 4)
v P/J119 (tray 5)
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 863 before installing the parts.
P/J112 Tray 3
P/J118 Tray 4
P/J119 Tray 5
hc3m1491
Interior, Top, Trays 3, 4, and 5
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 862
Link to Paper Level Sensor, Trays 3, 4, and 5, Input Unit removal procedure
P/J112 Tray 3
P/J118 Tray 4
P/J119 Tray 5
Installation Procedure
1. Connect 1 of the following connectors
to the sensor:
v P/J112 (tray 3)
v P/J118 (tray 4)
v P/J119 (tray 5)
2. Position the sensor with the arms of
the sensor facing the feed assembly
actuator.
3. Install the paper level sensor in to the
slot in the frame by first inserting the
front latch of the sensor through the
front opening in the frame.
4. Press in on the rear latch and
inserting it in to the rear opening.
5. Release the rear latch and the sensor
snaps in to place.
6. Release the actuator and make sure it
moves freely between the arms of the
sensor.
7. Install the paper tray.
hc3m1491
Interior, Top, Trays 3, 4, and 5
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 863
Paper Size PCB, Trays 4 and 5, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4030-8, PN 90H4234, Table 289 on page 1200
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove tray 4 (see “Tray 4, Input
Unit” on page 884) and tray 5 (see
“Tray 5, Input Unit” on page 898) from
the input unit.
3. Disconnect P/J115 and P/J120 from
the size sensor PCB.
4. Remove the screw holding the size
sensor PCB to the input unit frame,
pull the PCB straight out.
Installation Note
When installing the Paper Size PCB,
Trays 4 and 5, Input Unit, align the
positioning tabs and screw holes.
P/J115 / P/J120
hc3m0359
Interior, Trays 4 and 5, On Rear Wall
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 864
PCB, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4020-10, PN 90H4230, Table 286 on page 1194
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the input unit rear cover (see
“Rear Cover, Input Unit” on page 847).
Attention: This is an ESD sensitive area.
See “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Procedures” on page 23 before working
with parts that are sensitive to ESD.
P/J480
P/J484
P/J485
P/J481
P/J217
P/J486
P/J483
P/J482
hc3m0356
3. Disconnect the following 8 connectors
from the input unit PCB:
v P/J217IU
v P/J480
v P/J481
v P/J482
v P/J483
v P/J484
v P/J485
v P/J486
4. Press in and release the latches on
the 4 plastic standoffs holding the
PCB to the input unit frame, and
remove the PCB.
Reverse the removal procedure.
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 865
No-Paper Actuator, Trays 3, 4 and 5, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4030-99 (trays 3 and 4), PN 90H3631, Table 289 on
page 1200
Removal Procedure
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4040-99 (tray 5), PN 90H3631, Table 290 on
page 1202
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the associated paper tray.
3. Remove the no-paper sensor (see
“No-Paper Sensor, Trays 3, 4, and 5,
Input Unit” on page 868) (tray 3, J111
or tray 4, J117) associated with the
no-paper actuator you are going to
remove.
4. Squeeze together the sides of the
actuator bracket and remove the
actuator bracket from the input unit
frame.
5. Press the actuator out of the bracket.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 867 before installing the parts.
P/J111 Tray 3
P/J117 Tray 4
hc3m0225
Interior, Top, Trays 3, 4, and 5
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 866
Link to No-Paper Actuator, Trays 3, 4 and 5, Input Unit removal procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Press the legs of the actuator in to the
slots on the bracket. The actuator
snaps in to place.
2. Install the bracket in to the opening in
the input unit frame by positioning the
bracket so the actuator paddle faces
the front of the printer.
3. Insert the left side of the bracket in to
the opening, then squeeze together
the sides of the bracket while inserting
the right side in to the opening.
4. Release the bracket and it should
snap in to place and hold the bracket
to the frame.
5. Install the no-paper sensor.
6. Install the paper tray.
P/J111 Tray 3
P/J117 Tray 4
hc3m0225
Interior, Top, Trays 3, 4, and 5
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 867
No-Paper Sensor, Trays 3, 4, and 5, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4030-2, PN 63H2477, Table 289 on page 1200
Removal Procedure
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4040-3, PN 63H2477, Table 290 on page 1202
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the associated paper tray.
3. Release the sensor latches and
remove the no-paper sensor from the
frame.
4. Disconnect one of the following
connectors from the sensor:
v P/J111, tray 3
v P/J117, tray 4
v P/J116, tray 5
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 869 before installing the parts.
P/J111 Tray 3
P/J117 Tray 4
P/J116 Tray 5
hc3m1490
Interior, Top, Trays 3, 4, and 5
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 868
Link to No-Paper Sensor, Trays 3, 4, and 5, Input Unit removal procedure
P/J111 Tray 3
P/J117 Tray 4
P/J116 Tray 5
Installation Procedure
1. Connect one of the following
connectors to the sensor:
v P/J111, tray 3
v P/J117, tray 4
v P/J116, tray 5
2. Push the no-paper actuator up and
out of the way.
3. Position the sensor with the arms of
the sensor facing the actuator.
4. Install the sensor in to the slot in the
frame by first inserting the front latch
of the sensor through the front
opening in the frame.
5. Press in on the rear latch and insert it
in to the rear opening. Release the
rear latch and the sensor snaps in to
place.
6. Release the actuator and ensure that
it moves freely.
7. Install the paper tray.
hc3m1490
Interior, Top, Trays 3, 4, and 5
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 869
Tray 3, Input Unit
Feed Asm., Tray 3, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4073-3, PN 06L9963, Table 298 on page 1220
Bearing
Removal Procedure
Attention: Be careful not to break or
dislodge the no-paper actuator when
removing or replacing the tray 3 feeder
assembly.
Bearing Cutout
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove tray 3.
3. Remove the rear cover (see “Rear
Cover, Input Unit” on page 847).
Feed Chute
Stopper Link
hc3m0362
FRONT
Separation Shaft
4. Open the left cover assembly.
5. Remove the spring that is located on
the left side of the inner chute.
6. Remove the 2 screws holding the
inner chute to the input unit frame,
and remove the inner chute.
7. Remove the screw holding the feed in
chute to the input unit frame.
8. Lift the separation shaft up and out of
the way while you slide the feed in
chute to the front of the input unit.
Sliding the feed in chute to the front
unhooks the chute from the input unit
frame.
Go to step 9 on page 871.
Interior, Tray 3
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 870
Bearing
Bearing Cutout
9. Push the chute back and remove it
from the frame.
10. Remove tray 3 feed clutch (see
“Feed Clutch, Tray 3, 4, and 5,
Input Unit” on page 856).
11. Remove the E-ring that is holding the
feed gear (located behind the feed
clutch) to the shaft, and remove the
feed gear and bearing.
12. Hold down the stopper link while you
pull the feeder assembly to the front
of the input unit frame.
13. Remove the feeder assembly
Feed Chute
Stopper Link
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 872 before installing the parts.
hc3m0362
FRONT
Separation Shaft
Interior, Tray 3
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 871
Link to Feed Asm., Tray 3, Input Unit removal procedure
Bearing
Installation Procedure
Bearing cutout
Feed Chute
Stopper Link
hc3m0454
FRONT
Separation Shaft
1. Hold down the stopper link while you
insert the end of the feed shaft in to
the opening in the rear of the input
unit frame.
2. Slide the bearing in to the bearing
cutout.
3. When the bearing is in place and the
end of the feed shaft is through the
opening in the rear of the frame,
release the stopper link. The pinch
shaft should rest on top of the stopper
link, and the link should hold the
feeder assembly in place on the
frame.
4. Ensure that the paper level actuator
tab on the feeder is positioned in the
center of the arms of the paper level
sensor.
5. Slide the feed bearing onto the feed
shaft and press the bearing in to the
cutout in the frame.
6. Install the feed gear onto the feed
shaft, and use an E-ring to hold it to
the shaft.
Go to step 7 on page 873.
Interior, Tray 3
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 872
Bearing
Bearing cutout
Feed Chute
Stopper Link
hc3m0454
FRONT
7. Install tray 3 feed clutch.
8. Lift the separation shaft up and out
of the way while you slide the feed in
chute under the separation assembly
and against the input unit frame.
9. Slide the chute to the rear of the
input unit so the rear of the chute
hooks on to the frame, and the
screw hole at the front of the chute
aligns with the screw hole in the
input unit frame.
10. Use 1 screw to hold the feed in
chute to the input unit frame.
11. Install the inner chute onto the input
unit frame.
12. Use 2 screws to hold the inner
chute.
13. Install the spring to the left side of
the inner chute.
14. Install the rear cover.
15. Install tray 3.
Separation Shaft
Interior, Tray 3
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 873
Feed, Pinch, and Separation Rollers, Tray 3, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4052-6, PN 06L9941, Table 292 on
page 1206
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug the power cord.
2. Remove tray 3.
3. Use a flat blade screwdriver to unhook the front of
the upper chute, and remove the chute.
4. Pull out on the separation roll latch and slide the
separation roll off of the shaft.
5. Repeat 4 for the pinch and feed rollers.
See the “Installation Procedure” on page 875 before
installing the parts.
hc3m0309
Interior, Tray 3, Front Upper Left
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 874
Link to Feed, Pinch, and Separation Rollers, Tray 3, Input Unit removal
procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Position the roller with the latch end facing out, and
slide the roll onto the feed shaft.
2. Rotate the roller so the end tabs line up with the slots
on the shaft 1 way clutch and push the roll down the
shaft until the latch locks the roll in to place.
3. Repeat 1 and 2 for the pinch and separation rolls.
4. Install the chute by sliding the opening in the rear of
the chute in to the tab on the frame, then hooking the
tab at the front of the chute in to the opening on the
frame.
5. Install tray 3.
6. Reset the paper feeder usage log for the feeder with
the new rolls as follows:
a. Enter the diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode”
on page 566).
b. Enter 3008 for tray 3 log.
c. Press 1 to view the log.
d. Scroll to each digit of the displayed log, and set
each number to 0.
e. Press 1 to write the new number to the log.
7. Exit diagnostics.
hc3m0458
Interior, Tray 3, Front Upper Left
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 875
Paper Path Sensor 3, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4012-10, PN 90H3665, Table 285 on page 1192
P/J114
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Open the left cover assembly.
3. Remove the spring that is located on
the left side of the inner chute.
4. Remove the 2 screws holding the
inner chute to the input unit frame,
and remove the inner chute.
5. Squeeze together the 4 latches that
are located at the 4 corners of the
sensor, while pulling the sensor
forward.
6. Remove the sensor from the input unit
frame.
7. Disconnect P/J114 from the switch.
Reverse the removal procedure.
hc3m0233
Left Side, Behind Cover C
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 876
Paper Size Sensor, Tray 3, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4030-7, PN 90H4233, Table 289 on page 1200
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Slide paper tray 3 out of the input
unit.
3. Disconnect P/J110 from the size
sensor PCB.
4. Remove the screw holding the tray 3
paper size sensor PCB to the input
unit frame and remove the sensor.
P/J110
Installation Note
hc3m0358
When installing the Paper Size Sensor,
Tray 3, Input Unit, align the 2 positioning
tabs on the PCB with 2 holes in the
frame.
Interior, Tray 3, On Rear Wall
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 877
Separation Asm., Tray 3, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4051-99, PN 90H4237, Table 291 on page 1204
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove tray 3.
3. Remove the rear cover (see “Rear
Cover, Input Unit” on page 847).
4. Remove the input unit left cover (see
“Left Cover, Input Unit” on page 846).
hc3m0364
5. Open the left cover assembly.
6. Remove the spring that is located on
the left side of the inner chute.
7. Remove the 2 screws holding the
inner chute to the input unit frame,
and remove the inner chute.
8. Pull the plastic upper feed chute off
of the bearings, and remove the
chute.
9. Remove the screw holding the feed
in chute to the input unit frame.
10. Lift the separation shaft up and out
of the way while you slide the feed in
chute to the front of the input unit.
Sliding the feed in chute to the front
unhooks the chute from the input unit
frame.
11. Push the chute back and remove it
from the frame.
Go to step 12 on page 879.
Left Side, Behind Cover C
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 878
P/J211
12. Disconnect P/J211 from tray 3 feed
clutch.
13. Disconnect P/J211 and P/J213 from
the bracket, and free the wire
harness from the harness clips.
14. Remove the 2 screws holding the
bracket to the input unit frame, and
remove the bracket.
Go to step 15 on page 880.
P/J213
hc3m0363
Upper Right, Behind Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 879
15. Remove tray 3 feed clutch (see
“Feed Clutch, Tray 3, 4, and 5,
Input Unit” on page 856).
Tray 3 Feed Clutch
Drive Transmission Gear
P/J211
Separation Gear
Bearing
Feed Gear
Fixed Gear
hc3m0228
16. Remove the E-ring holding the drive
transmission gear to the shaft and
remove the gear.
17. Remove the E-ring holding the feed
gear to the shaft and remove the
gear.
18. Remove the E-ring holding the fixed
gear to the shaft and remove the
gear.
19. Slide the separation gear off the
shaft.
20. Slide the feed bearing off the shaft.
21. Slide the separation assembly to the
front of the input unit, then swing the
rear of the assembly out of the input
unit.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 881 before installing the parts.
Left Side, Right Rear Corner
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 880
Link to Separation Asm., Tray 3, Input Unit removal procedure
Installation Procedure
Tray 3 Feed Clutch
Drive Transmission Gear
P/J211
Separation Gear
Bearing
Feed Gear
Fixed Gear
hc3m0228
1. Insert the separation assembly in to
the input unit.
2. Insert the bearing end of the shaft in
to the bearing cutout at the front of
the input unit frame.
3. Slide the shaft far enough to the front
so you can insert the rear of the shaft
in to the cutout in at the rear of the
input unit frame.
4. Slide the shaft to the rear, and seat
the bearing at the front of the shaft in
to the bearing cutout at the front of
the input unit frame.
5. Slide the feed bearing onto the shaft.
6. Install the separation gear.
7. Install the fixed gear and use an
E-ring to hold it to the shaft.
8. Install the feed gear and use an E-ring
to hold it to the shaft.
9. Install the drive transmission gear and
use an E-ring to hold it to the shaft.
Go to step 10 on page 882.
Left Side, Right Rear Corner
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 881
P/J211
10. Install the bracket to the input unit
frame, and use 2 screws to hold it.
11. Install the tray 3 feed clutch.
12. Connect P/J211 and P/J213 to the
bracket, and free the wire harness
from the harness clips.
Go to step 13 on page 883.
P/J213
hc3m0459
Upper Right, Behind Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 882
hc3m0460
13. Lift the separation shaft up and out
of the way while you slide the feed in
chute under the separation assembly
and against the frame.
14. Slide the chute to the rear so that
the rear of the chute hooks on to the
frame, and the screw hole at the
front of the chute aligns with the
screw hole in the frame.
15. Use one screw to hold the feed in
chute to the frame.
16. Install the plastic upper feed chute
onto the three bearings on the feed
roller.
17. Install the inner chute onto the
frame.
18. Use two screws to hold the inner
chute.
19. Install the spring to the left side of
the inner chute.
20. Install the input unit left cover.
21. Install the rear cover.
22. Install tray 3.
Left Side, Behind Cover C
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 883
Tray 4, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4063-1, PN 06L9799, Table 295 on page 1212
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Pull tray 4 out until it stops.
3. Press and hold the tray release
button while you slide tray 4 out of the
input unit.
Installation Procedure
1. Align the guide rails on both sides of
tray 4 with the guide rails on the input
unit frame.
2. Push tray 4 all the way in to the input
unit.
hc3m0234
Front, Lower Left
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 884
Feed Asm., Tray 4, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4062-3, PN 06L9963, Table 294 on page 1210
Bearing
Bearing Cutout
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove tray 4.
3. Remove the input unit rear cover (see
“Rear Cover, Input Unit” on page 847).
4. Open the left cover assembly.
5. Remove tray 4 feed clutch (see “Feed
Clutch, Tray 3, 4, and 5, Input Unit”
on page 856).
Feed Chute
Stopper Link
6. Remove the E-ring holding the feed
shaft bearing to the input unit frame,
and slide the bearing off of the shaft.
7. Hold down the stopper link while
pulling the feed assembly to the front
of the input unit frame.
8. Remove the feeder assembly.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 886 before installing the parts.
hc3m0362
FRONT
Separation Shaft
Upper Interior, Tray 4
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 885
Link to Feed Asm., Tray 4, Input Unit removal procedure
Bearing
Installation Procedure
Bearing Cutout
Feed Chute
Stopper Link
hc3m0362
FRONT
Separation Shaft
1. Hold down the stopper link while you
insert the end of the feed shaft in to
the opening in the rear of the input
unit frame.
2. Slide the bearing in to the bearing
cutout.
3. When both the bearing is in place and
the end of the feed shaft is through
the opening in the rear of the frame,
release the stopper link. The pinch
shaft should rest on top of the stopper
link, and the link should hold the
feeder assembly in place on the
frame.
4. Ensure that the paper level actuator
tab on the feeder is positioned in the
center of the arms of the paper level
sensor.
5. Slide the feed shaft bearing onto the
feed shaft and press the bearing in to
the cutout in the frame.
6. Use and E-ring to hold the bearing to
the shaft.
7. Install tray 4 feed clutch.
8. Install the rear cover.
9. Install tray 4.
Upper Interior, Tray 4
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 886
Feed Roller Asm., Tray 4, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4061-99, PN 06L9796, Table 293 on page 1208
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Slide out tray 5.
3. Remove the rear cover (see “Rear
Cover, Input Unit” on page 847).
4. Remove the input unit left cover (see
“Left Cover, Input Unit” on page 846).
hc3m0266
5. Open the left cover assembly.
6. Remove the spring that is located on
the left side of the inner chute.
7. Remove the 2 screws holding the
inner chute to the input unit frame,
and remove the inner chute.
Go to step 8 on page 888.
Left Side, Behind Cover C
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 887
P/J211
8. Disconnect P/J211 from tray 3 feed
clutch.
9. Disconnect P/J211 and P/J213 from
the bracket, and free the wire
harness from the harness clips.
10. Remove the 2 screws holding the
bracket to the input unit frame, and
remove the bracket.
Go to step 11 on page 889.
P/J213
hc3m0363
Upper right, Behind Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 888
11. Remove the E-ring holding gear 22
to the feed roll shaft.
12. Hold on to gear 22 as you slide tray
4 feed roll toward the front of the
input unit.
13. Remove gear 22 and the bearing.
14. Remove tray 4 feed roller.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 890 before installing the parts.
Captured Bearing
Gear 22
Bearing
hc3m0230
Left Side, Right Rear Corner
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 889
Link to Feed Roller Asm., Tray 4, Input Unit removal procedure
1. Slide the captured bearing end of the
feed roll shaft in to the bearing hole at
the front of the input unit frame.
2. Install the bearing in to the bearing
hole at the rear of the input unit.
3. Place gear 22 over the bearing and
hold it there while you install the feed
roll shaft.
4. Slide the rear of the feed roll shaft
through the bearing and gear 22.
5. Position the shaft so the captured
bearing at the front end of the shaft
rests in the bearing hole at the front of
the input unit.
6. Use an E-ring to hold gear 22 to the
feed roll shaft.
Captured Bearing
Gear 22
Bearing
Installation Procedure
hc3m0457
Go to step 7 on page 891.
Left Side, Right Rear Corner
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 890
P/J211
7. Install the bracket to the input unit
frame, and use 2 screws to hold it
frame.
8. Connect J211 and J213 to the
bracket, and free the wire harness
from the harness clips.
9. Connect P/J211 to tray 3 feed clutch.
Go to step 10 on page 892.
P/J213
hc3m0363
Upper Right, Behind Rear Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 891
10. Install the inner chute to the input
unit frame, and use 2 screws to hold
it to the frame.
11. Install the spring to the left side of
the inner chute.
12. Install the input unit left cover.
13. Install the rear cover.
14. Slide tray 5 back in to the input unit.
hc3m0266
Left Side, Behind Cover C
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 892
Feed, Pinch, and Separation Rollers, Tray 4, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4061-4, PN 06L9941, Table 293 on
page 1208
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the tray 4.
3. Use a flat blade screwdriver to unhook the front of
the upper chute, and remove the chute.
4. Pull out on the separation roll latch and slide the
separation roll off of the shaft.
5. Repeat 4 for the pinch and feed rolls.
See the “Installation Procedure” on page 894 before
installing the parts.
hc3m0309
Interior, Tray 4, Front Upper Left
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 893
Link to Feed, Pinch, and Separation Rollers, Tray 4, Input Unit removal
procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Position the roll with the latch end facing out, and
slide the roll onto the feed shaft.
2. Rotate the roll so the end tabs line up with the slots
on the shaft 1 way clutch and push the roll down the
shaft until the latch locks the roll in to place.
3. Repeat 1 and 2 for the pinch and separation rolls.
4. Install the chute by sliding the opening in the rear of
the chute in to the tab on the frame, then hooking the
tab at the front of the chute in to the opening on the
frame.
5. Install tray 4.
6. Reset the paper feeder usage log for the feeder with
the new rollers as follows:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic Mode” on
page 566).
b. Enter 3009 for tray 4 log.
c. Press 1 to view the log.
d. Scroll to each digit of the displayed log, and set
each number to 0.
e. Press 1 to write the new number to the log.
f. Exit diagnostics.
hc3m0458
Interior, Tray 4, Front Upper Left
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 894
Paper Path Sensor 4, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4040-7, PN 90H3665, Table 290 on page 1202
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove tray 3 and open tray 5.
3. Squeeze together the 4 latches that
are located at the 4 corners of the
tray 4 feed sensor, while pulling the
sensor up and out of the cutout in the
input unit frame.
4. Disconnect P/J126 from the sensor.
P/J126
Installation Procedure
1. Position the sensor above the cutout
in the input unit frame, and with
P/J126 facing down.
2. Insert the sensor in to the cutout, and
press down on the sensor to snap it in
to place.
3. Connect P/J126 to the sensor.
4. Install tray 3.
hc3m0227
Interior, Tray 4, Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 895
Separation Asm., Tray 4, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4061-99, PN 06L9796, Table 293 on page 1208
Separation Gear
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove tray 4 (see “Tray 4, Input
Unit” on page 884).
Separation Spring
3. Remove the input unit rear cover (see
“Rear Cover, Input Unit” on page 847).
Separation Support
hc3m0229
4. Open the left cover assembly.
5. Remove the screw holding the left
cover left strap to the input unit frame,
and move the strap out of the way.
6. Unhook 1 arm of the separation
spring from the hole in the input unit
frame, and release the spring.
7. Unhook the other arm of the
separation spring from the separation
assembly.
8. Remove the screw holding the
separation support to the input unit
frame, and remove the support.
9. Hold the separation gear while sliding
the assembly off the spring shaft and
out of the input unit.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 897 before installing the parts.
Left Side, Behind Cover C
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 896
Link to Separation Asm., Tray 4, Input Unit removal procedure
Separation Gear
Installation Procedure
Separation Spring
Separation Support
hc3m0456
1. Position the separation assembly so
that the opening in the assembly lines
up with the spring shaft.
2. Hold the separation gear in place
against the frame while you slide the
separation assembly to the rear of the
input unit. Ensure the assembly shaft
slides through the center of the
separation gear and the spring shaft
slides through the opening in the
assembly.
3. Insert the shaft of the separation
support through the opening in the
front of the separation assembly.
4. Install the separation support onto the
input unit frame, and use 1 screw to
hold it to the frame.
5. Install the left cover left strap to the
input unit frame, and use 1 screw to
hold it to the frame.
6. Install the input unit rear cover.
7. Install tray 4.
Left Side, Behind Cover C
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 897
Tray 5, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4074-1, PN 06L9800, Table 299 on page 1222
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove tray 3.
3. Slide tray 5 out unit it stops.
4. Use a flat screwdriver blade to press
down on the latch spring that is
located on the left tray 5 guide rail,
while you slide free the left side of the
tray.
5. Press and hold the 2 release buttons,
that are located behind tray 5, while
you slide tray 5 out of the input unit.
Installation Procedure
1. Align the guide rails on both sides of
tray 5 with the guide rails on the input
unit frame.
2. Push tray 5 all the way in to the input
unit.
3. Install tray 3.
hc3m0236
Front, Lower right
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 898
Feed Asm., Tray 5, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4071-99, PN 06L9797, Table 296 on page 1215
Bearing
Bearing Cutout
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove tray 3.
3. Remove tray 5 (see “Tray 5, Input
Unit” on page 898).
4. Remove the input unit rear cover (see
“Rear Cover, Input Unit” on page 847).
5. Remove tray 5 feed clutch (see “Feed
Clutch, Tray 3, 4, and 5, Input Unit”
on page 856).
Feed Chute
Stopper Link
hc3m0362
6. Remove the E-ring holding the feed
shaft bearing to the input unit frame,
and slide the bearing off of the shaft.
7. Hold down the stopper link while you
pull the feeder assembly to the front
of the input unit frame.
8. Remove the feeder assembly.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 900 before installing the parts.
FRONT
Separation Shaft
Upper Interior, Tray 5
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 899
Link to Feed Asm., Tray 5, Input Unit removal procedure
Bearing
Installation Procedure
Bearing Cutout
Feed Chute
Stopper Link
hc3m0362
FRONT
Separation Shaft
1. Hold down the stopper link while you
insert the end of the feed shaft in to
the opening in the rear of the input
unit frame.
2. Slide the bearing in to the bearing
cutout.
3. When the bearing is in place and the
end of the feed shaft is through the
opening in the rear of the frame,
release the stopper link. The pinch
shaft should rest on top of the
stopper link, and the link should hold
the feeder assembly in place on the
frame.
4. Ensure the paper level actuator tab
on the feeder is positioned in the
center of the arms of the paper level
sensor.
5. Slide the feed shaft bearing onto the
feed shaft and press the bearing in
to the cutout in the frame.
6. Use and E-ring to hold the bearing to
the shaft.
7. Install tray 5 feed clutch.
8. Install the rear cover.
9. Install tray 5.
10. Install tray 3.
Upper Interior, Tray 5
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 900
Feed, Pinch, and Separation Rollers, Tray 5, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4071-4, PN 06L9941, Table 296 on page 1215 Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug the
power cord.
2. Remove the tray 5.
3. Use a flat blade screwdriver to unhook the
front of the upper chute, and remove the
chute.
4. Pull out on the separation roll latch and slide
the separation roll off of the shaft.
5. Perform 4 for the pinch and feed rollers.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 902 before installing the parts.
hc3m0309
Interior, Tray 5, Front Upper Left
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 901
Link to Feed, Pinch, and Separation Rollers, Tray 5, Input Unit removal
procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Position the roller with the latch end facing
out, and slide the roll onto the feed shaft.
2. Rotate the roller so the end tabs line up with
the slots on the shaft 1 way clutch and push
the roll down the shaft until the latch locks
the roller in to place.
3. Repeat 1 and 2 for the pinch and separation
rolls.
4. Install the chute by sliding the opening in the
rear of the chute in to the tab on the frame,
then hooking the tab at the front of the chute
in to the opening on the frame.
5. Install tray 5.
6. Reset the paper feeder usage log for the
feeder with the new rollers as follows:
a. Enter diagnostic mode (see “Diagnostic
Mode” on page 566).
b. Enter 3010 for tray 5 log.
c. Press 1 to view the log.
d. Scroll to each digit of the displayed log,
and set each number to 0.
e. Press 1 to write the new number to the
log.
f. Exit diagnostics.
hc3m0458
Interior, Tray 5, Front Upper Left
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 902
Separation Asm., Tray 5, Input Unit
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 4071-99, PN 06L9797, Table 296 on page 1215
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove tray 3.
3. Remove tray 5 (see “Tray 5, Input
Unit” on page 898).
Separation Gear
Fixed Gear
4. Remove the input unit rear cover (see
“Rear Cover, Input Unit” on page 847).
Separation Spring
Separation Support Shaft
hc3m0231
5. Remove the screw holding the fixed
gear to the input unit frame, and
remove the gear.
6. Slide the separation gear off of the
separation shaft.
7. Slide the separation assembly to the
rear of the input unit in order to
release the front of the separation
support shaft from the cutout in the
input unit frame.
8. Slide the separation assembly to the
front of the input unit, and remove the
assembly.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 904 before installing the parts.
Upper Interior, Tray 5
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 903
Link to Separation Asm., Tray 5, Input Unit removal procedure
Separation Gear
Fixed Gear
Separation Spring
Separation Support Shaft
hc3m0231
Installation Procedure
1. Position the rear of the separation
assembly near the opening in the
rear of the input unit frame.
2. Press and hold the arm of the
separation spring against the shaft.
3. Slide the rear of the separation shaft
and separation support shaft through
the 2 openings in the rear of the
input unit frame.
4. Slide the separation assembly to the
front and insert the front of the
separation support shaft in to the
cutout in the input unit frame.
5. Release the arm of the separation
spring, and make sure it rests
against the metal tab sticking out
from the input unit frame.
6. Slide the separation gear onto the
separation shaft.
7. Install the fixed gear over the
separation support shaft, and use
1 screw to hold gear to the frame.
8. Install the input unit rear cover.
9. Install tray 5.
10. Install tray 3.
Upper Interior, Tray 5
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 904
2000-Sheet Finisher Removal Procedures
For a complete listing of printer removal procedures, go to the “Contents” under “Chapter 6. Removal Procedures”
on page 755.
For other removal procedures, see
“Printer Removal Procedures” on page 762
“Duplex Asm. Removal Procedure” on page 833
“Envelope Feeder Removal Procedure” on page 837
“2500-Sheet Input Unit Removal Procedures” on page 840
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 905
Covers, Finisher
Docking Cover Asm., Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5020-1, PN 11L5463, Table 302 on
page 1230
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug the power
cord.
2. Separate the finisher from the printer (see
“Finisher Asm.” on page 970).
In-Gate Support
Docking Cover
hc3m0732
3. Lift the finisher docking assembly off of the
fuser.
4. Turn the docking assembly upside down and
place it on a stable work surface.
5. Remove the 3 screws holding the in-gate
support to the docking cover, and lift the support
off of the cover.
6.
Installation Procedure
1. Turn the docking cover upside down and place it
on a stable work surface.
2. Position the in-gate support as shown, and
install it on the docking cover.
3. Align the 2 positioning holes in the support with
the 2 positioning tabs on the cover.
4. Use 3 screws to hold the in-gate support to the
docking cover.
5. Install the finisher docking assembly on to the
fuser.
6. Connect the finisher to the printer.
Top Left, On Top of Fuser Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 906
Eject Cover, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5012-3, PN 06L9987, Table 301 on page 1228
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the rear cover (see “Rear
Cover, Finisher” on page 919).
Coarse Thread Screws
3. Remove the front inner cover
assembly (see “Front Inner Cover,
Finisher” on page 909).
4. Open the top cover.
5. Remove the 4 screws (notice the
coarse thread of these screws)
holding the eject cover to the finisher
frame, and remove the cover.
Coarse Thread Screws
hc3m0823
NT
FRO
Installation Procedure
1. Position the eject cover as shown,
and install the cover on to the finisher
frame.
2. Align the 4 screw holes in the cover
with the 4 screw holes in the finisher
frame.
3. Use 4 screws to hold the eject cover
to the frame.
4. Install the front inner cover assembly.
5. Install the rear cover.
Top, Left Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 907
Front Cover, Asm., Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5011-5, PN 06L9978, Table 300 on page 1226
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove the E-ring on the top hinge
pin that holds the front cover to the
front inner cover assembly.
4. Lift and remove the front cover
assembly.
hc3m0744
Installation Procedure
1. Install the front cover assembly by
sliding the 2 hinges that are located
on the inner assembly, in to the
2 holes in the front cover assembly.
2. Use 1 E-ring on the top hinge pin to
hold the front cover assembly to the
front inner cover assembly.
3. Close the front cover.
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 908
Front Inner Cover, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5011-1, PN 06L9977, Table 300 on page 1226
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Open the top cover.
3. Remove the screw holding the front
inner cover assembly to the finisher
frame.
4. Press Pause (unload while run button)
as you lift the front inner cover up and
off of the finisher frame.
Pause
(Unload While Running Button)
Locating Tabs
Front Inner Cover
FR
ON
T
Removal Procedure
Locating Cutouts
hc3m0743
Installation Procedure
1. Open the top cover.
2. Open the front cover assembly.
3. Install the front inner cover by first
inserting the 2 tabs that are located at
the lower of the assembly in to the
cutouts in the finisher frame.
4. Press Pause (unload while run button)
as you press the top of the inner
assembly against the finisher frame.
5. Position the front inner cover so that
when you press and release Pause,
the button moves freely.
6. Use 1 screw to hold the assembly to
the finisher frame.
7. Close the front cover assembly.
8. Close the top cover.
Front, Behind Front Cover
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 909
Front Lower Cover, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5011-16, PN 06L9981, Table 300 on page 1226
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Separate the finisher from the printer
(see “Finisher Asm.” on page 970).
3. Remove the 3 screws holding the
front lower cover to the finisher frame.
4. Pull the cover to the left and remove it
from the frame.
Installation Procedure
1. Position the cover as shown.
2. Slide the cover on to the frame so the
tabs on the frame fit in to the
rectangular cutouts in the cover.
3. Press the cover against the frame.
4. Use 3 screws to hold the cover to the
frame.
5. Connect the finisher to the printer.
hc3m0745
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 910
Harness Cover, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5012-6, PN 11L5495, Table 301 on page 1228
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the 3 screws holding the
harness cover to the finisher frame.
3. Remove the cover.
Reverse the removal procedure.
hc3m0749
NT
FRO
Left Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 911
Left Cover, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5011-13, PN 06L9979, Table 300 on page 1226
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the transport assembly (see
“Transport Asm., Finisher” on
page 1061).
3. Remove the rear cover (see “Rear
Cover, Finisher” on page 919).
4. Remove the 2 screws holding the left
cover to the finisher frame.
5. Remove the left cover.
Long Screws
hc3m0746
Installation Procedure
1. Install the left cover by first sliding the
front lip of the cover under the front
cover.
2. Press the left cover against the
finisher frame, and reposition as
necessary so the 2 screw holes in the
cover line up with the 2 screw holes
in the frame.
3. Use 2 screws to hold the left cover to
the finisher frame.
4. Install the rear cover.
5. Install the transport assembly.
Left End
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 912
Left Lower Cover, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5011-14, PN 06L9980, Table 300 on page 1226
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Separate the finisher from the printer
(see “Finisher Asm.” on page 970).
3. Remove the transport assembly (see
“Transport Asm., Finisher” on
page 1061).
4. Remove the 6 screws holding the left
lower cover from the finisher frame,
and remove the cover.
Reverse the removal procedure.
hc3m0739
Left End
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 913
PCB Cover and Connector Cover, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5012-1, PN 06L9985, Table 301 on page 1228
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the screw holding the
connector cover and remove the
cover.
3. Remove the harness cover (see
“Harness Cover, Finisher” on
page 911).
4. Remove the 4 screws holding the
PCB cover to the finisher frame.
5. Pull the cover away from the frame
and free the wire harness from the top
harness clamp.
6. Remove the finisher PCB cover.
Connector Cover
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 915 before installing the parts.
hc3m0751
Rear, Lower Left
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 914
Link to PCB Cover and Connector Cover, Finisher removal procedure
Top Harness Clamp
Bottom Harness Clamp
Harness Cover
hc3m0752
PCB Cover
Connector
Cover
Opening
Finisher Interface cable
AC Power cable
Installation Procedure
1. Install the finisher PCB cover on to
the finisher frame.
2. Route the finisher interface cable
through the cutout at the top of the
cover.
3. Route the ac power cable through the
cutout at the lower of the cover.
4. Hold the top and lower of the wire
harness in to the harness clamps.
5. Press the finisher PCB cover against
the finisher frame.
6. Use 4 screws to hold the cover to the
frame.
7. Install the harness cover.
8. Install the connector cover by sliding
the cover on to the finisher frame so
the tab on the frame fits in to the
rectangular cutout in the cover.
Ensure that you route the ac power
cable through the connector cover
opening.
9. Use 1 screw to hold the cover to the
frame.
Rear, Lower Left
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 915
Rack Cover, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5120-98, PN, Table 313 on page 1256
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the following:
a. Lower bin assembly (see “Bin
Asm., Lower, Finisher” on
page 923)
Rail
Elevator Drive Bracket
Removal Procedure
b. Middle bin assembly (see “Bin
Asm., Middle, Finisher” on
page 942)
Runner
Elevator Hinge Bracket
Channel
Rack Cover
c. Upper bin assembly (see “Bin
Asm., Upper, Finisher” on
page 952)
3. Remove the left, lower cover. (see
“Left Lower Cover, Finisher” on
page 913).
4. Remove the 4 screws holding the
elevator drive bracket to the elevator
hinge bracket, and remove the drive
bracket.
P/J273
Go to step 5 on page 917.
P/J274
FR
ON
T
hc3m0754
Right Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 916
Rail
Elevator Drive Bracket
Runner
Elevator Hinge Bracket
Channel
Rack Cover
5. Remove the 4 screws holding the
elevator hinge bracket to the right rail
cover, and remove the hinge bracket.
6. Remove the 6 screws holding the rail
to the 2 channels of the finisher
frame, and lift the rail up and off the
finisher frame.
7. Remove the 7 screws holding the
rack cover to the finisher frame, and
pull the cover away from the frame.
8. Disconnect the following connectors:
v P/J273 (upper limit switch)
v P/J274 (lower limit switch)
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 918 before installing the parts.
P/J273
P/J274
FR
ON
T
hc3m0754
Right Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 917
Link to Rack Cover, Finisher removal procedure
Installation Procedure
Rail
Elevator Drive Bracket
Runner
Elevator Hinge Bracket
Channel
Rack Cover
P/J273
P/J274
FR
ON
T
hc3m0754
1. Position the right rack cover near the
finisher frame and connect the
following connectors:
v P/J273 (upper limit switch)
v P/J274 (lower limit switch)
2. Install the rack cover on to the
finisher frame.
3. Position the rail as shown, and slide
the 2 runners in to the 2 channels
of the finisher frame.
4. Use 6 screws to hold the rail
runners to the channels. Leave these
screws loose until all 6 are installed,
and then tighten them.
5. Install the elevator hinge bracket to
the right rack cover, and use
4 screws to hold the bracket.
6. Install the elevator drive bracket to
the hinge bracket, and use 4 screws
to hold the drive bracket.
7. Check that the lower limit switch
actuator is not bent (form as
necessary).
8. Install the left, lower cover.
9. Install the upper bin assembly.
10. Install the middle bin assembly.
11. Install the lower bin assembly.
Right Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 918
Rear Cover, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5012-2, PN 06L9986, Table 301 on page 1228
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Open the top cover.
3. Remove the screw holding the rear
cover to the finisher frame.
4. Lift the cover and remove it from the
frame.
Installation Procedure
1. Open the top cover.
2. Install the rear cover by first hooking
the 2 tabs that are located at the top
of the cover, in to the 2 cutouts in
finisher frame.
3. Use 1 screw to hold the rear cover to
the frame.
Tabs
NT
FRO
hc3m0748
Top, Left Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 919
Rear, Lower Cover, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5012-4, PN 06L9988, Table 301 on page 1228
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the screw that holds the rear,
lower cover to the finisher frame.
3. Remove the rear, lower cover.
Installation Procedure
1. Position the rear, lower cover as
shown.
2. Slide the cover on to the finisher
frame so the tab on the frame fits in to
the rectangular cutout in the cover.
3. Use 1 screw to hold the cover to the
finisher frame.
hc3m0750
Left Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 920
Top Cover Asm., Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5150-1, PN 11L5429, Table 316 on page 1263
Pivot
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Open the top cover.
3. Remove the screw holding the cover
bracket to the cover.
4. Slide the cover to the side so the pivot
slides out of the pivot hole, and pull
the top cover away from the finisher.
Cover
Bracket
Installation Procedure
1. Insert the top cover pivot in to the
pivot hole in the finisher.
2. Pull the bracket up in to position
against the top cover, ensuring that
you align the positioning hole in the
bracket with the positioning tab on the
cover.
3. Use 1 screw to hold the bracket to
the top cover.
4. Close the top cover.
hc3m0787
Right Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 921
Transport Top Cover Asm., Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5090-1, PN 11L5470, Table 310 on page 1247
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Open the transport.
3. Remove the screw holding the cover
support strap to the transport.
4. Use the flat blade of a screwdriver to
carefully force the cover rear pivot [2]
away from the transport.
hc3m0822
FRO
Installation Procedure
1. Install the cover front pivot [1] in to
the pivot hole at the front of the
transport.
2. Use the flat blade of a screwdriver to
help insert the rear transport pivot [2]
in to the rear cover pivot hole.
3. Install the free end of the cover
support strap on to the transport, and
use 1 screw to hold the strap.
NT
Right Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 922
Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5171-1, PN 11L5367, Table 318 on page 1268 Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug the
power cord.
2. Separate the finisher from the printer (see
“Finisher Asm.” on page 970).
3. Remove the harness cover (see “Harness
Cover, Finisher” on page 911).
Loosen Only
P/J874
P/J871
P/J875
P/J830
Harness Guide Cover
4. Remove the lower harness guide cover.
5. Free the wire harnesses in the harness
guide, from the harness clips.
6. Disconnect the following connectors:
P/J830, P/J871, P/J874, and P/J875
7. Remove the screw holding the lower
harness guide, and remove the guide.
8. Remove the 2 screws, located at the lower
of the lower bin assembly, holding the
assembly to the finisher frame.
9. Loosen the 2 screws, located at the top of
the lower bin assembly, holding the
assembly to the finisher frame.
10. Lift the bin assembly off of the top screws.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 924 before installing the parts.
Harness Guide
hc3m0758
Right Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 923
Link to Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher removal procedure
Installation Procedure
Loosen Only
P/J874
P/J871
P/J875
P/J830
Harness Guide Cover
1. Install the lower bin assembly by hooking
the keyhole screw holes at the top of the
assembly over the 2 screws on the finisher
frame.
2. Tighten the 2 top screws.
3. Use 2 screws to hold the lower of the
assembly to the finisher frame.
4. Route the lower bin assembly wire harness
in to the slot in the lower harness guide.
5. Install the lower harness guide, and use
1 screw to hold it to the finisher frame.
6. Connect the following connectors:
v P/J830
v P/J871
v P/J874
v P/J875
7. Hold the wire harness in to the harness
clips.
8. Install the lower harness guide cover. It
snaps in to place.
9. Install the harness cover.
10. Connect the finisher to the printer.
Harness Guide
hc3m0758
Right Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 924
Bins, Lower and Middle, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5171-2, PN 11L5368, Table 318 on page 1268
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the lower bin assembly (see
“Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher” on
page 923).
Bin
Frame
Removal Procedure
Bin
3. Remove both lower bin drive belts
(see “Drive Belts, Lower Bin, Finisher”
on page 927).
4. Remove the lower bin paper sensor
(see “Paper Sensor, Lower Bin,
Finisher” on page 936) and sensor
actuator.
5. Remove the lower bin safety sensor
(see “Safety Sensors, Lower and
Middle Bins, Finisher” on page 938).
Carriage
Frame
FRO
NT
hc3m0765
6. Remove the screw holding the sensor
wire harness to the underside of the
bin, and remove the harness.
7. Lift the rear of the bin [1] and slide
the bin out of the slots in the front and
rear bin frames[2].
8. Remove the 4 screws holding the
carriage to the bin, and remove the
bin.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 926 before installing the parts.
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 925
Link to Bins, Lower and Middle, Finisher removal procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Install the carriage on to the bin, and
use 4 screws to hold the carriage.
2. Install the bin in to the slots in the
front and rear bin frames.
3. Install the sensor wire harness to the
underside of the bin, and use 1 screw
to hold the harness.
4. Install the lower bin safety sensor.
5. Install the lower bin paper sensor and
sensor actuator.
6. Install both lower bin drive belts.
7. Install the lower bin assembly.
Bin
Frame
Bin
Carriage
Frame
FRO
NT
hc3m0765
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 926
Drive Belts, Lower Bin, Finisher
Removal Procedure
Tension Spring
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the lower bin assembly (see
“Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher” on
page 923).
T
ON
FR
Front Belt
3. Remove the lower bin front cover (see
“Front Cover, Lower and Middle Bins,
Finisher” on page 933).
Tension Plate
Pulley
Belt Clamp
Tension Spring
Front Belt
hc3m0842
4. Unhook the tension spring from the
tension plate as shown.
5. Remove the 2 screws holding the
tension plate to the bin frame, and
remove the plate.
6. Remove the 2 screws holding the belt
clamp to the tray, and remove the
clamp.
7. Slide the belt out of the clamp.
8. Remove the E-ring hold the drive gear
to the shaft, and remove the drive
gear.
9. Remove the front drive belt.
Go to step 10 on page 928.
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 927
Belt Clamp
10. Remove the lower bin elevator motor
(see “Elevator Motor, Lower Bin,
Finisher” on page 931).
Rear Belt
Limit Actuator
Tension Spring
Tension Plate
Pulley
Drive Gear
R
REA
Tension Spring
Rear Belt
Drive Gear
hc3m0834
11. Remove the screw holding the
sensor bracket to the bin frame, and
remove the bracket.
12. Unhook the tension spring from the
tension plate as shown.
13. Remove the 2 screws holding the
limit actuator to the bin frame, and
remove the actuator.
14. Remove the 2 screws holding the
tension plate to the tray frame, and
remove the plate.
15. Remove the 2 screws holding the
belt clamp to the tray, and remove
the clamp.
16. Slide the belt out of the clamp.
17. Remove the E-ring holding the drive
gear to the shaft, and remove the
drive gear.
18. Remove the rear drive belt.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 929 before installing the parts.
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 928
Link to Drive Belts, Lower Bin, Finisher removal procedure
Installation Procedure
Belt Clamp
Rear Belt
Limit Actuator
Tension Spring
Tension Plate
Pulley
Drive Gear
1. Install the rear drive belt as shown.
2. Install the drive gear to the shaft, and
use an E-ring to hold the gear.
3. Slide the rear belt in to the clamp.
4. Use two screws to hold the clamp to
the bin frame.
5. Install the tension plate to the frame
using 2 screws.
6. Install the limit actuator to the frame
using 2 screws.
7. Hook the tension spring on to the
tension plate.
8. Install the sensor bracket to the tray
frame using 1 screw.
Go to step 9 on page 930.
R
REA
Tension Spring
Rear Belt
Drive Gear
hc3m0834
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 929
Tension Spring
FRO
Front Belt
9. Install the lower bin motor.
10. Install the front drive belt according
to the Figure 1 inset.
11. Slide the rear drive belt in to the
clamp.
12. Use two screws to hold the clamp to
the bin frame.
13. Install the tension plate to the frame
using 2 screws.
14. Hook the tension spring on to the
tension plate.
15. Install the lower bin front cover.
16. Install the lower bin assembly.
NT
Tension Plate
Pulley
Belt Clamp
Tension Spring
Front Belt
hc3m0842
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 930
Elevator Motor, Lower Bin, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5171-17, PN 11L5375, Table 318 on page 1268
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the lower bin assembly (see
“LVPS, Finisher” on page 998).
3. Slide the rear harness cover off of the
lower bin rear cover.
4. Remove the screw, located under the
rear cover, holding the lower bin rear
cover to the bin frame.
5. Release the latch at the top of the
rear cover, and remove the cover.
6. Disconnect 871.
7. Remove the 4 screws holding the
motor bracket to the bin, and remove
the bracket and attached motor.
8. Remove the E-ring holding the gear to
the motor shaft, and remove the gear.
9. Remove the 2 screws holding the
motor to the bracket, and remove the
motor.
Shaft Gear
Motor Bracket
Motor
R
REA
hc3m0768
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 932 before installing the parts.
P/J871
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 931
Link to Elevator Motor, Lower Bin, Finisher removal procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Install the motor to the motor bracket,
and use 2 screws to hold the motor.
2. Install the gear on to the end of the
motor shaft.
3. Use an E-ring to hold the gear to the
shaft.
4. Install the motor bracket and attached
motor to the bin frame, and use
4 screws to hold the bracket.
5. Install the rear cover by first latching
the top of the cover, then by using
1 screw to hold cover to the bin
frame.
6. Route the wire harness through the
opening at the rear of the cover and
slide the rear harness cover in to
place.
7. Connect 871.
8. Install the lower bin assembly.
Shaft Gear
Motor Bracket
Motor
R
REA
hc3m0768
P/J871
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 932
Front Cover, Lower and Middle Bins, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5171-13, PN,11L5372 Table 318 on page 1268
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the lower bin assembly (see
“Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher” on
page 923).
3. force up the lower of the front cover,
and remove the cover.
hc3m0759
NT
O
FR
Installation Procedure
1. Install the front cover on to the lower
bin. The cover snaps in to place.
2. Install the lower bin assembly.
Front
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 933
Half and Full Sensors, Lower and Middle Bins, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5171-9, PN 06L9993, Table 318 on page 1268
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the lower bin assembly (see
“Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher” on
page 923).
Sensor Bracket
Half Sensor
Full Sensor
Bottom Tray Rear Cover
P/J860
P/J861
R
REA
hc3m0840
Rear Harness Cover
Removal Procedure
3. Slide the rear harness cover off of
the lower bin rear cover.
4. Remove the screw, located under the
rear cover, holding the lower bin rear
cover to the bin frame.
5. Release the latch at the top of the
rear cover, and remove the cover.
6. Remove the screw holding the
sensor bracket to the bin frame, and
remove the bracket.
7. Disconnect P/J860 from the half
sensor.
8. Press in and release the sensor
latches that are holding the sensor to
the bracket, and remove the sensor.
9. Disconnect P/J861 from the full
sensor.
10. Press in and release the sensor
latches that are holding the sensor to
the bracket, and remove the sensor.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 935 before installing the parts.
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 934
Link to Half and Full Sensors, Lower and Middle Bins, Finisher removal procedure
1. Position the full sensor as shown, and
insert it, latches first, in to the sensor
cutout in the sensor bracket.
2. Connect P/J861 to the full sensor.
3. Position the half sensor as shown,
and insert it, latches first, in to the
sensor cutout in the sensor bracket.
4. Connect P/J860 to the half sensor.
5. Install the sensor bracket to the bin
frame, and use 1 screw to hold it to
the frame.
6. Install the rear cover by first latching
the top of the cover, then by using
1 screw to hold cover to the bin
frame.
7. Route the wire harness through the
opening at the rear of the cover and
slide the rear harness cover in to
place.
8. Install the lower bin assembly.
Sensor Bracket
Half Sensor
Full Sensor
Bottom Tray Rear Cover
Installation Procedure
P/J860
P/J861
R
REA
hc3m0840
Rear Harness Cover
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 935
Paper Sensor, Lower Bin, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5171-5, PN 11L5369, Table 318 on page 1268
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the lower bin assembly (see
“Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher” on
page 923).
Sensor Bracket
Paper Sensor
P/J859
Back Cover
3. Remove the 3 screws holding the
back cover to the bin, and remove the
cover.
4. Remove the screw holding the paper
sensor bracket to the bin, and remove
the bracket along with the attached
paper sensor.
5. Disconnect P/J859 from the sensor.
6. Press in and release the sensor
latches that are holding the sensor to
the bracket, and remove the sensor.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 937 before installing the parts.
Bin
hc3m0763
Under Side of Lower Bin
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 936
Link to Paper Sensor, Lower Bin, Finisher removal procedure
Installation Procedure
Sensor Bracket
Paper Sensor
P/J859
Back Cover
1. Position the lower bin paper sensor as
shown, and insert it, latches first, in to
the sensor cutout in the sensor
bracket.
2. Connect P/J859 to the sensor.
3. Install the sensor bracket on the bin,
making sure you align the position
holes in the bracket with the
positioning tabs on the bin.
4. Use 1 screw to hold the bracket to
the bin.
5. Install the back cover to the bin, and
use 3 screws to hold the cover.
6. Install the lower bin assembly.
Bin
hc3m0763
Under Side of Lower Bin
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 937
Safety Sensors, Lower and Middle Bins, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5171-9, PN 06L9993, Table 318 on page 1268
Sensor Bracket
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the lower bin assembly (see
“Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher” on
page 923).
P/J831
Safety Sensor
Back Cover
3. Remove the 3 screws holding the
back cover to the bin, and remove the
cover.
4. Remove the screw holding the safety
sensor bracket to the bin, and remove
the bracket along with the attached
safety sensor.
5. Disconnect P/J831 from the sensor.
6. Press in and release the sensor
latches that are holding the sensor to
the bracket, and remove the sensor.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 937 before installing the parts.
Bin
hc3m0755
Under Side of Lower Bin
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 938
Link to Safety Sensors, Lower and Middle Bins, Finisher removal procedure
Sensor Bracket
P/J831
Safety Sensor
Back Cover
Installation Procedure
1. Position the lower bin safety sensor
as shown, and insert in, latches first,
in to the sensor cutout in the sensor
bracket.
2. Connect P/J831 to the sensor.
3. Install the sensor bracket on to the
bin, making sure you align the position
holes in the bracket with the
positioning tabs on the bin.
4. Use 1 screw to hold the bracket to
the bin.
5. Install the back cover to the bin, and
use 3 screws to hold the cover.
6. Install the lower bin assembly.
Bin
hc3m0755
Under Side of Lower Bin
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 939
Upper and Lower Limit Paper Sensors, Lower and Middle Bins, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5171-5, PN 11L5369, Table 318 on page 1268
P/J850
Upper Limit Sensor
1. Switch off printer power and unplug
the power cord.
2. Remove the lower bin assembly (see
“Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher” on
page 923).
Sensor Bracket
P/J851
Lower Limit Sensor
REA
hc3m0761
R
Removal Procedure
3. Slide the rear harness cover off of the
lower bin rear cover.
4. Remove the screw, located under the
rear cover, holding the lower bin rear
cover to the bin frame.
5. Release the latch at the top of the
rear cover, and remove the cover.
6. Remove the screw holding the sensor
bracket to the bin frame, and remove
the bracket.
7. Disconnect the following connectors:
v P/J850, upper limit sensor
v P/J851, lower limit sensor
8. Press in and release the sensor
latches holding each sensor to the
bracket, and remove the sensors.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 941 before installing the parts.
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 940
Link to Upper and Lower Limit Paper Sensors, Lower and Middle Bins, Finisher
removal procedure
P/J850
Upper Limit Sensor
Sensor Bracket
P/J851
Lower Limit Sensor
REA
hc3m0761
R
Installation Procedure
1. Insert each sensor, latches first, in to
the sensor cutout in the sensor
bracket.
2. Connect the following connectors:
v P/J850, upper limit sensor
v P/J851, lower limit sensor
3. Install the sensor bracket to the bin
frame, and use 1 screw to hold it to
the frame.
4. Install the rear cover by first latching
the top of the cover, then by using
1 screw to hold cover to the bin
frame.
5. Route the wire harness through the
opening at the rear of the cover and
slide the rear harness cover in to
place.
6. Install the lower bin assembly.
Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 941
Bin Asm., Middle, Finisher
Link to parts catalog, Asm.-Index 5181-1, PN 11L5367, Table 320 on page 1273
Removal Procedure
1. Switch off printer power and unplug the
power cord.
2. Separate the finisher from the printer (see
“Finisher Asm.” on page 970).
3. Remove the harness cover (see “Harness
Cover, Finisher” on page 911).
Loosen Only
P/J887
P/J870
P/J872
P/J873
Harness Guide Cover
4. Remove the lower harness guide cover.
5. Free the wire harnesses in the harness
guide, from the harness clips.
6. Disconnect the following connectors:
P/J873, P/J870, P/J285B, P/J872, P/J887.
7. Remove the screw holding the lower
harness guide, and remove the guide.
8. Remove the 2 screws, located at the
lower of the middle bin assembly, holding
the assembly to the finisher frame.
9. Loosen the 2 screws, located at the top
of the middle bin assembly, holding the
assembly to the finisher frame.
10. Lift the bin assembly off of the top screws.
See the “Installation Procedure” on
page 943 before installing the parts.
Harness Guide
hc3m0757
Right Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 942
Link to Bin Asm., Lower, Finisher removal procedure
Installation Procedure
Loosen Only
P/J887
P/J870
P/J872
P/J873
Harness Guide Cover
1. Install the middle bin assembly by hooking
the keyhole screw holes at the top of the
assembly over the 2 screws on the
finisher frame.
2. Tighten the 2 top screws.
3. Use 2 screws to hold the lower of the
assembly to the finisher frame.
4. Route the middle bin assembly wire
harness into the slot in the lower harness
guide.
5. Install the lower harness guide, and use
1 screw to hold it to the finisher frame.
6. Connect the following connectors: P/J873,
P/J870, P/J285B, P/J872, and P/J887
7. Hold the wire harness in to the harness
clips.
8. Install the lower harness guide cover. It
snaps in to place.
9. Install the harness cover.
10. Connect the finisher to the printer.
Harness Guide
hc3m0757
Right Rear
Chapter 6. Removal Procedures 943
Drive Belts, Middle Bin, Finishe